Home

Shelf Manager User Guide

1. Boolean FALSE This variable defines what to do if the Shelf Manager runs without backup and detects a loss of the local Healthy bit If this variable is TRUE the Shelf Manager exits the ShMM reboots and the Shelf Manager is restarted If this variable is FALSE the Shelf Manager sets the Healthy bit and continues operation Yes Release 3 5 1 August 17 2015 EXIT IF NO S HELF FRU Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide Boolean DEFAULT FALSE DESCRIPTION If TRUE the Shelf Manager exits probably resetting the ShMM if no Shelf FRU Information can be found CAN BE OBTAINED FROM SHELF FRU INFO No EXTERNAL EVE NT HANDLER String 255 oy This is the path to an executable file or a script file on the Shelf Manager that performs local handling of events via PEF No FAN FULL SPE ED DELAY Number The delay in seconds after Shelf Manager startup or after a switchover during which the cooling algorithm does not check the number of present fan trays giving the existing fan trays enough time to activate This applies to the carriers where cooling management raises the fan speed to maximum if the actual number of fan trays in the shelf is fewer than what is specified in the Shelf Address Table No FAN LEVEL ST EP_DOWN Number The number of fan steps by which the fan speed is decreased during operation of the cooling algorithm in the Normal state T
2. timezone Local time zone in CCCn format where n is the offset from GMT and optionally negative while CCC identifies the time zone The default is UTC ubifs ShMM 700 only U Boot command executed to perform system boot from the Flash drive The command performs setting bootargs variable loading both kernel and RFS images into RAM and booting the system If at least one of the images is broken and there is no reliable upgrade in progress the command also outputs an error message and performs a single attempt to boot the ShMM using the alternative rollback kernel and RFS images user partitio n ShMM 700 only Specifies the format of the user partition which can be either j s2 or ubifs where ubifs is the default value This variable value must only be changed along with the flash_reset user setting to change the user partition format Note such partition format changes are supported starting with release 3 5 0 ver The U Boot version string The value is taken from the U Boot image The version string contains the base U Boot version and the build timestamp as well For example on the ShMM 700 the variable contains something like U Boot 2009 08 Feb 24 2012 07 44 12 3 2 2 Assigning Values to Environment Variables To assign a value to an environment variable on either ShMM variant use the format shmmxx00 setenv lt variable_name gt lt new_value gt For example shmmxx
3. clia ipmc v 84 Release 3 5 1 90 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide Pigeon Point Shelf Manager Command Line Interpreter 84 Entity Oxa0 0x60 Maximum FRU device ID 0x04 PICMG Version 2 3 Hot Swap State M4 Active Previous M3 Activation In Process Last State Change Cause Normal State Change 0x0 Device ID 0x12 Revision 0 Firmware 1 20 ver 1 2 0 IPMI ver Manufacturer ID 00400a Product ID bada Auxiliary Rev 00000000 Device ID String BMR A2F ATCA BTR Global Initialization Oxc Power State Notification Oxc Device Capabilities 0x2d Controller provides Device SDRs Supported features 0x2d Sensor Device SEL Device FRU Inventory Device IPMB Event Generator HPM 1 Components OL Extensions Extended Inactive State Management 20W ON Version Change Sensor for LAN Configuration Dynamic Sessions HPM 2 Channels 5 HPM 2 LAN Parameters start at 192 0xc0 revision 1 HPM 2 SOL Parameters start at 192 0xc0 revision 1 HPM 3 Capable Parameters start at 205 Oxcd revision 1 Links 84 Base Interface 0x00 Channel 1 Link Disabled Ports 1 84 Base Interface 0x00 Channel 2 Link Disabled Ports 1 84 Fabric Interface 0x01 Link Disabled Ports 1 84 Fabric Interface 0x01 Channel 2 1 c 1 0 A2F AMCc F W Version 1 20 Aux 00000000 1 A2F AMCc B L Version 1 20 Aux 00000000 2 A2F AMCc F I Version 1 20 Aux 00000000 4 A2F
4. This parameter is used in certain shelf specific cooling algorithms and specifies the intake temperature sensors of the shelf The format of the parameter is a comma separated list of tuples in the form lt owner address gt lt sensor number gt The sensor LUN must be 0 For example the value 0x20 124 0x20 125 indicates that sensors 124 and 125 on the logical Shelf Manager IPMB address 20h represent the intake temperature sensors of the shelf Yes COOLING KEEP _POWERED OFF _FRUS_IN M1 Boolean FALSE If set the FRUs that are powered off by the Shelf Manager due to a critical temperature stay in state M1 and are not automatically activated and powered on when the temperature condition goes away manual intervention is needed to reactivate each such FRU Yes COOLING NO A LL_FRUS POWE R_DOWN_IN CR ITICAL ALERT Boolean FALSE Do not power down the whole shelf if a critical thermal alert is reported by a shelf wide temperature sensor or a sensor that cannot be associated with a specific FRU Specific FRUs can still be powered down in the case of a Critical thermal alert in this mode This mode should be used with caution Yes Release 3 5 1 44 August 17 2015 COOLING NO P OWER_DOWN_IN _CRITICAL AL ERT Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide Boolean DEFAULT FALSE DESCRIPTION Do not power down FRUs that experience critical thermal alerts Thi
5. etc re rupgrade _ rupgrade __ rupgrade _ etc re etc re etc re etc re etc re etc re etc re Board Har etc netc Checking the reli tool Watchdog no tool upgrade fai Rupgrade c Ret Mounted ram disk Started syslogd a Mounted ram disk Setting hostname Mounted dev mtdb Calling etc re c dware Address Ox onfig etc hosts able upgrade watchdog timer t active tool restoring ADM1060 EEPROM to RAM led 255 to var log nd klogd to var tmp shmm 193 lockl to etc arrier3 FE has valid 192 168 1 193 entry etc netconfig Updating etc profile sentry with IP settings etc netc etc re c onfig Starting i arrier3 Starting netd up IPMBs etc rce carrier3 Updating etc profile sentry with specific settings etc re c Release 3 5 arrier3 RC2 daem 1 ons not started by request 238 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide 8 Re programming the ShMM 700 This section describes how to update the firmware on the ShMM 700 using the reliable upgrade facilities Comparisons and contrasts with the SAMM 500 ShMM 1500 style of firmware upgrades are included but this section is also intended to be usable for readers without prior background on the SAMM 500 ShMM 1500 firmware upgrade facilities 8 1 In This Section This section contains the topics listed below Just click on a topic to go to it Firmware Reliable Upgrade Procedure Ove
6. 4 10 Assignment of LAN Configuration Parameters to Boards and Modules In shelves where some of the boards and intelligent modules currently only AMC modules are considered implement LAN IPMI channels there may be a need for a centralized repository of LAN configuration parameters mainly the IP addresses subnet masks and gateway addresses for these boards and modules This repository can be maintained on the Pigeon Point Shelf Manager The parameters are stored statically on the ShMM or in the Shelf FRU Information Also the Shelf Manager supports obtaining parameters from a DHCP server using the DHCP protocol One use for such LAN IPMI channels once configured is to support serial over LAN sessions via the management controllers on the boards or modules This use involves a significant number of additional IPMI parameters In the current Shelf Manager only the following three parameters are supported IP address subnet mask and default gateway address Other parameters for instance MAC addresses may be added in future releases of the Shelf Manager NOTE the functionality described in this section has been made obsolete by the HPM 3 specification and is not recommended to be used in new systems It is described here for compatibility purposes The Shelf Manager fully supports the mechanisms defined in the HPM 3 specifications to retrieve network configuration parameters for boards and modules from a DHCP server using the DHCP Proxy appr
7. Complex Programmable Logic Device on the ShMM 500 or an FPGA Field Programmable Logic Array on the ShMM 1500 and ShMM 700 that is part of each ShMM For details of the HRI implementation for each architecture please see the appropriate ShMM Hardware Architecture specification In the remainder of this section these HRI data items are referenced informally as the Healthy Presence and Switchover Request bits each with Local and Remote variants In addition the set of HRI data items also includes an Active bit which is 1 on the active Shelf Manager This section and most other Shelf Manager user documentation refers to the device that implements the HRI functionality as a CPLD though that is not strictly true on either the ShMM 1500 or the ShMM 700 The backup Shelf Manager recognizes the departure of the active Shelf Manager when the Remote Healthy or Remote Presence bit becomes 0 The Remote Presence bit monitors the presence of the peer Shelf Manager this bit changing to 0 on the ShMM 500 and ShMM 1500 means that the board hosting the peer Shelf Manager has been removed from the shelf For the ShMM 700R this bit changing to 0 indicates that the peer Shelf Manager has been reset or removed from the shelf WARNING Only the ShMM carrier board hosting the backup Shelf Manager should be removed from a shelf If the ShMM carrier board hosting the active Shelf Manager needs to be removed the user should first issue the CLI swi tchover
8. Number The time in seconds between successive polls of local Shelf Manager sensors by the Shelf Manager No Release 3 5 1 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide TYPE DEFAULT DESCRIPTION CAN BE OBTAINED FROM SHELF FRU INFO SESSION_SEQU Number 128 This is the window of acceptable No ENCE _ WINDOW RMCP sequence numbers the wider this window is the more tolerant is the Shelf Manager to RMCP packets being dropped during transfer If the difference in the sequence numbers of a received packet and the previous packet exceeds the window size the Shelf Manager closes the RMCP session as a corrupted one SHELF _FRU_IN Boolean TRUE If TRUE the Shelf FRU Information is No _EEPROM retrieved from EEPROMs on the backplane in a carrier specific way if FALSE the Shelf FRU Information is obtained from a file on the Flash file system SHELF _FRU_IP Number 0 If defined non zero specifies the No MB SOURCE1 IPMB address of the first designated source of Shelf FRU Information in the shelf Shelf FRU Information is located at FRU 1 If this value is defined the search for the Shelf FRU Information on the IPMB is limited to the designated sources only SHELF _FRU_IP Number 0 If defined non zero specifies the No MB _SOURCE2 IPMB address of the second designated source of Shelf FRU Information in the shelf Shelf FRU Information is located at FRU 1 If this value is defi
9. Release 3 5 1 139 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide In the example below an italicized bold hexadecimal represents the Tag of a field and an underlined hexadecimal represents the length of a field message length 125 30 7B 02 01 00 04 06 70 75 62 6C 69 63 A4 6E 06 09 2B 06 01 04 01 98 6F 01 01 40 04 CO A8 00 02 02 01 06 02 03 12 6F 00 43 04 61 A3 ED 13 30 4D 30 4B 06 OA 2B 06 01 04 01 98 6F 01 01 01 04 3D 1D 3A 30 76 62 F2 11 DD 00 80 00 50 C2 3F FB 56 00 07 13 ED A3 61 00 00 20 20 01 20 85 00 00 CO 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 19 00 00 40 OA 00 00 80 4B 01 54 65 73 74 53 74 72 69 6E 67 00 C1 Here is a detailed description of the content of this trap 30 02 04 A4 06 40 Ww ASN 1 tag and remaining length 00 SNMP version field len 1 O SNMPVv1 70 75 62 6C 69 63 community field public PDU Trap command tag and remaining length 2B 06 01 04 01 98 6F 01 01 Agent ID Enterprise OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 3183 1 1 co a8 00 02 Agent IPv4 192 168 0 2 02 06 Generic Status len 1 EnterpriseSpecific 02 03 12 6F 00 Specific Status len 3 SenType 12h EventType 6Fh EventOffset 00h Direction Asserted 43 04 61 A3 ED 13 Time in ticks 0 01sec obviously wrong 30 4D ASN 1 tag at variable bindings start and remaining length 30 48 First variable header and remaining length 06 OA 2B 06 01 04 01 98 6F 01 01 01 Variable OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 3183 1 1
10. inks 12 s Stat PMB A S PMB B S ink 13 us Stat PMB A S PMB B S ink 14 s Stat PMB A S PMB B S ink 15 us Stat PMB A S PMB B S L ta ta L ta ta L ta ta L ta ta T ta ta T ta ta L ta ta L ta ta L ta ta L ta ta US Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide us us us us us us us us us clia setipmbstate 20 A 4 1 Release 3 5 1 163 UN 0 Sensor 18 IPMB LINK 6 0x8 IPMB A Enabled IPMB B Enabled te 0x08 LocalControl No failure te 0x08 LocalControl No failure UN 0 Sensor 19 IPMB LINK 7 0x8 IPMB A Enabled IPMB B Enabled te 0x08 LocalControl No failure te 0x08 LocalControl No failure UN 0 Sensor 20 IPMB LINK 8 0x8 IPMB A Enabled IPMB B Enabled te 0x08 LocalControl No failure te 0x08 LocalControl No failure UN 0 Sensor 21 IPMB LINK 9 0x8 IPMB A Enabled IPMB B Enabled te 0x08 LocalControl No failure te 0x08 LocalControl No failure LUN 0 Sensor 22 IPMB LINK 10 0x8 IPMB A Enabled IPMB B Enabled te 0x08 LocalControl No failure te 0x08 LocalControl No failure LUN 0 Sensor 23 IPMB LINK 11 0x8 IPMB A Enabled IPMB B Enabled te 0x08 LocalControl No failure te 0x08 LocalControl No failure LUN 0 Sensor 24 IPMB LINK 12 0x8 IPMB A Enabl
11. lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1285 Write storage state not available gt available ALLOW lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 369 Resetting UBIFS cache lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1913 Clean on defice 1 1 Leaving file dev mtd2 untouched lt INFO gt backend c 730 Burning image lt INFO gt backend c 764 393216 bytes was written from file tmp file tmp u boot bin to dev 1 1 lt INFO gt backend c 730 Burning image lt INFO gt backend c 764 1402348 bytes was written from file tmp file tmp sentry kernel to dev 2 1 lt INFO gt backend c 730 Burning image lt INFO gt backend c 764 2283039 bytes was written from file tmp file tmp sentry rfs to dev 4 1 lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1285 Write storage state available gt not available ALLOW lt INFO gt backend c 730 Burning image lt INFO gt backend c 764 2110743 bytes was written from file tmp file tmp _sentry app to dev 8 1 lt INFO gt backend c 808 Erasing user data on candidate bank lt INFO gt backend c 821 Copy ssh keys lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1189 Write confirmed 0 gt 0 ALLOW lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1194 Write candidate 1 gt 1 ALLOW The log contains no confirm message the confirmed and candidate image set numbers are the same they were before reliable upgrade initiation lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1265 Write upgrade watchdog 0 gt 1 ALLOW lt INFO gt frontend c 4
12. ATCA products The Pigeon Point ShMM when coupled with a corresponding carrier board provides the necessary hardware to run the Shelf Manager within an ATCA shelf This document focuses on aspects of the Shelf Manager and ShMM that are common to any ShMM carrier used in an AdvancedTCA context Carrier specific and shelf specific details are documented by shelf providers The ShMM 500R complies with the Restriction of Hazardous Substances RoHS directive but is equivalent to its predecessor the SnMM 500 from a software point of view All references to the ShMM 500 in this document apply to the ShMM 500R unless otherwise noted Both the ShMM 1500R and ShMM 700R were designed to be RoHS compliant from the start and there are no ShMM 1500 or ShMM 700 products though references to both product names may be simplified as ShMM 1500 or ShMM 700 respectively The ShMM 1500R is an additional ShMM variant that is based on a PowerPC processor unlike the ShMM 5OOR which is based on a MIPS 32 processor The ShMM 70OR is the newest ShMM variant it is based on the Freescale i MX28 ARM9 based processor Both the ShMM 1500R and the ShMM 700R have different physical dimensions and a different approach for connecting to the ShMM carrier Therefore distinct ShMM carrier board designs are required for Shelf Manager solutions based on each of the ShMM 500R ShMM 1500R or SAMM 700R ShMM variants However the Pigeon Point Shelf Manager provides the same
13. Boot image if the current image set has number 0 there are no such side effects The reliable upgrade of the A2F060 firmware includes the following steps e The upgrade utility copies the upgrade image file onto the Flash Boot partition as a2 upgrade dat e f the current image set has number 1 the upgrade utility saves the contents of U Boot image 0 to a file and copies the U Boot image from partition 1 to partition 0 This is done to ensure that if the upgrade process is interrupted the ShMM 700 can still recover by booting from partition 0 see below e The upgrade utility reboots the ShMM Release 3 5 1 253 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide When U Boot sees the a2 upgrade dat file in the boot partition at startup it initiates an A2F upgrade procedure via the A2F JTAG pins This procedure is performed with Flash remapping logic turned off so that U Boot has direct access to the Flash and U Boot image 0 is always the active one Also the built in i MX287 watchdog timer is enabled during the upgrade so that if the upgrade process gets stuck the SnMM 700 still has a potential to recover If the upgrade is successful U Boot boots Linux from the current image set When Linux boots it performs some basic tests and if everything works as expected it disables the built in i MX287 watchdog timer and turns on the Flash remapping logic It then restores the contents of the first U Boot partition if the backu
14. Cold Reset is accepted even if the Shelf Manager does not have an available backup and reboots the Shelf Manager By default the command Cold Reset is accepted only in a dual redundant configuration and causes a switchover Yes Release 3 5 1 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide TYPE DEFAULT DESCRIPTION CAN BE OBTAINED FROM SHELF FRU INFO ALLOWED _CIPH Number OxFFFFFFF The bit mask of the IPMI 2 0 cipher Yes ER_SUITES F decimal suite IDs that a LAN client is allowed 1 to use when establishing a session to the Shelf Manager By default all supported cipher suites can be used If security considerations require the set of allowed cipher suites can be restricted using this parameter A bit value of 1b in the bit position corresponding to a cipher suite ID 0 to 14 indicates that the corresponding cipher suite can be used There must be at least one cipher suite enabled so a value 0 of this parameter is treated as if all cipher suites are allowed just as with the default value ALTERNATE _CO Boolean TRUE Use alternate controller on the Shelf No NTROLLER Manager with the address that is equal to the SAMM hardware address If this variable is set to TRUE the active Shelf Manager exposes two IPMB addresses 20h and a second address based on its hardware address the backup Shelf Manager exposes only the IPMB address based on its hardware address After a
15. Net AulX00 ETHERNET Hit any key to stop autoboot 0 shmm500 On ShMM 1500 you should see the following U Boot 1 1 4 Jun 15 2006 17 49 12 MPC83xXxX Clock configuration Coherent System Bus 99 MHz Core 249 MHz Local Bus 24 MHz CPU MPC83xx Rev 1 1 at 249 975 MHz Board ShMM 1500R PCI1 32 bit 33 MHz E2C ready DRAM 128 MB FLASH 64 MB PCI Bus Dev VenId Devid Class Int 00 17 1172 0001 f00 00 Tens serial Out serial Err serial FPGA firmware version 1 12 carrier id 0 Net TSECO TSEC1 Hit any key to stop autoboot 0 shmm1500 On ShMM 700 you should see the following PowerPrep start initialize power Battery Voltage 1 44V No battery or bad battery detected Disabling battery voltage measurements Feb 24 201207 45 29 FRAC 0x92926152 memory type is DDR2 Release 3 5 1 96 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide Wait for ddr ready 1 power 0x00820616 Frac 0x92926152 start change cpu freq hbus 0x00000003 cpu 0x00010001 start test memory accress ddr2 0x40000000 finish simple test U Boot 2009 08 Feb 24 2012 07 44 12 Freescale 1 MX28 family CPU 297 MHz BUS 99 MHz EMI 130 MHz GPMI 24 MHz EAC ready DRAM 128 MB SFGEN N25Q512A detected total size 64 MB A2F SPICOMM protocol v1 6 M3 firmware v0 8 FPGA design v0 42 0 0 A2F A2F firmware version 0 8 A2F Last reset cause HARD A2F Device type A2FO60M3E FG256 A2F MSS c
16. Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide To specify a filter use the Filter text entry box in the upper left corner of the main window For instance to select the messages with the destination address 0x20 and the source address 0x82 type the string ipmi header target 0x20 amp amp ipmi header source 0x82 in the Filter text entry box Figure 16 Filtered Trace TCP 192 168 1 199 Capturing Wireshark a es File Edit View Go Capture Analyze Statistics Help a a ameorvFt BR aaan BME g Filter ipmi header target 0x20 amp amp ipmi header source Expression Clear Apply No Time Source Destination Protocol Info 1 0 000000 12C 2 0x10 IPMI ATC Req Platform Event seq 0x00 4 0 101917 I2C 2 0x10 IPMI ATC Rsp Get Device ID seq 0x10 6 0 132643 I2C 1 0x10 IPMI ATC Rsp ATCA Get PICMG Properties seq 0x11 8 0 161710 I2C 2 0x10 IPMI ATC Rsp Set Event Receiver seq 0x 9 1 237134 I2C 1 0x10 IPMI ATC Req Platform Event seq 0x00 11 1 263932 I2C 2 0x10 IPMI ATC Req Platform Event seq 0x01 14 1 296905 12C 2 0x10 IPMI ATC Rsp Get Device ID seq 0x13 15 1 305104 12C 2 0x10 IPMI ATC Rsp ATCA Get Device Locator Record ID seq 0x14 18 1 326371 I2C 1 0x10 IPMI ATC Req Platform Event seq 0x02 21 1 392419 I2C 2 0x10 IPMI ATC Rsp Reserve Device SDR Repository seq 0x15 23 1 408658 I2C 1 0x10 IPMI ATC Rsp Get Device ID seq 0x16 24 1 418148 I2C 1 0x10 IPMI ATC Rsp Get Device SDR seq 0x17 26 1 439321 I2C 2 0x10 IPMI
17. SHELF MANAGER User Guide Release 3 5 1 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide 2002 2015 Pigeon Point Systems LLC All rights reserved Pigeon Point Shelf Manager and ShMM 500 ShMM 500R ShMM 500RE ShMM 1500R ShMM 700R This document is furnished under license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of such license The content of this manual is furnished for informational use only is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by Pigeon Point Systems Pigeon Point Systems assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this book Except as permitted by such license no part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic manual recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of Pigeon Point Systems The Pigeon Point Shelf Manager uses an implementation of the MD5 Message Digest algorithm that is derived from the RSA Data Security Inc MD5 Message Digest algorithm The Pigeon Point name and the stylized lighthouse logo as well as Monterey Linux and IntegralHPI are trademarks of Pigeon Point Systems LLC Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds Release 3 5 1 2 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide Table of Contents 1 ABOUT THIS DOCUMENT s ccciccocoche ce ccctedscs tchedtteccccsceteete
18. The reboot was caused by the ShMM hardware watchdog 9 The reboot was initiated by software a reboot system call 10 The ShMM has been power cycled 11 The reboot happened because of an SDRAM error 12 The reboot was caused by the IPMI Cold Reset command 13 The reboot was caused by 12C Isolation switchover 14 The reboot was caused by a local IPMB 0 failure ShMM 700 only The sensor reading byte is always 0 and does not have any meaning NOTE in case of a Shelf Manager reboot initiated by software this sensor may report two different reasons based on system shutdown speed If the system shuts down within the default setting of 2 seconds i e while the watchdog timer has not expired the reboot reason will be a reboot call state mask 9 Otherwise the reboot reason will be the hardware watchdog To avoid this non deterministic result it is possible to increase the WATCHDOG TIMEOUT configuration variable value for example WATCHDOG TIMEOUT could be increased to 5 seconds Release 3 5 1 160 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide In addition to the state mask reported by the reboot reason sensor information about recent reboots is stored in the file var nvdata reboot_reason 1logon the ShMM The typical log file is shown below 04 10 2014 04 55 35 The reboot was caused by power operation 04 10 2014 04 41 04 The reboot was caused by power operation 04 09 2014 23 32 47 Th
19. command bridged SPONSE from LAN to IPMB If TRUE the sequence number of the command encapsulated in the Send Message request is used If FALSE the sequence number of the Send Message request itself is used According to a clarification being proposed for the latest version of the PICMG 3 0 specification the first variant is correct while the Shelf Manager historically used the second variant INTEGRALHPI_ Number 0 This variable defines the seconds Yes DEFAULT AUTO portion of the default auto extraction _EXTRACT TIM timeout value for all exposed HPI EOUT resources A negative value causes the timeout to be set to SAHPI TIMEOUT BLOCK INTEGRALHPI_ Number 1 This variable defines the milliseconds Yes DEFAULT_AUTO portion of the default auto extraction _EXTRACT_TIM timeout value for all exposed HPI EOUT_MSEC resources INTEGRALHPI_ Number 0 This variable defines the seconds Yes DEFAULT_AUTO portion of the default auto insertion _INSERT_TIME timeout value for this IntegralHPI OUT domain A negative value causes the timeout to be set to SAHPI TIMEOUT BLOCK INTEGRALHPI_ Number 1 This variable defines the milliseconds Yes DEFAULT_AUTO portion of the default auto extraction _INSERT_TIME timeout value for this IntegralHP OUT_MSEC domain INTEGRALHPI_ Number 1 The HPI domain ID of the current No DOMAIN ID shelf used to differentiate on the HPI Client level among multiple shelves whose Shelf Managers suppor
20. tmp tmp kernel to dev 2 1 lt INFO gt backend c 730 Burning lt INFO gt backend c 764 2283039 bytes was written from file tmp tmp rfs to dev 4 1 lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1285 Write storage state available gt not available ALLOW lt INFO gt backend c 730 Burning lt INFO gt backend c 764 2110743 bytes was written from file tmp tmp app to dev 8 1 lt INFO gt backend c 808 Erasing user data on candidate bank lt INFO gt backend c 821 Copy ssh keys lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1189 Write confirmed 0 gt 0 ALLOW lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1194 Write candidate 1 gt 1 ALLOW lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1265 Write upgrade watchdog 0 gt 1 ALLOW Release 3 5 1 266 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide The reliable upgrade procedure resets the ShMM here and starts U Boot from the candidate Flash PowerPrep start initialize power Battery Voltage 1 46V No battery or bad battery detected Disabling battery voltage measurements Mar 21 201223 23 40 FRAC 0x92926152 memory type is DDR2 Wait for ddr ready 1 power 0x00820616 Frac 0x92926152 start change cpu freq hbus 0x00000003 cpu 0x00010001 start test memory access ddr2 0x40000000 finish simple test U Boot 2009 08 Mar 21 2012 23 22 30 Freescale 1 MX28 family CPU 297 MHz BUS 99 MHz EMI 130 MHz GPMI 24 MHz I2C ready DRAM 128 MB SFGEN N250512A detected t
21. 3826312 Bytes 3 6 MB Load Address 00000000 Entry Point 00000000 Verifying Checksum OK Loading Ramdisk to O7bfc000 end 07fa2288 OK shmm1500 login root On ShMM 700 shmm700 reset resetting PowerPrep start initialize power Battery Voltage 1 44V No battery or bad battery detected Disabling battery voltage measurements Feb 24 201207 45 29 FRAC 0x92926152 memory type is DDR2 Wait for ddr ready 1 power 0x00820616 Frac 0x92926152 start change cpu freq hbus 0x00000003 cpu 0x00010001 Release 3 5 1 99 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide start test memory accress ddr2 0x40000000 finish simple test U Boot 2009 08 Feb 24 2012 07 44 12 Freescale 1 MX28 family CPU 297 MHz BUS 99 MHz EMI 130 MHz GPMI 24 MHz IZG ready DRAM 128 MB SFGEN N25Q512A detected total size 64 MB A2F SPICOMM protocol v1 6 M3 firmware v0 8 FPGA design v0 42 0 0 A2F A2F firmware version 0 8 A2F Last reset cause HARD A2F Device type A2FO60M3E FG256 A2F MSS clock frequency 40 MHz A2F Fabric clock frequency 20 MHz A2F Fast delay calibration 1330 cycles per 100uS A2F eNVM 128 KB 00000000 00020000 AZF eSRAM 16 KB 20000000 20004000 A2F Extram start 200022D0 RUPG booting from image 0 confirmed In serial Out serial Err serial Net FECO 00 18 49 01 8f 26 FEC1 00 18 49 01 8f 27 FECO FEC1 Hit
22. 745 kernel tmp _tmp_kernel lt INFO gt frontend c 755 rfs tmp _tmp_rfs lt INFO gt frontend c 765 app tmp tmp app lt INFO gt frontend c 820 Calling backend to handle partial upgrade sbin backend uboot tmp _tmp uboot kernel tmp tmp kernel rootfs tmp tmp rfs application tmp tmp app copy etc lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1285 Write storage state not available gt available ALLOW UBI device number 1 total 484 LEBs 31657472 bytes 30 2 MiB available 0 LEBs 0 bytes LEB size 65408 bytes 63 9 KiB lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 369 Resetting UBIFS cache Erasing 64 Kibyte 30000 75 complete lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1913 Clean on defice 1 0 Leaving file dev mtd0 untouched lt INFO gt backend c 730 Burning image lt INFO gt backend c 764 393216 bytes was written from file tmp tmp uboot to dev 1 0 qgaaaqaagaagaaaaa Here and below rupgrade reports that a new image has been written to the storage device The number in brackets is the candidate image set number In this example the confirmed image number is 1 and the candidate number is 0 Erasing 64 Kibyte 30000 75 complete 512 0 records in 512 0 records out Release 3 5 1 256 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide 262144 bytes 256 0KB copied 1 567781 seconds 163 3KB s lt INFO gt backend c 730 Burning lt INFO gt backend
23. Boolean FALSE If TRUE the event severity and alert Yes _SEVERITY_ST string is added to a trap message in RING the PPS OEM Plain Text and Multi Variable PET formats The default IPMI PET format always includes these fields from the corresponding event filter PET SNMP_VER Number 1 Specifies the SNMP version for traps Yes SION generated by the Shelf Manager Currently supported versions are 1 the default and 2 POWER_UNLIST Boolean TRUE Allow the FRUs not listed in the power No ED _FRUS management table in the Shelf FRU Information to be activated and powered up PROPAGATE_RM Boolean FALSE If TRUE the active Shelf Manager Yes CP_ADDRESS propagates the RMCP IP address to the backup Shelf Manager which configures the network interface specified by the RMCP_NET_ ADAPTER variable using that IP address but with the least significant bit inverted Release 3 5 1 69 August 17 2015 REAPPLY POWE R_MAX COOLIN G STATE Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide String 16 DEFAULT NORMAL DESCRIPTION Sets the most severe shelf thermal state in which the Shelf Manager can power a FRU up after that FRU has been powered down due to a Critical thermal alert Possible values of this variable are NORMAL MINOR_ALERT MAJOR_ALERT The CRITICAL ALERT value is not supported since it could lead to oscillations caused by immediate reactivation of the problematic FRU
24. In that case only the specified DHCP server is used In addition if the configuration parameter DHCP_FOR_RMCP_ONLY is set to TRUE only the RMCP accessible Logical Shelf Manager IP addresses are assigned via DHCP In this case the private ShMM IP addresses if any are left untouched Release 3 5 1 107 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide The DHCP server should be configured to provide a unique IP address for each Client Identifier To avoid IP address expiration the lease time of each address must be set as infinite time value OxFFFFFFFF If the configuration of the DHCP server changes over time it may be necessary to restart the procedure of IP address assignment on the DHCP client for the Shelf Manager The CLI command dhcp restart can be used for this purpose Another CLI command dhcp status can be used to find out the current DHCP client status on the Shelf Manager which IP addresses have already been retrieved and assigned Please refer to the Shelf Manager External Interface Reference for the detailed information about these CLI commands In addition to providing an IP address related information a DHCP server can be configured via the TFTP Server Name and Bootfile Name options to provide the name of a TFTP server and identify a bootfile on that server For the benefit of other applications that may run on the ShMM in parallel with the Shelf Manager the DHCP client if it receives this additional i
25. Initialization field the following fields from the replacement SDRs specify the replacement hysteresis values for the target sensor Positive Hysteresis Negative Hysteresis Hysteresis values must be specified in the raw format with the Ox prefix e The field OEM from the replacement SDR always replaces the corresponding attribute of the target sensor even if not specified e The field Id String replaces the target sensor name only if specified in the replacement SDR The example below illustrates a typical local sensor configuration text definition It redefines thresholds for the two temperature sensors on the physical IPM controller It is assumed that the physical IPM controllers have IPMB 0 addresses 10h and 12h in the target shelf Full Owner Sensor Record Id 0x10 Sensor Number 2 Sensor Initialization THRESHOLDS LOwer Lower Non Critical Threshold 0xb0 Critical Threshold 0xc0 Lower Non Recoverable Threshold 0xd0 Upper Non Critical Threshold 0x40 Upper Critical Threshold 0x48 Upper Non Recoverable Threshold 0x50 Full Sensor Record Owner Id 0x10 Sensor Number 3 Sensor Initialization THRESHOLDS Release 3 5 1 130 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide Lower Non Critical Threshold 0xb0 Lower Critical Threshold 0xc0 Lower Non Recoverable Threshold 0xd0 Upper Non Critical Threshold 0x40 Upper Critical Threshold 0x48 Upper Non Rec
26. backend c 772 Burning Release 3 5 1 263 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide lt INFO gt backend c 806 2377014 bytes were written from file tmp _shmm700 sentry shmm700 app to dev 8 1 lt INFO gt backend c 850 Erasing user data on candidate bank lt INFO gt backend c 860 Copy etc lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1161 Write confirmed 0 gt 0 ALLOW lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1166 Write candidate 1 gt 1 ALLOW lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1235 Write upgrade watchdog 0 gt 1 ALLOW At this point the telnet session is closed after a certain inactivity period after several seconds it is possible to reconnect to the target again and check the status of the reliable upgrade by invoking rupgrade s telnet 192 168 1 123 Trying 192 168 1 123 2 lt Connected to 192 168 1 123 Escape character is shmm700 login root Password rupgrade s lt INFO gt frontend c 87 Last upgrade log lt WARN gt shmm700_ hal c 322 Device ubil boot is mounted to folder boot lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1255 Write storage state not available gt available ALLOW lt INFO gt shmm700_ hal c 368 Resetting UBIFS cache lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1863 Clone lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1898 File dev mtd0 of device 1 0 cloned to file dev mtd2 of device 1 1 lt INFO gt shmm700_ hal c 1642 Cleaning image var upgrade boot ulImage 1 lt INFO gt shmm700 h
27. case of a forced switchover from the backup Shelf Manager However the behavior of a standalone Shelf Manager one without a backup in the case of the loss of either Local Healthy or Active bit is different In the case of the Local Healthy bit the behavior is configurable and depends on the value of the configuration variable EXIT IF HEALTHY LOST IN STANDALONE MODE By default the value is FALSE and in that case the Shelf Manager restores the Local Healthy bit and continues the operation However if the value is TRUE the standalone Shelf Manager reinitializes itself by rebooting the ShMM On ShMM 500 when the Active bit changes to 0 in the absence of a backup Shelf Manager it is likely the result of a known hardware issue that exists on some ShMM carriers In that case the Shelf Manager attempts to restore the Active bit by requesting the active state again via setting the Switchover Request bit in the CPLD If the recovery of the Active bit fails the standalone Shelf Manager reinitializes itself by rebooting the SAMM No check of the Active bit takes place if the configuration variable CPLD_ ACTIVE WORKAROUND is set to FALSE the default value is TRUE for all carriers and changing it is not recommended The workaround described in this paragraph does not apply to the ShMM 700 and the configuration variable CPLD ACTIVE WORKAROUND has no effect on the ShMM 700 Release 3 5 1 156 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide
28. is treated as a comment and ignored Empty lines are allowed and ignored too For each slot the file can define several parameter sets All parameter sets defined for the same slot must be placed in the file together and have the same values to the left of the equal sign They are assigned to LAN channels on the corresponding boards or modules that require such assignments 3 Read from the Shelf FRU Information In this case there is a set of custom multirecords with Manufacturer ID 00400Ah the PPS IANA Record ID OCh The concatenation of the data in these multirecords optionally compressed with gzip represents the parameter data in the same format as for the text file above Management of parameter sets is also performed in the same way as for the previous case An example of a LAN parameters configuration file is given below Parameters for a board in physical slot 1 192 168 1101 255 255 255 0 192 168 1171 192 168 1 102 2597299529907 192 168 Lal 192 168 1 103 255 295 255 0 192 168 1241 PRR e Parameters for an AMC in the first AMC slot of a board in slot 1 1 1 192 168 1 104 255 255 255 0 192 168 1 1 1 1 192 168 1 105 255 255 255 0 192 168 1 1 1 1 192 168 1 106 255 255 255 0 192 168 1 1 Parameters for an AMC in the second AMC slot of a board in slot 1 1 2 192 168 121 107 255 255 255 0 192 168 1 1 1 2 192 168 1 108 255 255 255 0 192 168 1 1 Parameters for a board in physical slot 19
29. is updated the shelf must be completely restarted to accommodate the changes To update the Shelf FRU Information stored in a Flash file with the contents of the file newdata bin update a single location with the IPMB address 20h and FRU device ID 1 like this clia frudataw 20 1 newdata bin To update the Shelf FRU Information stored in SEEPROMs with the contents of the file newdata bin use two commands to update locations with the IPMB address 20h and FRU device IDs 1 and 2 like this clia frudataw 20 1 newdata bin clia frudataw 20 2 newdata bin To update the Shelf FRU Information stored on separate IPM controllers in the shelf use several usually two commands with the corresponding IPMB addresses and FRU IDs FRU ID is usually 1 in this case Here is an example of updating the Shelf FRU Information in a shelf where the Shelf FRU Information is stored on the IPMCs at 62h and 64h Clia frudataw 62 1 newdata bin Clia frudataw 64 1 newdata bin Release 3 5 1 117 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide This method can be also used to update any other FRU Information repository in the shelf if the IPMB address and the FRU device ID of that repository are known Note The Shelf Manager doesn t support dynamic reconfiguration of the Shelf FRU Information After any modifications of the Shelf FRU Information performed via CLI RMCP SNMP and other interfaces the whole shelf must be restarted to accommodate t
30. it is possible to reconnect to the target again and check the status of the reliable upgrade by invoking rupgrade tool w telnet 192 168 1 174 Trying 192 168 1 174 Connected to 192 168 1 174 Escape character is BusyBox on shmm 174 login root BusyBox v0 60 5 2005 05 07 17 27 0000 Built in shell msh xupgrade_tool w Recent upgrade status PLB is 9 EEPROM page saved persistent flash is 0 provisional flash is 1 copying image s 4 copying sentry shmm1500 rfs from 192 168 1 253 tftpboot ru ppce to tmp using ftp protocol 4 invoking scripts step4v r sentry shmm1500 rfs proto ftp 192 168 1 253 tftpboot ru ppc admin hook etc_ copy 4 copying sentry shmm1500 rfs from tmp to dev mtdchar9 using cp protocol 4 invoking scripts step4h etc copy 4 image s copy OK 5 watchdog started 6 selected provisional flash 7 reboot 9 WDT not fired upgrade in progress 10 provisional flash 1 disabling watchdog 12 upgrade WDT disabled 13 EEPROM updated 13 invoking scripts stepl13h 14 upgrade completed successfully DWN H Release 3 5 1 235 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide 7 8 3 Example 3 This example shows an unsuccessful reliable upgrade Power is turned off after the boot from the provisional Flash but before the reliable upgrade is finalized After turning the power back on the rollback to the persistent Flash occ
31. lt protocol gt specifies a file copy protocol used to pull each of the specified lt src gt files to the ShMM and can be any of the following Release 3 5 1 224 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide e no Nocopy is performed This protocol assumes that all of the specified lt src gt files were pushed to the tmp directory prior to start of the reliable upgrade procedure This protocol choice cannot be used in conjunction with the d option e cp lt dir gt Simple copy This protocol assumes that all of the specified lt s re gt files are to be copied from the specified directory in the ShMM local file system by the cp command This protocol can be useful for instance for installation of upgrade images from an NFS mounted file system or even from a JFFS2 file system e ftp lt server gt lt dir gt lt user gt lt pwd gt Copy froma remote FTP server This protocol assumes that all of the specified lt s re gt files are to be copied to the ShMM from the FTP server host specified as the host name or the IP address by lt server gt All the images must reside in the directory specified by lt dir gt on the remote FTP server The FTP connection is made using the account specified by the lt usexr gt parameter with the password specified by the optional lt pwd gt parameter If no lt pwd gt is supplied the utility prompts for a password e scp lt server gt lt dir gt lt user gt lt id_file gt port Copy
32. section 3 8 1 1 Radial IPMB 0 is implemented differently for ShMM 500s and for SaMM 1500s For ShMM 500s there is a single logical bus for each of the two constituent buses of IPMB 0 that is IPMB A and IPMB B and radial IPMB is actually implemented in a pseudo radial in which the radial segments are only implemented at the physical level For SaMM 1500s there are distinct logical buses for each radial segment Support for radial IPMB is not yet implemented in the Linux kernel for the ShMM 700 though on the hardware level the same approach as on the ShMM 500 should work fine 4 5 1 Operation in ShMM 500 based Shelves with Radial IPMB 0 For pseudo radial IPMB 0 implementations on the ShMM 500 the Shelf Manager uses a single logical IPMB interface on each of IPMB A and IPMB B to communicate with all the IPM controllers but there is a separate GPIO control on the carrier for each of the radial segments that can be used to turn that segment on and off Only some carriers provide this support If both 1 the Shelf FRU Information contains the radial IPMB 0 description record and 2 the carrier supports radial operation the Shelf Manager on ShAMM 500s implements isolation of faulty bus segments in the case of a persistent error on IPMB 0 This prevents such an error on one or Release 3 5 1 161 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide several specific IPM controllers from causing a failure of an entire bus Isolation is per
33. the analyzer host is also the one that participates in the IPMl oriented communication However if the analyzer host s local network interface supports promiscuous mode Wireshark or tshark can collect a trace of IPMI communication between two separate systems that are not the analyzer host if at least one of them is on the same LAN with the analyzer host The following stepwise procedure shows how to collect an IPMl over network trace and open it for analysis in the GUI The GUl specific steps are followed by corresponding guidance for collecting a similar trace in tshark 1 On the analyzer host start the GUI C gt wireshark In the main menu go to Capture submenu and select Options This opens the Capture Options dialog In the dialog use the Capture Interface window to Release 3 5 1 203 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide specify the target Choose the name of the network interface through which the IPMI communication takes place e g eth0 Additionally you can use the Update list of packets in real time checkbox to specify that the GUI should show the trace in real time For instance Figure 12 Capture Options Window analyzing networked IPMI traffic Wireshark Capture Options i met Capture 4 Interface eth0 IP address 80 240 102 57 fe80 203 dff fe2e 2371 Link layer header type Ethernet gt v Capture packets in promiscuous mode Limit each packet to bytes Capture
34. upgrade procedure has failed and was terminated before proceeding to reset the ShMM in order to boot from the provisional Flash Before the first step of the upgrade procedure is initiated by the utility it removes the var upgrade status file In other words the status of the previous upgrade procedure session if any is lost and overwritten by the status of the new upgrade procedure session as soon as rupgrade tool s is called There can be one or more lt dst gt lt src gt specifiers in a call to rupgrade_tool s Each such specifier defines the name of a to be installed upgrade image file and where the file is to be installed in the Flash of the ShMM lt ds t gt defines the destination of a newly installed upgrade image and can be any of the following e u Upgrade the U Boot image in the provisional U Boot firmware image partition dev mtdchar3 e k Upgrade the Linux kernel image in the provisional Linux kernel image partition dev mtdchar2 e r Upgrade the root file system image in the provisional root file system image partition dev mtdchar4 lt src gt specifies an upgrade image file to be copied to the provisional Flash partition specified by lt dst gt The specifier a if used indicates that all three components U Boot kernel and root file system are to be upgraded and the source upgrade image files must have standard names These standard names are defined separately for ShMM 500 and ShMM 1500 accor
35. using 24 hour notation e mm Minute e ss Second e YY Year 2 digit e CC Century For example date 042916282006 Sat Apr 29 16 28 00 UTC 2006 To make the date persistent you need to store it using the hwclock application hwclock w In some cases you might get the error message mktime cannot convert RTC time to UNIX time This error can be ignored It is due to the original date being in an uninitialized state 3 10 1 Obtaining Date and Time from a Time Server It is possible to obtain the system date and time from a time server during system startup and synchronize it periodically thereafter This facility is critical if the SAMM carrier does not have an RTC battery There are two network time protocols that can be used for that purpose NTP and RFC 868 rdate The specific protocol to be used is selected when configuring the ShMM Release 3 5 1 132 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide To enable obtaining the network time via the NTP protocol it is necessary to define the U Boot variables time_proto time_server and optionally the additional variable timezone The variable time_proto determines the adjust time protocol if this variable is undefined by default the RFC 868 rdate protocol is used This variable should be set to ntp to enable the NTP protocol The usage of the other variables is identical their usage with RFC 868 rdate and is described below To enable obtaining the network time
36. x and V as in the case of unattended mode can be used to request a hexadecimal and or detailed dumps of the messages Any additional options needed for filtering and analysis of the message stream see section 5 4 6 should also be specified at this time Next execute the actions from step 5 the trace is then captured by tshark and sent to the command output For example nc 192 168 1 62 19000 Capturing on Standard input 1214325501 948358 Reading seq 0x27 1214325501 999629 Reading seq 0x27 1214325502 002796 Reading seq 0x28 1214325502 017845 Reading seq 0x28 1214325502 038082 Reading seq 0x29 1214325502 038245 Reading seq 0x29 Release 3 5 1 tshark i I2C 1 gt 0x41 I2C 1 gt 0x10 I2C 2 gt 0x41 I2C 2 gt 0x10 I2C 1 gt 0x41 I2C 1 gt 0x10 202 IPMI A IPMI A IPMI Al IPMI ATCA IPMI ATCA CA CA CA IPMI ATCA Req RSP Req RSP Req RSP Get Get Get Get Ge Get Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide 1214325502 041232 I2C 2 gt 0x41 IPMI ATCA Req Get Sensor Reading seq 0x2a To stop the capture session terminate the tshark process e g by pressing C 5 4 3 Collecting an IPMI Trace in Board Trace Mode If some board in the shelf supports an HPM 2 IPMI trace facility the trace daemon can be used as a bridge between the board and
37. 1 04 3D Variable data length data follows see Table 17 7 PET Variable Bindings Field of IPMI 2 0 specification 1D 3A 30 76 62 F2 11 DD 00 80 00 50 C2 3F FB 56 GUID 00 07 trap sequence 13 ED A3 61 00 00 Local Timestamp Tue Aug 5 16 29 21 2008 20 20 trap source event source IPMI 01 Event Severity Monitor 20 Sensor Device BMC 85 Sensor Number oo Entity 0Oh unspecified 00 Entity Instance OOh unspecified_ co 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Event Data 19 Language Code English 00 00 40 oa Manufacturer ID MSB first 00400Ah for PPS 00 00 System ID MSB first 80 4B 01 PET multirecord ASCII len Bh Text Alert String i Oy Oy GI es Tl lt gt ay a e e o Release 3 5 1 140 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide 54 65 73 74 53 74 72 69 6E 67 00 Null terminated Alert String TestString c1 No more fields 3 14 Configuring the IntegralHPI Interface The Pigeon Point Shelf Manager optionally includes IntegralHPI an implementation of the Service Availability Forum SAF www saforum org Hardware Platform Interface HPI operating as a subsystem within the Shelf Manager On the ShMM 500 and ShMM 1500 IntegralHPI requires a variant of the ShMM that has additional memory specifically 128 megabytes of RAM and 64 megabytes of Flash These memory resources needed for IntegralHPI are present on all ShMM 700s so no spe
38. 14 35 23 920 212 Controller 20 FRU 2 Al prev M1 cause 2 locked 0 lt I gt 14 35 23 942 221 sdrrep Skipping 20 lt I gt 14 35 23 944 221 sdrrep Skipping FC lt I gt 14 35 23 947 214 Hot Swap event SA 0x20 FRU 1 sensor 0x02 M1 gt M2 cause 2 lt I gt 14 35 23 963 214 Hot Swap event 0x03 M1 gt M2 cause 2 lt I gt 14735 23 973 234 SA 0x20 FRU 1 is ACTIVATING Release 3 5 1 152 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide lt I gt 14 35 23 978 230 sdrrep full ipmc_sdrs_ update thread for 20 lt I gt 14 35 23 979 213 Controller FC FRU 0 ATCA state set to M3 prev M2 cause 1 locked 0 lt I gt 14 35 23 984 230 sdrrep full ipmc_sdrs_ update thread for 20 attempt 0 lt I gt 14 35 23 992 230 Registered potential fan 0x100eb2b8 SA 0x20 FRU 2 lt I gt 14 35 23 997 230 sdrrep finished reading SDRs for SA 20 added 15 preserved 0 deleted 0 time 7 seconds lt I gt 14 35 24 003 214 Hot Swap event SA 0xfc FRU 0 sensor number 0x00 M2 gt M3 cause 1 lt I gt 14 35 24 021 231 sdrrep full ipmc_sdrs_ update thread for FC lt I gt 14 35 24 024 235 SA 0x20 FRU 2 is ACTIVATING lt I gt 14 35 24 031 217 Move fan 0x100eb2b8 cnt 2 0 gt 1 lt I gt 14 35 24 031 217 ipmc_cooling scan sensors Reread sensors on the SA OxFC lt I gt 14 35 24 023 231 sdrrep full ipmc_sdrs_ update thread for FC attempt 0 lt I gt 14 35
39. 18 d6 20 24 O1 bb TCP 192 168 1 65 Capturing Wireshark M B Q Apply Protocol Info EF IPMI ATC Req IPMI ATC Req IPMI ATC Req IPMI ATC Req IPMI ATC Req IPMI ATC Req IPMI ATC Req IPMI ATC Req IPMI ATC Req IPMI ATC Req IPMI ATC Req IPMI ATC Req IPMI ATC Req IPMI ATC Req IPMI ATC Req IPMI ATC Req IPMI ATC Req IPMI ATC Req IPMI ATC Req TCP 192 168 1 65 lt live capture in pro Packets 262 Displayed 262 Ma Profile Default ZX Get Device ID Get Device ID Get Device ID Get Device ID Get Device ID Get Device ID Get Device ID Get Device ID Get Device ID Get Device ID Get Device ID Get Device ID Get Device ID Get Device ID Get Device ID Get Device ID Get Device ID Get Device ID Get Device ID QF wf e seq 0x3e seq 0x3e seq 0x3f seq 0x3f seq 0x00 seq 0x00 seq 0x01 seq 0x01 seq 0x02 seq 0x02 seq 0x03 seq 0x03 seq 0x04 seq 0x04 seq 0x05 seq 0x05 seq 0x06 seq 0x06 seq 0x07 y FS e 4 To stop the capture session go to the Capture submenu and select Stop In a command line context redirect the output of netcat to the tshark utility instead of the Wireshark GUI application Like Wireshark tshark can take the standard input option to indicate the source of the data Specify the IP address of the ShMM and the port on which the trace daemon listens for incoming connections 19000 by default as input to netcat Options
40. 192 168 1 191 Connected to 192 168 1 191 192 168 1 191 220 shmm 191 FTP server Version wu 2 6 2 1 Wed Oct 5 21 30 04 GMT 2005 ready Name 192 168 1 191l username anonymous 331 Guest login ok send your complete e mail address as password Password 230 Guest login ok access restrictions apply Remote system type is UNIX Using binary mode to transfer files ftp gt cd var nvdata 250 CWD command successful ftp gt put user_sdr local user _ sdr remote user sdr 227 Entering Passive Mode 192 168 1 191 246 195 150 Opening BINARY mode data connection for user sdr 226 Transfer complete 124 bytes sent in 8 5e 05 secs 7 6e 03 Kbytes sec ftp gt quit 221 You have transferred 124 bytes in 1 files 221 Total traffic for this session was 1165 bytes in 1 transfers 221 Thank you for using the FTP service on shmm 191 221 Goodbye A newly installed SDR definition file var nvdata user_sdr takes effect only after a restart of the Shelf Manager the Shelf Manager log during that restart could look like the following example Release 3 5 1 127 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide daemon f shelfman lcs lt I gt 03 45 09 041 152 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager ver 3 5 1 Built on July 17 2015 11 03 27 lt gt 03 45 09 055 152 Limits code 10af4040 10ba95c0 end data 10c355d4 start _stack 10c36e64 sp 10c36874 eip 10bal1838 lt gt 03 45 09 063 152 Stack limits
41. 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide OFFSET IN FLASH SIZE IN DEVICE NODE MOUNTED As CONTENT IN MBYTES MBYTES ON STARTUP 33 75 1 dev mtdchar6 Not mounted The other etc dev mtdblock6 JFFS2 file system 34 75 2 dev mtdchar5 Not mounted The other var dev mtdblock5 JFFS2 file system 36 75 16 dev mtdchar9 Not mounted The other Linux root dev mtdblock9 file system rfs image 52 75 11 25 dev mtdchar11 Not mounted The second half of dev mtdblock1 1 the app_jffs application specific JFFS2 partition 7 4 The var upgrade File System Monterey Linux mounts a 1 MByte partition as a JFFS2 file system at var upgrade This file system hosts the reliable upgrade procedure status file It is important to note that the var upgrade JFFS2 partition is composed of two non contiguous Flash blocks 0 5 MBytes each residing in both the lower and upper halves of the Flash device Monterey Linux takes advantage of the ability of the Linux MTD and JFFS2 layers to support a file system in non contiguous Flash sectors in order to implement var upgrade this way Another feature of the JFFS2 file system that makes var upgrade work for purposes of the reliable upgrade procedure is that the JFFS2 internal structures do not create any dependencies such as linked lists based on Flash sector numbers or absolute offsets in Flash Instead when mounting a file system on a partition the JFFS2
42. 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide specifies that the Carrier FRU Information should be retrieved from the SEEPROM of the ADM1026 device that is located on bus 0 at address 2Eh 7 bit and that only the first 2048 bytes of this SEEPROM which has the capacity of 8192 bytes should be read 3 6 4 2 Using the FRU Info Compiler to Place HPDL and SDR data in FRU Information The FRU Information Compiler is a Pigeon Point tool that generates a FRU Information image from its textual description The image can then be stored in an appropriate EEPROM device using various techniques The FRU Information Compiler implements special syntax that can be used to incorporate binary HPDL and SDR data into a FRU Information image that is being created For example the following instructions add binary files acb3 hpd1 bin gz and acb3 sdr bin gz which are compressed HPDL and SDR files respectively to the current FRU Information image PPS HPDL Data File acbh3 hpdl bin gz PPS HPDL SDR Data File acb3 sdr bin gz 3 6 4 3 Using the Shelf Manager Command Line Interface An extended version of the CLI command rudataw Can be used to dynamically update any FRU Information in a shelf with HPDL data and SDRs The corresponding binary files should be first downloaded on the ShMM The corresponding command line has the following syntax clia frudataw d lt ipmb address gt lt fru id gt lt in file gt clia frudataw s lt ipmb add
43. 21 2012 23 22 30 Freescale 1 MX28 family CPU 297 MHz BUS 99 MHz EMI 130 MHz GPMI 24 MHz T2C ready DRAM 128 MB SFGEN N25Q512A detected total size 64 MB A2F SPICOMM protocol v1 6 M3 firmware v0 9 FPGA design v0 44 0 0 A2F A2F firmware version 0 9 AQF Last reset cause HARD A2F Device type A2FO60M3E FG256 A2F MSS clock frequency 40 MHz A2F Fabric clock frequency 20 MHz A2F Fast delay calibration 1330 cycles per 100uS A2F eNVM 128 KB 00000000 00020000 A2F eSRAM 16 KB 20000000 20004000 A2F Extram start 200022D0 RUPG booting from image 0 confirmed After a power cycle U Boot reports that there is no reliable upgrade in progress and the confirmed image set is being used The confirmed image set index is 0 I serial Out serial Err serial Net FECO 00 18 49 01 8f 26 FEC1 00 18 49 01 8f 27 FECO FEC1 Hit any key to stop autoboot 0 Creating 1 MTD partitions on spi0O 0x0000001c0000 0x000002000000 mtd 5 UBI attaching mtdl to ubi0 UBI MTD device 1 is write protected attach in read only mode UBI physical eraseblock size 65536 bytes 64 KiB UBI logical eraseblock size 65408 bytes UBI smallest flash I O unit ak Release 3 5 1 268 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide UBI VID header offset 64 aligned 64 UBI data offset 128 UBI attached mtdl to
44. 22 17 23 27 2007 Acquiring 2ac34ad0 pid 263 file ipmc c ine 387 un 22 17 23 27 2007 Succeeded 2ac34ad0 pid 263 file ipmc c ine 387 un 22 17 23 27 2007 Released 2ac34ad0 pid 263 file ipmc c ine 484 un 22 17 23 27 2007 Acquiring 7d5f 740 pid 263 file msg c ine 775 un 22 17 23 27 2007 Succeeded 7d5f 740 pid 263 file msg c ine 775 Jun 22 17 23 27 2007 Acquiring 2acclf80 pid 263 file ipmf c line 1360 Jun 22 17 23 27 2007 Succeeded 2acc1lf80 pid 263 file ipmf c line 1360 BiGy H E e BG cy cy H j Release 3 5 1 173 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide Jun 22 17 23 27 2007 Acquiring 2ac344a0 pid 263 file msg c line 924 un 22 17 23 27 2007 Succeeded 2ac344a0 pid 263 file msg c ine 924 un 22 17 23 27 2007 Released 2ac344a0 pid 263 file msg c line 932 Jun 22 17 23 27 2007 Acquiring 2ac344a0 pid 263 file msg c line 867 un 22 17 23 27 2007 Succeeded 2ac344a0 pid 263 file msg c ine 867 un 22 17 23 27 2007 Released 2ac344a0 pid 263 file msg c line 876 un 22 17 23 27 2007 Acquiring 2acbe5ec pid 263 file ipmf ipmb c ine 1649 un 22 17 23 27 2007 Succeeded 2acbe5ec pid 263 file ipmf ipmb c ine 1649 un 22 17 23 27 2007 Released 2acbe5ec pid 263 file ipmf ipmb c ine 1656 un 22 17 23 27 2007 Acquiring 2acclde0 pid 263 ile ipmf ipmb buffe line 98 un 22 17 23 27 2007 Succeeded 2acclde0 pid 263 ile
45. 254 The parameter lt in ile gt indicates the LAN configuration parameters file which is possibly compressed to be stored in the target FRU Information Option c removes clears the LAN configuration data from the target FRU Information For example the following command can be used to update the Shelf FRU Information with a new version of the LAN configuration parameters file clia frudataw 1 20 254 lan _config_params gz 4 10 2 3 Configuring a Linux DHCP server for obtaining LAN Configuration Parameters The etc dhcpd conf file on the DHCP server should have a record with a unique DHCP client identifier string for each channel of each FRU for which the LAN configuration parameters need to be assigned Unless otherwise documented explicitly for certain specific types of ATCA shelves the format of the client identifier is as follows lt dhcp client identifier gt lt shelfaddress in bytes gt lt 2F board physical number gt lt FRU ID gt lt channel number gt The example below is for a shelf with 2 board slots with IPMB addresses 82h 84h and the shelf address XXX in ASCII HHtettetteetee Board LAN Configuration Params HtHTHETHEEH Ox82 0 0 host boardl fru0 ch0 option dhcp client identifier 58 58 58 30 0 0 fixed address 192 168 1 202 option routers 192 168 1 253 Release 3 5 1 181 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide option subnet mask 255 255
46. 255 0 host boardl fru0 chil option dhcp client identifier 58 58 fixed address 192 168 1 202 option routers 192 168 1 253 option subnet mask 255 255 255 0 host boardl fru0_ ch2 option dhcp client identifier 58 58 fixed address 192 168 1 202 option routers 192 168 1 253 option subnet mask 255 255 255 0 host boardl fru0 ch3 option dhcp client identifier 58 58 fixed address 192 168 1 202 option routers 192 168 1 253 option subnet mask 255 255 255 0 host boardl fru0_ch4 option dhcp client identifier 58 58 fixed address 192 168 1 202 option routers 192 168 1 253 option subnet mask 255 255 255 0 0x84 0 0 host board2 fru0_chO option dhcp client identifier 58 58 fixed address 192 168 1 203 option routers 192 168 1 253 option subnet mask 255 255 255 0 host board2 fru0 chil option dhcp client identifier 58 58 fixed address 192 168 1 203 option routers 192 168 1 253 option subnet mask 255 255 255 0 host board2 fru0 ch2 option dhcp client identifier 58 58 fixed address 192 168 1 203 option routers 192 168 1 253 option subnet mask 255 255 255 0 host board2 fru0 ch3 option dhcp client identifier 58 58 fixed address 192 168 1 203 Release 3 5 1 182 D8 58 58 58s 58 58 58 58 30 30 30 30 313 314 Bale 313 August 17 2015 Pige
47. 500 shmm1500 for ShMM 1500 and shmm700 for ShMM 700 image_sel ShMM 700 only This variable contains the current image set index The variable is used in the Lload_ubifs command to determine which of the Linux kernel and RFS images to boot during bootup The variable is set automatically by U Boot during bootstrap io_config ShMM 500 only Determines if the Programmable Serial Controllers PSCs used for the IPMB 0 interface on the ShMM 500 are configured for the dual slave address configuration y n Default setting y If setting is not y the IPMB 0 interface does not work properly ipaddr IP address used by the primary on chip Ethernet interface This variable configures the network interface specified by ipdevice automatically ifthe rc_ifconfig variable is set to y Note that the system startup script sets the least significant bit of this variable to the least significant bit of the Hardware Address for the ShMM carrier that is if the Hardware Address is an even value the last bit in the IP address is set to 0 otherwise it is set to 1 This is done in the startup script etc netconfig to support coordinated IP address configurations on redundant ShMMs To disable this functionality simply remove the etc readhwaddr file ipladdr IP address used by the secondary Ethernet interface This variable can be passed as a part of the kernel command line to automatically configure the corresponding kernel network
48. ALLOW lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1235 Write upgrade watchdog 1 gt 0 ALLOW lt INFO gt frontend c 96 Last upgrade stages log O initial PASSED 1 before storage mount PASSED 2 after storage mount PASSED 3 after marking image set invalid PASSED 4 after u boot burn PASSED 5 after kernel burn PASSED 6 after rootfs burn PASSED 7 after storage umount PASSED 8 after cleaning previous apps set PASSED 9 after writting new apps set PASSED 10 after sync PASSED 11 after processing var and etc PASSED 12 after boot select PASSED 13 after reboot PASSED 14 after confirm PASSED 8 9 3 Example 3 This example shows an unsuccessful reliable upgrade Power is turned off after the boot from the candidate locations but before the reliable upgrade is finalized After turning the power back on the rollback to the confirmed images occurs This reliable upgrade is initiated from the serial console The default copy mode is used copy SSH keys and var nvdata All four images are assumed to be already in tmp xrupgrade skip checksums k file tmp sentry kernel r u file tmp u boot bin a file tmp sentry rfs file tmp sentry app lt INFO gt frontend c 449 lt INFO gt frontend c 449 lt INFO gt frontend c 449 lt INFO gt frontend c 449 lt INFO gt frontend c 535 lt INFO gt frontend c 735 lt INFO gt frontend c 745 lt INFO gt frontend c 755 Relea
49. AMCc IAP Version 2 30 Aux 00000000 HPM 2 Session 2 Channel 5 State Established HPM 2 Capabilities S Channel 1 Link Disabled Ports 84 Update Channel Interfa Link Disabled Ports e 0x02 Channel 1 clia fru v 84 4 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager Command Line Interpreter 84 FRU 4 AMC 2 Entity Oxcl 0x62 Hot Swap State M4 Active Previous M3 Activation In Process Last State Change Cause Normal State Change 0x0 Device Type FRU Inventory Device behind management controller 0x10 Modifier 0x0 Device ID String BMR A2F AMCm BTR Current Power Level 0x01 Maximum Power Level 0x01 Current Power Allocation 42 4 Watts Release 3 5 1 91 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide Device ID 0x34 Revision 0 Firmware 1 20 ver 1 2 0 IPMI ver Manufacturer ID 00400a Product ID beef Auxiliary Rev 00000000 HPM 2 Session 2 Channel 5 State Established HPM 2 Capabilities SOL Extensions Extended Inactive State Management Version Change Sensor for LAN Configuration Dynamic Sessions HPM 2 Channels 5 HPM 2 LAN Parameters start at 192 0xc0 revision 1 HPM 2 SOL Parameters start at 192 0xc0 revision 1 HPM 3 Capable Parameters start at 205 Oxcd revision 1 Established HPM 2 sessions are used by the Shelf Manager in the following scenarios e CLI commands sendemd and sendamc with the option x are used to send IPMI command
50. After a switchover the former backup now active Shelf Manager performs additional initialization applies cached state changes and collects any necessary further information from the IPM Controllers on IPMB The new active Shelf Manager then exposes the ShMC device address 20h on IPMB and assumes the IP address that was used for RMCP and other shelf external interactions between the formerly active Shelf Manager and the System Manager Since the RMCP session information is propagated from the active Shelf Manager to the backup Shelf Manager RMCP sessions survive the switchover For the System Manager using RMCP the switchover is transparent The switchover is also transparent for the Web interface and for the SNMP interface provided that they use the redundancy IP address that is switched over Command line interface sessions since they are initiated locally on the target Shelf Manager do not survive a switchover and need to be re established again on the newly active Shelf Manager The command line interface support on the backup Shelf Manager is limited but it does allow the backup Shelf Manager to request a switchover using the switchover command The formerly active Shelf Manager after the switchover can cease to exist or reinitialize itself as the backup Shelf Manager To reinitialize as the backup Shelf Manager the formerly active ShMM must reboot the operating system 4 4 1 Initialization of the Redundant Shelf Managers When star
51. All messages are also recorded to the var upgrade log txt file The rupgrade utility can operate in several modes depending on the command line parameters Upgrade mode rupgrade u lt URL gt uboot lt URL gt k lt URL gt kernel lt URL gt r lt URL gt rootfs lt URL gt a lt URL gt application lt URL gt base lt string gt copy config copy etc copy var copy all erase all skip checksums v lt verbose level gt verbose lt verbose level gt The main command line parameters have the following meanings and at least one of the following parameters must be specified u uboot lt URL gt specify the location of the new U Boot image k kernel lt URL gt specify the location of the new Linux kernel image r rootfs lt URL gt specify the location of the new Linux root file system image a application lt URL gt specify the location of the new application package image The following additional parameters are optional verbose lt verbose level gt specify the verbosity level see below base lt string gt specify the string used as a prefix for all URLs in the command copy config copy the SSH keys the Shelf Manager configuration files and the subdirectory var nvdata from the current image set to the new image set copy etc copy the entire etc directory and the subdirectory var nvdata from the current image set to the new image se
52. CAN BE OBTAINED FROM SHELF FRU INFO No REDUNDANCY C OMPRESSION_T HRESHOLD Number This parameter controls compression of messages sent over the redundancy interface A message is sent in compressed format if its size exceeds the parameter value The value 1 turns compression off Using message compression can improve the speed of redundancy information transfer on relatively slow redundancy links like the serial interface used on ShMM 1500 No REDUNDANCY E NABLED Boolean TRUE Run the Shelf Manager in redundant mode No REDUNDANCY N ET ADAPTER String 16 oy undefined The name of the network adapter used for communication between redundant instances of the Shelf Manager usb0 is the recommended value if USB network interfaces are used for redundancy No Release 3 5 1 70 August 17 2015 REDUNDANCY N ET ADAPTER2 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide TYPE String 16 DEFAULT oy undefined DESCRIPTION The name of the second network adapter used for communication between redundant instances of the Shelf Manager if the dual USB network interface is used for this purpose usb1 is the recommended value if USB network interfaces are used for redundancy If the configuration variable REDUNDANCY NET ADAPTER is set to usb0 this variable defaults to usb1 CAN BE OBTAINED FROM SHELF FRU INFO No REDUNDANCY N
53. CLI command setipmbstate can be used to selectively enable or disable a specific IPMB segment 4 5 3 Operation in ShMM 700 based Shelves with Radial IPMB 0 On ShMM 700 based shelves radial IPMB 0 support is implemented very similar to the ShMM 1500 case As on the SAMM 1500 there is a separate logical IPMB interface for each of the two portions IPMB A and IPMB B of each radial IPMB segment and the supported topologies include dual star and redundant dual star Since all ShMM 700 based shelves are HPDL based IPMB topology in those systems is always specified in HPDL and no IPMB Topology record in the Carrier FRU Information is needed or supported The IPMB topology clause has the following syntax which is backwards compatible with ShMM 1500 but with an extension specifying the position of the IPMB cross link lt ipmb topology clause gt IPMB TOPOLOGY lt bus_type gt lt cross link num gt z lt bus_type gt BUSED DUAL STAR REDUNDANT DUAL STAR lt cross link num gt 0 1 NOBUS The value BuSED of the lt bus_type gt token indicates a bused IPMB 0 carrier The default value is BUSED For hybrid IPMB 0 designs i e carrier designs that support both a radial IPMB 0 and a bused IPMB 0 the radial IPMB 0 topology is specified For carrier designs that only support a bused IPMB topology the IPMB Topology clause is optional and does not need to be included The value DUAL STAR corresponds
54. Changing the VLAN ID may disrupt current RMCP RMCP communication on the affected channel so it should be used with caution The VLAN ID is a 12 bit unsigned number the value 0 indicates that virtual LANs are not used on the channel Once set the VLAN ID is stored persistently in the LAN configuration parameters on the ShMM Flash file system Example Get the current VLAN ID settings for channel 1 where no VLANs are currently in use clia getlanconfig 1 vlan_id Pigeon Point Shelf Manager Command Line Interpreter 802 1q VLAN ID 0 disabled Set the VLAN ID for channel 1 to a different value clia setlanconfig 1 vlan_id enabled 5 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager Command Line Interpreter VLAN ID set successfully The IPMI 2 0 specification allows distinct VLAN IDs to be used for the outgoing SNMP traps LAN alerts generated by the Shelf Manager as a result of PEF processing As allowed by the IPMI specification the Shelf Manager does not support this extension and always uses the main VLAN ID that is assigned to the corresponding channel for such LAN alerts Each LAN configuration parameter that defines a VLAN ID for a LAN alert destination is read only in the Shelf Manager and identical to the VLAN ID for the corresponding LAN channel The default VLAN ID for a channel is usually 0 VLANs disabled but can be configured via the configuration parameters DEFAULT _VLAN_ID for channel 1 and DEFAULT_VLAN_ID2 for channel 2 These defaults a
55. Collecting Traces of IPMI Traffic Over the Network cccccccccssssssecesesseeeeeneees 203 5 4 5 Analyzing a Trace Using the GUI 1 ccsccccsccecesceeneeceeeteceeeeeseseeseneecneeeesennsesaees 206 5 4 6 Analyzing a Trace Using Command Line Tools 1 c ccccccccssscseseeceeneetsnnseensees 209 6 RE INITIALIZING THE SHMM 0 cccccsecseneeeeeeeescaeeesaeeenseeeeeaeeesaaesaseeeeeeesessaesaseeneneeaeeeanes 212 6 1 IN THIS SECTION iisen ansien ted casted ad ceaceds sseeeeatuua a aaa a a ai Eei 212 6 2 RE INITIALIZING THE U BOOT ENVIRONMENT 0 0 esesssesesssesesesssesesssesssssesessesseseeseeeee 212 6 3 RE INITIALIZING THE FILE SYSTEM cc cccccesccecseseceececeescseeaaeeeseseeseseeaaeaeeeeeeeseessaaees 213 6 4 RESETTING THE LOGIN PASSWORD s esesesssesesesesesseeseeeseeeeeessseesseeeessseeesesesesaeae 214 7 RE PROGRAMMING THE SHMM 500 1500 cssecceseeeseseeesseeeeseeeeeeeeesseeseseeeenseeeesiees 215 7 1 IN THS SECTION rsisi aea aaa aaa aae aaa aaia aasa 215 7 2 FIRMWARE RELIABLE UPGRADE PROCEDURE OVERVIEW 0 ccc eeceeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeaeseeeeeeaes 215 7 3 FLASH PARTITIONING oogs2asasvny onctagseedatie vag ined condues sang aeaa aeaa aa EaR ahaa aaea iaaa saii 216 7 4 THE VAR UPGRADE FILE SYSTEM 0 cccseeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeneeceeeeesaaeeeeaaeseeeeseaeeesaaeeseneeenaees 221 7 5 RELIABLE UPGRADE PROCEDURE STATUS FILE ceeececeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeesaeeesaaeeeeeeeeaas 221 7 6 RELIABLE UPGRADE
56. Destination Type N A Destination Address N A 802 1q VLAN ID 0 disabled VLAN priority 0 Cipher Suite Entry count 15 Supported Cipher Suite IDs Oh 1h 2h 3h 4h 5h 6h 7h 8h 9h Ah Bh Ch Dh Eh Cipher Suite Privilege Levels ID 00h Priv Level User 2 ID Olh Priv Level User 2 ID 02h Priv Level Administrator 4 ID 03h Priv Level OEM Proprietary 5 ID 04h Priv Level OEM Proprietary 5 ID 05h Priv Level OEM Proprietary 5 ID 06h Priv Level User 2 ID 07h Priv Level Administrator 4 ID 08h Priv Level OEM Proprietary 5 ID 09h Priv Level OEM Proprietary 5 ID OAh Priv Level OEM Proprietary 5 ID OBh Priv Level Administrator 4 ID 0Ch Priv Level OEM Proprietary 5 ID ODh Priv Level OEM Proprietary 5 Release 3 5 1 102 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide ID OEh Priv Level OEM Proprietary 5 Destination Address VLAN TAGs N A Bad password threshold disabled 9 Change the IP settings for channel 1 clia setlanconfig 1 ip 10 1 1 10 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager Command Line Interpreter IP set successfully clia setlanconfig 1 subnet_mask 255 255 0 0 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager Command Line Interpreter Subnet Mask set successfully clia setlanconfig 1 dft_gw_ip 10 1 1 1 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager Command Line Interpreter Default
57. Filter fo 7 Capture File s Display Options File Browse J Update list of packets in real time Use multiple files Automatic scrolling in live capture v Hide capture info dialog Name Resolution Stop Capture v Enable MAC name resolution after r Enable network name resolution after _ after v Enable transport name resolution 2 Press the Start button to begin collecting the trace 3 Setup the filter mcp to include only RMCP related traffic into the trace Otherwise all network traffic going through the specified adapter will be included into the trace To do this type rmcp in the Filter window in the top left corner of the main screen and press the Apply button 4 Execute actions that create the IPMI traffic on the network to be analyzed For example run a system management application that uses RMCP RMCP to talk to the Shelf Manager 5 The GUI will update the main window showing the collected trace in real time Release 3 5 1 204 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide Figure 13 Collected Trace networked IPMI traffic eth0 Capturing Wireshark File Edit View Go Capture Analyze Statistics Help a2 oe ameo2F4 BE Q2QQF BME EG Bitter rmcp Time Source Destination _ Protocol Info a E 506 116 932515 192 168 1 62 80 240 102 57 IPMI ATC Rsp Get Device ID seq 0x03 X Version 0x06 IB Sequence Oxff b Tyne Normal RMCP Class TPMT x 0000 0
58. IPMI 2 0 Sensor Type DEh Redundancy and CPLD state Sensor Number 80h Bo P Event Direction 7 0b Assertion Event Type 6 0 6Fh General Availability Event Data 1 7 4 7h previous state and severity in Event Data 2 OEM code in Event Data 3 3 0 The highest new offset 00h The current Shelf Manager is Active with no Backup Oth The current Shelf Manager is Active with a Backup 02h The current Shelf Manager is a Backup 03h The Shelf Manager is Active with a Backup but Backup is unavailable for switchover 04h The Shelf Manager is a Backup but the remote presence bit is not set 05h The Shelf Manager is a Backup but the remote switchover request bit is not set 06h The Shelf Manager is a Backup but the CPLD Active bit is set 07h The Shelf Manager is Active with a Backup but the remote presence bit is not set 08h The Shelf Manager is Active with a Backup but the remote healthy bit is not set 09h The Shelf Manager is Active with a Backup but the CPLD Active bit is not set OAh The local presence bit is not set for the current Shelf Manager OBh The Shelf Manager is Active with no Backup but the remote healthy bit is set OCh The Shelf Manager is Active with no Backup but the remote switchover request bit is set ODh The Shelf Manager is Active but senses the CPLD Active bit set on other ShMM Event Data 2 7 4 Event Severity 3 0
59. Information to IPM controllers at 66h and 68h respectively these variables should be defined as follows note the use of Ox prefix for hexadecimal addresses 0x66 0x68 SHELF _ FRU IPMB_ SOURCE1 SHELF FRU IPMB SOURCE2 However most known ShMM based shelves provide two SEEPROMs that are connected to the Shelf Manager via the master only 12C interface usually with each SEEPROM residing on its own bus behind an 12C multiplexer Each of these two SEEPROMs stores a copy of the Shelf FRU Information providing the needed redundancy Some shelves do not provide even this type of storage in that case it is possible to store the Shelf FRU Information on the ShMM itself as a single Flash file var nvdata shelf fru_info The redundant Shelf Managers each have their own copy of that Flash file and synchronize them using the redundancy protocol so even in that case some degree of redundancy is still preserved The Shelf Manager configuration as represented in she1f man conf must be aligned with the mechanisms for accessing Shelf FRU Information that are provided by the shelf The default configuration supports the approach where redundant Shelf FRU Information instances are represented by separate IPM controllers as FRU 1 as well as the two SEEPROMs approach The following key configuration variables are set as follows for that case LOCAL SHELF FRU TRUE SHELF FRU IN EEPROM TRUE In t
60. Intelligent Platform Management Interface No corresponding response gt Header Get Device ID Request from 0x20 to Oxf2 Data checksum Oxdb correct 0000 ARERR db H Text item 6 bytes Packets 382 Displayed 382 Mar Profile Default A trace can be filtered using the filter expressions Specifically for IPMI trace filtering the following expression primitives are available Table 22 IPMI Filter Primitives FILTER PRIMITIVE NAME DESCRIPTION ipmi header broadcast Broadcast destination address only for Broadcast Get Device ID Request messages ipmi header target Destination device responder or requester slave address ipmi header netfn Network Function NetFn of the message ipmi header trg_lun Destination responder or requester Logical Unit Number LUN ipmi header crc Header checksum ipmi header source Source device requester or responder slave address ipmi header sequence Request sequence ipmi header src lun Source requester or responder LUN ipmi header command Command to execute ipmi data completion Completion code only for response messages ipmi data cre Data checksum The filtering expression primitives above are applicable for both IPMB traffic and RMCP RMCP IPMI traffic over the network In the latter case several RMCP filtering expression primitives are also available but these are not widely used Release 3 5 1 208 August 17 2015
61. Interface Reference The overall infrastructure is documented in the IPM Controller Diagnostic Initiator Architecture document The Diagnostic Initiators facility is implemented on the physical Shelf Manager and provides access to several run time tests for the ShMM All tests are associated with Diagnostic Initiator 0 Cancellation is not supported for any of the tests Parameters for the tests are described in the following table The results string for most of these tests has the form Status XX where XX is a two digit hexadecimal test specific reason code 00 if the test completes successfully For the 12C test the results string in the case of success is a list of 2 character hexadecimal addresses for 2C devices present on the bus For the IPMB test the results string in the case of both success and failure is the list of extended IPMB state and error flags reported by the driver Some of the tests are not implemented on ShMM 700 because they don t make sense for that platform this is noted explicitly in the table below However to ensure compatible allocation of test identifiers across all platforms the corresponding tests are still described as present on the ShMM 700 when invoked such tests report failure with the textual result string This test is not implemented Release 3 5 1 185 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide Table 18 ShMM Tests Implemented in the Diagnostic Infrastructure T
62. Manager when it is started the Local Healthy and Active bits in CPLD are already set The Shelf Manager waits for the completion of the initialization script The initialization script is run only during the startup of the Shelf Manager it is not run after a switchover CAN BE OBTAINED FROM SHELF FRU INFO No INITIAL FAN_ LEVEL Number 5 This parameter specifies the initial fan level that the Shelf Manager applies to fan trays Usually fan level values are in 0 15 range where 0 is the slowest and 15 is the fastest possible fan speed This parameter has an alias CTCA_INITIAL FAN LEVEL for CompactPCI shelves No INITIAL SLOW _LINK_DELAY Number The initial delay in seconds before the Shelf Manager starts testing the integrity of the physical network link between the Shelf Manager and the System Manager the RMCP link see the description of the configuration parameter SWITCHOVER_TIMEOUT_ON B ROKEN_LINK A non zero delay can be used to accommodate slow network links that need significant time to initialize after shelf power up Yes Release 3 5 1 60 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide TYPE DEFAULT DESCRIPTION CAN BE OBTAINED FROM SHELF FRU INFO INNER_SEQUEN Boolean TRUE This variable controls which sequence No CE_NUMBER_IN number is used in the response to a _SEND_MSG RE Send Message
63. RFS image only copying etc and var nvdata non volatile directories to provisional Flash The RFS image is taken from an FTP server at the IP address 192 168 1 253 The path to the RFS image on the FTP server is tf tpboot ru ppc sentry sentry1500 rfs The upgrade procedure is started from a telnet session Note Since only the RFS image is explicitly updated the U Boot and kernel images are automatically copied from the persistent Flash partition to the provisional Flash partition The local system must be able to access the FTP server over the network that is its network adapter must be up and configured and a route must exist from the ShMM to the FTP server In the example below the ShMM is configured with the network address 192 168 1 174 which is in the same network with the FTP server telnet 192 168 1 174 Trying 192 168 1 174 Connected to 192 168 1 174 Escape character is BusyBox on shmm 174 login root BusyBox v0 60 5 2005 05 07 17 27 0000 Built in shell msh The parameters to rupgrade_tool s indicate that only the RFS is being upgraded and that the copy protocol is FTP accessing a specified IP address and file with user admin and no password supplied Release 3 5 1 233 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide rupgrade tool s r sentry shmm1500 rfs proto ftp 192 168 1 253 tftpboot ru ppc admin hook etc_copy v rupgrade tool PLB is 9 rupgrade tool EEPROM page saved rup
64. S l e ShMM 700R o 1c Nose Other Field Replaceable Unit FRU AdvancedTCA Board and Optional Rear Transition Module RTM 2 IPM Controllers Variants for Distinct Types of Boards and FRUs Fan Tray Running Pigeon Point 1 N BMR Firmware Optionally Implemented in SmartFusion Mixed Signal FPGA Shelf Manager Active Power Entry Module 1 N 2x Redundant Bused or Radial IPMB 0 2x Redundant Radial Internet Protocol Capable Transport An AdvancedTCA Shelf Manager communicates inside the shelf with IPM Controllers each of which is responsible for local management of one or more Field Replaceable Units FRUs such as boards fan trays or power entry modules Management communication within a shelf occurs primarily over the Intelligent Platform Management Bus IPMB which is implemented on a dual redundant basis as IPMB 0 in AdvancedTCA The PICMG Advanced Mezzanine Card AdvancedMC or AMC specification AMC 0 defines a hot swappable mezzanine form factor designed to fit smoothly into the physical and management architecture of AdvancedTCA Figure 1 includes an AMC carrier with a Carrier IPMC and two installed AMC modules each with a Module Management Controller MMC The figure also shows an instance of an MMC installed on a Rear Transition Module RTM which is then defined as an intelligent RTM In both cases on carrier management communication between a Carrier IPMC and its MMCs oc
65. TURBO mode that is run at full speed in the default HPDL cooling management algorithm If the shelf implements zoned cooling the specified number of tachometer faults is counted relative to each zone and setting TURBO mode affects only the fan trays that participate in cooling of the corresponding zone Release 3 5 1 78 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide DEFAULT DESCRIPTION CAN BE OBTAINED FROM SHELF FRU INFO TURBO MODE M Number 1 This parameter specifies the minimum Yes IN_MISSING F number of missing inactive fan trays AN _ TRAYS that triggers the remaining fan trays to go to TURBO mode that is run at full speed in the default HPDL cooling management algorithm If this parameter is set to O this feature of setting fans to their maximum speed due to missing inactive fan trays is disabled entirely If the shelf implements zoned cooling the specified number of missing inactive fan trays is counted relative to each zone and setting TURBO mode affects only the fan trays that participate in cooling of the corresponding zone UNCONDITIONA Boolean FALSE If the value of this parameter is TRUE Yes L_SDR_REREAD the Shelf Manager unconditionally re _ON_VERSION_ reads SDRs from an IPM controller CHANGE when it receives a Version Change event from that controller even if the Sensor Population Change Indicator in the Get Device SDR Info response does not change T
66. The highest previous offset Release 3 5 1 159 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide 7 Event Data 3 bits 8 15 of the ShMM CPLD state on the SAMM 500 1500 7 1b Reboot was caused by watchdog expiration 6 1b Interrupt happened 5 1b Active 4 1b Local presence 3 1b Hot Swap latch open 2 1b Remote switchover request 1 1b Remote healthy 0 1b Remote presence On the ShMM 700 this byte should be ignored its value is always 00h 4 4 3 Reboot Reason Sensor Both active and standby Shelf Managers also expose a sensor that indicates the reason for the last reboot This discrete sensor is associated with the physical Shelf Manager has number 129 name Reboot Reason and OEM event reading type code DDh The state mask for the sensor indicates the cause of the last reboot its bits have the following meanings 0 The reboot reason is either a Shelf Manager crash or unknown 1 The reboot was caused by a switchover operation 2 The reboot was caused by a forced switchover operation 3 The reboot was caused by the CLI command terminate 4 The reboot was caused by loss of the HEALTHY bit 5 The reboot was caused by loss of the ACTIVE bit 6 The reboot of the Backup ShMM happened because the redundancy connection was broken but the Active ShMM was still alive 7 The reboot happened due to an error during the Shelf Manager startup 8
67. Threshold Deassertion Event Mask Settable Threshold Mask Readable Threshold Mask e For Discrete sensors e Assertion Event Mask e Deassertion Event Mask e Discrete Reading Mask e The fields Sensor Units 1 Base Unit Modifier Unit cannot currently be replaced e The following sensor attributes are replaced from the replacement SDR fields if at least one of these fields is specified in the replacement SDR with a non zero value e Linearization M Tolerance B Accuracy Accuracy exp R exp Release 3 5 1 129 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide B exp Analog Characteristic Flags Nominal Reading Normal Maximum Normal Minimum Sensor Maximum Reading Sensor Minimum Reading e If and only if the symbolic constant THRESHOLDS has been specified in the Sensor Initialization field the fields listed below from replacement SDRs specify replacement threshold values for the target sensor Note however that only thresholds supported by the sensor implementation can be redefined Some local sensors do not support all possible thresholds Here is a list of replaceable threshold types all of which must be specified in the raw format with the Ox prefix Upper Non Recoverable Threshold Upper Critical Threshold Lower Non Critical Threshold Lower Non Recoverable Threshold Lower Critical Threshold Lower Non Critical Threshold If and only if the symbolic constant HYSTERESIS has been specified in the Sensor
68. UTILITY ccccceesceeeesceceeeeeseaeeeeneeseeeeecaaeseeaaesaeaeseaeeeeaaeseeaeeseeeeeeaas 222 7 7 RELIABLE UPGRADE UTILITY USE SCENARIOS 0 ccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeesaeeeeaaeeeeeeeeaas 229 7 8 RELIABLE UPGRADE EXAMPLES ccceecceceeeeeeeceeeeneeceeeeeceaeseeaaesaaeesnaeeesaaeseeaeeeeeeeeeaas 230 7 8 1 EXAMI T 2 pocccsceesesenteAesn bevesee erteusyc betes EOE ENAERE AA A 230 7 8 2 EXQIMOIO E A A A E braless bean tee ee ideas 233 7 8 3 EXQIMOIO 3 vs E EE A A A A be nase E 236 8 RE PROGRAMMING THE SHMM 700 cccsccsssseeesseeeeseeeeeensesnaeeeseeeeeeneessaeseseeeeneeeeesiees 239 8 1 IN THIS SECTION serrrassogineasierinee se adena neeaae aeaaaee iaaea iaaa E EEEa i aeai ea 239 8 2 FIRMWARE RELIABLE UPGRADE PROCEDURE OVERVIEW ssssssseseeessesssteceeeeeeeeeensaaees 239 8 3 FLASH PARTITIONING AND IMAGE LAYOUT 0 0 c esssesssesssesesesssssesessseseeesessseesssseseeae 241 8 4 CHANGING THE USER FLASH PARTITION FORMAT TO JFFS2 0 cccccccecsesssseceeeeeeeeees 243 8 5 RELIABLE UPGRADE PROCEDURE STATUS FILE s ccccsececsesesseceeeseeeceessaeeeceeeeeeeensaaees 245 8 6 RELIABLE UPGRADE UTILITY c cscsesesesesesssssesesesseessseseseeseeseeeseeesesesesssesssesssaseseeaeees 246 8 7 RELIABLE UPGRADE OF A2FO60 FIRMWARE 0 csesssesssssesssesssssssesesesesesesssesssseeseene 253 8 8 RELIABLE UPGRADE UTILITY USE SCENARIOG scccccececsesesseseeeseeeceesseaeaeeeeceeeeensaa
69. VenId Devid Class Int 00 17 1172 0001 f f00 00 Tens serial Out serial Err serial FPGA firmware version 1 12 carrier id 0 Net TSECO TSEC1 Hit any key to stop autoboot 0 shmm1500 For ShMM 700 PowerPrep start initialize power Battery Voltage 0 80V No battery or bad battery detected Disabling battery voltage measurements Feb 24 201207 45 29 FRAC 0x92926152 memory type is DDR2 Wait for ddr ready 1 power 0x00820616 Frac 0x92926152 start change cpu freq hbus 0x00000003 cpu 0x00010001 start test memory accress ddr2 0x40000000 finish simple test U Boot 2009 08 Feb 15 2012 18 50 25 Freescale 1 MX28 family CPUs 297 MHz BUS 99 MHz EMI 130 MHz GPMI 24 MHz I2C ready DRAM 128 MB SFGEN N250512A detected total size 64 MB Release 3 5 1 23 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide A2F SPICOMM protocol v1 6 M3 firmware v0 7 FPGA design v0 41 0 0 A2F A2F firmware version 0 7 A2F Last reset cause HARD A2F Device type A2FO60M3E FG256 A2F MSS clock frequency 40 MHz A2F Fabric clock frequency 20 MHz A2F Fast delay calibration 1330 cycles per 100uS A2F eNVM 128 KB 00000000 00020000 A2F eSRAM 16 KB 20000000 20004000 A2F Extram start 200022F0 RUPG booting from image 1 confirmed in serial Out serial Her serial Net FECO 00 18 49 01 8f 26 FEC1 00 18 49 01 8f 27 FECO FEC1 Hit any key to
70. address is provided in the LAN Configuration Parameters the value provided in the Shelf Manager configuration file is ignored Release 3 5 1 46 August 17 2015 DEFAULT HPM2 _CLIENT IP A DDRESS Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide TYPE IP address DEFAULT None DESCRIPTION The default IP address used for HPM 2 based network communication with intelligent FRUs in the shelf This IP address is used only if the corresponding parameter is set to 0 0 0 0 inthe IPMI LAN Configuration Parameters for the HPM 2 channel channel 8 on the Shelf Manager and if the HPM 2 channel is not mirrored to another channel If a non zero IP address is provided in the LAN Configuration Parameters for the HPM 2 channel the value provided in the Shelf Manager configuration file is ignored If the HPM 2 channel is mirrored to another channel the IP address is taken from the parameters of that other channel and this parameter is also ignored CAN BE OBTAINED FROM SHELF FRU INFO No DEFAULT _HPM2 _GATEWAY_IP_ ADDRESS IP address None The default IP address used as the gateway IP address for HPM 2 based network communication with intelligent FRUs in the shelf This IP address is used only if the corresponding parameter is set to 0 0 0 0 inthe IPMI LAN Configuration Parameters for the HPM 2 channel channel 8 on the Shelf Manager and if the HPM 2 channel is not mirrored to ano
71. all three variants though the actual register interface and bit layout is different among those variants If you are not using the active ShMM connect to the other ShMM device and repeat step 7 hwri HWRI word 3307 1000h Local Presence 0100h Remote Presenc 0002h Local Healthy 0200h Remote Healthy Release 3 5 1 101 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide 0004h Local Switchover Request 2000h Active 8 Get the current IP settings for channel 1 clia getlanconfig 1 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager Command Line Interpreter Authentication Type Support 0x15 None MD5 Straight Password Key Authentication Type Enables Callback level 0x00 User level 0x15 None MD5 Straight Password Key Operator level 0x15 None MD5 Straight Password Key Administrator level 0x15 None MD5 Straight Password Key OEM level 0x00 IP Address 206 25 139 28 IP Address Source Static Address Manually Configured 0x01 MAC Address 00 50 c2 22 50 30 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 IPv4 Header Parameters 0x40 0x40 0x10 Primary RMCP Port Number 0x026f Secondary RMCP Port Number 0x0298 BMC generated ARP Control 0x02 Enable BMC generated ARP Response Gratuitous ARP Interval 2 0 seconds Default Gateway Address 206 25 139 3 Default Gateway MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 Backup Gateway Address 0 0 0 0 Backup Gateway MAC Address N A Community String public Number of Destinations 16
72. appropriate to each context C 30 Release 3 5 0 1 Section 3 3 describes new configuration variable COOLING _NO ALL FRUS POWER_DOWN_IN CRITICAL ALERT Section 4 4 2 describes the previously undocumented state Active with Backup unavailable of the CPLD State HWRI State sensor on the physical Shelf Manager Release 3 5 1 285 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide C 31 Release 3 5 1 e Section 3 4 adds notes on the risks of doing manual changes in the ShMM network configuration separately from the Shelf Manager e Section 3 4 9 updated with information about support in this release of PICMG 3 0 R3 0 IPv6 amendments in ECN 3 0 3 0 001 e Section 3 15 adds information about configuring IPv6 support for various network services Release 3 5 1 286 August 17 2015
73. available MAX EVENT_SU Number 64 The maximum number of entities that No BSCRIBERS can simultaneously subscribe to receive event notifications from the Shelf Manager MAX EVENT SU Number 60 The maximum timeout for an event Yes BSCRIBER_IDL subscriber in seconds between the E TIME moment when an event arrives and the moment when the subscriber retrieves this event from the Shelf Manager If this timeout is exceeded the subscriber is considered dead and is automatically unregistered MAX INCOMING Number 128 The size of the internal Shelf Manager No _IPMB_REQUES queue for incoming IPMB requests TS Incoming IPMB requests are stored in this queue before processing MAX NODE BUS Number 255 The maximum number of Yes Y_TRANSMISSI transmissions of an IPMB command if ONS the receiver always returns the completion code Node Busy in response MAX OEM FILT Number 16 The maximum number of PEF OEM No ERS event filters available Release 3 5 1 66 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide TYPE DEFAULT DESCRIPTION CAN BE OBTAINED FROM SHELF FRU INFO MAX PENDING _ Number 1024 The maximum number of outstanding No EVENT _NOTIFI event notifications for each active CATIONS subscriber MAX PENDING _ Number 192 The maximum number of pending No IPMB REQUEST IPMB requests awaiting response S MAX _SEL_ENTR Number 1024 The maximum number o
74. by the Shelf Manager and implementing adaptive setting of tachometer thresholds depending on the current fan level This parameter specifies the delay in seconds between setting a new fan level that is higher than the current fan level and increasing the tachometer threshold value the delay is needed to allow the fans to reach the higher speed Yes Release 3 5 1 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide TYPE DEFAULT DESCRIPTION CAN BE OBTAINED FROM SHELF FRU INFO TASKLET_RETR Number 3 This parameter specifies the total Yes IES number of Shelf Manager retries to execute a tasklet activation deactivation getting information etc if it encounters a transient failure when doing that If the Shelf manager fails to perform a tasklet after the TASKLET_RETRIES retries it gives up Increasing this value may improve the robustness of the Shelf Manager operation but degrade its performance TIMEPROTO String 16 Protocol used to retrieve time froma Yes network time server possible values are ntp and rdate TIMESERVER IP address None IP address of the time server for Yes synchronization at runtime If this variable is not specified time is extracted from the hardware clock at shelf startup TURBO MODE M Number 1 This parameter specifies the number Yes IN_FAN_FAILU of tachometer underspeed faults RES crossing Major or Critical thresholds cause the remaining fans to go to
75. command on the active or backup Shelf Manager and then remove the ShMM carrier board after the switchover has completed The Remote Healthy bit is set by the peer Shelf Manager during initialization this bit changing to 0 means that the remote Shelf Manager has become not healthy typically has been powered off or reset Another situation that needs some action from the backup Shelf Manager is when the TCP connection between the Shelf Managers gets closed This happens when either the communication link between the two Shelf Managers is broken or the she1 man process on the active Shelf Manager terminates in a voluntary or involuntary way or due to a software exception Also since the keepalive option is enabled on the TCP connection it closes shortly after the active ShMM is switched off or reset In the case of Shelf Manager termination it is possible that the TCP connection is closed before the Remote Healthy bit becomes 0 So in order to determine why the Release 3 5 1 155 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide TCP connection closed the backup Shelf Manager samples the state of the Remote Healthy bit immediately and if it is still 1 samples it again after some delay If the Remote Healthy bit becomes 0 the backup Shelf Manager concludes that the active Shelf Manager is dead In that case it initiates a switchover and assumes the active Shelf Manager role Otherwise if the Remote Healthy bit retains the va
76. curr 800000 max ffffffff lt gt 03 45 09 067 152 Data limits curr ffffffff max ffffffff lt gt 03 45 09 090 152 Lock log print buffer at 10c10e90 lt gt 03 45 09 094 152 Pthread lock log print buffer at 10c14ed0 KKK lt I gt 03 45 09 380 152 Enabling the CPLD Active bit workaround lt I gt 03 45 09 435 152 User SDR size 124 lt I gt 03 45 09 453 152 20 120 Type 1 lt I gt 03 45 09 467 152 a0 2 Type 1 If the SDR definition file var nvdata user_sdr is not present the configurations of the local sensors are unmodified from the default established in the Shelf Manager and the log looks like the following example daemon f shelfman lcs lt I gt 17 11 28 004 522 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager ver 3 5 1 Built on July 17 2015 19 03 33 lt gt 17 11 28 009 522 Limits code 400000 529030 end data 10062000 start stack 7fff7df0 esp 7fff7758 eip 2ab0d2e4 lt gt 17 11 28 010 522 Stack limits curr 1ff000 max 7fffffff lt gt 17 11 28 010 522 Data limits curr 7fffffff max 7fffLfLLF lt gt 17 11 28 014 522 Lock log print buffer at 1003c910 lt gt 17 11 28 014 522 Pthread lock log print buffer at 10040940 kko lt W gt 17 11 28 027 522 Custom SDR initialization file is absent It is important to understand that replacement SDRs must be closely coordinated with SDRs that are defined within the Shelf Manager Therefore additio
77. e writes this information to a Flash file on the ShMM var nvdata dumplog bin where it survives reboots and can be subsequently analyzed by the analysis tool dumplog e stops strobing the hardware watchdog timer which causes a reset of the SAMM and a switchover to the backup Shelf Manager Note This second direct deadlock detection mechanism is not implemented on the ShMM 700 The reason is that with the new version of the Linux kernel 2 6 x used on the SAMM 700 the detection of deadlocks by direct analysis of internal lock mutex structures is not reliable and generates substantially larger performance overhead The first mechanism watchdog based monitoring of the CLI and RMCP processing threads should be sufficient for detection of deadlocks on this platform In this scenario an output similar to the following appears on the console lock Ox2acd3940 owner 208 waiting 209 lock 0x2ac432f0 owner 223 waiting 217 214 220 208 lock Ox2ac43650 owner 220 waiting 223 Release 3 5 1 172 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide lt W gt 14 09 43 866 199 ipmf watchdog_thread proc a potential deadlock was detected lt I gt 14 09 44 307 199 Write 148724 bytes to the var nvdata dumplog bin 1 seconds lock offset 148232 lock 0x2acd3940 owner 208 waiting 209 lock 0x2ac432f0 owner 223 waiting 217 214 220 208 lock 0x2ac43650 owner 220 waiting 223 lt W gt 14 09 44 61
78. ensures that applications cannot accidentally erase the critical boot up images If the specifier R specifier has been used in the command line no copy operation is performed and it is assumed that corresponding upgrade images have been already copied into Flash None of the previously described steps is executed in this case execution of the reliable upgrade procedure begins from this point After all the specified images have been installed to their respective destinations in Flash the utility invokes a hook script that enables custom actions required by an application at the point where the upgrade images have been already installed in Flash but the upgrade procedure has not yet initiated the hardware mechanisms of the reliable upgrade procedure by enabling the ShMM s Release 3 5 1 220 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide upgrade watchdog timer WDT Refer to ML User s Guide Chapter 7 for background and details on the upgrade WDT The hook script etc upgrade step4hshm is supplied with the Shelf Manager It performs the following actions e terminates the Shelf Manager performs a switchover to the backup ShMM without restarting the shelf and stops the ATCA watchdog timer e mounts the provisional etc and var Flash partitions and erases all files on them e optionally copies the current contents of the etc directory to the provisional etc Flash partition e optionally copies the current non volati
79. hexadecimal digits represent the most significant byte of the Auxiliary Firmware Revision For example assume that the file var nvdata aux fw revision contains the string adbtefcd When the Shelf Manager is started and the RMCPTA connection is established it is possible to obtain the Auxiliary Firmware Revision via RMCP The parameter lt I PMB address gt below represents the IPMB address of the alternative controller Here is a dialogue with the Pigeon Point internal tool RMCPTA but any RMCP client can be used to make this query RMCPTA 1 gt TargetFwd lt IPMB address gt RMCPTA 1 gt GetDevicelId Completion Code 0x00 OK Release 3 5 1 131 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide Device ID 0x00 Device Revision 0x0 Device Mod normal operation Device SDR present Firmware Rev 2 30 IPMI Version 1 5 Device Support IPMB Req Gen FRU Sensor Manufacturer ID O0x0400A Product ID 0x0000 AUX FW Rev 3 10 Setting Up the Clock When the system is brought up for the first time the clock is not set and must be initialized Initially the clock is set to January 1 1970 The date can be accessed via the serial console OxAOBIEFCD AO Bl EF CD date Thu Jan 1 03 16 30 UTC 1970 In order to change the date you should type in the correct date using the date application The format for the date command is MMDDhhmm CC YY ss where e MM Month e DD Day e hh Hour
80. if specified the candidate directories var and etc are erased only the SSH keys etc ssh are copied from the current location e f none of the options above is specified default mode then the SSH keys etc ssh and the subdirectory var nvdata are copied to the candidate directories etc and var from the current location any other files in the candidate etc and var directories are erased The behavior defined by these parameters is compatible with the behavior of the reliable upgrade tool on the SAMM 500 and ShMM 1500 Release 3 5 1 252 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide As the final stage of the upgrade the utility starts the reliable upgrade watchdog timer WDT and resets the ShMM using the FPGA capabilities for ShMM reset Refer to ShMM 700 Hardware Architecture Specification for background and details on the reliable upgrade WDT The reliable upgrade WDT is started with a 120 second timeout period This period should be sufficient for the ShMM software to reach after the reset and without strobing the reliable upgrade WDT the point in time where the ShMM software can detect whether a reliable upgrade is in progress by invoking rupgrade status and if so strobe the reliable upgrade WDT via backend strobe The reliable upgrade utility can invoke an optional hook script that enables custom actions required by an application After each stage of the upgrade procedure the hook script is invo
81. image download the image to the target resource and activate the new image Also the FUMI API includes optional support for manual and automatic rollbacks to the previous state Shelf Manager FUMIs implement all functions defined for the logical bank model except for saHpiFumiAutoRollbackDisableSet the explicit bank model is not supported for these FUMIs An image used for HPI based Shelf Manager upgrades must be in HPM 1 format This format allows creating a single image that consists of multiple components with a special header An HPM 1 Shelf Manager image includes as HPM 1 components the normal U Boot kernel and RFS images used for reliable upgrades On ShMM 500 1500 the HPM 1 image consists only of these three components On ShMM 700 the HPM 1 image also includes the application package and therefore consists of four components Starting with release 2 8 0 Shelf Manager images in HPM 1 format are available to SnMM based shelf developers from a secure partner page in addition to the traditional U Boot kernel and RFS images The implementation of these Shelf Manager FUMIs is done on top of the reliable upgrade facility Once the image is downloaded to a physical ShMM a call to activate the image invokes the reliable upgrade utility On ShMM 500 1500 the reliable upgrade utility places the embedded U Boot kernel and RFS images into the provisional Flash bank and makes the provisional Flash bank active The utility is c
82. is set to O O O O in the IPMI LAN Configuration Parameters for channel 1 and in the Shelf Manager IP Connection record in Shelf FRU Information If a non zero IP address is provided in the LAN Configuration Parameters and or Shelf FRU Information the value provided in the Shelf Manager configuration file is ignored No Release 3 5 1 48 August 17 2015 DEFAULT _RMCP _IP_ADDRESS2 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide TYPE IP address DEFAULT None DESCRIPTION The default IP address used for shelf external RMCP based communication on the second network interface it is switched over between the redundant instances of the Shelf Manager This IP address is used only if the corresponding parameter is set to O O O O in the IPMI LAN Configuration Parameters for channel 2 If a non zero IP address is provided in the LAN Configuration Parameters the value provided in the Shelf Manager configuration file is ignored CAN BE OBTAINED FROM SHELF FRU INFO No DEFAULT_RMCP _NETMASK IP address Variable The network mask for the network adapter used for RMCP communication This mask is used only if the corresponding parameter is setto 0 0 0 0 inthe IPMI LAN Configuration Parameters for channel 1 and in the Shelf Manager IP Connection record in Shelf FRU Information The default value depends on the class of the default IP address used for shelf external RM
83. machine NOT on the ShMM itselfl Release 3 5 1 114 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide mv shelf fru bin shelf fru_info ftp 192 168 1 230 Connected to 192 168 1 230 220 shmm 230 FTP server Version wu 2 6 2 1 Sun Dec 15 17 40 37 GMT 2002 ready Name 192 168 1 230 serjio ftp 331 Guest login ok send your complete e mail address as password Password 230 Guest login ok access restrictions apply Remote system type is UNIX Using binary mode to transfer files ftp gt cd var nvdata 250 CWD command successful ftp gt del shelf_fru_info 250 DELE command successful ftp gt put shelf fru_info local shelf fru_info remote shelf fru_info 227 Entering Passive Mode 192 168 1 230 107 162 150 Opening BINARY mode data connection for shelf fru_info 226 Transfer complete 129 bytes sent in 5 le 04 secs 2 3e 02 Kbytes sec ftp gt quit 221 You have transferred 129 bytes in 1 files 221 Total traffic for this session was 640 bytes in 1 transfers 221 Thank you for using the FTP service on shmm 230 221 Goodbye Another case is when the Shelf FRU Information is stored in SEEPROMs that are accessible to the Shelf Manager via the master only 12C bus In that case the binary file should be copied onto the ShMM and then written into the SEEPROMs The utility eepromw can be used for that purpose The exact location of SEEPROMs on the master 12C bus is carrier specific bu
84. of this variable is set automatically by U Boot On ShMM 500 and ShMM 1500 this address is passed to the kernel Ethernet driver On ShMM 700 this address is not passed to the kernel Ethernet driver directly but both the U Boot and the Linux kernel FEC driver set up the MAC address for the second Ethernet controller as ethaddr incremented by 1 so both U Boot and Linux use the same MAC for the second Ethernet controller flash_reset Instructs Linux to erase the Flash filesystems etc and var restoring them from the contents of the current RFS image y n The system startup script sets this variable back to n after the Flash erase Default is n On ShMM 700 this variable can also be set to user y n user to cause the system startup script to erase the entire user partition where etc and var are located This mode can be used in case of unrecoverable user partition corruption or together with the user_partition variable while converting the user partition to the JFFS2 or UBIFS format Note this mode is supported starting in release 3 5 0 Release 3 5 1 26 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide ENVIRONMENT DESCRIPTION VARIABLE gatewayip Default gateway IP address This variable can be passed as a part of the kernel command line to automatically configure routing for the network interfaces Default setting 192 168 0 1 hostname Network host name default is shmm500 for ShMM
85. on wire 65 bytes captured Ethernet II Src UniwillC_2e 23 71 00 03 0d 2e 23 71 Dst Cisco_9a c7 f0 00 16 c7 9a c7 f0 Internet Protocol Src 80 240 102 57 80 240 102 57 Dst 192 168 1 65 192 168 1 65 User Datagram Protocol Src Port 50122 50122 Dst Port asf rmcp 623 Remote Management Control Protocol Class IPMI IPMI v1 5 Session Wrapper session ID 0x0 Intelligent Platform Management Interface vvyvvvvvy 0000 00 16 c7 9a c7 fO 00 03 Od 2e 23 71 08 00 45 00 a q E 0010 00 33 00 00 40 00 40 11 cl a7 50 fO 66 39 cO a8 3 P f9 0020 01 41 c3 ca 02 6f 00 1f 97 73 06 00 ff 07 00 00 n EA ETE ETEL 0030 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 09 20 18 c8 89 04 38 Be 04 asas auas 8 0040 a9 i eth0 lt live capture in progress gt File Packets 280 Displayed 20 Marked 0 Profile Default Instead of I2C related information the Source and Destination columns show the source and destination IP addresses of the captured message Instead of the three protocol layers in the case of an IPMB trace seven protocol layers are shown e Layer 1 provides low level information about a message such as the frame size arrival time relative to the start of the trace and the list of protocols used in the frame e Layer 2 provides Ethernet specific information about the frame source and destination MAC addresses and the protocol type Layer 3 provides IP specific information from the frame Layer 4 provides UDP specific infor
86. only copying etc and var nvdata non volatile directories from confirmed to candidate locations The application package image is taken from an FTP server at the IP address 192 168 1 253 The path to the application package image on the FTP server is shmm700 sentry shmm700 app The upgrade procedure is started from a telnet session Note Since only the application package image is explicitly updated the U Boot kernel and RFS images are automatically copied from the confirmed locations to the candidate locations The ShMM must be able to access the FTP server over the network that is its network adapter must be up and configured and a route must exist from the ShMM to the FTP server In the example below the ShMM is configured with the network address 192 168 1 123 which is in the same network with the FTP server telnet 192 168 1 123 Trying 192 168 1123 Connected to 192 168 1 123 Escape character is shmm700 login root Release 3 5 1 262 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide Password The parameters to rupgrade indicate that only the application package is being upgraded and that the copy protocol is FTP accessing a specified IP address and file with the user name admin and password ADMINPWD rupgrade skip checksums copy etc a ftp admin ADMINPWD 192 168 1 253 shmm700 sentry shmm700 app lt INFO gt frontend c 449 Downloading file ftp admin ADMINPWD 192 168 1 253 sh
87. parameter is a hexadecimal bit mask with each bit enabling output of a specific type of message according to Table 9 If this parameter is omitted the value of the VERBOSITY configuration parameter is used to control the verbosity of output to both the system log and the console 3 4 Setting Up Ethernet The ShMM uses two Ethernet ports one of them being used for shelf external access Since RMCP is the only shelf external interface that is required by ATCA the shelf external Ethernet port is referenced as the RMCP port though the other shelf external interfaces HTTP TELNET FTP are accessible via this port as well The other Ethernet port can be used for communication between redundant Shelf Managers or potentially for other purposes if the redundancy link is provided by another mechanism Note that manual changes in the ShMM network configuration that are initiated separately from the Shelf Manager e g via the ifconfig command can disrupt Shelf Manager operations The implications of any such changes must be thoroughly understood before they are undertaken Release 3 5 1 83 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide 3 4 1 Usage of the First Ethernet Interface Since the RMCP Ethernet port is directly connected to the site network the IP address should be set up appropriately for that network For example if the site uses the IP address range 192 168 0 x the RMCP Ethernet port should be set to a unique IP addr
88. preserved across the upgrade e flip the script overrides all other hook options causing just the termination of the ShMM flipping of the Flash banks and a reboot of the ShMM with the upgrade WDT active Note When upgrading ShMM software from an encryption present RFS to an encryption removed RFS always use the erase option to repopulate the directory etc from the RFS This is because some files in the etc directory in an encryption present RFS are encrypted and are not readable in anon encrypted RFS during the reliable upgrade they should be replaced from the new encryption removed RFS where they are not encrypted The script returns 0 on success and non zero for failure If a non zero value is returned the upgrade procedure is terminated The utility starts the upgrade WDT with a 12 8 sec timeout period This timeout period is considered sufficient for any software that boots after the reset to proceed to the point where it is able to call rupgrade_tool c which strobes the upgrade WDT in case it is active without having to strobe the upgrade WDT in the interim The utility performs a strobe of the upgrade WDT just before resetting the ShMM c v Proceed with the reliable upgrade procedure after the ShMM is booted from the provisional Flash The invocation of rupgrade_tool c is done from the etc rc script As described below certain situations discovered by rupgrade_tool c imply a failure in the upgrade procedure and r
89. radial IPMB 0 carrier not currently supported Other values are reserved In a FRU Info Compiler input file the following approach is used to define the IPMB Topology record for a redundant dual star radial configuration in this example PPS IPMB Topology Carrier Type 3 In an HPDL carrier definition file the IPMB topology can be specified ina IPMB_TOPOLOGY clause that has the following syntax lt ipmb topology clause gt IPMB TOPOLOGY lt bus_type gt lt bus_type gt BUSED DUAL STAR REDUNDANT DUAL STAR For example a redundant dual star radial configuration the following definition can be used IPMB TOPOLOGY REDUNDANT DUAL STAR The radial functionality is turned on if the following two prerequisites are satisfied e the carrier is designated as a dual star or redundant dual star type either in the HPDL carrier definition or in an IPMB Topology record in the carrier FRU Information with IPMB Topology Type 2h or 3h e the Shelf FRU Information contains an IPMB radial mapping record Release 3 5 1 166 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide If the above prerequisites are satisfied the logical Shelf Manager creates and hosts multiple IPMB link sensors each of which reports the state of the corresponding radial segment As in the case of ShMM 500 the CLI command getipmbstate can be used to show the state of all segments or of a specific IPMB segment the
90. respectively From the user perspective configuration can be done via the CLI using the commands setlanconfig and getlanconfig The IPv6 based services in the Shelf Manager are designed as an addition not replacement of the existing IPv4 based services So it is not possible to make the Shelf Manager accessible only over IPv6 but not over IPv4 Pv6 based services are always available for LAN channel 1 and for LAN channel 2 if the second network interface is used in the Active Active mode Use of IPv6 over a VLAN based interface or over a bonded interface is also supported Use of IPv6 for HPM 2 based communication with FRUs in the shelf is not currently supported since there are no provisions yet for the use of IPv6 in the HPM 2 specification Also IPv6 is not supported for inter ShMM communication over the software redundancy interface only IPv4 can be used for that communication It is possible to use IPv6 as the underlying protocol for LAN alert messages sent to remote destinations over the network For that the Shelf Manager supports an extended format for LAN configuration parameter 19 Destination Addresses which allows specifying an IPv6 address for a LAN alert destination LAN alerts sent to such destinations use the IPv6 protocol and packet format The following IPv6 related LAN configuration parameters are essential for IPv6 operation on a LAN channel e Pv6 IPv4 Addressing Enables 51 This parameter must be set to
91. scans all the Flash sectors comprising the partition and recreates the logical content of a file system in an internal in RAM representation This feature ensures that regardless of which half of the Flash the SAMM 500 has booted from Linux is able to mount var upgrade as a JFFS2 file system and make use of the previous content of the file system 7 5 Reliable Upgrade Procedure Status File The software reliable upgrade procedure maintains the status of the most recent upgrade procedure session in the fille var upgrade status residing in a dedicated file system var upgrade which is mounted by Linux regardless of which Flash the ShMM has booted from If the file exists it contains the status of an upgrade procedure session that either is in progress presently or has recently completed var upgrade status is an ASCII format file that contains one or more new line terminated records each describing the status of a particular step in the upgrade procedure The format of a record line is as follows lt step gt lt status gt Release 3 5 1 221 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide where lt step gt is an integer ranging from 1 to 14 with Step 14 corresponding to a completed upgrade session and status is a human readable string describing status of the current step of the upgrade procedure session Refer to the ML User Guide for a list and explanation of these steps The status file is used by the reliable
92. script etc timesync to override the current value of the TIMESERVER variable Note that during each reboot of the Shelf Manager the clock is reset to January 1 1970 Therefore the system time stays incorrect until the script etc timesync succeeds in obtaining correct time from the time server The variable timezone contains the name of the current time zone followed by its offset from Greenwich Meridian Time GMT The offset is positive for time zones to the west of Greenwich and negative for time zones to the east of Greenwich This variable is propagated to the Linux level as the environment variable TZ The default value of this variable is UTC i e Universal Coordinated Time which matches Greenwich time Note that textual timestamps generated on a ShMM correspond to the local time zone That is these timestamps include the offset defined by the environment variable TZ The time sent by time servers is GMT time if the time zone on the Shelf Manager is not set or not set correctly the time obtained from the time server is interpreted incorrectly The three letter name of the time zone is not used by the Shelf Manager but is propagated to set the Linux time zone For instance if the time zone name XXX0 is used the date command produces output like the following Thu Sep 9 21 24 24 XXX 2004 Daylight saving time is not supported Release 3 5 1 133 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide Here is an example of a t
93. specific way the IPMB address is the hardware address multiplied by 2 v lt verbosity gt Set the initial debug verbosity mask see section 3 3 2 both for the system log and for the console If this option is not present the values of the parameters VERBOSITY and VERBOSITY_CONSOLE in the file etc shelfman conf determine the initial debug verbosity mask c lt path gt Path to non volatile configuration files The default path is var nvdata cs Enforce cs disable cs checking Shelf FRU Information checksums If a checksum is invalid an error message is produced and the Shelf FRU Information is not used If a checksum is valid no message is produced If the option es is not present in the command line the value of the parameter VERIFY _SHELF_FRU_CHECKSUM from the file etc shelfman conf determines Shelf Manager behavior in this area w wt Release 3 5 1 147 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide Enable w disable w the watchdog timer If neither of the w or wt options is present in the command line the value of the parameter WATCHDOG ENABLED from the file etc shelfman conf determines Shelf Manager actions in this area The wt option puts the watchdog timer in test mode that is the actual timer is not turned on or strobed but the strobing thread in the Shelf Manager still runs and a warning message is printed if the interval between subsequent strobes exceeds 500 ms I
94. stop autoboot 0 shmm700 Note shmm500 shmm1500 and shmm700 are the U Boot prompts on each ShMM variant for user commands For a complete set of supported commands type help In this document example dialogues that are applicable to all three ShMM variants represent this prompt with shmmxx00 Example dialogues that are applicable to only one of the variants use the relevant prompt 3 2 1 U Boot Environment Variables U Boot includes a set of environment variables that should be configured prior to U Boot use The following table describes the default set of variables available Some of these variables are set automatically by U Boot and should not be modified by a user Table 5 U Boot Environment Variables ENVIRONMENT DESCRIPTION VARIABLE a2f upg file ShMM 700 only This variable contains the name of the A2F060 firmware image file that U Boot looks for on the boot volume This variable is set automatically by U Boot during bootstrap and must not be changed by a user its value is used by U Boot to pass information about the A2F upgrade image file to the Linux kernel Only three values can be used a2f upgrade dat in the case of a normal A2F upgrade a2 auto rollback dat in the case of an A2F upgrade rollback or empty if no A2F upgrade is in progress Note U Boot expects the a2 auto rollback dat file to be stored on the boot volume and to contain an image of the currently running fir
95. the file to put the trace to ipmb traced w u var ipmb traced log amp If no u option is provided ipmb traced puts the trace in the following file var ipmb_ traced ipmb_ traced 1log In this case the var ipmb traced directory must be created manually using the mkdir command before ipmb_tracedis started mkdir var ipmb_ traced 2 Execute actions that create the IPMI traffic on IPMB 0 to be analyzed For example if insertion of a board generates the sequence of events and commands that need to be analyzed do such a board insertion 3 When trace collection is complete stop ipmb traced by sending the SIGINT signal to ipmb_ traced e Obtain the ipmb_traced process ID using the ps command ps 39 ttysod root 0 S ipmb traced w u var ipmb traced log e Send the SIGINT signal to the ipmb__traced process kill 2 39 4 Copy the trace file to the analyzer host cd var ftp 172 16 1 24 Connected to 172 16 1 24 220 ts FTP server Version wu 2 6 2 5 ready ftp gt put ipmb traced log 5 On the analyzer host start the GUI C gt wireshark 6 Inthe main menu go to File then Open and browse to the trace file Open the trace file Release 3 5 1 196 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide Figure 8 Open Capture File Window Wireshark Open Capture File Ed home serge Places Name v Modified T g Search Desktop 07 15 2008 Recently Used B Documents Wednesday
96. the following meanings see the Pigeon Point Shelf Manager External Interface Reference document for detailed descriptions of the setpefconfig and other CLI commands e 1 number of alert policy table entry 1 policy number 8 policy enabled always send alert to this destination F destination channel 1 destination selector 1 alert string selector 8 Set event filters for relevant events For example the following event filter can be used to capture hot swap transitions to state MO of FRU 0 on IPMC 9Ch clia setpefconfig event filter 1 80 1 1 0 9C FF FO FF FF FF FF OF FF 0 00 0 FF FF 0 Release 3 5 1 136 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide where e 1 filter number 80 filter configuration enabled software configurable filter 1 filter action alert 1 alert policy number O event severity unspecified 9C Slave Address or Software ID from Event Message FF channel Number LUN to match FO type of sensor FF sensor FF event trigger FF Event Data 1 Event Offset Mask FF Event Data 1 Event Offset Mask OF Event Data 1 AND Mask FF Event Data 1 Compare 1 0 Event Data 1 Compare 2 0 Event Data 2 AND Mask 0 Event Data 2 Compare 1 0 Event Data 2 Compare 2 FF Event Data 3 AND Mask FF Event Data 3 Compare 1 0 Event Data 3 Compare 2 Note when an event handler is placed in the directory var bin as assumed in the example above care must be taken to preserve the state
97. the following parameters eepromr b lt multiplexer gt c lt channel gt lt eeprom address gt lt file gt lt count gt where e lt file gt is the path to the file where data are written from SEEPROM e lt count gt is how many bytes to read The remaining parameters are the same as for eepromw There is one caveat on using the utility eepromw The Shelf Manager must not be running when the SEEPROM is updated because the Shelf Manager can change the 12C multiplexer settings trying to access an 12C device behind the multiplexer while the update is in progress This will cause the update to fail with high probability There are several ways to ensure that the Shelf Manager is not running on the ShMM One is to turn off automatic start of the Shelf Manager by setting the U Boot variable start_rc2_daemons ton The other way is to terminate the Shelf Manager using the command clia terminate On some shelves access to Shelf FRU Information SEEPROMs is also guarded by the ACTIVE signal on the ShMM In that case make sure before running eepromw that the Hardware Redundancy Interface flags Local Healthy and Active are set for the local SAMM For the ShMM 500 and ShMM 1500 make sure that the CPLD control word has the following bits set e 0x02 Local Healthy e 0x04 Local Switchover Request e 0x20 Independent IPMB Watchdog To turn all these bits on use the following cp1d command epld 26 26 For the ShMM 7
98. the specified IP address and waits for Test Acceptable values are 0 a reply in the specified timeout range and 1 Default value is 0 ip INT32 IP Address to resolve during the test timeout INT32 Timeout value in seconds for the test Release 3 5 1 186 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide TEST NAME TEST PARAMETERS NAME TYPE TEST DESCRIPTION 1 DESCRIPTION FLASH CRC 5 mtd INT32 Software The test calculates a checksum for Flash image number MTD the software image for ShMM Checksum partition number for ShMM 500 1500 located in the Test 500 1500 for the test corresponding MTD partition and Acceptable values are compares it with the checksum in the e 2 Active Linux image header kernel e 3 Active U Boot e 4 Active RFS e 7 Inactive Linux kernel e 8 Inactive U Boot e 9 Inactive RFS e 10 Active application image ShMM 700 only e 11 Inactive application image ShMM 700 only 12C TEST 6 bus INT32 12C bus The test tries to access the specified 12C Bus Test number to test 12C adapter device and enumerate all Acceptable values are 0 12C devices present on that bus by and higher bus 0 reading from all possible 12C represents the main master addresses on the bus and checking only 12C bus going to the which addresses are acknowledged ShMM carrier and often beyond the carrier to the shelf other bus numbers are platform spe
99. the value 02h Enabled IPv6 and IPv4 addressing simultaneously to allow IPv6 based communication with the Shelf Manager over the channel Setting this parameter to 00h IPv6 addressing disabled causes the Shelf Manager to stop listening to IPv6 addresses and sending IPv6 based LAN alerts The parameter value 01h Enabled IPv6 addressing only IPv4 addressing is disabled is not supported by the Shelf Manager since it cannot operate in IPv6 only mode Release 3 5 1 110 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide e Pv6 Static Addresses 57 For IPv6 based services at least one static IPv6 address must be configured on the channel Up to 4 addresses can be configured RMCP service is available on any of these addresses The Shelf Manager makes sure that an RMCP request received on a specific address is responded to from the same address However RMCP service is not available on the link local IPv6 addresses that are automatically configured by the kernel starting with the e80 prefix When static IPv6 addresses are assigned or removed the Shelf Manager assigns the address to or removes it from the physical network interface of the ShMM via the corresponding ioctl call e Pv6 Router Address Configuration Control 64 This parameter controls whether static IPv6 router addresses assigned via corresponding LAN configuration parameters are taken into consideration by the Shelf Manager The value 03h of this parameter turns on the
100. timeout value that combines with the IPMB_RETRY_TIMEOUT value to form the full timeout value This variable allows retry timeout values less than a second given a zero value for the configuration variable IPMB_RETRY_TIMEOUT Using an overall IPMB timeout value less than 250 msec is not recommended No Release 3 5 1 63 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide DEFAULT DESCRIPTION CAN BE OBTAINED FROM SHELF FRU INFO IPMC_PRESERV Boolean TRUE Setting this variable to TRUE Yes E_ON_REVISIO preserves the Shelf Manager s N_CHANGE identification of an IPM controller after a firmware upgrade if only the Firmware Revision and or Auxiliary Firmware Revision information is changed If the variable is set FALSE any change in Get Device ID response data during the Shelf Manager s regular polls is considered to signal the presence of a different IPM controller ISOLATE _MUX_ Number 0x70 The 7 bit 12C multiplexer address on No ADDRESS platforms where SHMM_GPIO8 is used to control access from the Shelf Manager to the multiplexer on the master only 12C bus via the original mechanism that is not based on HPDL ISOLATE MUX_ Number Platform The number of the logical IC buson No BUS dependent which the 12C switch multiplexer 5 on resides on platforms where ShMM 700 SHMM_GPIO8 is used by the Shelf Qonother Manager to reset the 12C platforms switch multiplexer via the o
101. to the non redundant dual star radial topology one Shelf Manager implements all the IPMB A radial links the other Shelf Manager implements all the IPMB B radial links The value REDUNDANT DUAL STAR Corresponds to the redundant dual star radial topology where each Shelf Manager implements both IPMB A and IPMB B radial links The lt cross_ link num gt specifies the link number used for communication with the peer Shelf Manager in a radial configuration and is used only with the Redundant Dual Star topology The default value is 0 which means that no cross link exists and the Shelf Managers communicate with each other over the bused IPMB 0 Currently only link number 1 can be specified as the cross link as a result the only legal values for lt cross link num gt are 0 and 1 If a cross link exists i e lt cross_ link num is 1 communication between redundant Shelf Managers goes over the cross link even if a bused IPMB 0 also exists as would be the case for a hybrid IPMB 0 topology The keyword nosgus can be specified if lt cross link num gt is 1 This indicates a bused IPMB 0 is not physically implemented in the shelf In this case the active Shelf Manager does not attempt to access the bused IPMB 0 but emulates the bused IPMB logically over the cross link The bused IPMB link sensor IPMB LINK in this case monitors the state of the cross link Release 3 5 1 167 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager Use
102. to the HPM 2 client channel The configuration parameters can be managed via the commands Get LAN Configuration Parameters and Set LAN Configuration Parameters directed to the HPM 2 client channel A set of Shelf Manager configuration parameters is defined that specify the network adapter name and initial values of certain LAN configuration parameters In the standalone mode values must be assigned to all the parameters in the following list HPM2_ NET ADAPTER DEFAULT_HPM2 CLIENT _IP ADDRESS DEFAULT _HPM2 NETMASK DEFAULT _HPM2 GATEWAY IP_ADDRESS This mode can be used for shelves in which the outside network and the HPM 2 shelf internal network are available through different network interfaces If the HPM 2 client channel is configured properly the Shelf Manager attempts to establish an RMCP session with each HPM 2 capable IPMC when it first encounters it in the shelf and with each HPM 2 capable AMC or intelligent RTM when the corresponding FRU is activated The session is maintained by the Shelf Manager while the corresponding FRU is present in the shelf and is attempted to be reestablished if dropped by the controller representing the FRU The CLI commands ipmc and fru in verbose mode can be used to determine if an HPM 2 client session to a specific module currently exists For example the following output indicates that HPM 2 client sessions are established to the IPMC at 84h and to MMC on AMC 2 represented by that same IPMC
103. upgrade utility to maintain a software protocol atop the reliable upgrade procedure hardware mechanisms to reliably determine the status of the upgrade procedure and proceed as appropriate 7 6 Reliable Upgrade Utility A special user space utility is provided that is used for carrying out the reliable upgrade procedure as well as checking the status of the most recent upgrade The utility can be called only from the superuser root account Any attempt to run the utility from a non superuser account is rejected If called with any of the s c or options the utility is being used to carry out the reliable upgrade procedure While in the upgrade procedure the utility logs to var upgrade status the status of each action it performs as it proceeds through the steps of the upgrade procedure If the utility detects a failure the reliable upgrade procedure is terminated by adding to var upgrade status a record indicating an unsuccessful completion of the upgrade procedure and exiting with an appropriate error code If the utility is called with the c capital C option it copies the images to Flash partitions according to other command line parameters but does not perform the final upgrade step of switching active partitions and rebooting This final step can be done later using the command rupgrade tool s R The utility prints any informational messages to stdout Providing a v flag to any option that supports it increas
104. use of static routers and the value 02h turns it off Other values are not valid for the Shelf Manager the Shelf Manager always honors dynamic router assignment performed via the IPv6 Router Discovery protocol e Static Router 1 IP Address 65 Prefix Length 67 Prefix Value 68 Static Router 2 IP Address 69 Prefix Length 71 Prefix Value 72 These are the configuration parameters for the two static routers that Shelf Manager can use if the parameter IPv6 Router Address Configuration Control turns on the use of static routers The following are the default values of the IPv6 related LAN parameters in the PPS provided RFS images e Pv6 IPv4 Addressing Enables 02h Enabled IPv6 and IPv4 addressing simultaneously e Pv6 Static Addresses 57 not configured e Pv6 Router Address Configuration Control 64 03h enable static and dynamic router address configuration e Static Router 1 IP Address 65 Prefix Length 67 Prefix Value 68 Static Router 2 IP Address 69 Prefix Length 71 Prefix Value 72 not configured NOTE The above parameters are reset to the default values as assigned in the current RFS image if the var nvdata files are erased as would occur after re initializing the file system or possibly after a reliable upgrade with for example the erase al1 mode enabled To configure the Shelf Manager with the default Pv6 related LAN parameter values for responding to RMCP traffic over IPv6 it i
105. via the RFC 868 protocol rdate over TCP it is necessary to define the U Boot variable time_server and optionally the additional variable timezone The variable time_proto should be left undefined or set to rdate The variable time_server contains the IP address of the time server that the Shelf Manager queries for the system time after startup This server should support RFC 868 over TCP as required by the rdate utility or support NTP as required by the ntpdate utility This variable is propagated to the Linux level as the environment variable TIMESERVER If this variable is set the startup script etc netconfig starts the script etc timesync as a daemon which runs in an endless loop and queries the time server with a default interval of 300 seconds To change this interval edit the script etc timesync and change the value of the variable INTERVAL If a query fails the script starts polling the server more frequently with the default interval of 30 seconds this new interval is the value of the script variable INTERVAL2 When a subsequent query succeeds the polling rate reverts back to INTERVAL The TIMESERVER variable can be changed by the Shelf Manager if the Shelf Manager is configured to receive its RMCP IP address via DHCP In that case depending on the configuration of the DHCP server the Shelf Manager can also receive the IP address of the NTP server via DHCP It stores this address in the tmp timeserverip file which is used by the
106. 0 235 Tasklet ACTIVATE 20 2 is _local_address 1 lt W gt 14 35 24 213 235 Local FRU 2 at SA 0x20 is not listed in Shelf FRU Info still activate lt I gt 14 35 24 236 213 Controller 20 FRU 2 ATCA state set to M3 prev M2 cause 1 locked 0 lt I gt 14 35 24 241 214 Hot Swap event SA 0x20 FRU 2 sensor number 0x03 M2 gt M3 cause 1 lt I gt 14 35 24 257 218 Adjust power for 20 01 from 0 to 5000 lt I gt 14 35 24 258 218 Sending sync point lt I gt 14 35 24 269 237 SA 0x20 FRU 1 is OPERATIONAL lt I gt 14 35 24 301 218 Adjust power for 20 02 from 0 to 20000 lt I gt 14 35 24 302 218 Sending syne point Release 3 5 1 153 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide lt I gt 147354244311 213 Controller 20 FRU 2 ATCA state set to M4 prev M3 cause 0 locked 0 lt I gt 14 35 24 315 214 Hot Swap event SA 0x20 FRU 2 sensor number 0x03 M3 gt M4 cause 0 lt I gt 14 35 24 326 238 SA 0x20 FRU 2 is OPERATIONAL lt I gt 14 35 24 393 217 IPMC Cooling Management cooling state switched from Unknown to Normal The Shelf Manager software on the ShMM 1500 is optionally delivered without encryption related code for reasons having to do with export regulations If present the encryption related code is located in the shared library lib libpps_ encryption so If the encryption library is absent the Shelf Manager does not allow opening RMCP sessions
107. 0 lt I gt 14 35 23 661 214 State Ml sa 20 FRU 2 op state Ml1 power cycle 0 Release 3 5 1 151 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide lt I gt 14 35 23 667 214 0x00 MO gt M1 cause 0 lt I gt 14 35 23 669 214 power cycle 0 lt I gt 14 35 23 729 214 0x00 M0 gt M1 cause 0 lt I gt 14 35 23 731 214 power cycle 0 lt I gt 14 35 23 743 214 0x02 M0 gt M1 cause 0 lt I gt 14 35 23 745 214 power cycle 0 lt I gt 14 35 23 755 214 0x00 lt I gt 14 35 23 763 M1 gt M2 cause 2 217 Hot Swap event SA 0xfc FRU 0 sensor number State Ml sa FC FRU 0 op_state M1 SA 0x20 Hot Swap event FRU 0 sensor number State M1 sa 20 FRU 0 op _state M0 SA 0x20 Hot Swap event FRU 1 sensor number State M1 sa 20 FRU 1 op state M0 SA 0x20 Hot Swap event FRU 0 sensor number ipmc_cooling scan _sensors Reread sensors on the SA 0x20 time 6 SA O0xfc FRU 0 sensor number is_local_address 1 27 state new 33 state new ICA state set to M3 TCA state set to M4 SA 0x20 FRU 0 sensor number SA 0x20 FRU 0 sensor number from 0 to 5000 is_local_address 1 in Shelf TCA state set TCA state set read already in read already in SA 0x20 FRU 2 sensor number to M2 to M2 progress progress number lt I gt L4 935 23 76
108. 0 03 Od 2e 23 71 00 01 02 le 13 04 08 00 45 10 accede siabaa be 0010 00 54 00 00 40 00 3f 11 c2 79 cO a8 O1 3e 50 fO SVG Pe SVs coP 0020 66 39 02 6f 8c dO 00 40 5f 84 06 00 ff 07 06 40 F9 0 PEET 0030 Ob 00 00 00 02 00 00 00 17 00 89 lc 5b 20 Oc Ol sssaaa eee Bat 0040 00 00 80 02 60 02 bf Oa 40 00 00 00 02 60 01 00 eee Serine b eth0 lt live capture in progress gt File Packets 427022 Displayed 19 Marked 0 Profile Default A ca Expression Clear Apply 2 a 4x y zc rH ous 304 650 A ie aos o e rt ao 3a i n ooo 03 A 2 o u A S30 PE G e 3 a oo wn 30353 E m nN S4 o C L l 5 0 vaN ay eae bs oOo Dre o o o5 0 QO rms of m ee ao un ath ee ea B iit a aan ot m ma O Dao ZN HUn o N ot ral ae o UH ort Bi ik pi T o wis an on BO ao m aol wn Cae ow e N amp o N s N uw x 6 To stop the capture session go to the Capture submenu and select Stop In a command line context instead of steps 1 3 run the tshark utility specifying the target in the form of the network interface name e g ethO using option i Specify the filtering option R rmcp to include only RMCP traffic in the trace Options x and V as in the case of unattended IPMB trace mode can be used to request a hexadecimal and or detailed dumps of the messages Any additional options needed for filter
109. 00 use the hwri command to set these flags and the Local Presence flag hwri set presence healthy switchover Release 3 5 1 116 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide After that make sure that the output of hwri reports the Active flag set The remaining case where the Shelf FRU Information resides on separate IPM controllers inside the shelf is completely shelf specific and is beyond the scope of this document 3 5 3 Setting up the Shelf FRU Information Using the CLI Because of the limitations and system dependencies of the approaches listed in the previous sections another method is recommended to update the Shelf FRU Information This method involves using the CLI command f rudataw and it is applicable to all of the three cases considered in the previous section This method requires that the Shelf FRU Information file to be placed on the active ShMM After that the following command can be used possibly several times to update the locations that contain the Shelf FRU Information clia frudataw lt ipmc address gt lt fru id gt lt file gt where e lt ipmc address gt is the address of the IPM controller that contains the Shelf FRU Information e lt ru id gt is the FRU device ID of that location e lt file gt is the name of the file on the ShMM that contains the new Shelf FRU Information image The Shelf Manager must be running when this command is issued After the Shelf FRU Information
110. 00 hpdl Command line shelfman sf etc rce shmm700 hpdl Strobing the reliable upgrade WDT lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1265 Write upgrade watchdog 1 gt 2 ALLOW Release 3 5 1 260 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide rupgrade is called to strobe the reliable upgrade WDT once again just before starting the Shelf Manager or confirming the upgrade if automatic start is disabled via the environment variable start_rc2_daemons lt gt 09 28 46 973 134 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager ver 3 5 1 Built on July 17 2015 22 20 24 lt gt 09 28 47 012 134 Lock log print buffer at Oxla2d74 lt gt 09 28 47 013 134 Pthread lock log print buffer at 0x1a7594 KKK lt I gt 09 28 47 044 134 Reading configuration file etc shelfman conf shmm700 login lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1265 Write upgrade watchdog 1 gt 2 ALLOW The reliable upgrade WDT is strobed once again just to make sure it won t fire during the confirm procedure lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1189 Write confirmed 1 gt 0 ALLOW rupgrade changes the confirmed image set index to the candidate image set index lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1202 Write upgrade state in progress 2 gt confirmed 4 ALLOW lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1265 Write upgrade watchdog 1 gt 0 ALLOW And finally rupgrade turns the reliable upgrade WDT off The reliable upgrade is complete Finally the user checks the status of the r
111. 00 setenv bootdelay 1 Once all of the environment variables have been properly set you need to save them back out to the Flash so that they remain after the ShMM is powered down The saveenv command is used for this purpose shmmxx00 saveenv The setenv functionality is also available as a Linux utility with the same usage To display U Boot variables at the shell prompt use the additional ge tenv utility or issue the setenv command without parameters Release 3 5 1 31 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide 3 2 3 Configuring U Boot Environment Variables for the Shelf Manager When U Boot is started for the first time the following default environment variables are defined For ShMM 500 addip setenv bootargs bootargs ip ipaddr serverip gatewayip netmask hostname ipdevice addmisc setenv bootargs bootargs quiet console console baudrate bootargs root dev ram rw console ttyS0 115200 bootcmd run ramargs addmisc bootm kernel_ start rfs_start bootdelay 3 bootfile sentry shmm500 kernel baudrate 115200 console ttys0 ethaddr 00 00 1a 18 xx yy ethladdr 00 00 1la 18 xx zz netmask 255 255 0 0 hostname shmm500 gatewayip 192 168 0 1 ipdevice eth0 ipladdr 192 168 1 2 ipldevice ethl re2 etc re carrier3 ipaddr 192 168 0 22 start _rc2 daemons y flash_reset n password reset n logging ram net tftpboot 80400000 S bootfile tftpboot 81200000
112. 044 DRAM 64 MB Flash 16 MB Ini serial Out serial Err serial Net AulX00 ETHERNET Hit any key to stop autoboot 0 Release 3 5 1 236 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide Booting image at bfb00000 Image Name MIPS Linux 2 4 26 Created 2005 04 11 10 35 08 UTC Image Type MIPS Linux Kernel Image gzip compressed Data Size 843129 Bytes 823 4 kB Load Address 80100000 Entry Point 802bc040 Verifying Checksum OK Uncompressing Kernel Image OK Loading Ramdisk Image at bfc40000 Image Name sentry RFS Ramdisk Image Created 2005 04 22 9 10 41 UTC Image Type MIPS Linux RAMDisk Image gzip compressed Data Size 2400736 Bytes 2 3 MB Load Address 00000000 Entry Point 00000000 Verifying Checksum OK Power is turned off here After some time power is turned back on Assignment of provisional Flash has been lost because of the power loss so the system reverts back to the persistent Flash U Boot 1 1 2 Apr 11 2005 15 16 25 CPU Aul550 324 MHz id 0x02 rev 0x00 Board ShMM 500 S N 8000048 DRAM 64 MB Flash 16 MB Iri serial Out serial Err serial Net AulX00 ETHERNET Hit any key to stop autoboot 0 Booting image at bfb00000 Image Name MIPS Linux 2 4 26 Created 2005 04 11 10 35 08 UTC Image Type MIPS Linux Kernel Image gzip compressed Data Size 843129 Bytes 823 4 kB Load Address 80100000 Entry Point
113. 17 35 21 UTC Image Type MIPS Linux Kernel Image gzip compressed Data Size 843144 Bytes 823 4 kB Load Address 80100000 Entry Point 802bc040 Verifying Checksum OK Uncompressing Kernel Image OK Loading Ramdisk Image at bfc40000 Image Name sentry RFS Ramdisk Image shmm500 login root BusyBox v0 60 5 2005 05 07 17 27 0000 Built in shell msh On ShMM 1500 shmm1500 reset Resetting the board U Boot 1 1 4 Jun 15 2006 17 49 12 MPC83XX Clock configuration Coherent System Bus 99 MHz Core 249 MHz Local Bus 24 MHz CPU MPC83xx Rev 1 1 at 249 975 MHz Release 3 5 1 98 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide Board ShMM 1500R PCI1 32 bit 33 MHz T2Cs ready DRAM 128 MB FLASH 64 MB PCI Bus Dev VenId Devid Class Int 00 17 1172 0001 f f00 00 Iiis serial Out serial Err serial FPGA firmware version 1 12 carrier id 0 Net TSECO TSEC1 Hit any key to stop autoboot 0 Booting image at 00c0000 Image Name Linux 2 4 25 Created 2006 06 29 14 51 42 UTC Image Type PowerPC Linux Kernel Image gzip compressed Data Size 786177 Bytes 767 8 kB Load Address 00000000 Entry Point 00000000 Verifying Checksum OK Uncompressing Kernel Image OK Loading RAMDisk Image at f 04c0000 Image Name sentry shmm1500 RFS Ramdisk Imag Created 2008 02 15 16 35 56 UTC Image Type PowerPC Linux RAMDisk Image gzip compressed Data Size
114. 2 168 1121 25542552095407 192168 192 168 1 122 255 255 255 0 192 168 192 168 1 123 255 255 255 0 192 168 NN KD Fe PRR Dd PRR 4 10 2 1 Using the FRU Info Compiler to Place LAN Configuration Data in the Shelf FRU Information The FRU Information Compiler implements special syntax that can be used to incorporate a LAN configuration parameters file into a FRU Information image that is being created For example the following instructions add a compressed LAN configuration parameters file lan_config_params gz to the current FRU Information image PPS Board AMC LAN Configuration File lan config params gz Release 3 5 1 180 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide 4 10 2 2 Using the Shelf Manager Command Line Interface to Place LAN Configuration Parameters in the Shelf FRU Information An extended version of the CLI command rudataw can be used to dynamically update Shelf FRU Information with LAN configuration information The corresponding configuration file optionally compressed should first be downloaded to the ShMM The corresponding command line has the following syntax clia frudataw l1 lt ipmb address gt lt fru id gt lt in file gt clia frudataw l1 c lt ipmb address gt lt fru id gt The parameters lt ipmb address gt and lt fru id gt specify the IPMB address and FRU device ID of the FRU Information to update For the Shelf FRU Information use IPMB address 20h and FRU device ID
115. 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide IMPORTANT NOTICE JFFS2 support for the ShMM 700R is available starting with release 3 5 0 and affects U Boot Linux kernel and RFS images If the ShMM 70OR is configured to use JFFS2 and it is necessary to downgrade it to a pre 3 5 0 release there are two possible ways 1 Downgrade only the APP image preserving JFFS2 capable U Boot Linux kernel and RFS images from release 3 5 0 or above 2 Change the user partition format from JFFS2 to UBIFS before the downgrade so that it is possible to downgrade any of the firmware components Table 31 Flash Partitioning for ShMM 700s 64MB Flash in JFFS2 mode OFFSET IN FLASH SIZE IN DEVICE NODE MOUNTED As CONTENT IN MBYTES MBYTES ON STARTUP 0 0 5 dev mtd0 Not mounted U Boot image 0 0 5 0 5 dev mtd2 Not mounted U Boot image 1 1 0 25 dev mtd4 Not mounted U Boot environment variables first copy 1 25 0 25 dev mtd6 Not mounted U Boot environment variables second copy 1 5 0 25 dev mtd8 Not mounted UBIFS cache used for boot acceleration 1 75 30 25 dev mtd10 Not mounted Boot partition UBI temporarily with one UBIFS mounted by U Boot volume named to load images and _ boot contains Linux by the reliable kernel and RFS upgrade utility to images write images 32 15 25 dev mtdblock6 0 JFFS2 User partition for image set 0 contains shelf manager files and user data 47 25 15 25 dev mtdb
116. 24 071 218 Adjust power for FC 00 from 0 to 20000 lt I gt 14 35 24 073 218 Sending sync point lt I gt 14 35 24 077 213 Controller FC FRU 0 ATCA state set to M4 prev M3 cause 0 locked 0 lt I gt 14 35 24 081 214 Hot Swap event SA O0xfc FRU 0 sensor number 0x00 M3 gt M4 cause 0 lt I gt 14 35 24 097 236 Set Port State disable ipmc FC chan 1 it 0 ports 1 lt 1 ext 0 group 0 lt I gt 14 35 24 106 222 IPMC 20 1 is in the list already Exiting lt I gt 14 35 24 109 234 Tasklet ACTIVATE 20 1 is local address 1 lt W gt 14 35 24 111 234 Local FRU 1 at SA 0x20 is not listed in Shelf FRU Info still activate lt I gt 14 35 24 115 236 Set Port State disable ipmc FC chan 2 it 0 ports 1 lt 1 ext 0 group 0 lt I gt 14 35 24 130 217 ipmc_cooling scan_sensors Reread sensors on the SA OxFC lt I gt 14 35 24 134 213 Controller 20 FRU 1 ATCA state set to M3 prev M2 cause 1 locked 0 lt I gt 14 35 24 137 213 Controller 20 FRU 1 ATCA state set to M4 prev M3 cause 0 locked 0 lt I gt 14 35 24 147 231 sdrrep finished reading SDRs for SA FC added 29 preserved 0 deleted 0 time 7 seconds lt I gt 14 35 24 152 214 Hot Swap event SA 0x20 FRU 1 sensor number 0x02 M2 gt M3 cause 1 lt I gt 14 35 24 167 236 SA Oxfc FRU 0 is OPERATIONAL lt I gt 14 35 24 179 214 Hot Swap event SA 0x20 FRU 1 sensor number 0x02 M3 gt M4 lt I gt 14 35 24 211 cause
117. 2975 Bytes 2 2 MB Load Address 00000000 Entry Point 00000000 Verifying Checksum OK Loading Kernel Image OK OK Starting kernel init started BusyBox vl 16 2 2011 11 03 18 19 59 MSK etc rc Mounting filesystems etc re Mounted proc etc rce Mounted sys etc rc Mounted dev pts etc rc Boot using 0 image set Release 3 5 1 269 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide etc rce Fetching evnironment settings etc rce Extracted following params etc re re2 etc rce shmm700 hpdl etc rce ipaddr 192 168 0 22 etc rc ipdevice eth0 etc rce ipladdr 192 168 1 2 etc rce ipldevice usb0 etc rce ip2addr etc rce ip2device etc rce carrier etc rce Checking the reliable upgrade watchdog timer activated etc re Attaching UBIO user UBI device number 0 total 512 LEBs 33488896 bytes 31 9 MiB available 0 LEBs 0 bytes LEB size 65408 bytes 63 9 KiB etc re Attach result 0 u B etc rc Mount ubi0 user etc rc Attaching UBI1 boot UBI device number 1 total 484 LEBs 31657472 bytes 30 2 MiB available 0 LEBs 0 bytes LEB size 65408 bytes 63 9 KiB etc re Attach result 0 etc re Mount ubil boot etc re Selecting carrier from the environment etc re etc rce Extracting shelfman rootfs patch from 0 sentry shmm700 app 32979 1 records in 4122 1 records out 2110464 bytes 2 0MB copied 12 323593 seconds 167 2KB s etc rce Extracti
118. 4 3 2 2 Assigning Values to Environment VariableS eeeseeeeeeeeeeeeneerirreerinneerinneerenne 31 3 2 3 Configuring U Boot Environment Variables for the Shelf Managet 2 0006 32 3 2 4 Establishing the Secondary RC Script 1 22 cccccceceecceeseeceeeeeceeeeesnaeseeeeseneeetneeees 34 3 3 SETTING UP SHELF MANAGER CONFIGURATION FILE cceecceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeseaeeesaeeeeeeeseeneess 35 3 3 1 Carrier specific Configuration File 1 2c ccccccccceecceeseeceeneeceneceseeneseeeeeeeeecsensetnaeeees 81 3 3 2 Obtaining Configuration Variables from Shelf FRU Information cc0ccceee 81 3 3 3 Verbosity Level Description cccccscceceetsnteceenneeeeeenneeectenneeecetnneeecsennneeeetnnneeentnaees 83 3 3 4 Verbosity Console Level D SCLIDtION 11 1 cccccececeeeeeneceeececeeeeesaeceeneeteneeetiaeeees 83 3 4 SETTING UP ETHERNET 4i c lt ssecctansisnchevbalcuudsecanen deli csaeasbenevesedccseasd ssh aeisilacegiandanapeteareeeet 83 3 4 1 Usage of the First Ethernet Interface 0 cscccccsessececeenseeeeeenneeeeeenieeeseenieeeteenneees 84 3 4 2 Usage of the Second Ethernet Interface ccsccccccccesceceeeeeteseeeeseeceeeeesennsessasenes 85 3 4 3 Setting up the HPM 2 Client CHA nnel cccccccceesceesseceececeneeeesaesseneeceneseenseees 90 3 4 4 Using the SAMM 500 and ShMM 700 Alternate Software Redundancy Interface 92 3 4 5 Using the ShMM 1500 Alternate Software Redundancy Interface cc00e0 95 3 4 6 Cha
119. 5 ENVIRONMENT VARIABLE mac override Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide DESCRIPTION ShMM 700 only This variable allows overriding MAC address configuration for both Ethernet controllers for the Linux kernel This variable is used in bootargs generation and by default configures ethaddr to be passed as a configuration parameter Default value is set bootargs bootargs fec_mac ethaddr If a different MAC address is specified and it is a valid MAC address the FECO controller is configured with it while FEC1 controller is configured with an incremented value If no value is specified i e mac_override is empty or doesn t set fec_mac value the Linux kernel driver selects MAC addresses by its built in algorithm The MAC addresses generated by the kernel in this latter case may be the same as what the U Boot reports via ethaddr and eth1laddr variables but this is not guaranteed mount_ubifs ShMM 700 only U Boot command that invokes MTD configuration U Boot scripts This command is executed by U Boot during bootstrap Default value is run set mtdparts mtdids ShMM 700 only This variable contains SPI interfaces configuration and is used privately by the U Boot to configure the SPI subsystem to access Flash drives Default value is spiO SPI O mtdpartl ShMM 700 only This variable contains the Flash drive partition map The variable is used by the U Boot and its value is also passed to the Linux kernel as pa
120. 5 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide Comments are interspersed in the console log to provide additional background on the steps of the upgrade procedure First the rupgrade utility is started from the command prompt in upgrade mode The parameters show that all four images are to be updated with the Shelf Manager non volatile data and configuration file preserved as well xrupgrade skip checksums copy etc k file tmp sentry kernel r file tmp sentry rfs u file tmp u boot bin a file tmp sentry app tgz The upgrade utility attempts to invoke a validation script to check the images in tmp currently supplied If any of the specified file designators is not found in tmp the utility stops and a message like the following is produced lt INFO gt frontend c 449 Downloading file file tmp u boot bin lt ERR gt download_easy c 51 Failed to download file file tmp u boot bin Error The utility proceeds to copy the images to the specified destinations in candidate Flash lt INFO gt frontend lt INFO gt frontend lt INFO gt frontend lt INFO gt frontend lt INFO gt frontend lt INFO gt frontend lt INFO gt frontend 2449 Downloading file file tmp u boot bin 2449 Downloading file file tmp sentry kernel 2449 Downloading file file tmp sentry rfs 2449 Downloading file file tmp sentry app 2535 Initiating partial upgrade 2735 uboot tmp _tmp_uboot
121. 6 199 ipmf watchdog thread proc a potential deadlock was detected lock Ox2acd3940 owner 208 waiting 209 lock Ox2ac432f0 owner 223 waiting 217 214 220 208 lock Ox2ac43650 owner 220 waiting 223 lt W gt 14 09 44 926 199 ipmf watchdog thread proc a potential deadlock was detected lock Ox2acd3940 owner 208 waiting 209 lock Ox2ac432f0 owner 223 waiting 217 214 220 208 lock 0Ox2ac43650 owner 220 waiting 223 lt W gt 14 09 45 236 199 ipmf watchdog thread proc a potential deadlock was detected lock Ox2acd3940 owner 208 waiting 209 lock Ox2ac432f0 owner 223 waiting 217 214 220 208 lock Ox2ac43650 owner 220 waiting 223 lt W gt 14 09 45 546 199 ipmf watchdog thread proc a potential deadlock was detected For postmortem analysis of a deadlock the utility dumplog supplied in the Shelf Manager RFS can be used The following command line invokes this utility dumplog f var nvdata dumplog bin The result is produced on standard output in a human readable format It includes information about which locks are owned by which threads and a per thread history of lock acquisition and release for each currently active Shelf Manager thread The output of the command looks something like this xxx 24 Log for pthread with pid 263 18 17 Jun 22 17 23 27 2007 Succeeded 2ac34530 pid 263 file sdrrep c ine 4288 un 22 17 23 27 2007 Released 2ac34530 pid 263 file sdrrep c ine 3715 un
122. 6 Last upgrade stages log O initial PASSED 1 before storage mount PASSED 2 after storage mount PASSED 3 after marking image set invalid PASSED 4 after u boot burn PASSED 5 after kernel burn PASSED 6 after rootfs burn PASSED 7 after storage umount PASSED 8 after cleaning previous apps set PASSED 9 after writting new apps set PASSED 10 after sync PASSED 11 after processing var and etc PASSED 12 after boot select PASSED 13 after reboot FAILED 14 after confirm FAILED The last stages are marked as FAILED in the reliable upgrade status The ShMM has automatically rolled back to the confirmed firmware because the upgrade failed Release 3 5 1 271 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide 9 HPl based Shelf Manager Upgrade In addition to the reliable upgrade facility a Shelf Manager with IntegralHPI also supports upgrades over the HPI interface HPI defines a special type of management instruments used for upgrades and called Firmware Upgrade Management Instruments FUMIs IntegralHPI creates a FUMI for each resource that represents a physical Shelf Manager In a redundant configuration there are two Shelf Manager related FUMIs one for the active and one for the backup Shelf Manager The HPI paradigm for FUMIs is defined in the HPI specification and consists of a series of function calls to select the upgrade
123. 7 gt seq 0x06 724102654 192 168 1 199 gt seq 0x06 192 168 1 199 80 240 102 57 192 168 1 199 80 240 102 57 192 168 1 199 80 240 102 57 192 168 1 199 80 240 102 57 192 168 1 199 80 240 102 57 192 168 1 199 80 240 102 57 80 240 102 57 192 168 1 199 80 240 102 57 RMCP RMC P RMC P RMCP payload payload payload payload IPMI ATCA IPMI ATCA IPMI ATCA IPMI ATCA IPMI ATCA IPMI ATCA IPMI ATCA IPMI ATCA IPMI ATCA IPMI ATCA IPMI ATCA Req RSP type type BEE type type RAKP Set Session Set Session Get Device ID Get Device ID Get Device ID Get Device ID Req RSP Send Message Send Message Get Device ID Close Session Close Session To stop the capture session terminate the tshark process e g by pressing C 5 4 5 Analyzing a Trace Using the GUI To select a message in the Wireshark GUI main window simply scroll to the message that interests you in the upper frame of the main window Release 3 5 1 206 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide Figure 14 Message 244 is Selected TCP 192 168 1 65 Capturing Wireshark File Edit View Go Capture Analyze Statistics Help amp amp a f et amp A 47 4 BS QQQF BUSH B Filter z Expression Clear Apply No Time Source Destination Protocol Info mre a rr eA rr
124. 7 228 SA 0x20 FRU 0 is ACTIVATING lt I gt 14 35 23 779 214 Hot Swap event 0x00 M1 gt M2 cause 2 lt I gt 14 35 23 787 217 ipmc_cooling scan _sensors Reread sensors on the SA OxFC lt I gt 14 35 23 801 228 Tasklet ACTIVATE 20 0 lt I gt 14 35 23 811 221 Initial indicator for SA 0x20 lt I gt 14 35 23 814 221 Initial indicator for SA Oxfc lt I gt 14 35 23 817 221 sdrrep fetched new SDRs lt I gt 14535223 821 213 Controller 20 FRU 0 Al prev M2 cause 1 locked 0 lt I gt 14 35 23 824 213 Controller 20 FRU 0 Al prev M3 cause 0 locked 0 lt I gt 14 35 23 828 214 Hot Swap event 0x00 M2 gt M3 cause 1 lt I gt 14 35 23 835 217 ipmc_cooling scan_sensors Reread sensors on the SA 0x20 lt I gt 14 35 23 842 217 ipmc_cooling scan_sensors Reread sensors on the SA 0x20 lt I gt 14 35 23 847 214 Hot Swap event 0x00 M3 gt M4 cause 0 lt I gt 14 35 23 853 217 ipmc_cooling scan_sensors Reread sensors on the SA 0x20 lt I gt 14 35 23 864 229 SA Oxfc FRU 0 is ACTIVATING lt I gt 14 35 23 881 218 Adjust power for 20 00 lt I gt 14 35 23 882 218 Sending syne point lt I gt 14 35 23 891 233 SA 0x20 FRU 0 is OPERATIONAL lt I gt 14 35 23 905 229 Tasklet ACTIVATE fc 0 lt W gt 14 35 23 907 229 Local FRU 0 at SA OxFC is not listed FRU Info still activate lt I gt 14 35 23 918 212 Controller 20 FRU 1 Al prev M1 cause 2 locked 0 lt I gt
125. 7 1 Default Cooling Management Strategy csccccccccccsceceteeeceeeeessseceeeeeeeetecsnneneaes 124 3 7 2 Configuring a Specific Cooling Management StrateQy ccccccccsccesstetsseessees 126 Release 3 5 1 3 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide 3 8 CONFIGURING LOCAL SENSORS sscccccsscecsessseeceeecscecsesaeaeceeeesceenaaeaeeececeeseaaeeeseeseeenes 126 3 9 SETTING THE AUXILIARY FIRMWARE REVISION s0ccccceceeeeeesesseaeeeceeececsessaeeeeeeeeeenes 131 3 10 SETTING UP THE CLOCK gp ssice cect ciecegesseeey sce penepe hase cegenteuns daeavensducde ian sis eadescleeadedanneieeddcens 132 3 10 1 Obtaining Date and Time from a Time S Ivel 2c cccscceceeeceeseeceeneeceeeeessnnetenes 132 3 11 SETTING UP AND USING SHMM POWER ON SELF TESTS cccseeseceeeeeceesessaeeeeeeeeeeees 134 3 12 CONFIGURING EXTERNAL EVENT HANDLING cccccccecsessececeeeeeceeseeseeeceeeeessesaaeeeseeeeeenes 135 3 12 1 Detailed Steps to Configure External Event HandlinQ 1 ccccccccsscecessetseeeeees 135 3 12 2 External Event Handler Operation cscccccsccessesceeneecenececsneeesnseceeneecseneessnetenes 137 3 13 CONFIGURING THE PLATFORM EVENT TRAP FORMAT sc cccccccecsessssececeeececsessaeeeseeeeeeses 138 3 13 1 Parsed Example of SNMP Trap ccccscceceeeceseseceeneeceneeeceeeesneeseeneeceneeessaneneaes 139 3 14 CONFIGURING THE INTEGRALHPI INTERFACE 0 ccceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeseaeeesaeeeee
126. 802bc040 Verifying Checksum OK Uncompressing Kernel Image OK Loading Ramdisk Image at bfc40000 Image Name sentry RFS Ramdisk Image Created 2005 04 11 18 27 17 UTC Image Type MIPS Linux RAMDisk Image gzip compressed Data Size 2372311 Bytes 2 3 MB Load Address 00000000 Entry Point 00000000 Verifying Checksum OK Starting kernel init started BusyBox v0 60 5 2005 02 07 16 45 0000 multi call binary hub c new USB device AU1550 1 assigned address 2 usb0O speed config 1 Ethernet Gadget Release 3 5 1 237 August 17 2015 usbl reg serial 8 etc re etc re etc re etc re etc re Pigeon ister usbnet usb Point Shelf Manager User Guide AU1550 1 Linux Device 000048 not found Mounted proc Mounting filesyst Mounted dev pts Mounted dev mtdb Mounted dev mtdb ems lock0 to var lock10 to var upgrade The next step in the re script is to call rupgrade_tool c to check whether a reliable upgrade is in progress The check determines that an attempted reliable upgrade failed The message restoring ADM1060 EEPROM to RAM refers to the ShMM system supervisory device an ADM1060 which supervises the ShMM boot up process and implements some of the hardware aspects of the reliable upgrade support This message indicates that key variables affecting the boot process are being reverted to their state before the reliable upgrade was attempted
127. 9 lt W gt 14 35 18 810 199 lt I gt 14 35 18 812 199 lt I gt 14 35 18 818 199 lt I gt 14 35 18 824 199 001849000EEC lt I gt 14 35 18 829 199 configuration defaulting to lt I gt 14 35 18 834 199 lt I gt 14 35 18 836 199 192 168 0 192 1040 lt I gt 14 35 18 838 199 192 168 0 64 1041 lt I gt 14 35 18 841 199 lt I gt 14 35 18 843 199 lt I gt 14 35 21 844 199 backup failed 148 lt I gt 14 35 21 846 199 lt I gt 14 35 21 883 199 successfully value 8 lt I gt 1473521951 199 at 0x2C lt E gt 14 35 21 995 199 128 ignored lt E gt 14 35 22 045 199 128 ignored lt I gt 14 35 22 049 199 0 4 at 0x2C lt I gt 14 35 22 054 199 0 5 at Ox2C lt I gt 14 35 22 058 199 at 0x2C lt I gt 14 35 22 062 199 0 7 at 0x2C lt I gt 14 35 22 067 199 0 8 at 0x2C lt I gt 14 35 22 071 199 0 9 at Ox2C Release 3 5 1 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager ver 3 5 xk Lock log prin 1 Built on t buffer at 1006c720 x Pthread lock log print buffer at 10070f 70 Reading configura Shelfman tion file Using EEPROM for Shelf FRU error 0 Set watchdog timeout to 2 seconds Custom SDR Carrier set to shm_ crypto init Device GUID Netmask no Interface Pps t specified in two adap 255 255 255 128 usbl activated successf etc shelfman conf initialization file is absent
128. 90890 owner 0 waiting 0 2ac344f0 owner 0 waiting 0 2acbdb98 owner 0 waiting 0 10091fa8 owner 0 waiting 0 10091c10 owner 0 waiting 0 100923e8 owner 0 waiting 0 10092840 owner 0 waiting 0 1008d7a4 owner 0 waiting 0 JVefffa80 owner 0 waiting 0 2ac34430 owner 0 waiting 0 2ac36310 owner 0 waiting 0 2ac33d98 owner 0 waiting 0 1008d81c owner 0 waiting 0 10094c08 owner 0 waiting 0 For backwards compatibility with older versions of the Shelf Manager deadlock detection is turned off if the value of the configuration variable DETECT _DEADLOCKS is FALSE By default this configuration variable has the value TRUE This variable controls both the watchdog based and the direct deadlock detection mechanisms 4 9 I2C Bus Fault Isolation On some carriers ShMM GPIOs can be used to reset an 12C multiplexer or 12C switch that is implemented on an 12C bus By resetting the 12C multiplexer or switch it is possible to implement an algorithm in the Shelf Manager to isolate faulty devices on subordinate 12C buses that are behind that multiplexer switch so that access to devices on other 12C buses can still occur successfully In the original implementation this feature was applicable only to one multiplexer or switch connected to the Shelf Manager GPIO E8 GPIO_08 on the SnMM 700R was used to reset it On ShMM 700R carriers that have multiple master only 12C buses the number of the bus to which the multiplexer or switch wa
129. 916 212 Controller FC FRU 0 ATCA state set to M2 prev M1 cause 2 locked 0 lt I gt 14 35 22 935 226 LAN setting RMCP subnet mask to 255 255 255 0 lt I gt b4935 22 939 226 channel param start channel on backup channel 1 propagate 0 lt I gt 14 35 22 941 226 DHCP Client is disabled lt I gt 14 35 22 943 226 Calling shelf FRU notification Ox2ab44fdc lt I gt 14 35 22 945 226 LAN Config Parameters data in the Shelf FRU 0 bytes lt I gt 14 35 22 948 226 Found Power Distribution record instance 0 size 49 lt I gt 14 35 22 950 226 Allowance for FRU Activation Readiness 10 seconds start 23 lt I gt 14 35 22 952 226 Found Power Management record format version 1 lt I gt 14 35 22 954 226 Retrieving initial power budget lt I gt 14 35 22 975 227 RMCP starting server thread for 192 168 1 198 623 lt I gt 14 35 22 977 227 RMCP started server thread for 192 168 1 198 623 lt I gt 14 35 22 979 227 Registering 227 facility to the triggering watchdog lt I gt 14 35 23 585 214 Hot Swap event SA 0x20 FRU 2 sensor number 0x03 MO gt M1 cause 0 lt I gt 14 35 23 586 214 State Ml sa 20 FRU 2 op state M0 power cycle 0 lt I gt 14 35 23 647 214 Hot Swap event SA O0xfc FRU 0 sensor number 0x00 MO gt M1 cause 0 lt I gt 14 35 23 649 214 State Ml sa FC FRU 0 op _state M0 power cycle 0 lt I gt 14 35 23 659 214 Hot Swap event SA 0x20 FRU 2 sensor number 0x03 MO gt M1 cause
130. ATC Rsp Get Device SDR seq 0x18 28 1 540049 I2C 1 0x10 IPMI ATC Rsp Get Device SDR seq 0x19 32 1 581004 I2C 1 0x10 IPMI ATC Rsp Get Device ID seq Oxld 33 1 590353 I2C 1 0x10 IPMI ATC Rsp Get Device SDR Info seq Oxle 25 1 692271 Tw 9 Avin TOMT zarr Don Dlatfarm Cunnt can AvA 3 gt Frame 21 10 bytes on wire 10 bytes captured b Inter Integrated Circuit Data v Intelligent Platform Management Interface Response to 17 Responded in 0 081195000 seconds b Header Reserve Device SDR Repository Response from 0x82 to 0x20 b Data Data checksum 0x76 correct 0000 PORES P ay Pe hae EEE S Frame frame 10 bytes Packets 168 Displayed 84 Mark Profile Default Note Since the broadcast destination address is always zero the ipmi header broadcast filter expression should be used by specifying the following filter string in the Filter entry of the main window ipmi header broadcast 0x00 5 4 6 Analyzing a Trace Using Command Line Tools GUI tools are much more powerful for analyzing a trace than command line tools so you should use GUI tools for trace analysis if possible When using command line tools you should first capture the data into a file in unattended mode and then analyze the captured data file using tshark In this usage style tshark can be run multiple times over the same data thus allowing some degree of interactivity in the analysis In controlled mode tshark is run only once over the captured dat
131. Also there are two instances of writable directories etc and var on the ShMM 700 so that each of the two image sets has its own instance of these directories These directories contain writable application data When the corresponding image set is loaded the corresponding instance of etc and var directory is found on the Flash and mounted as etc and var in the current file tree When a stable firmware configuration is established in one of these image sets it is designated as the confirmed image set When a new firmware configuration is installed it goes in the other image set which is initially designated candidate Once a new firmware configuration in the candidate set is validated that image set is designated the confirmed image set and continues to be uses until a future upgrade cycle starts the process over again ShMM reliable upgrades are enabled by hardware mechanisms which ensure that if defective firmware is present in the candidate image set and the candidate image set fails to boot or initialize an automatic rollback takes place to the safe software copy in the confirmed image set Even if the candidate image set boots and initializes successfully but embedded software integrity checks run at the application level during initialization indicate that the new software image is not fully functional hardware mechanisms can be invoked to reset the ShMM and revert to the safe confirmed image set At a higher level the reliable upg
132. B root B Download 04 18 2008 E ffmpeg export 2008 07 07 07 08 2008 i EB libmad 0 15 1b 07 07 2008 BS libpcap 0 9 8 06 23 2008 E Linux Wireless HowTo 04 21 2008 B madwifi 0 9 4 04 19 2008 EB mpeg2dec 0 4 1 07 08 2008 B Music 04 18 2008 G Pictures Today at 14 57 Add Remove Em test11 nananana 7 Filename Filter V Enable MAC name resolution Format N cket First Packet C Enable network name resolution Enable transport name resolution Elapsed time This will open the trace in the GUI main window Figure 9 GUI Main Window Unattended mode ipmb_traced log Wireshark File Edit View Go Capture Analyze Statistics Help GAA SGBExee Meovdtt SR aaan RUSH g a_i No Time Source Destination Protocol Info 27 12 711110 I2C 1 0x41 IPMI ATC Req Get Device SDR seq 0x09 Te 29 12 730525 I2C 2 0x41 IPMI ATC Req Get Device SDR seq 0x0a 31 12 752292 I2C 1 0x41 IPMI ATC Req Get Device SDR seq 0x0b 33 12 789674 I2C 1 0x41 IPMI ATC Req Get Device ID seq Ox0f 34 12 739674 I2C 2 Ox41 IPMI ATC Req Get Device SDR Info seq 0x10 35 12 791296 I2C 1 0x41 IPMI ATC Req ATCA Set FRU Activation seq 0x11 3 276 r x tSp D fo 38 12 870679 I2C 2 0x41 IPMI ATC Req Get Device SDR seq 0x12 39 12 895527 I2C 2 0x10 IPMI ATC Req Platform Event seq 0x09 la A212 nancon TIF oa Avar TOMT ATF Dan Gat Nawien CND cnn Avi tss b
133. CP based communication see parameter DEFAULT_RMCP_IP_ADDRESS For example for an IP address of class C this parameter is set to 255 255 255 0 No Release 3 5 1 49 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide DEFAULT DESCRIPTION CAN BE OBTAINED FROM SHELF FRU INFO DEFAULT _RMCP P address Variable The network mask for the second No _NETMASK2 network adapter used for RMCP communication This mask is used only if the corresponding parameter is set to0 0 0 0 inthe IPMI LAN Configuration Parameters for channel 2 The default value depends on the class of the default IP address used for shelf external RMCP based communication see parameter DEFAULT_RMCP_IP_ ADDRESS 2 For example for an IP address of class C this parameter is set to 255 255 255 0 DEFAULT VLAN Number 0 The default Virtual LAN ID used for Yes _ID the first LAN channel This value is used only as the default value for the corresponding LAN configuration parameter once LAN configuration parameters are defined and stored on the ShMM the value provided in the Shelf Manager configuration file is ignored DEFAULT VLAN Number 0 The default Virtual LAN ID used for Yes _ID2 the second LAN channel This value is used only as the default value for the corresponding LAN configuration parameter once LAN configuration parameters are defined and stored on the ShMM the value provided in the Shelf Manager configuratio
134. Capture Options Window cccccceceeeeeeeeceeeeeseaeeeeaeeceeeeesaeeesaaeseeaeeseeeeeseaeeseaeseneeesaas 201 Figure 11 Collected Trace Controlled mode cccccceceeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeaeeseeeeseaeeesaeeeeeeesaas 202 Figure 12 Capture Options Window analyzing networked IPMI traffic c ceceeeeseeeeereeeees 204 Figure 13 Collected Trace networked IPMI traffic cccceceseceeeeeeeneeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeesaeeeeaeeeeeeesaas 205 Figure 14 Message 244 is Selected ccecccceeeeeeeneeceeeeeceaeeeeaeeceeeeesaeeesaaeeseaeeseeeesiaeeeeaeeeneeeeaas 207 Figure 15 IPMI Protocol Layers IPMB trace ccceeeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeseeaaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaas 208 Figure 16 Filtered Trace icc ci 2 cccvasssteevessasccdehdeecensacectsndgebacrhascsctunbgcodexsesvscsundasbeevbedesctenbasddzeenascey 209 Release 3 5 1 7 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide Tables Table 1 Shelf Manager Documentation ccceeccecessnececeenneeeceesaeeeesesaeeecessaeeesscaaeeseesaeeeesssaeeeeeeaas 9 Table 2 Conventions Used in this Document 0 ec ccceeececeeeeeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeaeeseneeseaeeesaeeesaaeeeeeeeeaas 9 Table 3 SAMM 500R ShMM 1500R and ShMM 700R Features and Variants 0 eeee 19 Tabl 4 SAMM MOd6 Siisc cccasietcctdenccccvadtecctrausececsuttceci cluasdecvdiaceantvantcectauiecdermadeccuainesacriaatacetamaeancdae 20 Table 5 U Boot Environment Variables ccecceeee
135. Data Size 1402284 Bytes 1 3 MB Load Address 40008000 Entry Point 40008000 Verifying Checksum OK Loading init Ramdisk from Legacy Image at 46000000 Image Name ShMM700 RFS 3 5 1 Created 2015 04 17 18 21 50 UTC Image Type ARM Linux RAMDisk Image gzip compressed Data Size 2282975 Bytes 2 2 MB Load Address 00000000 Entry Point 00000000 Verifying Checksum OK Loading Kernel Image OK OK Starting kernel init started BusyBox vl 16 2 2011 11 03 18 19 59 MSK etc rce Mounting filesystems etc rc Mounted proc etc rc Mounted sys etc rce Mounted dev pts etc rce Boot using 0 image set etc rce Fetching evnironment settings etc rce Extracted following params etc re re2 etc rce shmm700 hpdl Release 3 5 1 259 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide etc rce ipaddr 192 168 0 22 etc rce ipdevice ethod etc rce ipladdr 192 168 1 2 etc rce ipldevice usb0 etc re ip2addr etc rce ip2device etc rce carrier etc rce Checking the reliable upgrade watchdog timer lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1265 Write upgrade watchdog 1 gt 2 ALLOW activated Here rupgrade is invoked for the first time after the reboot to strobe the reliable upgrade watchdog timer etc rce Attaching UBIO user UBI device number 0 total 512 LEBs 33488896 bytes 31 9 MiB available 0 LEBs 0 bytes LEB size 65408 bytes 63 9 KiB
136. ELF_FRU_IPMB_ SOURCE1 SHELF _FRU_IPMB SOURCEZ2 e Section 3 8 covers a new option for local sensors to be configured when the Shelf Manager is started The Sensor Device Records SDRs defining these sensors are read from the file var nvdata user_sdr e Section 4 3 provides the details of command line invocations of the Shelf Manager e Section 4 5 describes Shelf Manager operation on radial shelves C 3 Release 2 3 0 e Section 3 2 1 corrects references to the U Boot environment variable gatewayip that was previously incorrectly referenced as gateway e Section 3 4 2 1 explains the configuration parameter INITIAL SLOW_LINK_DELAY e Introduces the parallel usage of two network interfaces In parallel mode instead of having a single RMCP network address that is switched between the two network interfaces the Shelf Manager supports RMCP on both interfaces with different IP addresses as two separate IPMI channels channels 1 and 2 e Section 3 4 7 adds an option for IP addresses for the Shelf Manager to be assigned by a DHCP server e Section 3 3 introduces the new configuration parameters COOLING _FAN DECREASE TIMEOUT COOLING_FAN_INCREASE_TIMEOUT CPLD ACTIVE WORKAROUND Release 3 5 1 Zit August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide DEFAULT _GATEWAY_IP_ADDRESS2 DEFAULT _RMCP_ IP ADDRESS2 INITIAL SLOW LINK DELAY FAN LEVEL STEP DOWN FAN LEVEL _STEP_UP IPMB RETRY TIMEOUT MSEC MAX NODE BUSY_RETRANSMISSIONS NORMA
137. EST NAME TEST PARAMETERS NAME TYPE TEST DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION UART INT 0 uart INT32 UART ID to The UART RX and TX channels are Internal UART test internally looped back while the test is Loopback Acceptable values are 0 in progress which may result in data Test and 1 loss for external communication on Default value is 0 the affected UART For example if Not UART 0 is the system console implemented some console output may be lost or on ShMM 700 corrupted UART EXT 1 uart INT32 UART ID to This test requires manual interaction External test with the ShMM carrier to loop back UART Acceptable values are 0 the UART RX and TX pins Loopback and 1 Test Default value is 0 Not implemented on ShMM 700 ETHER INT 2 mac INT32 MAC ID to The RX and TX channels are Internal test internally looped back while the test is Ethernet Acceptable values are 0 in progress which may result in data Loopback and 1 loss and or a broken network Test Default value is 0 connection ETHER PHY 3 mac INT32 MAC ID to The RX and TX channels are Ethernet PHY test internally looped back within the PHY Loopback Acceptable values are 0 while the test is in progress which Test and 1 may result in data loss and or a Default value is 0 broken network connection ETHER ARP 4 mac INT32 MAC ID to The test sends an ARP request with Ethernet ARP test
138. ETMASK IP address 0 0 0 0 The netmask to assign to the redundancy IP address by default if 0 the netmask is determined automatically from the class of the IP address 255 255 255 128 is the recommended value if USB network interfaces are used for redundancy No REDUNDANCY P ORT Number 1040 The TCP port used for interactions between redundant instances of the Shelf Manager No REDUNDANT_IP _ADDRESS IP address None The IP address used for redundant communications This address actually specifies a pair of IP addresses that differ only in the least significant bit They are assigned to redundant Shelf Managers according to their hardware addresses No RESERVATION _ RETRIES Number 0 The maximum number of times the Shelf Manager retries the Reserve Device SDR command Yes RMCP_ NET ADA PTER String 16 ethod The name of the network adapter used for RMCP based communication Yes Release 3 5 1 T1 August 17 2015 RMCP_ NET ADA PTER2 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide TYPE String 16 DEFAULT None DESCRIPTION The name of the alternate network adapter used for RMUCP based communications if cross connect links are supported by the hardware eth1 is the recommended value if the parameter is specified CAN BE OBTAINED FROM SHELF FRU INFO Yes RMCP_ PLUS ON LY Boolean FALSE If th
139. Frame 34 7 bytes on wire 7 bytes captured gt Inter Integrated Circuit Data v Intelligent Platform Management Interface Response in 37 b Header Get Device SDR Info Request from 0x20 to 0x82 Data checksum 0x80 correct 0000 82 10 6e 20 40 20 80 on File yhome serge ipmb_traced log 4590 Packets 132 Displayed 132 Mar Profile Default 4 Release 3 5 1 197 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide In a command line context at step 5 instead of starting the GUI utility run the tshark utility option r specifies the trace data file name tshark r ipmb_ traced log 1 0 000000 Reading seq 0x28 2 0 079507 Reading seq 0x28 3 0 579642 Reading seq 0x29 4 0 585695 Reading seq 0x29 5 0 679566 Reading seq 0x2a 6 0 686105 Reading seq 0x2a 7 0 698566 Reading seq 0x2b 8 0 713453 Reading seq 0 9 0 724908 Reading seq 0 10 0 739889 Reading seq 0x2c Fi 0 751980 Reading seq 0x2d 12 0 767020 Reading seq 0x2d x2b Xx2C I2C 1 gt 0x41 IPMI ATCA Req Get Sensor I2C 1 gt 0x10 IPMI ATCA Rsp Get Sensor I2C 2 gt 0x41 IPMI ATCA Req Get Sensor I2C 2 gt 0x10 IPMI ATCA Rsp Get Sensor I2C 1 gt 0x41 IPMI ATCA Req Get Sensor I2C 1 gt 0x10 IPMI ATCA Rsp Get Sensor I2C 2 gt 0x41 IPMI ATCA Req Get Sensor I2C 2 gt 0x10 IPMI ATCA Rsp Get Sensor I2C 1 gt 0x41 IPMI ATCA Req Get Sensor I2C 1 gt 0x10 IPMI ATCA Rsp Get
140. Gateway Address set successfully 10 If the second network interface is used for RMCP get the current IP settings for channel 2 clia getlanconfig 2 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager Command Line Interpreter 11 Change the IP settings for channel 2 clia setlanconfig 2 ip 10 2 1 10 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager Command Line Interpreter IP set successfully clia setlanconfig 2 subnet_mask 255 255 0 0 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager Command Line Interpreter Subnet Mask set successfully clia setlanconfig 2 dft_gw_ip 10 2 1 1 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager Command Line Interpreter Default Gateway Address set successfully Release 3 5 1 103 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide 3 4 7 Assigning VLAN IDs Starting from release 2 6 0 the Shelf Manager supports Virtual LANs VLANs in accordance with version 2 0 of the IPMI specification That is RMCP RMCP traffic to and from the Shelf Manager can be passed over a specific virtual LAN the ID of that virtual LAN is stored in the LAN configuration parameters and is automatically added to the outgoing RMCP RMCP packets and stripped from the incoming packets in accordance with the IEEE 802 1q specification Separate VLAN IDs are supported for the two LAN channels 1 and 2 that can carry RMCP RMCP traffic To assign a VLAN ID to a channel use the IPMI Set LAN Configuration Parameters command the CLI setlanconfig command or the CLI analog in the SNMP or WEB interface
141. L ATT ONL_CH ATT CH lt I gt 14 35 22 495 215 IPMB 0 went online lt I gt 14 35 22 498 215 Status change on IPMB 1 flags 186 ONL ATT ONL_CH ATT CH lt I gt 14 35 22 500 215 IPMB 1 went online lt I gt 14 35 22 524 216 IPMC Stored write thread started lt I gt 14 35 22 663 199 Starting power thread lt I gt 14 35 22 681 199 Controller FC FRU 0 ATCA state set to M1 prev M0 cause 0 locked 0 lt I gt 14 35 22 689 199 Created IPMC for 84 exists 0 lt I gt 14 35 22 691 lt I gt 14 35 22 693 from stored SDR lt I gt 14 35 22 701 lt I gt 14 35 22 763 lt I gt 14 35 22 784 watchdog lt I gt 14 35 22 806 lt I gt 14 35 22 834 Information sources lt I gt 14 35 22 836 trusted list lt I gt 14 35 22 842 lt I gt 14 35 22 850 prev M0 cause 0 lt I gt 14 35 22 852 lt I gt 14 35 22 854 Release 3 5 1 199 Get Stored Device ID OK for 84 199 Operational state for SA 84 224 C 199 225 F 199 F 205 Creating new SI 199 Controller 20 locked 0 199 Before init fr set the FRU 1 initial state 199 S RU 1 on 0x20 IPMC FRU u hs DR Repository broadcasting Get LI subscribing for deadlocks 224 Registering 224 facility to the triggering FRU 0 is set to M7 Device ID pid 224 RU data write thread started successfully 199 Generating list of the trusted Shelf FRU was added to the Shelf FRU EL Journal 0 ATCA state set t
142. L STABLE TIME PREFERRED DHCP SERVER SYSTEM MANAGER _TRUNCATES SEL USE_DHCP USE_SECOND_CHANNEL Section 3 9 adds coverage for the Auxiliary Firmware Revision being set when the Shelf Manager is started It is read from the file var nvdata aux fw revision Section 3 10 1 adds an option for the Shelf Manager to obtain date and time via the Network Time Protocol Section 4 6 introduces the option for SEL truncation to be done automatically under control of the System Manager C 4Release 2 4 0 Section 3 4 7 adds a description of the Request Identifier Request ID byte of the DHCP Client Identifier along with coverage of the default inclusion of the Shelf Address in the DHCP Client Identifier Section 3 3 introduces the new configuration parameter RMCP_ WITHOUT SHELF_FRU Section 4 4 1 provides a description of the new Redundancy and CPLD sensor that is provided by both active and backup Shelf Managers Section 7 3 deletes the table describing the Flash partitions fora ShMM 500 with 32MB Flash devices this configuration is not offered C 5 Release 2 4 1 Section 3 2 1 changes the default value of the U Boot environment variable hostname to shmm300 or shmm500 based on the ShMM type Section 3 2 4 a new section that describes how to establish the secondary RC script Section 3 3 contains the content of the former section 3 4 Setting up Shelf Manager Configuration File Section 3 3 uses the new configuration parameter n
143. LADE is used No SWAPPED CROS Boolean FALSE Swaps the names of network Yes S_CONNECTS adapters used for cross connects on the ShMC with the odd hardware address Release 3 5 1 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide TYPE DEFAULT DESCRIPTION CAN BE OBTAINED FROM SHELF FRU INFO SWITCHOVER_O Number 0 This parameter specifies the delay on Yes N_BROKEN_LIN the backup side during a switchover K_ BACKUP _DEL caused by a broken physical network AY link When the active Shelf Manager requests the switchover the backup Shelf Manager agrees to it if its physical network link is present only after this number of seconds passes following the first request from the active Shelf Manager A non zero value for this parameter can be used to prevent switchovers in scenarios where a hub board is inserted into the shelf that activates the active Shelf Manager link several seconds after the backup Shelf Manager link SWITCHOVER_O Boolean FALSE lf TRUE switchover related behavior Yes N_HANDLE_OPE of the active Shelf Manager is N affected by the Hot Swap state of its physical IPM controller as follows If the physical IPM controller on the active Shelf Manager goes to state M1 due to its Hot Swap Handle being open or due to programmatic deactivation a switchover to the backup Shelf Manager is initiated If the physical IPM controller on the active Shelf Manager goes to st
144. M2 ENABLE CLIENT SESSIONS HPM2 CLIENT MIRROR_CHANNEL HPM2 NET ADAPTER New section 3 4 3 covers configuration considerations for the HPM 2 channel Section 3 15 explains how to establish IPv6 access to FTP TELNET and SSH which is available only on the ShMM 700 Section 3 16 adds explanation on bus mapping for ShMM 700 Section 4 4 3 adds coverage of the var nvdata reboot_reason log file which contains information about recent reboots Section 4 5 3 explains how the redundant Shelf Managers communicate with each other over a cross link Section 4 10 2 corrects the name of the LAN configuration parameters file on the ShMM Appendix A adds coverage of particular aspects of converting a live shelf from ShMM 500 based management to ShMM 700 based management Appendix B updates contact information for Pigeon Point Systems C 29 Release 3 5 0 Section 3 3 describes a new IntegralHPl related configuration variable and new Shelf Manager configuration variable controlling the SNMP trap version format INTEGRALHPI_SESSION_EVENTS CAPACITY PET SNMP VERSION DHCP_REQUEST OPTION _LIST New section 3 4 9 covers configuration of Pv6 based services of the Shelf Manager New section 8 4 adds a ShMM 700 specific description of the user_partition and flash_reset variables in U Boot and details for user partition format changes Sections 3 2 1 3 4 6 4 2 6 3 and 6 4 change instances of the term factory defaults to alternate terms
145. MB 0 This daemon is also able to collect trace data from HPM 2 compliant management controllers in the shelf forwarded via RMCP connections between the daemon and those management controllers Even though this trace data is not necessarily only from IPMB the name IPMB trace daemon is still used The collected data is either stored into a file in a local or NFS mounted file system available on all ShMM variants or transferred directly to the GUI client on a separate platform available on ShMM 500 1500 only e The IPMI trace analyzer This role is typically played by a GUI application that supports viewing and analyzing an IPMB trace collected by the daemon either from a file or directly from a ShMM via a TCP IP connection Wireshark and its terminal oriented variant tshark are two specific applications that can play this role In addition Wireshark and tshark can also collect and analyze IPMI packets that are transferred over an Internet Protocol IP based network via RMCP or RMCP both of which are layered above UDP 5 1 In This Section This section contains the topics listed below Just click on a topic to go to it e PMB Trace Collection Daemon ipmb traced e PMI Trace Analyzer e Collecting and Analyzing a Trace Using the GUI and Command Line Tools 5 2 IPMB Trace Collection Daemon ipmb_traced The IPMB trace daemon can operate in unattended trace mode or controlled trace mode In the unattended trace mode the trace dat
146. MI ATC Req Get Device ID seq 0x03 264 34 408530 I2C 2 0x09 IPMI ATC Req Get Device ID seq 0x03 265 34 457179 I2C 1 0x09 IPMI ATC Req Get Device ID seq 0x03 266 34 457680 I2C 2 0x09 IPMI ATC Req Get Device ID seq 0x03 267 34 458276 I2C 2 0x09 IPMI ATC Req Get Device ID seq 0x03 268 34 458709 I2C 1 0x09 IPMI ATC Req Get Device ID seq 0x03 269 49 438130 I2C 1 0x09 IPMI ATC Req Get Device ID seq 0x19 270 49 438130 I2C 2 0x09 IPMI ATC Req Get Device ID seq 0x19 271 49 439784 I2C 2 0x09 IPMI ATC Req Get Device ID seq 0x19 272 49 440248 I2C 1 0x09 IPMI ATC Req Get Device ID seq 0x19 273 49 440783 I2C 1 0x09 IPMI ATC Req Get Device ID seq 0x19 1 274 49 441199 I2C 2 0x09 IPMI ATC Req Get Device ID seq 0x19 b Frame 1 7 bytes on wire 7 bytes captured b Inter Integrated Circuit Data b Intelligent Platform Management Interface 0000 02 18 e6 20 bO 01 2f re A TCP 192 168 1 65 lt live capture in pro Packets 274 Displayed 274 Ma Profile Default The upper frame shows a list of captured messages that provides basic information about each IPMB message The list can be sorted by the contents of each field as a key Release 3 5 1 192 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide In an IPMB trace analyzer usage this frame displays the full list of collected IPMB messages For each message the following basic information is provided Table 21 IPMB Message List Basic Information GUI FRAME FIELD INTERPRETATIO
147. Manager when detecting an IPMC that supports Extended Inactive State Management attempts to turn on the extended management power and enable corresponding communication ports on that IPMC Subsequently the Shelf Manager maintains extended management power and corresponding communication ports while the IPMC is in state M1 If this parameter is FALSE the Shelf Manager does not manage extended management power on IPMCs this mode of operation is compatible with previous releases of the Shelf Manager that lacked HPM 2 support Release 3 5 1 56 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide TYPE DEFAULT DESCRIPTION CAN BE OBTAINED FROM SHELF FRU INFO HPM2 ENABLE __ Boolean FALSE Enables HPM 2 Extended Inactive No SHMM INACTIV State Management support in the E STATE physical Shelf Manager on non HPDL systems and on HPDL systems where extended management power or extended ports are not specified explicitly In this mode no additional extended management power is requested but both cross connect ports stay available in the inactive state M1 With the default value of this parameter FALSE Shelf Manager operation is compatible in this area with previous releases Release 3 5 1 57 August 17 2015 HPM2 CLIENT MIRROR_CHANN EL Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide TYPE Number DEFAULT DESCRIPTION CAN BE OBTAINED FROM SHELF FRU INFO This configurat
148. Manager IPv6 Connection records in the Shelf FRU Information as defined in PICMG 3 0 R3 0 as amended by ECN 3 0 3 0 001 If a Shelf Manager IPv6 Connection record in the Shelf FRU Information contains one or two IPv6 addresses or static router addresses such definition s take s precedence over all other settings for the corresponding channel and is are propagated to the LAN configuration parameters for the relevant channel Note that unlike the IPv4 case multiple IPv6 addresses can be assigned to a single network interface According to the specification multiple records can be specified to define settings separately for different LAN channels In the Shelf Manager case multiple Shelf Manager IPv6 Connection records are handled similarly to multiple Shelf Manager IPv4 Connection records see section 3 4 2 2 for details In particular the first Shelf Manager IPv6 Connection record defines IPv6 settings for the first network interface or for both network interfaces in the Active Standby mode The second record if present defines settings for the second network interface in Active Active mode In addition the command Get Shelf Manager IP Addresses can be used by a System Manager to retrieve information about IPv6 addresses in addition to IPv4 addresses of both the active and backup Shelf Managers See the Shelf Manager External Interfaces Reference for further details on the IPv6 related LAN configuration parameters The Shelf M
149. N No The index number of the message in the trace Time Message date and time stamp displayed as an Offset from the first packet The time stamp obtained on the target is available in the detailed packet information in the bottom frame Source The IPMB the message was captured on This field is either 12C 1 for IPMB A or I2C 2 for IPMB B Destination Destination 12C address of the message in 7 bit format This field is for IPMB events Protocol The type of the captured message This field can be one of the following IPMI ATCA for an IPMI ATCA formatted message EVENT for an IPMB event I2C READorI2C WRITE fora raw 2C transaction Info Basic information about the captured message or event The middle frame provides the protocol break down and data interpretation for a message selected in the message list provided in the upper frame In an IPMB trace analyzer usage this frame provides interpretation of the layered contents of the message Three protocol layers are supported e Layer 1 provides low level information about a message such as the frame size arrival time relative to the start of the trace and the frame protocol i2c ipmi for IPMI messages e Layer 2 includes physical IPMB 0 and 12C information such as the bus the message was captured on IPMB A or IPMB B and the destination 12C address of the frame e Layer 3 is available only for IPMI ATCA messages and provides message header
150. N PARAMETERS US E DHCP is TRUE The detailed syntax for this value is defined in section 4 10 4 Yes BOARD LAN PA RAMETERS USE _DHCP Boolean FALSE lf TRUE use DHCP to retrieve board module LAN configuration parameters If this parameter is FALSE the following options are available e If the Shelf FRU Information contains one or more Board AMC LAN Configuration Parameters multirecords use these to retrieve the board module LAN configuration parameters e Otherwise if the LAN configuration parameters file exists on the ShMM use this file to retrieve the board module LAN configuration parameters e Otherwise Shelf Manager assignment of board module LAN configuration parameters is not available Yes Release 3 5 1 42 August 17 2015 CARRIER Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide TYPE String 16 DEFAULT PPS DESCRIPTION The name of the specific carrier board on which the ShMM is installed CAN BE OBTAINED FROM SHELF FRU INFO No CARRIER OPTI ONS String 256 Variable The carrier specific options defined separately for each supported carrier By default this parameter is set from the environment variable CARRIER_ OPTIONS No CONSOLE _ LOGG ING ENABLED Boolean FALSE Output log messages to the console on which the Shelf Manager was started No COOLING EXHA UST_SENSOR_L IST String 32 oy un
151. No Release 3 5 1 45 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide DEFAULT DESCRIPTION CAN BE OBTAINED FROM SHELF FRU INFO CTCA_HEALTHY Number 0 CompactPCI shelves only The time No _TIMEOUT in seconds during which the Shelf Manager waits for the HEALTHY signal to appear when powering on a CompactPCl board If the HEALTHY signal does not appear within the specified time the Shelf Manager deactivates the board O the default stands for infinity CTCA_INITIAL Number 15 CompactPCI shelves only The initial No _FAN_LEVEL fan speed in the range 0 15 that Shelf Manager applies to fan trays in CompactPCI shelves 0 corresponds to the slowest and 15 to the fastest possible speed DEFAULT GATE P address None The default IP address used for the No WAY_IP_ADDRE gateway for shelf external RMCP ss based communication if the corresponding parameter is set to 0 0 0 0 inthe IPMI LAN Configuration Parameters for channel 1 If a non zero gateway IP address is provided in the LAN Configuration Parameters the value provided in the Shelf Manager configuration file is ignored DEFAULT _GATE P address None The default IP address used forthe No WAY_IP_ADDRE gateway for shelf external RMCP SS2 based communication on the second network interface if the corresponding parameter is set to 0 0 0 0 inthe IPMI LAN Configuration Parameters for channel 2 If a non zero gateway IP
152. P address To toggle the least significant bit in an IP address it is sufficient to add 1 if the IP address is even or subtract 1 if the IP address is odd On the ShMM with the even hardware address the assignment of IP addresses looks like this e usb0 192 168 1 12 since the file etc readhwaddr is present the least significant bit should be set to zero e usb1 192 168 1 140 toggling the least significant non zero bit of the netmask On the ShMM with the odd hardware address the assignment of IP addresses looks like this e usb0 192 168 1 141 toggling the least significant bit of the IP address and the least significant non zero bit of the netmask e usb1 192 168 1 13 toggling the least significant bit of the IP address Starting from Shelf Manager release 2 8 0 data transferred over the Software Redundancy Interface can be compressed A configuration variable Release 3 5 1 94 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide REDUNDANCY_COMPRESSION_THRESHOLD specifies the threshold for message size messages that are bigger than this threshold are compressed by the gzip algorithm before sending and uncompressed after receiving Smaller messages are sent in uncompressed form The default value of the threshold is 1 which effectively turns compression off for compatibility with previous Shelf Manager releases Since previous releases of the Shelf Manager do not understand compressed data compression should be turned on only if b
153. P ranges and the access login and password for example A 192 16 Allow any address that begins with 192 16 D Deny from other IP connections cgi bin username password where password is generated via the httpd m password command 161 udp SNMP server with ShM SNMP interface 161 udp6 Activated by the etc re common script if the U Boot variable start_rc2_daemons is set to y to disable the SNMP server comment out the corresponding line in the script The SNMP server supports the configuration file etc snmpd conf The validation criteria for incoming SNMP requests are hardcoded in this configuration file For SNMP v1 v2c the community string in an incoming request must be public For SNMP version 3 requests the user name in an incoming request must be overlord These parameters can however be changed by editing the configuration file etc snmpd conf On ShMM 700 the SNMP server handles requests over both IPv6 and IPv4 To disable IPv6 support comment out the agentaddress and com2sec 6 directives in the configuration file 514 tcp RSH server Activated by the etc inetd conf file to disable the RSH server comment out the she11 line in that file Runin rshd help to see list of supported arguments that can be specified Release 3 5 1 143 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide PORT NUMBERITYPE NETWORK SERVICE DESCRIPTION 623 udp ShM RMCP interface Activated by the etc re commo
154. PDL HPDL_ON_SUBSIDIARY_FRUS ISOLATE MUX _ON GPIO8 PET FORMAT SWAPPED CROSS CONNECTS ENABLE DIRECT SHELF_FRU_ WRITE Modifies the description of the configuration parameter SWITCHOVER_ON_HANDLE_ OPEN to reflect that programmatic deactivation also triggers a switchover e Section 3 4 2 2 describes the second instance of the Shelf Manager IP Connection record in the Shelf FRU Information as the source of the IP address netmask and default gateway for the second RMCP network interface New section 3 4 2 3 describes support for site dependent ShMC cross connects New section 3 6 describes configuring Carrier and Shelf Attributes using HPDL the Pigeon Point Hardware Platform Description Language e New section 3 7 describes configuring the cooling management strategy on HPDL based platforms Section 3 8 specifies that the section applies only to systems where HPDL is not used New section 3 13 describes how to configure the Platform Event Trap format Section 4 4 1 describes the event message format for the Redundancy and CPLD state sensor e Section 4 4 3 augments the list of reboot causes that are reported by the reboot reason sensor New section 4 7 describes the cooling state sensors Section 4 8 adds information about the direct deadlock detection mechanism Section 7 changes the heading structure to eliminate an unnecessary heading level Release 3 5 1 279 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide C 10 Relea
155. PI_SNMP_SUBAGENT should be set to TRUE 3 14 3 IntegralHPI Client Configuration The HPI interface is a C language function call interface To use it across a network boundary a remote procedure call RPC protocol must be used IntegralHPI is compatible with the RPC protocol implemented in OpenHPI www openhpi org This means that OpenHPI client utilities and libraries can be used to communicate with IntegralHPI in the same way as they can communicate with an OpenHPI daemon IntegralHP accepts an OpenHPI library connection to the TCP port 4743 which is the default for an OpenHPI daemon Currently the recommended approach for client configuration is the following e Download OpenHPI distribution release 2 10 2 12 2 14 or 2 16 from www openhpi org configure it build and install on the client system If you have access to Pigeon Point OpenHPI Pigeon Point s distribution of OpenHPI for either of the above OpenHPI releases you can use it instead of the original distribution Release 3 5 1 141 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide e Set the environment variable OPENHPI_DAEMON_HOST to the RMCP IP address of the target Shelf Manager e Use the OpenHPI client library which is located by default in usr local 1ib 1libopenhpi so to link to client applications Note The OpenHPI library Libopenhpi so 2 from the Pigeon Point OpenHPI 2 12 0 1 release or from the Pigeon Point OpenHPI 2 14 0 0 release and higher is st
156. RELERSE S Ua s E Gti 284 RELEASE SA unpenn E T 285 RELEASES 5O aieas ansaan Aa aa aAa aa Aa Ea aao e AE daa aTa 285 RELEASES 520 1 ine onenean i Ana aa Ae aAA a aE AE aA RE a Ea 285 RELEASE 9 5 lanaa i a a aa a EE Aa E aa da aE 286 Release 3 5 1 6 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide Figures Figure 1 Management Aspects and Potential Pigeon Point Product Sites in an Example AdvancedTCA Shelt ccccccsccccseseceeeeeeceeeenaeceeeeecaeeeeaaeseeaaecaeeeceaeeseaaesgeaeeseeeeesaesseaaesseneeeaas 13 Figure 2 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager Architecture and ConteXt 0 cccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaees 17 Figure 3 Implementation Options for SAMC Cross Connects ccccccceeeeeeeeceeeeeceeeeeaeeeeneeesaees 88 Figure 4 Dual Star Radial IPMB 0 Topology cceecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeseneeseeeesaeeesaaeeeneeeeaas 164 Figure 5 Redundant Dual Star Radial IPMB 0 Topology ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseaeeeeeeeeneeeeaas 165 Figure 6 Main Window IPMB trace analysis 0 ccceceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeenaeeeseeaaeeeeeeaeeeeneaas 192 Figure 7 Main Window IPMI over network trace analysis eccceeeeseeeeeeeneeeeeeenaeeeeeeaeeeeeenas 194 Figure 8 Open Capture File Window ccccccceeeeeececeeeeeeeaeeeeeee cence caeeesaaeeseaeeseeeesaeeesaeeeeeeeeaas 197 Figure 9 GUI Main Window Unattended mode cccccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeseeeeesaeeesaeeeeeeeeaas 197 Figure 10
157. RK and SEL_LOW_WATERMARK The first parameter relates to the percentage of free entries in the SEL and the second one relates to the percentage of occupied entries in the SEL When the percentage of free SEL entries falls below SEL_HIGH_ WATERMARK the truncation thread wakes up and starts deleting the oldest entries from the SEL u using the IPMI command Delete SEL Entry The thread works until the percentage of occupied entries in the SEL falls below SEL_LOW_WATERMARK then it stops and stays dormant until the percentage of free SEL entries falls below the SEL HIGH WATERMARK again This algorithm is enabled by default but can be turned off by setting the configuration variable SYSTEM MANAGER TRUNCATES SEL to TRUE In that case automatic truncation is turned off but the Shelf N Manager assists s the System Manager by indicating the current state of the SEL via the sensor SEL State of the type Event Logging Enabled as follows in accordance with the IPMI 2 0 specification e The reading returned by that sensor is equal to the percentage of the SEL that is occupied 0 to 100 e The sensor assumes the state SEL Almost Full 5h when the percentage of free entries in the SEL falls below the high watermark the value of the configuration parameter SEL_HIGH_ WATERMARK An event is generated in that case and placed in the SEL Event Data Byte 3 of the event contains the percentage of the SEL that is occupied No event if generated for this state
158. ROM SHELF FRU INFO Yes NO MO Ml EVE NT_AT STARTU P Boolean FALSE If TRUE the physical Shelf Manager does not send an M0 gt M1 hot swap event when the Shelf Manager application is restarted on the SAMM the event is sent only the first time after the ShMM is plugged into a shelf The default value is FALSE for backward compatibility No PEF _USE_KEYE D_ALARMS Boolean FALSE If TRUE the Shelf Manager uses special methods of managing TELCO alarms raised via PEF as OEM actions Each event condition that causes a TELCO alarm is counted separately in this case so that if a specific alarm is raised due to multiple event conditions it stays raised while any of these conditions stay asserted No Release 3 5 1 68 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide TYPE DEFAULT DESCRIPTION CAN BE OBTAINED FROM SHELF FRU INFO Number 0 Specifies the format of the Platform Yes Event Traps that are sent by the Shelf Manager as the Alert action initiated by event processing in the Platform Event Filtering facility The values are defined as follows e 0 the default IPMI format defined by IPMI Platform Event Trap Format v1 0 specification e 1 plain text format all the event details are sent as plain ASCII text in a single variable e 2 multi variable format each event field is encoded as a separate variable defined in PET FORMAT PPS PET MIB PET OEM WITH
159. Rs into the FRU Information for a specific FRU e g a fan tray This information is used by the Shelf Manager to amend the attributes of that FRU from the attributes for that FRU that are specified in the HPDL chassis definition The following information about the FRU is supplied in the chassis definition and cannot be redefined by the HPDL data in the FRU e FRU site type and number e Presence signal definition Device selection definitions can be redefined by the HPDL data in the FRU however a problem arises when several slots exist in the chassis for the same type of the FRU and addresses of devices of the FRU are different between different slots In that case it is not possible to define device location information on the FRU level it is possible to do that only on the chassis level This consideration limits the possibilities of redefining device information on the FRU level It is not necessary to have both HPDL data and SDRs in a given FRU Information area only HPDL data or only SDRs may be present For example to change the power consumption of the FRU it is sufficient to have only HPDL data To change certain sensor attributes e g the conversion formula default threshold values or default hysteresis it is sufficient to have only SDRs One problem with using HPDL data in a specific FRU is how to correlate the sensor numbers in the description to the actual sensor numbers The sensor numbers are assigned within an IPM control
160. S ramdisk run ramargs addmisc bootm 80400000 81200000 nfs tftpboot 80800000 S bootfile run nfsargs addip addmisc bootm nfsargs setenv bootargs root dev nfs rw nfsroot serverip rootpath quiet quiet rc_ifconfig n ramargs setenv bootargs root dev ram rw ramdisk sentry shmm500 rfs rootpath rootfs rmcpaddr 192 168 0 2 serverip 192 168 0 7 timezone UTC For ShMM 1500 addip setenv bootargs bootargs ip ipaddr serverip gatewayip netmask hostname ipdevice addmisc setenv bootargs bootargs quiet console console baudrate bootargs root dev ram rw console ttys0 115200 bootcmd run ramargs addmisc bootm kernel start rfs_start bootdelay 3 bootfile sentry shmm1500 kernel baudrate 115200 console ttys0 ethaddr 00 50 c2 3f xx yy ethladdr 00 50 c2 3f xx 2z netmask 255 255 0 0 Release 3 5 1 32 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide hostname shmm1500 gatewayip 192 168 0 1 ipdevice etho ipladdr 192 168 1 2 ipldevice ethl re2 etc re carrier3 ipaddr 192 168 0 22 start _rc2 daemons y flash reset n password reset n logging ram net tftpboot 400000 bootfile tftpboot 1200000 ramdisk run ramargs addmisc bootm 400000 1200000 nfs tftpboot 400000 S bootfile run nfsargs addip addmisc bootm nfsargs setenv bootargs root dev nfs rw nfsroot serverip rootpath quiet quiet re_ifconfig n ramargs setenv bootargs root dev ra
161. S Eee re vagttbe wy a ssa eesaatemestaeey 279 C 8 RELEASE 2 5 Una a soc codunsaeteewvasconcuusveutevk sede oeunesvaocvesssaccevessloe dh eeaactunpeaiery 279 C 9 RELENE 2 OA in E E T 279 G10 RECEASE e E A nee 280 Si R E T E E E E A 280 G12 RELEASE 2 6 orish anaapa aaa aaa Ea R EAEE eaa AE a aaa 280 Release 3 5 1 5 August 17 2015 C 13 C 14 C 15 C 16 C 17 C 18 C 19 C 20 C 21 C 22 C 23 C 24 C 25 C 26 C 27 C 28 C 29 C 30 C 31 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide RELEASE 2 6 Ahoia iernii EU EErEE EIEE OEE EIRA E EARO EG E wadeed nthe EE 280 RELEASE 2 GA 2 i cszeciei chad ceedvi es denengttveeeyaee UE EEEREN EENAA EE EEEE E EEEE 281 RELEASE 2 GAA uien erneennee i oriens ENE ERER DEE EUERE AEE AEA RENE EAA 281 RELEASE 227 0 eiar nn aa ee a ea a aaa aa aa a Aaaa 281 RELEASE 220 1 sss scess ccd te tan ids coaweciictcas fay sisiinnscede a e A a Ai aaa aa aS 282 RELEASE 2672 ceuvssncseaensdy coapuanadeagh ee a a e a aa i aaa aaia iaaa 282 RELEASE 267 8 ox cee ctdte tan ids coaweciicteaza aE a S a e A a Ai aaa aa iaa 282 RELEASE 2 TM cess snc seaenidy soapeanaticagh aeaa a a ea a a aa aaa Aiaia 282 RECEASE 2 870 EE E A E A N N a eee eae dered 282 PREEEASE 2 021 scacvcgesed2uy agdeteniusGtot wes scoisaastettvnasie b suscil aiteueenabees 283 PRECEASE 2 0 22s ooe sctirices ened ccd pvacecne E E sitet 283 RELEASE SO Ouar a E iGer 283 RELEASE 9T lanae aonana Aa aaia aAA E AEA Ea Aa o aA AE da aE 284 PRECEASE T2 Uapi E ET ates 284
162. SH server 22 tcp 6 Activated via the etc inetd conf file to disable the SSH server comment out the ssh line in that file Run sshd help to see the list of supported arguments that can be specified On ShMM 700 only the SSH server listens to both IPv6 and IPv4 sockets so SSH sessions to a ShMM 700 can be established over both IPv6 and IPv4 Release 3 5 1 142 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide PORT NUMBERITYPE NETWORK SERVICE DESCRIPTION 23 tcp Telnet server Activated via the etc inetd conf file to disable the Telnet server comment out the telnet line in that file Run telnetd help to see the list of supported arguments that can be specified NOTE On ShMM 700 only the telnet server can be configured to listen to IPv6 sockets To achieve that it is necessary to replace tcp with tcp6 in the corresponding line in the etc inetd conf file telnet stream tcp6 nowait root bin telnetd This option is turned off by default because the telnet server does not correctly show the peer IP address in the system logs in the case of an IPv6 connection 80 tcp HTTP server with the ShM Web interface Activated by the etc rce common script if the U Boot variable start_rc2_daemons is set to y to disable the HTTP server comment out the corresponding line in the script The HTTP server supports the configuration file etc httpd conf file where it is possible to specify allowed and denied I
163. Sensor I2C 2 gt 0x41 IPMI ATCA Req Get Sensor I2C 2 gt 0x10 IPMI ATCA Rsp Get Sensor Use the V option to obtain a detailed dump of the messages use x option to obtain a hexadecimal dump of messages as well tshark r ipmb_traced log x V Frame 1 8 bytes on wire 8 bytes captured Arrival Time Jun 24 2008 20 58 03 238567000 Time delta from previous captured frame 0 000000000 seconds Time delta from previous displayed frame 0 000000000 seconds Time since reference or first frame 0 000000000 seconds Frame Number 1 Frame Length 8 bytes Capture Length 8 bytes Frame is marked False Protocols in frame i2c ipmi Inter Integrated Circuit Data Bus I2C 1 Target address 0x41 Flags 0x00000000 Intelligent Platform Management Interface No corresponding response Header Get S from 0x20 to 0x82 Target Address Target LUN 0001 00 Release 3 5 1 nsor Reading 0x82 0x00 NetFN Sensor Event Request 00 Target LUN 0x00 NetFn Sensor Event Request Request 0x04 0x04 198 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide Header checksum Ox6e correct Source Address 0x20 Source LUN 0x00 SeqNo 0x28 00 Source LUN 0x00 1010 00 Sequence Number 0x28 Command Get Sensor Reading 0x2d Data Sensor Number 2 Data checksum 0x11 correct 0000 82 10 6e 20 a0 2d 02 11 n Frame 2 11 bytes on wire 11 bytes captured Arr
164. Shelf Manager if the main 12C bus remains inaccessible after the resetting the 12C switch multiplexer If the configuration parameter ISOLATE MUX _SWITCHOVER_THRESHOLD is defined as a non zero value it specifies the maximum consecutive number of attempts to reset the switch multiplexer if after that number of attempts the main 12C bus is still inaccessible a switchover to the backup Shelf Manager is initiated and the active Shelf Manager is rebooted WARNING The ISOLATE _MUX_SWITCHOVER_THRESHOLD configuration parameter can ONLY be used with 12C switch multiplexor devices that disable or isolate all 12C channels after a reset The default logical 12C bus number on which the 12C multiplexer resides can be changed with the configuration parameter ISOLATE MUX _BUS 4 9 2 l C Bus Fault Isolation HPDL based Approach Multiple Multiplexers or Switches In this mode the isolation algorithm is controlled by the HPDL description of the carrier and the shelf The original isolation approach in this case must be turned off that is the configuration variable ISOLATE _MUX_ON_GPIO8 must be set to FALSE in the configuration files Release 3 5 1 176 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide The typical HPDL description of an 12C multiplexer supporting reset looks as follows DEVICE Multiplexor PCA9545 5 0x70 SIGNALS Channels Channels 6 7 8 9 Reset 8 Muxlsolated IsolatedChannelMask MuxisiCh1 Channel1_
165. TURE SHMM 500R SHMM 1500R SHMM 700R CPU NetLogic Au1550 Freescale MPC8343 Freescale i MX28 Processor core s 333 MHz MIPS 32 250 MHz PowerPC 297 MHz ARM9 SDRAM 64 or 128 Mbytes 128 Mbytes with ECC 128 Mbytes Flash 161 32 or 64 Mbytes 32 or 64 Mbytes 64 Mbytes Ethernet Dual 10 100 Mbit Dual 10 100 Mbit Dual 10 100 Mbit Serial Two one with modem Two one with modem Three one with controls controls modem controls and one with flow control Universal Serial Bus Host and device ports No Host and device ports USB PCI interface to No Yes No carrier devices Duplex IPMB 0 Yes Yes Yes ATCA watchdog timer Yes Yes Yes Real time clock Yes Yes Yes optionally battery backed on ShMM carrier General Purpose I O Nine Nine Ten 1 For new shipments after about August 2008 the low end ShMM 500R model has 32 Mbytes of Flash Previously the low end model had 16 Mbytes of Flash Release 3 5 1 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide FEATURE SHMM 500R SHMM 1500R SHMM 700R signals Shelf Manager Yes via CPLD Yes via FPGA Field Yes via FPGA Field hardware redundancy Complex Programmable Logic Programmable Logic and hot swap Programmable Logic Array Array interface via on Device board PLD as indicated High speed Multiple ports SPI SPI interface s to on supporting either SPI carrier devices or SMBus with the l
166. The user makes a call to rupgrade in upgrade mode or in HPM 1 upgrade mode to initiate the upgrade procedure The call can be made either locally from the ShMM serial console or remotely over the network via telnet rsh ssh or any equivalent The user waits for rupgrade to reboot the ShMM A user who has access to the ShMM serial console can see the messages produced there by U Boot firmware and the Linux kernel and therefore can easily monitor the status of the reboot However in the case of a remote connection to the ShMM the status of the reboot can be more difficult to determine For example a telnet or ssh based virtual terminal connection usually times out on the reboot of the ShMM The user can either assume that the upgrade was successful or wait for some time reconnect to the ShMM and remotely invoke rupgrade status in order to find out the current upgrade session status The amount of time to wait is determined by the initialization time of the ShMM the time needed to boot the Linux kernel and start the proper Release 3 5 1 254 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide network daemons and by the time needed to validate the functionality of the newly installed firmware image set e On the ShMM the startup script etc xrc unconditionally makes a call to rupgrade status The returned value indicates whether there is an upgrade session in progress a value 0 is returned no upgrade session is in progress a posit
167. This mechanism allows redefining certain configuration variables for a specific instance or specific type of shelf Configuration variables are stored in the FRU Information as a sequence of OEM type multirecords similar to the multirecords defined in the xTCA specifications These multirecords have the Pigeon Point manufacturer ID 00040Ah and the manufacturer specific record type is 10 The concatenated contents of these multirecords represent the configuration variables in the same text format as in configuration files but optionally compressed using gzip Release 3 5 1 81 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide Some restrictions apply to the configuration variables in the Shelf FRU Information First not all variables can be redefined from the Shelf FRU Information Table 7 indicates for each variable whether it can be redefined from the Shelf FRU Information Second retrieval of configuration variables from the Shelf FRU Information must be explicitly enabled for the Shelf Manager via the configuration variable SHELF_MANAGER CONFIGURATION_IN SHELF _FRU_INFO By default this variable is set to FALSE This is done to allow the Shelf Manager to start in the case of a bad configuration stored in the Shelf FRU Information and for compatibility with previous releases of the Shelf Manager 3 3 2 1 Using the FRU Info Compiler to Place Configuration Variables in the Shelf FRU Information The FRU Information Compiler is a Pigeo
168. This non Ethernet SRI is implemented via a pair of cross connected USB links on the ShMM 500R and ShMM 700R and with a high speed UART based link on the ShMM 1500R The HRI ensures that three key items of coordination status are available to each Shelf Manager instance e Presence each Shelf Manager instance knows whether the other instance is present in the shelf e Health each instance knows whether the other instance considers itself healthy e Switchover Request the backup instance can force a switchover if necessary The HRI is implemented differently in each of the three ShMM families Figure 2 shows other aspects of the architecture and context of the Pigeon Point Shelf Manager as well These include the Shelf Adaptation Layer and the shelf description that drives it and the main Shelf Manager subsystems that implement the features summarized in Section 2 4 1 2 4 3 System Manager Interface Another major subsystem of the Pigeon Point Shelf Manager implements the System Manager Interface System Manager is a logical concept that may include software as well as human operators in the swivel chairs of an operations center The Pigeon Point Shelf Manager provides a rich set of System Manager Interface options which provide different mechanisms of access to similar kinds of information and control regarding a shelf Figure 2 shows the System Manager Interface options supported by the Pigeon Point Shelf Manager On
169. _ENABLE Boolean TRUE Enables HPM 3 compliant format of No DHCP client IDs when retrieving addressing information for the logical and physical Shelf Manager s over DHCP If this parameter is FALSE the Shelf Manager uses the old format of DHCP client IDs this mode of operation is compatible with previous releases of the Shelf Manager that did not support HPM 3 IGNORE_FAILE Boolean TRUE This parameter tells the Shelf Yes D DIRECTED P Manager to ignore board power down OWER_DOWN failure s during a Critical Alert and not to power down all boards in the shelf in this case This parameter also instructs the Shelf Manager to ignore board power level decrease failure s during a Major Alert and not to decrease power level for all boards in the shelf in this case If this parameter is FALSE all boards in the shelf are powered down if board s that caused the Critical Alert cooling state fail to power off also the power level for all boards in the shelf is decreased if decreasing power level fails for board s that caused the Major Alert cooling state Release 3 5 1 59 August 17 2015 INITIALIZATI ON SCRIPT Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide TYPE String 256 DEFAULT DESCRIPTION This parameter specifies a command line that is executed by the active Shelf Manager during initialization This initialization script can perform additional platform specific initialization of the Shelf
170. a as a result all applicable options must be specified in the command line at startup Another limitation of tshark compared to Wireshark is that tshark can only provide back references for the packets the links Response to and Response in that allow the user Release 3 5 1 209 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide to navigate across packets quickly This limitation results from the fact that tshark is optimized for speed and thus calls the packet dissector only once per packet The verbose tshark capture in section 5 4 1 shows an example of this limitation The description of the first packet indicates No corresponding message while the description of the second packet shows Response to 1 To filter messages in tshark both in controlled and unattended mode use the R option followed by the text of the filter expression in quotes For example to select and dump in details the messages with the destination address 0x20 and the source address 0x82 as in the previous section when reading from a trace file use the following command line tshark r ipmb traced log V R ipmi header target 0x20 amp amp ipmi header source 0x82 The T option can be used to specify the format of the output The following formats are supported plain text PostScript PDML Packet Details Markup Language based on XML PSML Packet Summary Markup Language based on XML and so called field format For example the fo
171. a is collected into a file in a ShMM local or NFS mounted file system When the trace collection has been completed the file can be transferred to the development host then read and reviewed via the trace analyzer In the controlled trace mode the trace data is transferred directly to the trace analyzer via a TCP IP connection The trace analyzer can display and analyze the collected data on a real time basis The IPMB trace collection daemon ipmb traced runs on the ShMM and takes the role of IPMB trace collector Release 3 5 1 188 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide The daemon interacts with the IPMB specific extensions in the Linux kernel to capture IPMB traffic on IPMB 0 Specifically the promiscuous mode of 12C adapter operation is used to capture all messages on the IPMB Promiscuous mode configures the adapter to receive all IPMB messages on the bus not just the messages that are addressed to or issued by the ShMM itself However promiscuous mode is supported only on the ShMM 1500 On the ShMM 500 and ShMM 700 due to hardware limitations adapters can only receive messages that are issued by or directed to a ShMM itself so promiscuous mode does not have its intended effect In addition to IPMB 0 traffic the daemon can also collect IPM messaging traces from boards or modules in the shelf via RMCP sessions with the management controllers on those boards or modules To begin collecting a trace the dae
172. a message has been selected its raw contents are shown in the bottom frame of the main window both in hex and ASCII interpretations The middle frame of the main window provides protocol interpretations of the message data By clicking on the right arrow down arrow or GUI elements you can choose a particular protocol layer you wish to analyze Release 3 5 1 207 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide Figure 15 IPMI Protocol Layers IPMB trace TCP 192 168 1 65 Capturing Wireshark 0X File Edit View Go Capture Analyze Statistics Help N yN 4 gt me AA a a S M 4T BR aaan gvm g Filter Expression Clear Apply No Time Source Destination Protocol Info rete Rent ee es SL A LITLE AY CRT OTIS 237 6 761618 I2C 1 0x76 IPMI ATC Req Get Device ID seq 0x3e 238 6 762032 I2C 2 0x76 IPMI ATC Req Get Device ID seq 0x3e 239 6 762581 I2C 2 0x77 IPMI ATC Req Get Device ID seq 0x3f 240 6 762993 I2C 1 0x77 IPMI ATC Req Get Device ID seq 0x3f 241 6 763541 I2C 1 0x78 IPMI ATC Req Get Device ID seq 0x00 D 242 6 763952 I2C 2 0x78 IPMI ATC Req Get Device ID seq 0x00 243 6 764502 I2C 2 0x79 IPMI ATC Req Get Device ID seq 0x01 244 6 764913 I2C 1 CEFE IPMI ATC Req Get Device ID seq 0x01 245 6 765460 T C 1 Ox7a TPMT ATC Rea Get Device TN sea AxA be b Frame 244 7 bytes on wire 7 bytes captured v Inter Integrated Circuit Data Bus I2C 1 Target address 0x79 Flags 0x00000000 v
173. able 31 Flash Partitioning for SAMM 700s 64MB Flash in JFFS2 mode 244 Table 32 Reliable Upgrade Stages cccccccccccesseeceeeeceeeeeesaeseeneeseeeeesaaeseeaaesseneeseaeeeeaaesseneeesaees 246 Table 33 Protocols Recognized in the URLs by the Reliable Upgrade Utility ee 249 Table 34 Standard Source File Names for Upgrade Components ccecceeeeeeeesteeeeeeeeeees 251 Release 3 5 1 8 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide 1 About This Document This document describes the Pigeon Point Shelf Manager This PDF file requires Adobe Acrobat Reader 7 0 for full functionality For a free reader go to http www adobe com 1 1 Shelf Manager Documentation This document is one of two documents in the Shelf Manager documentation set These documents are available in PDF file format The complete set includes Table 1 Shelf Manager Documentation DOCUMENT DESCRIPTION Pigeon Point Shelf Manager This document describes the overall configuration User Guide and use of the Pigeon Point Shelf Manager Pigeon Point Shelf Manager This document describes how to use the Shelf External Interface Reference Manager command line interface web interface Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP interface and Remote Management Control Protocol RMCP interface 1 1 1 Conventions Used in this Document This table describes the textual conventions used in this document Table 2 Conventions Used in th
174. address and usb1 on the Shelf Manager with the odd hardware address are in the same logical network and are not equal to each other e To compute the IP address for usb1 on the Shelf Manager with even hardware address you should take the IP address for usb0 on the same Shelf Manager and toggle the least non zero bit of the network mask This guarantees that the IP addresses for usb0 and usb1 on the Shelf Manager with the even hardware address are in different logical networks e The last step is to compute the IP address for usb0 on the Shelf Manager with the odd hardware address You should either toggle the least significant bit in the IP address for usb1 on the Shelf Manager with the even hardware address or toggle the least non zero bit of the network mask in the IP address for usb0 on the Shelf Manager with odd hardware address The result is the same This guarantees that usb0 on Shelf Manager with the odd hardware address and usb1 on Shelf Manager with the even hardware address are in the same logical network and are not equal Here is an example of deriving IP addresses for the USB network interfaces under the assumption that the following definitions are in etc shelfman conf Release 3 5 1 93 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide REDUNDANCY IP ADDRESS 192 168 1 2 REDUNDANCY NETMASK 255 255 255 128 The least significant non zero bit in the network mask is the 7th bit where smaller bit numbers are less si
175. age_sel variable value The kernel image is loaded at the Lloadaddr address and the RFS image is loaded at the rfsaddr address This command is invoked by ubifs explicitly load _ubifs al t ShMM 700 only U Boot command that loads alternative Linux kernel and RFS images from the Flash drive into RAM Images are selected on the basis of the alt_image variable value The kernel image is loaded at the loadaddr address and the RFS image is loaded at the rfsaddr address This command is invoked by ubi s command if one of the images from the current image set selected by the image_se1 value is broken and there is no reliable upgrade running log_max Specifies the size limit for the syslog file in bytes Default is 250000 When the log file size reaches the limit the file is renamed as a backup file and a new syslog file is started replacing any existing backup so that the maximum space used by the overall syslog is twice the log_ max value log _remote Specifies the IP address for the remote syslog facility By default this option is not set The syslog daemon on Linux systems can be configured to receive messages from remote hosts normally using the r option so using the log_remote setting it is possible to send the ShMM system log to a remote system logging Specifies if messages log file should be maintained in ram or Flash Default is ram which is the recommended option Release 3 5 1 28 August 17 201
176. al c 1863 33 lt INFO gt shmm700_ hal c 1898 File var upgrade boot uImage 0 of device 2 0 cloned to file var upgrade boot uImage 1 of device 2 1 lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1642 Cleaning image var upgrade boot rfs 1 lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1863 Release 3 5 1 264 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide available ALLOW NFO gt shmm700 hal c 1898 File var upgrade boot rfs 0 of device 4 0 oned to file var upgrade boot rfs 1 of device 4 1 NFO gt shmm7 700 hal c 1255 Write storage state available gt not lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1642 Cleaning image 1 sentry shmm700 app lt INFO gt backend c 772 Burning image lt INFO gt backend c 806 2377014 bytes were written from file tmp shmm700 sentry shmm700 app to dev 8 1 lt INFO gt backend c 850 Erasing user data on candidate bank lt INFO gt backend c 860 Copy etc lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1161 Write confirmed 0 gt 0 ALLOW lt INFO gt shmm700_ hal c 1166 Write candidate 1 gt 1 ALLOW lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1235 Write upgrade watchdog 0 gt 1 ALLOW lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1235 Write upgrade watchdog 1 gt 2 ALLOW lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1161 Write confirmed 0 gt 1 ALLOW lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1174 Write upgrade state in progress 2 gt confirmed 4
177. alled with no hook option so that the default mode of copying non volatile data applies only the directory var nvdata and SSH key files are copied On ShMM 700 the reliable upgrade utility places the embedded U Boot kernel RFS images and application package into the candidate locations and makes the candidate image set active The default mode of copying non volatile data applies only the directory var nvdata and SSH key files are copied As with the reliable upgrade facility Pigeon Point recommends upgrading the backup Shelf Manager then the active Shelf Manager After the upgrade of the active Shelf Manager a switchover occurs and the roles of the physical Shelf Managers active vs backup become reversed If it is desired to preserve the original role assignment an additional switchover is needed this can be done via the HPI Shelf Manager Failover control associated with the Virtual Shelf Manager resource Release 3 5 1 272 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide See the Pigeon Point HPI User s Guide for more information and examples of the HPI based Shelf Manager upgrade procedure Release 3 5 1 273 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide Appendix A Converting to ShMM 700 based Shelf Managers in ShMM 500 managed Shelves The ShMM 700 supports converting a live shelf from ShMM 500 based management to ShMM 700 based management without losing manageability of the shelf This support minimiz
178. ally from the ShMM serial console or remotely over the network via telnet rsh ssh or any equivalent The user waits for the rupgrade_tool s to reboot the ShMM If the user is connected to the serial console locally the status of the reboot is obvious from the messages printed by the U Boot firmware and Linux to the serial console If the connection to the ShMM is remote the status of the reboot is less obvious For instance a telnet connection times out on the reboot of the ShMM The user can either assume that the upgrade procedure has been carried out successfully or wait for a certain amount of time required for the upgrade session to complete and then make a call to rupgrade_ tool w again remotely over any of the remote shell tools mentioned above in order to find out the status of the upgrade session The amount of time to wait depends on the size of the upgrade images and the copy protocol used to pull the images to the ShMM as well as actions performed by the image validation script On the ShMM the startup script etc re unconditionally makes a call to rupgrade_ tool c Ifthe call returns a value of 1 indicating that there is no upgrade in progress or an error code value indicating that the upgrade session has failed the startup scripts proceed with the normal mode boot up sequence If however a value of 0 is returned indicating that there is an upgrade session in progress the startup scripts proceed with validation of the sa
179. alue is measured in milliseconds The value O means to not wait and the value 1 means to wait indefinitely Any other value specifies the number of milliseconds that the Shelf Manager waits for the AXle Enumeration Not Ready signal to get cleared If the timeout expires and the signal does not get cleared the Shelf Manager terminates the wait issues an error message and proceeds to the next state of power sequencing No Release 3 5 1 40 August 17 2015 AXIE SEQUENC ING M4_TIMEO UT Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide Number DEFAULT 1 DESCRIPTION Timeout for all AXle modules to reach state M4 This timeout value is measured in milliseconds The value O means to not wait and the value 1 means to wait indefinitely Any other value specifies the number of milliseconds that the Shelf Manager waits for all AXle modules to reach state M4 If the timeout expires and not all AXle modules have reached state M4 the Shelf Manager terminates the wait issues an error message and proceeds to the next state of power sequencing CAN BE OBTAINED FROM SHELF FRU INFO No AXIE_SEQUENC ING WAIT DEL AY Number 100 The delay in milliseconds between successive attempts by the Shelf Manager to poll the state of hardware and software signals and advance the current power sequencing state if it can be advanced No AXIE SYSTEM_ MODULE_IPMB _ ADDRESS Number 0x82 The IPMB a
180. aman mib ma d p a nm am nj m a a afk a na am a aa m m a ma a am am E E e eo oe T eo R po 772222 R I cowl i I Sulit Won i e lt l i o25i I gt ZW 1 i niet 1 I I Z2 j i J TO a an we a ee we we ef ae ae ee ee ee I IO I 1 a ay A G Da vi rot ow l 4 iz upo ia pugz IIl Seah Ta mij TOZO 1 I ic a lt 5 Ini 1 a 4 lI 2 I ET seaside ccm a E a 4 I E i jeg ZS i za 4 mht 4 I o gt l 1 anil 1 ze 1 4 so I I 1 14 eel eyy inl meee aay a Dees you Y I As shown in Figure 2 ShMC cross connects allow both ShMMs to be connected with both Base Interface Hubs This improves system availability because either hubs or ShMMs can switchover independently if necessary ShMC cross connect support requires the use of both ShMM Ethernet links and is implemented in essentially all modern ShMM based shelves that support Shelf Manager redundancy In the now obsolete ShMM 300 family one of the two ShMM Ethernet links was typically routed directly between the two ShMMs and used for the SRI With this arrangement ShMC cross connect support was not possible A non Ethernet link for SRI purposes was introduced with the ShMM 500R and carried forward to the ShMM 1500R and ShMM 700R Given this history a non Ethernet SRI is often referenced elsewhere in this document as an Alternate Software Redundancy Release 3 5 1 17 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide Interface
181. ame DHCP_SERVER_ADDRESS instead of the original name PREFERRED _DHCP_SERVER Section 3 5 2 adds caveats about using the eepromw utility Section 3 5 3 a new section that describes how to set up the Shelf FRU Information using CLI commands Section 3 11 adds a description of how ShMM POST results are reported using the IPMI command Get Self Test Results C 6 Release 2 4 2 Section 3 3 1 adds in a new subsection clarifications for the role of a carrier specific Shelf Manager configuration file in determining the effective values of Shelf Manager configuration variables Release 3 5 1 278 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide C 7 Release 2 4 4 e Section 3 3 4 adds in a new subsection a description of the new configuration parameter VERBOSITY_CONSOLE C 8 Release 2 5 0 e Section 3 3 adds new configuration parameters DETECT_DEADLOCKS EXIT IF HEALTHY LOST IN STANDALONE MODE EXTERNAL EVENT_HANDLER INNER_SEQUENCE_NUMBER_IN SEND MSG RESPONSE IPMC_PRESERVE_ON_ REVISION CHANGE e New section 3 12 describes the new external event handling facility including how to configure and use it New section 4 8 describes the deadlock detection facility Entire document removes coverage of first generation SnMM 300 mezzanine Starting with release 2 5 0 the SAMM 300 is not supported on new releases of the Shelf Manager C 9 Release 2 5 2 e Section 3 3 adds new configuration parameters COOLING_MANAGEMENT H
182. anager does not currently support obtaining IPv6 addresses and other information via the DHCP protocol DHCPv6 from an appropriate server This support is planned for a future release 3 5 Configuring the FRU Information This section describes configuring the Field Replaceable Unit FRU Information 3 5 1 Accessing the Shelf FRU Information According to the ATCA specification the Shelf FRU Information should be redundant at least two copies per shelf and each copy may be represented by separate IPM controllers as FRU 1 Some ATCA shelves adopt this approach fully For such shelves the default configuration file must be changed the variable LOCAL_SHELF_FRU must be set to FALSE This enables a shelf wide search for potential sources of Shelf FRU Information on IPMB 0 Release 3 5 1 112 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide On most ATCA shelves implementing this approach the Shelf FRU Information is accessed via two IPM controllers with known IPMB addresses In this case it is possible to limit the search for Shelf FRU Information to the two pre determined IPMB locations To do this two configuration variables SHELF_FRU_IPMB SOURCE1 and SHELF _FRU_IPMB SOURCE2 must be defined in the configuration file etc shelfman conf These variables are of the Number type and contain the IPMB addresses of the two designated IPM controllers that represent Shelf FRU Information For example to limit the search for the Shelf FRU
183. anager is a Backup Low level exception state bits should be treated as low level errors if set 3 The Shelf Manager is Active with a Backup but Backup is unavailable for switchover 4 The Shelf Manager is a Backup but the remote presence bit is not set 5 The Shelf Manager is a Backup but the remote switchover request bit the remote active bit on ShMM 700 is not set 6 The Shelf Manager is a Backup but the HRI Active bit is set 7 The Shelf Manager is Active with a Backup but the remote presence bit is not set 8 The Shelf Manager is Active with a Backup but the remote healthy bit is not set 9 The Shelf Manager is Active with a Backup but the HRI Active bit is not set Release 3 5 1 158 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide 10 The local presence bit is not set for the current Shelf Manager 11 The Shelf Manager is Active with no Backup but the remote healthy bit is set 12 The Shelf Manager is Active with no Backup but the remote switchover request bit the remote active bit on ShMM 700 is set 13 The Shelf Manager is Active but senses the HRI Active bit set on other ShMM The current reading and state mask of the sensor can be retrieved in many ways e g with the CLI command sensordata The sensor also generates events when the state mask changes The format of the event message is given in the following table BYTE DATA FIELD Event Message Rev 04h IPMI 1 5 and
184. and functioning ShMM The procedure supports upgrade of the U Boot firmware the Linux kernel and the Linux root file system or an arbitrary combination of these three images If a software upgrade attempt fails for instance due to installation of a faulty U Boot firmware image that is not capable of booting the ShMM or a Shelf Manager that can t start the reliable upgrade procedure automatically falls back to the previous version of the firmware in persistent Flash Flash storage on either the ShMM 500 or the ShMM 1500 is divided into two areas When a stable set of firmware is established in one of these areas it is designated the persistent area When new firmware is installed it goes in the other area which is initially designated provisional Once a new set of firmware in the provisional area is validated that area is designated the persistent area and continues in use until a future upgrade cycle starts the process over The reliable upgrade hardware mechanisms ensure that no matter what is installed to the provisional Flash the ShMM always manages to boot from a software copy that is either fully functional or sufficiently sane to determine that that there has been a failure in the upgrade session and consequently take appropriate corrective actions to revert to the safe software copy in persistent Flash At a higher level the reliable upgrade hardware mechanisms are assisted by a software protocol based on logging of the status of t
185. and starts transferring collected data to the analyzer over TCP IP This continues until the GUI terminates the connection The daemon can be terminated by the user via C or the SIGINT signal sent to the daemon process operating as a background Linux application The daemon command line has the following syntax ipmb traced OPTIONS The options are described in the following table Release 3 5 1 189 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide Table 19 Options for the IPMB Trace Collection Daemon OPTION NAME DESCRIPTION u lt file_ name gt Specify a file for collecting trace data in the unattended lt file name gt unattended trace mode By default the file name is var ipmb traced ipmb traced log c Run daemon in the controlled trace mode controlled e Trace IPMB state change events Applies to local events trace mode only d lt usec gt Specify a delay in microseconds for polling the delay lt usec gt IPMB A IPMB B interfaces This option has an effect only if the e events option is enabled If there are IPMB state change events they are extracted and collected at intervals that are no longer than the defined delay but always whenever an IPMB message is received The delay value is specified in a range of 0 to 1000000 microseconds 1 second If the d option is omitted the delay value defaults to 100000 microseconds 0 1 second Applies to local trace mode only
186. and thus the changes you made in U Boot are propagated forward Otherwise the network configuration data is stored on the ShMM Flash file system in the following files var nvdata chl_ param parameters for channel 1 var nvdata chl_param v2 additional parameters for channel 1 Shelf Manager release 2 6 and higher var nvdata chl_ param _ipv6 v2 additional Pv6 related parameters for channel 1 ShMM 700 only starting with Shelf Manager release 3 5 var nvdata ch2_ param parameters for channel 2 var nvdata ch2_param_v2_ additional parameters for channel 2 Shelf Manager release 2 6 and higher var nvdata ch2_ param _ipv6 v2 additional Pv6 related parameters for channel 2 ShMM 700 only starting with Shelf Manager release 3 5 In this latter case the following steps are required to configure the network settings in the Shelf Manager context T First check to see if you are interacting with the active Shelf Manager You only need to make changes on the active Shelf Manager as it updates the backup with the network configuration changes via the redundancy interface Use the hwri command and look for Active in the output of the command see the underlined fragment of the output below The hwri command reports the current state of the hardware redundancy signals on the ShMM exposed through the CPLD on the ShMM 500 and through the FPGA on the ShMM 1500 and ShMM 700 The flags reported by the hwri command are identical for
187. annel 15 bit mask 0x8000 System Payload Interface The default value is 1 trace IPMB 0 only i lt number gt In board trace mode specify the payload instance instance lt number gt number to use for establishing the RMCP session This number must match the IPMI Trace Payload instance number used by the target IPMC for IPMB tracing refer to the board documentation for this number The default value is 1 U lt username gt In board trace mode specify the RMCP user name username lt username gt for establishing the RMCP session with the board The default user name is rmcp Passwords are not used h Display help text and exit help If no options are provided ipmb traced runs in unattended trace mode produces trace data in Ethereal format Wireshark format on the ShMM 700 and puts them in the var ipmb_traced ipmb_ traced 1log file but does not trace IPMB state change events or collect any HPM 2 based IPM controller s trace data This scenario assumes that a separate ShMM application such as the Pigeon Point Shelf Manager assigns IPMB addresses for the ShMM and attaches to the ShMM IPMB interface so that there can be IPMB traffic to trace The trace collection daemon stores the collected data in a file or sends it directly to the analyzer in the form of packets Each packet describes a single IPMB transaction or event and contains the following fields The detailed layout of the fields
188. any key to stop autoboot 0 RUPG upgrade file is not present skipping Loading file uImage 1 to addr 0x42000000 with size 1399152 0x00155970 Loaded from UBIFS cache Loading file rfs 1 to addr 0x46000000 with size 2805717 Ox002acfd5 Loaded from UBIFS cache Booting kernel from Legacy Image at 42000000 Image Name Linux 2 6 34 8 shmm700 Image Type ARM Linux Kernel Image uncompressed Data Size 1399088 Bytes 1 3 MB Load Address 40008000 Entry Point 40008000 Verifying Checksum OK Loading init Ramdisk from Legacy Image at 46000000 Image Name ShMM700 RFS 3 5 1 Image Type ARM Linux RAMDisk Image gzip compressed Data Size 2277767 Bytes 2 2 MB Load Address 00000000 Entry Point 00000000 Verifying Checksum OK Loading Kernel Image OK OK Starting kernel Release 3 5 1 100 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide shmm700 login root 6 Allow the ShMM to start up Please note that the settings that were changed in the U Boot firmware are not necessarily propagated to the Linux environment The reason for this is that the Shelf Manager needs to maintain its own copy of the network configuration data in order to manage failover situations If this is the first time the Shelf Manager has been booted or if the Flash filesystems has been reset prior to bootup then the Shelf Manager uses the network settings provided by U Boot to set up this networking context
189. ariable ALLOW _POWER_UNRELATED FRU _IN CRITICAL_STATE f this variable is set to TRUE a new FRU can be powered up if 1 tl the critical alert state is caused bya temperature sensor that belongs to a different FRU and 2 the critical alert state is not caused by a shelf wide temperature sensor e In addition a fan management strategy is implemented that sets the fan level to the maximum for all fans in the cooling zone in the following cases e f some fans are missing in the shelf based on the fan population specified in the Address Table in the Shelf FRU Information all fan trays that cool the same zone s as the missing ones are set to maximum e f one or more of the fan tachometer sensors have a major or critical threshold crossed a fan is stopped or rotates too slowly all fan trays that cool the same zone s as the underspeed fan s are set to maximum speed The number of simultaneously underspeed fans that cause the remaining fans to go full speed is configurable via the configuration parameter TURBO MODE MIN FAN FAILURES and the default value is 1 Setting this parameter to 0 turns off this feature e The default cooling management strategy optionally supports leaving cold sensitive FRUs that are too cold at the time of shelf startup unpowered until they warm up This may be useful for shelves installed in severe climate conditions A special Pigeon Point OEM specific record must be present in the Shelf FRU Information to activate th
190. ariants A separate edition of this document covers the Entry Level Shelf Manager that is implemented on the SnMM 500RE The ShMM 1500R can be ordered with encryption code present or encryption code removed Each variant has a different United States Export Control Classification Number ECCN The ShMM 500R the ShMM 1500R with encryption code present and the ShMM 700R have an ECCN of 5A002 The SAMM 1500R with the encryption code removed has an ECCN of 5A992 For more information regarding these export classification topics please contact Pigeon Point Systems PPS Release 3 5 1 21 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide 3 Configuration The Shelf Manager application runs on a specialized distribution of Linux For the ShMM 500 and ShMM 1500 the distribution is Monterey Linux see http www pigeonpoint com library html userdocs for a User Guide For the ShMM 700 that distribution is Pigeon Point Linux The lowest layer in both cases is the firmware monitor which is called U Boot on all three ShMM variants 3 1 In This Section This section contains the topics listed below Just click on a topic to go to it Setting Up U Boot Setting Up Shelf Manager Configuration File Setting Up Ethernet Configuring the FRU Information Configuring Carrier and Shelf Attributes using HPDL Configuring the Cooling Management Strategy Configuring Local Sensors Setting the Auxiliary Firmware Revision Setting Up the Clock Settin
191. artitioning Both the SAMM 500 and the ShMM 1500 provide a hardware mechanism that allows swapping of the lower and upper halves of the Flash in the system memory map under control of software running on the CPU This capability is implemented in support of the reliable upgrade procedure for software images in Flash The reliable software upgrade procedure assumes that the Flash device contains two copies of the software located in the lower and upper halves of Flash All SaMMs are shipped with this partitioning in which the Flash device is divided into two equal parts each dedicated to holding one copy of the ShMM software This section assumes that the ShMM is configured to support reliable upgrade including the two separate Flash regions The tables below provide summaries of the Flash partitions maintained on the ShMM in this configuration The exact layout of Flash partitions provided by the FOSL depends on the type of the ShMM and the size of the Flash device installed The following tables provide a summary of the Flash partitions maintained by Linux for each of the ShMM 500 variants Table 23 Flash Partitioning for 16MB Flash ShMM 500s OFFSET IN FLASH SIZE IN DEVICE NODE MOUNTED As CONTENT IN MBYTES MBYTES ON STARTUP 0 0 5 dev mtdchar10 var upgrade The second half of dev mtdblock10 the var upgrade JFFS2 file system 0 5 1 5 dev mtdchar5 Not mounted The other var dev mtdblock5 JFFS2 file system 2 1 dev
192. ate M5 and there is no available backup Shelf Manager the physical IPM controller is not deactivated and stays in M5 indefinitely Release 3 5 1 76 August 17 2015 SWITCHOVER T IMEOUT_ON BR OKEN_LINK Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide Number DEFAULT 1 DESCRIPTION This parameter affects when or whether the Shelf Manager initiates a switchover when the physical network link between the Shelf Manager and the System Manager the RMCP link is broken If the link remains broken for at least the number of seconds given in this parameter a switchover takes place if the link is restored during this timeout period no switchover takes place If the value of this parameter is 1 no automatic switchovers take place on broken RMCP links CAN BE OBTAINED FROM SHELF FRU INFO Yes SYSLOG LOGGI NG ENABLED Boolean TRUE Output log messages to the system log No SYSTEM MANAG ER_TRUNCATES _SEL Boolean FALSE If TRUE the Shelf Manager algorithm for truncating the SEL automatically is disabled the System Manager is responsible for truncating the SEL by monitoring the value of the sensor SEL State of the type Event Logging Disabled on the Shelf Manager and removing events from the SEL by sending the Delete SEL Entry command to the Shelf Manager No TACHOMETER _T HRESHOLD UPD ATE_DELAY Number This parameter applies to fan trays managed
193. ated source SEEPROMSs accessed locally by the Shelf LOCAL_SHELF_FRU TRUE Manager SHELF FRU_IN EEPROM TRUE MIN SHELF FRUS the number of SEEPROMs providing the Shelf FRU Information usually 2 Flash file LOCAL SHELF FRU TRUE SHELF FRU IN EEPROM FALSE MIN SHELF FRUS 1 3 5 2 Setting up the Shelf FRU Information Since the contents of the Shelf FRU Information is crucial for successful management of the shelf it is necessary to set up the Shelf FRU Information on a fresh shelf before starting the Shelf Manager on it This procedure consists of the following steps e Creating a description of the shelf in a formalized text format INF format e Compiling the text description using the FRU Information Compiler e Placing the binary image of the FRU Information into the appropriate storage The first two steps are documented separately in the user manual for the FRU Information Compiler The last step is documented here and depends on where the Shelf FRU Information is stored The simplest case is if the Shelf FRU Information is stored on a Flash file on the ShMM In that case the binary image file should be downloaded on the ShMM via FTP and copied to the location var nvdata shelf fru_info The following log represents an example of the above process It should be performed on an x86 Linux
194. atter used to implement IPMB 0 if so configured JTAG interface for Yes Yes Yes processor debug and Flash programming Physical dimensions 67 60mm X 50 80mm_ 92mm x 50 80mm 67 60mm x 41 75mm Form factor definition SO DIMM 144 w Proprietary DDR3 SO DIMM 204 proprietary pin compatible assignments w proprietary pin assignments The following table provides a high level description of the full range of ShMM models including some that are no longer shipping for those in the latter category the table shows the end of life EOL date Table 4 ShMM Models PART PROCESSOR FLASH RAM COMMENTS SPEED SIZE SIZE ShMM 300R EOL June 2007 47Mhz 16Mb 32Mb Replaced with ShMM 500R ShMM 500RE 333M16F32R 333Mhz 16Mb 32Mb Entry level variant of ShMM 5O0R no support for ShMM redundancy along with other differences ShMM 500R 333M16F64R EOL 333Mhz 16Mb 64Mb Replaced with ShMM August 2008 500R 333M32F64R ShMM 500R 333M32F64R 333Mhz 32Mb 64Mb ShMM 500R 333M64F 128R 333Mhz 64Mb 128Mb ShMM 1500R 250M64F128R 250Mhz 64Mb 128Mb Encryption code present ShMM 1500R 250M64F128R NE 250Mhz 64Mb__ 128Mb Encryption code removed ShMM 700R AA 297Mhz 64Mb 128Mb Release 3 5 1 20 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide This edition of the User Guide focuses on the ShMM 500R ShMM 1500R and ShMM 700R and uses the shorthand ShMM to refer to all three v
195. aximum for the fans that serve the cooling zone s where those thresholds have been crossed In addition if the thermal condition is caused by a specific FRU the FRU is powered down If the thermal alert is caused by a shelf wide temperature sensor all FRUs are powered down as prescribed by the PICMG 3 0 specification After a FRU is powered down its further handling by the Shelf Manager depends on the value of the configuration variable COOLING KEEP POWERED OFF FRUS_IN M1 e If this variable is set to FALSE which is the default the FRU is activated but kept in state M3 until the thermal alert goes away The cooling state in which the FRU can be powered back is specified by the value of the configuration variable REAPPLY _ POWER MAX COOLING STATE By default this state is Normal when the shelf cools down sufficiently and the shelf cooling state reaches the specified state the Shelf Manager powers the FRU back on e Otherwise if the configuration variable is set to TRUE the FRU stays in the state M1 indefinitely and is not automatically powered back on when the thermal alert goes away in that case an intervention by the System Manager or by an operator is needed to activate and power on the FRU e Also when a new FRU is installed in the shelf when the shelf is in the critical alert cooling state by default it is not powered up and stays in M3 until the critical alert goes away This behavior can be overridden by the configuration v
196. bifs ro sync relatime bulk_ read dev mtdblock7 on var type jffs2 rw relatime dev mtdblock8 on var upgrade type jffs2 rw relatime dev mtdblock7 on etc type jffs2 rw relatime In case it is necessary to downgrade the Linux kernel image the RFS image or the U Boot image to a release older than 3 5 0 that does not support JFFS2 the user partition format must be changed to UBIFS before the downgrade This can be done via the following commands setenv user partition ubifs setenv flash_reset user reboot The result can be verified in the mount command output at the ShMM shell prompt e g mount ubil boot on boot type ubifs ro sync relatime bulk_ read ubi0 user on var type ubifs rw sync relatime bulk_ read ubi0 user on var upgrade type ubifs rw sync relatime bulk read ubi0 user on etc type ubifs rw sync relatime bulk read 8 5 Reliable Upgrade Procedure Status File The special file var upgrade status that is located on the User Flash partition contains the status of the most recent reliable upgrade session that is the session that is currently in progress or most recently completed var upgrade status is a text file and consists of multiple lines each line describes the status of a particular stage in the upgrade procedure The format of a record line is as follows Release 3 5 1 245 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide lt stage gt lt status gt lt description gt w
197. bled IPMB A State 0x08 LocalControl No failure IPMB B State 0x08 LocalControl No failure 20 Link 2 LUN 0 Sensor 11 IPMB LINK 2 Bus Status 0x8 IPMB A Enabled IPMB B Enabled IPMB A State 0x08 LocalControl No failure IPMB B State 0x08 LocalControl No failure 20 Link 3 LUN 0 Sensor 15 IPMB LINK 3 Bus Status 0x8 IPMB A Enabled IPMB B Enabled IPMB A State 0x08 LocalControl No failure IPMB B State 0x08 LocalControl No failure 20 Link 4 LUN 0 Sensor 16 IPMB LINK 4 Bus Status 0x4 IPMB A Disabled IPMB B Enabled IPMB A State 0x07 Isolated Undiagnosed communication failure IPMB B State 0x08 LocalControl No failure 20 Link 5 LUN 0 Sensor 17 IPMB LINK 5 Bus Status 0x8 IPMB A Enabled IPMB B Enabled IPMB A State 0x08 LocalControl No failure IPMB B State 0x08 LocalControl No failure Release 3 5 1 162 August 17 2015 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 The output above indicates that IPMB 0 link 4 for IPMB A has been isolated as a result of a persistent IPMB failure To manually re enable the link the following CLI command can be used L B I I HHE HHUWE HHW Ee HHW HHW He HHW He HHW Ee HHE L B I I ink 6 us Stat PMB A S PMB B S ink 7 us Stat PMB A S PMB B S ink 8 us Stat PMB A S PMB B S ink 9 us Stat PMB A S PMB B S ink 10 us Stat PMB A S PMB B S ink 11 us Stat PMB A S PMB B S
198. blem in order to read carrier HPDL data the Shelf Manager has to already know the location or the Carrier FRU Information So the location of the Carrier FRU Information if it is stored in an EEPROM is specified as a carrier option CARRIER_FRU_LOCATION for the HPDL carrier part of the string value of the Shelf Manager configuration parameter CARRIER_OPTIONS If the Carrier FRU Information is located in a file on the ShMM file system the carrier option CARRIER_FRU_LOCATION must not be present The following syntax governs this carrier option CARRIER FRU LOCATION lt device type gt lt bus gt lt address gt lt size gt where e lt device type gt is the EEPROM device type See Section 3 of the Pigeon Point HPDL Reference for the list of supported EEPROM devices Typical values are AT24C16 AT24LC256 ADM1026 e lt bus gt is the number of the master only 12C bus where the EEPROM is located typically 0 e lt address gt is the 7 bit IC address of the EEPROM device on that bus in hexadecimal e lt size gt is an optional argument that specifies the size of the occupied portion of the EEPROM that is the number of bytes which the Shelf Manager should read to get the entire Carrier FRU Information If this argument is not specified the Shelf Manager reads the entire EEPROM For example the following definition CARRIER OPTIONS CARRIER FRU LOCATION ADM1026 0 2E 2048 Release 3 5 1 121 August 17
199. c 1265 Write upgrade watchdog 0 gt 1 ALLOW lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1265 Write upgrade watchdog 0 gt 1 ALLOW lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1265 Write upgrade watchdog 1 gt 2 ALLOW lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1265 Write upgrade watchdog 1 gt 2 ALLOW lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1265 Write upgrade watchdog 1 gt 2 ALLOW lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1265 Write upgrade watchdog 1 gt 2 ALLOW lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1265 Write upgrade watchdog 1 gt 2 ALLOW lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1265 Write upgrade watchdog 1 gt 2 ALLOW lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1200 Write confirmed 1 gt 0 ALLOW lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1217 Write upgrade state in progress 2 gt confirmed 4 ALLOW lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1280 Write upgrade watchdog 1 gt 0 ALLOW lt INFO gt frontend c 46 Last upgrade stages log O initial PASSED 1 before storage mount PASSED 2 after storage mount PASSED 3 after marking image set invalid PASSED 4 after u boot burn PASSED 5 after kernel burn PASSED 6 after rootfs burn PASSED 7 after storage umount PASSED 8 after cleaning previous apps set PASSED 9 after writting new apps set PASSED 10 after sync PASSED 11 after processing var and etc PASSED 12 after boot select PASSED 13 after reboot PASSED 14 after confirm PASSED 8 9 2 Example 2 This example shows a reliable upgrade of the application package image
200. c 764 1402348 bytes was written from file tmp tmp kernel to dev 2 0 lt INFO gt backend c 730 Burning lt INFO gt backend c 764 2283039 bytes was written from file tmp tmp rfs to dev 4 0 lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1285 Write storage state available gt not available ALLOW lt INFO gt backend c 730 Burning lt INFO gt backend c 764 2110743 bytes was written from file tmp tmp app to dev 8 0 lt INFO gt backend c 808 Erasing user data on candidate bank lt INFO gt backend c 818 Copy etc lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1189 Write confirmed 1 gt 1 ALLOW lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1194 Write candidate 0 gt 0 ALLOW lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1265 Write upgrade watchdog 0 gt 1 ALLOW Here the reliable upgrade procedure resets the ShMM This causes U Boot to start from the candidate Flash PowerPrep start initialize power Battery Voltage 1 50V No battery or bad battery detected Disabling battery voltage measurements Mar 21 201223 23 40 FRAC 0x92926152 memory type is DDR2 Wait for ddr ready 1 power 0x00820616 Frac 0x92926152 start change cpu freq hbus 0x00000003 cpu 0x00010001 start test memory access Release 3 5 1 257 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide ddr2 0x40000000 finish simple test U Boot 2009 08 Mar 21 2012 23 22 30 Freescale 1 MX28 family CPU 297 MHz BUS 99 MHz EMI 130 MHz GPMI 24 MHz I2C rea
201. can be used if additional permanent IP addresses need to be assigned to both network interfaces The two network interfaces are used in active standby mode if the configuration parameter USE_SECOND_CHANNEL is set to FALSE Release 3 5 1 86 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide If the Shelf Manager configuration parameter PROPAGATE _RMCP_ADDRESS is defined as TRUE active standby management also applies to the network interface on the backup Shelf Manager which is assigned the RMCP derived IP address on the backup Shelf Manager That is if the backup Shelf Manager detects that the currently used adapter becomes physically disconnected from the network link broken it automatically switches to the other alternate adapter The first adapter is turned off and the RMCP derived IP address of the backup Shelf Manager is transparently moved to the other adapter 3 4 2 2 Active Active Usage of the Two Network Interfaces The approach to network interface redundancy outlined in the previous section seems to be insufficient for some configurations where the network connection between the Shelf Manager and the System Manager goes through several switches and may break on an Ethernet segment that is not adjacent to the ShMM This type of failure cannot be immediately recognized by the Shelf Manager Checking the accessibility of the System Manager from the Shelf Manager does not seem practical in this case since the architecture of
202. case this parameter specifies the number of consecutive failed 12C switch resets that are attempted after which if the main 12C bus remains inaccessible a switchover takes place and the active Shelf Manager reboots This parameter is only applicable on platforms where SHMM GPIO8 is used by the Shelf Manager to reset an I2C switch via the original mechanism that is not based on HPDL LOCAL SHELF _ Boolean TRUE Create a local FRU 1 on the Shelf No FRU Manager that exposes the Shelf FRU Information obtained from the file var nvdata shelf fru_i nfo Release 3 5 1 65 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide TYPE DEFAULT DESCRIPTION CAN BE OBTAINED FROM SHELF FRU INFO M7_TIMEOUT Number 1 The maximum time in seconds fora Yes FRU to stay in M7 state after the expiration of this time the FRU is automatically transitioned to M0 1 the default stands for forever Setting this parameter to O completely prevents FRUs from going into state M7 MAX ALERT PO Number 64 The maximum number of PEF Alert No LICIES Policies available The maximum allowed value for this parameter is 128 MAX ALERT ST Number 64 The maximum number of PEF Alert No RINGS Strings available MAX DEFERRED Number 32 The maximum number of outstanding No _ALERTS PEF alerts MAX EVENT FI Number 64 The maximum number of PEF event No LTERS filters
203. cation specific JFFS2 partition The following tables provide a summary of the Flash partitions maintained by Linux for each of the ShMM 1500 variants Table 26 Flash Partitioning for 32MB Flash ShMM 1500s OFFSET IN FLASH SIZE IN IN MBYTES MBYTES MOUNTED As CONTENT ON STARTUP Device NODE 0 25 dev mtdchar3 Not mounted The U Boot firmware image 0 25 0 5 dev mtdchar10 var upgrade The first half of the dev mtdblock10 var upgrade JFFS2 filesystem 0 75 1 dev mtdchar2 Not mounted The Linux kernel dev mtdblock2 image 1 75 1 Idev mtdchar1 letc The etc JFFS2 dev mtdblock1 filesystem 2 15 1 75 dev mtdchar0 ivar The var JFFS2 dev mdtblock0 filesystem 4 5 7 15 dev mtdchar4 Not mounted The Linux root file dev mtdblock4 system rfs image 12 25 3 75 Idev mtdchar11 Not mounted The first half of the dev mtdblock11 app_jffs application specific JFFS2 partition 16 0 25 dev mtdchar8 Not mounted The other U Boot firmware image Release 3 5 1 219 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide OFFSET IN FLASH SIZE IN DEVICE NODE MOUNTED As CONTENT IN MBYTES MBYTES ON STARTUP 16 25 0 5 dev mtdchar10 var upgrade The second half of dev mtdblock10 the var upgrade JFFS2 file system 16 75 1 dev mtdchar7 Not mounted The other Linux dev mtdblock7 kernel image 17 75 1 dev mtdchar6 Not mounted Th
204. cations e The Shelf Manager Application images for both firmware image sets are located in the user partition so even if the partition is re formatted after corruption the Shelf Manager Application images are lost and have to be restored manually e The upgrade status files are located in the user partition so in case of corruption they are lost e The user partition filesystem is not separated between firmware image sets so corruption leads to the loss of var and etc files for both image sets Also it is possible to fill the entire user partition while working with one image set for example when the ipmb_ traced utility is configured to save IPMB trace in a file in flash without the size restriction In that case an upgrade that attempts to preserve all var and etc contents will not work due to the lack of file system space All these issues are resolved with the JFFS2 conversion enhancement The Shelf Manager Application images which are included in the application package are now located in the safe boot partition the old locations remain as symbolic links The user partition is split into 3 parts in JFFS2 mode so that there are separate partitions for each image set In addition there is a partition for the upgrade status files with the minimum possible size The following table provides a summary of the Flash partitions for the SAMM 700 working in the JFFS2 mode Release 3 5 1 243 August 17
205. ccess one of the IP addresses on the backup Shelf Manager and initiate a switchover in a non standard way for example log in to the backup ShMM via telnet and issue the command clia switchover The active active mode is enabled by setting the configuration parameter USE_SECOND_CHANNEL to TRUE In this case the configuration parameter DEFAULT _RMCP_ IP ADDRESS2 should be set to a non zero IP address This IP address becomes the default IP address for the channel 2 and the configuration variables Release 3 5 1 87 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide DEFAULT _RMCP_NETMASK2 and DEFAULT_GATEWAY_IP_ADDRESS2 specify the network mask and default gateway IP address for the channel 2 respectively The values of the above mentioned configuration parameters have no effect if the corresponding values in the channel configuration parameter file are non zero The channel configuration parameters for the channel 2 are stored in the files var nvdata ch2_paramand var nvdata ch2_param_v2 on the ShMM the second file is used only with the Shelf Manager release 2 6 and higher Starting with release 2 5 2 the Shelf Manager recognizes a second instance of the Shelf Manager IP Connection record in the Shelf FRU Information as the source of the IP address netmask and default gateway for the second RMCP network interface Therefore it is possible to specify RMCP addressing information for both interfaces in the Shelf FRU Information In a
206. cial ShMM configuration requirements exist for IntegralHPI IntegralHPI is implemented as a shared library within the Shelf Manager and is turned off by default To turn it on it is necessary to set the configuration variable ENABLE _INTEGRALHPI to TRUE and ensure that the corresponding shared library Libintegralhpi so and several other libraries that IntegralHPI depends on is present on the ShMM A special RFS image containing those libraries is installed on your shelf if it is enabled for IntegralHPI support 3 14 1 HPI Domain Support in IntegralHPI IntegralHP exposes the ATCA shelf managed by the potentially redundant Shelf Manager as a single HPI domain This domain has Domain ID 1 by default In order to allow a single HPI client to manage multiple ATCA shelves the domain ID for a given shelf can be configured via the Shelf Manager configuration variable INTEGRALHPI_DOMAIN ID 3 14 2 HPI SNMP Subagent Support The IntegralHPl enabled RFS includes a public domain HPI SNMP subagent that allows a remote client to communicate with IntegralHPI using the SNMP protocol The mapping between the HPI interface and the SNMP protocol was specified by the Service Availability Forum SAF http www saforum org some time ago However currently neither the mapping definition nor the subagent software itself is actively supported In order to automatically start the HPI SNMP subagent at system startup the Shelf Manager configuration variable RUN_H
207. cific Default value is 0 IPMB TEST 7 bus INT32 IPMB bus The test queries the IPMB bus driver IPMB Bus number to test for extended information about the Test Acceptable values are 0 specified bus which includes state and higher 0 represents flags and error flags This information IPMB A 1 represents is then converted to a textual format IPMB B higher values and reported in the results string represent radial IPMB links Default value is 0 Release 3 5 1 187 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide 5 Using the IPMI Analysis Tools The Shelf Manager software includes tools for analyzing the IPMI messaging traffic within a shelf Categories of such traffic include IPMB messages going between the ShMM and other IPM controllers in the shelf as well as IPMI traffic between the ShMM and external management applications via Ethernet The PICMG HPM 2 specification enables other traffic to be collected and analyzed as well including IPMB L traffic among a Carrier IPMC and the Module Management Controllers MMCs it represents as well as IPMI messaging between an IPMC and its payload via the Payload Interface which is called the System Interface in IPMl These tools consist of the following two parts e The IPMB trace collection daemon This application runs on the ShMM and interfaces with the IPMB specific extensions in the Monterey Linux Pigeon Point Linux kernel on the ShMM to collect IPMB trace data from IP
208. corresponding Starter Kits are available at http www pigeonpoint com products html 2 4 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager and ShMM The Pigeon Point Shelf Manager consistent with AdvancedTCA Shelf Manager requirements has two main responsibilities e Manage track the FRU population and common infrastructure of a shelf especially the power cooling and interconnect resources and their usage Within the shelf this management tracking primarily occurs through interactions between the Shelf Manager and the IPM Controllers over IPMB 0 e Enable the overall System Manager to join in that management tracking through the System Manager Interface which is typically implemented over Ethernet Much of the Pigeon Point Shelf Manager software is devoted to routine missions such as powering a shelf up or down and handling the arrival or departure of FRUs including negotiating assignments of power and interconnect resources In addition the Shelf Manager can take direct action when exceptions are raised in the shelf For instance in response to temperature exceptions the Shelf Manager can raise the fan levels or if that step is not sufficient even start powering down FRUs to reduce the heat load in the shelf 2 4 1 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager Features The Pigeon Point Shelf Manager features are listed below e Executes on the ShMM a compact mezzanine module installed on a suitable carrier board for the shelf e Conforms to the AdvancedTCA specificati
209. cted by the active Shelf Manager These state updates are not applied immediately but are cached on the backup Shelf Manager The backup Shelf Manager may become active as the result of a switchover Two types of switchover are defined e Cooperative switchover the active and backup Shelf Managers negotiate the transfer of responsibilities from the active to the backup Shelf Manager this mode is supported via the CLI switchover command issued on the active or backup Shelf Manager e Forced switchover the backup Shelf Manager determines that the active Shelf Manager is no longer alive or healthy and forcefully takes on the responsibilities of the active Shelf Manager Release 3 5 1 154 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide Forced switchover can also be initiated via the CLI switchover command with the option force addressed to the backup Shelf Manager As discussed briefly in section 2 4 2 redundant ShMMs share three Hardware Redundancy Interface HRI data items between them for six items total these items together indicate for each ShMM the health presence and switchover request state of the ShMM itself referenced as the local state and its peer referenced as remote state Each ShMM variant has a different hardware implementation of these signals At the software level each of the Shelf Managers can access a register that provides a view of these data items The register is implemented in a PLD a CPLD
210. cting IPMI Traces on IPMB 0 in Controlled Mode When the trace daemon is run in the controlled mode the trace is transferred directly to the trace analyzer via a TCP IP connection The following stepwise procedure shows how to collect a controlled trace and open it for analysis in the GUI The GUl specific steps are followed by corresponding guidance for collecting a controlled trace in tshark 1 Onthe ShMM startipmb traced with the c and w flags daemon f ipmb traced c w Release 3 5 1 200 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide On the analyzer host use netcat to feed the data to Wireshark over the TCP IP network specify the IP address of the ShMM and the port on which the trace daemon listens for incoming connections 19000 by default C gt ne exe 192 168 1 62 19000 c Program Files Wireshark wireshark exe k i The k option instructs Wireshark to start capturing data immediately The standard input is specified as the interface that provides the trace data To avoid repeatedly typing the long command a Windows batch script can be created instead rtwireshark bat C distrib nc exe 1 19000 ProgramFiles Wireshark wireshark exe k i amp exit Given that this script is defined invoke it from the command prompt or create a shortcut on the desktop and specify the IP address as an input parameter Figure 10 Capture Options Window rtwireshark Properties 5 aa General Short
211. ctive this is a transition from a situation where both physical network links were broken on both Shelf Managers to a situation where at least one physical network link is present on both Shelf Managers However if in this case due to the specifics of the hub board the link to the backup Shelf Manager comes up earlier than the link to the active Shelf Manager an undesirable switchover may occur To prevent a switchover in this situation the backup Shelf Manager can delay for a specified number of seconds doing a switchover after the Original switchover request from the active Shelf Manager if the physical link to the backup Shelf Manager is present If during this time the physical link to the active Shelf Manager also comes up the active Shelf Manager will stop sending switchover requests and the switchover won t happen Otherwise if the physical link to the active Shelf Manager remains broken after the expiration of this delay the switchover will finally take place The value of the delay is specified in the configuration variable SWITCHOVER_ON_ BROKEN LINK_BACKUP_DELAY Usually the parameter RMCP_NET ADAPTER2 is assigned the value eth while the value of the configuration parameter RMCP_NET_ ADAPTER the main network adapter used for RMCP communication is eth0 as in the following sample RMCP_NET ADAPTER eth0o RMCP_NET ADAPTER2 ethl However other configurations are possible For example values ethO 1 and eth1 1
212. ctive active mode the IP addresses on both network interfaces are switched over to the backup ShMM as a result of a switchover 3 4 2 3 Support for Site dependent ShMC Cross connects According to the ECN 3 0 2 0 002 for revision 2 0 of the ATCA specification ShMC cross connects can be implemented with either a site independent or a site dependent configuration as shown in Figure 3 Figure 3 Implementation Options for ShMC Cross connects ShMC site ShMC site independent dependent recommended for recommended for 2 pair only 2 4 pair adaptable In the site dependent variant after a switchover in the default Shelf Manager configuration each specific RMCP address is propagated to the corresponding network interface eth0 or eth1 on the other ShMC and thus becomes associated with a different hub board In this case from the perspective of the hub board the ShMC switchover becomes non transparent which may be undesirable if for example each hub board hosts a System Manager The configuration parameter SWAPPED CROSS CONNECTS can be used to avoid this non transparency Release 3 5 1 88 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide If the configuration parameter SWAPPED _CROSS_CONNECTS is defined and set to TRUE and if the hardware address of the ShMC is odd the Shelf Manager swaps the values of the configuration parameters RMCP_NET ADAPTER and RMCP_NET ADAPTER2 As a result after a switchover the RMCP addresses
213. curs over IPMB L L for Local An overall System Manager typically external to the shelf can coordinate the activities of multiple shelves A System Manager typically communicates with each Shelf Manager over Ethernet The Pigeon Point Shelf Manager External Interface Reference document details the interfaces and protocols that are available for such interactions Those interfaces include optional support for the SA Forum s Hardware Platform Interface HPI Pigeon Point offers two implementations of HPI Release 3 5 1 13 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide one implemented internally and called IntegralHPI and the other based on OpenHPI www openhpi com Both implementations are documented in the Pigeon Point HPI User Guide The next two sections address the board and shelf levels of management highlighting the following Pigeon Point products and their capabilities as well as the relevant AdvancedTCA functionality e Pigeon Point Board Management Reference BMR firmware and corresponding hardware reference design which together implement various types of management controllers e Pigeon Point Shelf Manager software and ShMM mezzanine module which together with an appropriate ShMM carrier board implement an AdvancedTCA compliant Shelf Manager and Shelf Management Controller ShMC 2 3 Pigeon Point Board Management Reference Hardware and Firmware This hardware and firmware level includes the local managem
214. cut Options Font Layout Colors Compatibility re ttwireshark Ed Target type MS DOS Batch File Target location distrib Target C distrib rtwireshark bat 192 168 1 62 Start in C distrib Shortcut key None Bun Normal window Comment Eind Target Change Icon 2 Execute actions that create the IPMI traffic on IPMB 0 to be analyzed For example if insertion of a board generates the sequence of events and commands that need to be analyzed do such a board insertion 3 The GUI will update the main window showing the collected trace in real time Release 3 5 1 201 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide Figure 11 Collected Trace Controlled mode File Edit View Go Capture Analyze Statistics Help Q a No Time Source 237 6 761618 I2C 1 238 6 762032 I2C 2 239 6 762581 12C 2 240 6 762993 I2C 1 241 6 763541 I2C 1 242 6 763952 I2C 2 243 6 764502 I2C 2 244 6 764913 I2C 1 245 6 765460 I2C 1 246 6 765873 I2C 2 247 6 766420 I2C 2 248 6 766834 I2c 1 249 6 767380 I2C 1 250 6 767725 I2C 2 251 6 768293 I2C 2 252 6 768703 I2C 1 253 6 769264 I2C 1 254 6 769684 I2C 2 255 6 770229 I2C 2 Qa menanvaet Filter Expression Clear 0x76 0x76 0x77 0x77 0x78 0x78 0x79 0x79 0x7a 0x7a 0x7b 0x7b Ox7c Ox7c Ox7d Ox7d Ox7e Ox7e Ox7f b Frame 1 7 bytes on wire 7 bytes captured b Inter Integrated Circuit Data b Intelligent Platform Management Interface 0000 12
215. d e Section 3 4 2 1 adds a description of active standby management of the network interface on the backup Shelf Manager when RMCP address propagation is in effect e Section 3 7 1 adds a description of the effects of the new configuration variable COOLING KEEP POWERED OFF_FRUS_IN_ M1 anda description of the handling cold sensitive FRUs in the default cooling algorithm Release 3 5 1 281 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide e Section 3 14 2 corrects the path to the OpenHPI client library e New section 4 4 1 describes in detail the initialization of redundant Shelf Managers e Section 4 10 2 adds a description of how the Shelf Manager retrieves LAN parameters from a DHCP Server e New section 4 10 2 3 describes the configuration of a Linux DHCP Server to enable retrieving LAN Configuration information from it e New section 4 10 4 describes the synchronous assignment of LAN configuration parameters to a board C 17 Release 2 7 1 e Section 3 3 adds new configuration parameters ALLOW _POWER_UNRELATED FRU_IN CRITICAL STATE REAPPLY POWER MAX COOLING STATE e Section 3 7 1 adds a description of the effects of the new configuration variables ALLOW POWER_UNRELATED FRU_IN CRITICAL STATE and REAPPLY POWER MAX COOLING STATE Section 3 10 1 clarifies that ShMM timestamps correspond to the local time zone Section 4 4 3 adds descriptions of two more states of the Reboot Reason sensor New section 4 4 1 describes th
216. d user management commands are accepted from IPMB 0 in this case In this case a malicious IPM controller can seriously jeopardize the functionality of the shelf Release 3 5 1 37 August 17 2015 ALLOW CHANGE _EVENT_RECEI VER Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide Boolean DEFAULT TRUE DESCRIPTION If set to TRUE the Event receiver address for the Shelf Manager can be set to an address other than 20h LUN 0 If set to FALSE any attempt to change event receiver address for the Shelf Manager is rejected CAN BE OBTAINED FROM SHELF FRU INFO Yes ALLOW _CLEARI NG _CRITICAL_ ALARM Boolean FALSE If set to TRUE the critical alarm condition can be cleared by the CLI commandclia alarm clear Yes ALLOW POWER _ UNRELATED FR U_IN_CRITICA L STATE Boolean FALSE This variable affects the behavior of the Shelf Manager with respect to powering up FRUs that are in state M3 when the shelf is in Critical thermal alert state If set to TRUE the FRU can be powered on if the Critical alert state is caused by temperature sensors that belong to a different FRU If set to FALSE no FRU can be powered up when the shelf is in the Critical alert state In the case of a Critical alert caused by a shelf wide sensor no FRU can be powered up irrespective of the value of this variable Yes ALLOW_RESET_ STANDALONE Boolean FALSE If set to TRUE the command
217. ddress of the AXle system module No AXIE TIMING _ ASYMMETRIC_M ATCH Boolean FALSE This variable specifies how the E Keying logic in the Shelf Manager matches Axle timing links If this variable is set to TRUE asymmetric matching applies that is links tagged as Instrument Slot Inputs match links tagged as System Slot Outputs on the other side If this variable is set to FALSE regular matching rules apply to AXle timing links This configuration variable affects only AXle configurations in non AXle configurations its value is ignored No Release 3 5 1 41 August 17 2015 BOARD LAN PA RAMETERS CHA NNEL_ LIST Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide TYPE String 64 DEFAULT oy DESCRIPTION The list of IPMI channel numbers on boards and modules that are available for assignment of LAN configuration parameters by the Shelf Manager Channel numbers each in the range 1 to 7 can be separated by commas spaces or any other separators for example 3 4 5 LAN parameters are assigned only to channels specified in this list and in the order in which they appear in this list CAN BE OBTAINED FROM SHELF FRU INFO Yes BOARD LAN PA RAMETERS SYN CHRONOUS String 256 oy This string value represents the list of descriptors for FRUs that require synchronous assignment of LAN configuration parameters It is meaningful only if the variable BOARD LA
218. defined This parameter is used in certain shelf specific cooling algorithms and specifies the exhaust temperature sensors of the shelf The format of the parameter is a comma separated list of tuples in the form lt owner address gt lt sensor number gt The sensor LUN must be 0 For example the value 0x20 120 0x20 121 indicates that sensors 120 and 121 on the logical Shelf Manager IPMB address 20h represent the exhaust temperature sensors of the shelf Yes COOLING FAN_ DECREASE TIM EOUT Number The minimum timeout between successive decrements of the fan speed during operation of the cooling algorithm in Normal state Should be a multiple of COOLING _ POLL TIMEOUT if not it is rounded up to the next multiple If the parameter is omitted or set to O this timeout is equal to COOLING POLL TIMEOUT Yes Release 3 5 1 43 August 17 2015 COOLING FAN _ INCREASE TIM EOUT Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide Number DEFAULT DESCRIPTION The minimum timeout between successive increments of the fan speed during operation of the cooling algorithm in Minor Alert state Should be a multiple of COOLING _ POLL TIMEOUT if not it is rounded up to the next multiple If the parameter is omitted or set to O this timeout is equal to COOLING POLL TIMEOUT CAN BE OBTAINED FROM SHELF FRU INFO Yes COOLING _INTA KE _SENSOR_LI ST String 32 oy undefined
219. depends on whether the Ethereal or Wireshark format has been selected for the trace collection daemon Table 20 IPMB Trace Collection Packet Field FIELD NAME DESCRIPTION Seconds Transaction completion time in seconds Micro seconds Transaction completion time in microseconds calculated from the start of the last second Event IPMB interface state change information Flags Special flags returned by the Linux kernel driver Bus IPMB interface IPMB A or IPMB B on which the transaction was captured Address Destination 12C address of the transaction Size Size of the transaction Data Transaction raw data Release 3 5 1 191 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide 5 3 IPMI Trace Analyzer The recommended IPMI trace analyzer for Pigeon Point Shelf Manager applications is a network traffic analyzer program called Wireshark see www wireshark org with its terminal oriented variant tshark Wireshark provides a convenient interface for a complete analysis of layered protocol stack data The Wireshark design allows developers to easily add support for new protocols entire protocol stacks and trace collection data sources in a collaborative manner There are versions of Wireshark for both Windows and Linux environments All these considerations combine to make Wireshark a great framework for IPMI trace analyzer applications The following sections describe the key user interfaces of Wireshark t
220. ding to the following table Release 3 5 1 223 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide Table 28 Standard Source File Names for Upgrade Components COMPONENT NAME SOURCE FILE NAME SOURCE FILE NAME SHMM 500 SHMM 1500 U Boot sentry shmm500 u boot sentry shmm1500 u boot Linux kernel sentry shmm500 kernel sentry shmm1500 kernel RFS sentry shmms00 rfs sentry shmm1500 rfs The image upgrade works as follows For each of the specified source images the image is copied to the ShMM using the specified copy protocol If no d specifier is supplied the image is first copied to the RAM file system of the ShMM specifically the copy is to the tmp directory and then moved to Flash that is copied to the destination partition in Flash and then removed from the RAM file system If there is a d specifier supplied in the call to rupgrade_tool s the intermediate copy to the tmp directory is skipped and the image is copied directly to its destination in the Flash Use of this specifier is intended for a scenario where there is insufficient run time memory on the ShMM for an intermediate copy to the RAM file system If no d specifier is supplied the reliable upgrade procedure invokes a special script the main purpose of which is to validate images after they are copied to the tmp directory If d specifier is present no such validation is performed Currently the script etc upgrade step4vshm suppli
221. direct Flash read operations and to avoid expensive mounting of UBIFS volumes This information is stored on a dedicated Flash partition It is invalidated explicitly by the reliable upgrade utility before writing a new image set during a reliable upgrade The U Boot instance number and the number of the chosen set of images is calculated by the following formula Number UBOOT_IMAGE_SEL Candidate Where UBOOT_IMAGE_SEL is the ShMM 700 soft jumper the value of which is the number of the current confirmed U Boot image and other firmware images 0 1 Candidate is a flag that has a value of 1 if a reliable upgrade is currently in progress and the candidate set of images should be loaded and 0 otherwise indicates the Exclusive OR logical operation The following table provides a summary of the Flash partitions maintained by Pigeon Point Linux for the ShMM 700 Table 29 Flash Partitioning for ShMM 700s 64MB Flash in UBIFS mode OFFSET IN FLASH SIZE IN DEVICE NODE MOUNTED As CONTENT IN MBYTES MBYTES ON STARTUP 0 0 5 dev mtd0 Not mounted U Boot image 0 0 5 0 5 dev mtd2 Not mounted U Boot image 1 1 0 25 dev mtd4 Not mounted U Boot environment variables first copy Release 3 5 1 241 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide OFFSET IN FLASH SIZE IN DEVICE NODE MOUNTED As CONTENT IN MBYTES MBYTES ON STARTUP 1 25 0 25 dev mtd6 Not mounted U Boot envi
222. dure has finished either successfully or unsuccessfully the utility exits with the return value of 1 indicating that there is no upgrade procedure in progress hook args v Complete the upgrade procedure The invocation of rupgrade_tool f is done from inside the Shelf Manager after the Shelf Manager successfully completes its initialization If the Shelf Manager is not started automatically that invocation is done at the end of the etc rc script As soon as invoked rupgrade_tool f strobes the upgrade WDT and proceeds with establishing the new persistent Flash and disabling the upgrade WDT After disabling the upgrade WDT the upgrade procedure can invoke a special script to take any actions necessary after the hardware resources associated with a reliable upgrade have been returned to their normal state but before a completion record has been added to the status file This feature is not currently used during reliable upgrades of the Shelf Manager As the last step the utility updates var upgrade status with a record indicating a successful completion of the upgrade procedure and exits with a value of 0 w f Print the current status of the most recent upgrade procedure Essentially this option dumps the content of the var upgrade status file to stdout rupgrade_ tool w returns a value of 0 if the upgrade procedure has completed successfully 1 if the upgrade procedure has completed unsuccessfully an appropriate er
223. dy DRAM 128 MB SFGEN N250512A detected total size 64 MB A2F SPICOMM protocol v1 6 M3 firmware v0 9 FPGA design v0 44 0 0 A2F A2F firmware version 0 9 A2F Last reset cause HARD A2F Device type A2FO60M3E FG256 A2F MSS clock frequency 40 MHz A2F Fabric clock frequency 20 MHz A2F Fast delay calibration 1330 cycles per 100uS A2F eNVM 128 KB 00000000 00020000 A2F eSRAM 16 KB 20000000 20004000 A2F Extram start 200022D0 RUPG booting from image 0 candidate Here U Boot reports that reliable upgrade is in progress and the candidate image set is being used The candidate image set index is 0 and the confirmed image set is 1 Tns serial Out serial Err serial Net FECO 00 18 49 01 8f 26 FECL 00 18 49 01 8f 27 FECO FECL Hit any key to stop autoboot 0 RUPG reliable upgrade is in progress skipping Here U Boot reports that a reliable upgrade is in progress and therefore A2F060 upgrade stage is skipped it doesn t matter if the A2F060 upgrade file is present or not Creating 1 MTD partitions on spi0 0x0000001c0000 0x000002000000 mtd 5 Below U Boot attaches the UBI partition and mounts the UBIFS volume to load the new kernel and RFS images This stage is skipped and the messages listed below do not appear during regular boots because a UBIFS cache is used UBI attaching mtdl to ubi0 UBI MTD device 1 is write protected attach in read only m
224. e 0 At or above UNC threshold State 3 asserted False Release 3 5 1 199 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide 0 At or below LNR threshold State 2 asserted False 0 At or below LC threshold State 1 asserted False 0 At or below LNC threshold State 0 asserted False Data checksum Oxbf correct 0000 20 14 cc 82 a0 2d 00 32 c0 00 bf a AS Frame 3 8 bytes on wire 8 bytes captured Arrival Time Jun 24 2008 20 58 03 818209000 Time delta from previous captured frame 0 500135000 seconds Time delta from previous displayed frame 0 500135000 seconds Time since reference or first frame 0 579642000 seconds Frame Number 3 Frame Length 8 bytes Capture Length 8 bytes Frame is marked False Protocols in frame i2c ipmi Inter Integrated Circuit Data Bus I2C 2 Target address 0x41 Flags 0x00000000 Intelligent Platform Management Interface No corresponding response Header Get Sensor Reading Request from 0x20 to 0x82 Target Address 0x82 Target LUN 0x00 NetFN Sensor Event Request 0x04 00 Target LUN 0x00 0001 00 NetFn Sensor Event Request 0x04 Header checksum Ox6e correct Source Address 0x20 Source LUN 0x00 SeqNo 0x29 2 00 Source LUN 0x00 1010 01 Sequence Number 0x29 Command Get Sensor Reading 0x2d Data Sensor Number 4 Data checksum 0x0b correct 0000 82 10 6e 20 a4 2d 04 Ob l lt a 5 4 2 Colle
225. e other etc dev mtdblock6 JFFS2 file system 18 75 1 75 dev mtdchar5 Not mounted The other var dev mtdblock5 JFFS2 file system 20 5 7 15 dev mtdchar9 Not mounted The other Linux root dev mtdblock9 file system rfs image 28 25 3 75 dev mtdchar11 Not mounted The second half of dev mtdblock11 the app_jffs application specific JFFS2 partition Table 27 Flash Partitioning for 64MB Flash ShMM 1500s OFFSET IN FLASH SIZE IN DEVICE NODE MOUNTED As CONTENT IN MBYTES MBYTES ON STARTUP dev mtdchar3 Not mounted The U Boot firmware image 0 25 0 5 dev mtdchar10 var upgrade The first half of the dev mtdblock10 varlupgrade JFFS2 filesystem 0 75 1 dev mtdchar2 Not mounted The Linux kernel dev mtdblock2 image 1 75 1 dev mtdchar1 letc The etc JFFS2 dev mtdblock1 filesystem 2 15 2 dev mtdchar0 Iar The var JFFS2 dev mdtblock0 filesystem 4 75 16 dev mtdchar4 Not mounted The Linux root file dev mtdblock4 system rfs image 20 75 11 25 dev mtdchar11 Not mounted The first half of the dev mtdblock11 app_jffs application specific JFFS2 partition 32 0 25 dev mtdchar8 Not mounted The other U Boot firmware image 32 25 0 5 dev mtdchar10 var upgrade The second half of dev mtdblock10 the var upgrade JFFS2 file system 32 75 1 dev mtdchar7 Not mounted The other Linux dev mtdblock7 kernel image Release 3 5 1 220 August 17
226. e other Linux kernel image 1 5 1 dev mtdchar6 Not mounted The other etc dev mtdblock6 JFFS2 file system 2 5 1 75 dev mtdchar5 Not mounted The other var dev mtdblock5 JFFS2 file system 4 25 15 75 dev mtdchar9 Not mounted The other Linux root file system rfs image 20 8 dev mtdchar12 Not mounted The second half of dev mtdblock12 the app1_jffs application specific JFFS2 partition 28 0 25 dev mtdchar8 Not mounted The other U Boot firmware image 28 25 3 75 dev mtdchar11 Not mounted The second half of dev mtdblock11 the app_jffs application specific JFFS2 partition 32 0 5 dev mtdchar10 var upgrade The first half of the dev mtdblock10 var upgrade JFFS2 file system 32 5 1 dev mtdchar2 Not mounted The Linux kernel image Release 3 5 1 218 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide OFFSET IN FLASH SIZE IN DEVICE NODE MOUNTED As CONTENT IN MBYTES MBYTES ON STARTUP 33 5 1 Idev mtdchar1 letc The etc JFFS2 file dev mtdblock1 system 34 5 1 75 dev mtdchar0 ivar The var JFFS2 file dev mtdblock0 system 36 25 15 75 dev mtdchar4 Not mounted The Linux root file system rfs image 52 8 devimtdchar12 Not mounted The first half of the dev mtdblock12 app1_jffs application specific JFFS2 partition 60 0 25 dev mtdchar3 Not mounted The U Boot firmware image 60 25 3 75 dev mtdchar11 Not mounted The second half of dev mtdblock1 1 the app_jffs appli
227. e upgrade a2f lt URL gt skip checksums The following command invokes rollback mode rupgrade rollback In this mode the rollback takes place to the other image set which is assumed to be the image set used before the last upgrade Rollback doesn t affect the A2F060 firmware state because the A2F060 has its own auto rollback mechanism that is utilized during an A2F reliable upgrade procedure Additional command variants invoke other modes of the reliable upgrade utility Get Upgrade Status mode output current upgrade status on stdout rupgrade s rupgrade status Help mode output a brief help summary on stdout rupgrade h rupgrade help Get Version mode output the version of the utility to stdout rupgrade version Release 3 5 1 248 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide Add Hook Mode rupgrade add hook lt URL gt In this mode the utility adds a new hook script specifically the script file designated by the lt URL gt to the list of scripts executed during the upgrade procedure Scripts are stored in the directory etc hook to remove a hook script just delete the corresponding file from this directory The following table lists the protocols that are recognized in the URLs by the reliable upgrade utility Table 33 Protocols Recognized in the URLs by the Reliable Upgrade Utility PROTOCOL DESCRIPTION URL SYNTAX EXAMPLE URL NAME File Get image from a file lt abs_path gt
228. e Hardware Platform Interface HPI a set of application programming interfaces APIs for managing hardware platforms that is defined by the Service Availability Forum www saforum org The Pigeon Point Shelf Manager can also be used in CompactPCI shelves 2 4 2 Support for Dual Redundant Operation The Pigeon Point Shelf Manager can be configured with active backup instances to maximize availability Figure 2 shows how both Shelf Manager instances are accessible to the System Manager with primarily the active instance interacting at any given time Only the active instance communicates over IPMB 0 with the IPM Controller population in the shelf The two Shelf Manager instances communicate over TCP IP with the active instance posting incremental software level state updates to the backup instance via a Software Redundancy Interface SRI implemented between them As a result the backup can quickly step into the active role if necessary The SRI is a USB or a high speed UART based serial link depending on the ShMM variant Hardware level status updates are communicated between the Shelf Manager instances via the Hardware Redundancy Interface HRI which is also implemented differently in each of the three ShMM variants Release 3 5 1 16 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide Figure 2 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager Architecture and Context i 8 l rZ I I CZO m i Don 1972 340 I I m i 1 9 s a mam
229. e HPI System Event sensor Section 5 2 new section 5 4 3 describes the IPMB board trace mode Section 7 6 adds a description of a new parameter conf for the upgrade script step4hshm C 18 Release 2 7 2 e Sections 7 6 7 7 adds a description of a new parameter 1ip for the upgrade script step4hshzm Notes that the option u is no longer supported e New section 3 15 describes configuration of local services C 19 Release 2 7 3 e Section 3 3 adds new configuration parameter COOLING _NO POWER _DOWN_IN CRITICAL ALERT e Section 3 15 adds more information about configuration of the SNMP service C 20 Release 2 7 4 e Section 3 3 adds new configuration parameter REDUNDANCY _COMPRESSION_THRESHOLD C 21 Release 2 8 0 e Section 3 3 adds new configuration parameters NO_MO_Ml EVENT AT STARTUP PET OEM WITH SEVERITY STRING RUN_HPI_SNMP_SUBAGENT SPECIAL HPI_ENTITY_FOR_AMC CARRIER e Section 3 3 adds a description of the corrupted_images variable Release 3 5 1 282 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide Section 3 3 adds coverage of the etc localtime file Section 3 3 adds a description of double active state detection Section 4 12 adds descriptions of the ShMM tests accessible via Diagnostic Initiators Section 9 adds a description of HPl based upgrades C 22 Release 2 8 1 Section 3 3 adds a new configuration parameter HPDL NETWORK ELEMENT ID EEPROM OFFSET Section 3 3 fixes a typo in the c
230. e can be specified in the IPMB_TOPOLOGY clause in the HPDL Carrier definition in that case the IPMB topology record is not needed Two different topologies of radial IPMB 0 are supported by the ShMM 1500 dual star and redundant dual star The implemented topology is determined by the design of the ShMM carrier With the dual star topology only one IPMB hub exists on each ShMM carrier This hub connects the ShMM to radial links on either IPMB A or IPMB B depending on the physical position of the ShMM carrier in the shelf This topology has the following properties e Provides equivalent connectivity to the dual star topology that ATCA defines for the Gigabit Ethernet Base Interface e Includes two cross links that connect an IPMB either A or B port on one ShMM to the radial hub on the other ShMM carrier e Requires two installed Shelf Managers for dual redundant operation of IPMB 0 e Establishes two distinct and unconnected fault zones for the two Shelf Managers e Defined by the ATCA architecture only after the amendments made by ECN 002 for PICMG 3 0 R2 0 Figure 4 Dual Star Radial IPMB 0 Topology Shelf Manager Shelf Manager Release 3 5 1 164 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide With the redundant dual star topology each ShMM carrier has two IPMB 0 hubs with each hub connecting one of the ShMM IPMB ports A or B to corresponding radial links on the backplane This topology has the following properties e Defi
231. e of Pigeon Point products one of the Pigeon Point Board Management Reference designs for instance please contact Pigeon Point Systems Pigeon Point Systems 5860 Owens Avenue Suite 130 Carlsbad CA 92008 USA Phone 1 760 757 2304 Fax 1 760 757 2302 E Mail info pigeonpoint com Release 3 5 1 276 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide Appendix C Revision History This section lists the changes that have been made in each revision of this document starting with the 2 1 0 release C 1 Release 2 1 0 e Section 7 3 corrects the boundaries of the Flash partitions maintained on the ShMM 500 by FOSL for 16MB Flash devices e Section 7 3 covers the boundaries of the Flash partitions maintained on the ShMM 500 by FOSL for 32MB Flash and 64MB Flash devices C 2Release 2 2 0 e Section 3 4 4 elaborates on the algorithm for computation of IP address for endpoints of USB network interface e Section 3 3 introduces new configuration parameters ALLOW ALL COMMANDS FROM _IPMB ALLOW CHANGE EVENT RECEIVER ALLOW _RESET_STANDALONE DEFAULT_RMCP_ NETMASK IPMB LINK ISOLATION TIMEOUT MAX INCOMING IPMB REQUESTS MAX OEM FILTERS SENSOR_POLL_ INTERVAL SHELF _FRU_IPMB SOURCE1 SHELF_FRU_IPMB SOURCE2 SWITCHOVER_ON HANDLE OPEN e Section 3 5 1 adds an option to limit the search for potential sources of Shelf FRU Information on IPMB 0 to the two well known IPMB 0 locations defined by the configuration variables SH
232. e output for the SAMM 500 corresponding output for the ShMM 1500 and ShMM 700 is slightly different shmm500 reset Release 3 5 1 212 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide U Boot 1 1 2 Apr 27 2005 19 17 09 CPU Aul550 324 MHz id 0x02 rev 0x00 Board ShMM 500 S N 8000041 DRAM 64 MB Flash 16 MB xxx Warning bad CRC using default environment I serial Out serial Err serial Net AulX00 ETHERNET Hit any key to stop autoboot 0 shmm500 Then save these environment settings Since U Boot configuration storage contains 2 copies of environment variables data and the saveenv command changes them in round robin order you need to invoke the saveenv command twice to update both copies shmmxx00 saveenv saveenv reset 6 3 Re initializing the File System The filesystem var and etc is stored within the Flash and can be restored quite easily from the filesystem in the current RFS image U Boot has an environment variable called flash_reset By setting this variable to y and then booting up the system the var and etc files are erased and then restored from the filesystem in the current RFS image shmmxx00 setenv flash_reset y shmmxx00 saveenv shmmxx00 boot The flash_reset variable is automatically set to n at system startup after re initializing the Flash The boot command the second command above begins booting the Linux kernel It is during this process that the fil
233. e reboot was caused by power operation 04 08 2014 05 14 29 The reboot was caused by WATCHDOG 04 07 2014 00 10 43 The reboot was caused by Shelf Manager abnormal termination signal 11 Segmentation fault pid 139 04 06 2014 02 11 59 The reboot was caused by power operation Each line in the file contains a timestamp and text description of a ShMM reboot The text description normally corresponds to the description of the reboot reason sensor state shown above However if the corresponding reboot reason is 0 The reboot reason is either a Shelf Manager crash or unknown and it is known that a crash has occurred the log message notes that and adds information about the signal that caused the crash along with the Shelf Manager process identifier 4 5 Operation in Shelves with Radial IPMB 0 Some shelves implement radial control of IPMB 0 links in the shelf In that case the segment of IPMB 0 leading to each IPM controller in the shelf can be turned on and off individually by the Shelf Manager This applies individually to both the IPMB A and IPMB B portions of IPMB 0 The operation of the Shelf Manager in such shelves is different from the shelves with a simple bused IPMB 0 The Shelf FRU Information in radial shelves must contain special records that identify the shelf as implementing a radial IPMB 0 topology and specify the routing of the IPMB links to the IPM controllers These records must conform to the ATCA specification
234. e results are logged in a textual form in a dedicated area in SDRAM Results for each particular test have the following form lt 4 gt POST lt test name gt lt test specific output gt PASSED FAILED The POST framework provides interfaces for accessing the results of the POST tests in U Boot and in Linux U Boot supports a log show command which can be used to access the POST test results This command outputs the contents of the POST log buffer onto the serial console shmmxx00 log show lt 4 gt POST uart UART 0 test failed lt 4 gt FAILED lt 4 gt POST crc PASSED In a POST enabled configuration the Linux kernel shares its internal message log buffer with the POST log buffer This causes POST results to be automatically displayed on the serial console Release 3 5 1 134 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide during the kernel bootstrap Interactively the user can access the kernel log buffer and thus the POST test results using the dmesg command implemented by busybox The defined names for POST tests are e memory SDRAM tests recommended for execution on the first boot up after power on e crc Flash checksum verification recommended for execution on each boot up not available on ShMM 700 e uart UART verification specific to the Au1550 processor recommended for execution on each boot up e ethernet Ethernet MACs test specific to the Au1550 processor recommended for exec
235. e step4hshm Operation copy etc and var nvdata etc upgrade step4hshm Copying completed rupgrade tool image s copy OK rupgrade tool watchdog started rupgrade tool selected provisional flash rupgrade tool reboot Restarting system Here the reliable upgrade procedure resets the ShMM This causes U Boot to start from the provisional Flash x Resetting Integrated Peripherals U Boot 1 1 2 May 12 2005 21 27 13 CPU Aul550 324 MHz id 0x02 rev 0x00 Board ShMM 500 S N 08000412 DRAM 64 MB Flash 16 MB Tens serial Out serial Err serial Net AulX00 ETHERNET Hit any key to stop autoboot 0 Booting image at bfb00000 Image Name MIPS Linux 2 4 26 Created 2005 06 24 13 29 50 UTC Image Type MIPS Linux Kernel Image gzip compressed Data Size 844843 Bytes 825 kB Load Address 80100000 Entry Point 802bc040 Verifying Checksum OK Uncompressing Kernel Image OK Loading Ramdisk Image at bfc40000 Image Name sentry RFS Ramdisk Image Created 2005 06 27 10 51 03 UTC Image Type MIPS Linux RAMDisk Image gzip compressed Data Size 2465924 Bytes 2 4 MB Load Address 00000000 Entry Point 00000000 Verifying Checksum OK Starting kernel Release 3 5 1 231 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide init started BusyBox v0 60 5 2005 06 15 14 45 0000 multi call binary etc rce Mounted proc etc rce Mounting filesyste
236. e such mechanism is the IPMI LAN Interface To maximize interoperability among independently implemented shelf products this interface is required by the AdvancedTCA specification and supports IPMI messaging with the Shelf Manager via the IPMI Remote Management Control Protocol RMCP A System Manager that uses RMCP to communicate with shelves should be able to interact with any ATCA compliant Shelf Manager This relatively low level interface provides essentially complete access to the IPMI aspects of a shelf including the ability for the System Manager to issue IPMI commands to IPM Controllers in the shelf using the Shelf Manager as a proxy The Pigeon Point Shelf Manager also supports Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP access to the shelf This popular management protocol is supported with a custom Management Information Base MIB providing Get and Set access to a wide range of information and controls regarding the shelf In addition the Pigeon Point Shelf Manager provides two interfaces oriented towards human users rather than programmatic ones e Command Line Interface CLI This interface provides a comprehensive set of textual commands that can be issued to the Shelf Manager via either a physical serial connection or a telnet connection e Web based Interface This interface enables essentially the same functionality as the CLI with access to the Shelf Manager via a web browser Release 3 5 1 18 August 17 2015 Pigeon Po
237. e system is re initialized The following output is shown on the console etc rce Mounted dev pts etc rce Flash erase requested via U BOOT var etc rce erasing mtdcharl gt etc Erased 1024 Kibyte 0 100 complete etc rce erasing mtdchar0 gt var Erased 1536 Kibyte 0 100 complete etc rce Mounted dev mtdblock3 to var etc rce var log mounted as FLASH disk etc re Started syslogd and klogd etc re var tmp mounted as RAM disk etc rce hostname demo etc rce dev mtdblock2 appears to be empty restoring from RFS SECs s Release 3 5 1 213 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide For the ShMM 700 the console output will look differently etc rce Mount ubid0 user etc rce Flash erase requested via U Boot variable etc rce erasing etc etc rce erasing var etc re Selecting carrier from the environment etc re etc rce Extracting shelfman rootfs patch from 1 sentry shmm700 app etc rce Extraction result 0 etc rc Placed var tmp to ram disk etc re Setting hostname shmm 121 etc re Started syslogd and klogd etc re Strobing the reliable upgrade WDT etc rce etc appears to be empty restoring from RFS etc 6 4 Resetting the Login Password The default login for the ShMM as set in the PPS provided RFS images is a user ID of root and the empty password A shelf supplier can change the default password We hi
238. ead and modified with CLI commands A positive value of this parameter indicates the offset from the beginning of the EEPROM a negative value means the offset from the end of the EEPROM Zero value indicates the absence of the Network Element ID This parameter makes sense only for HPDL based systems and only if local EEPROMs are used to store Shelf FRU Information Release 3 5 1 55 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide TYPE DEFAULT DESCRIPTION CAN BE OBTAINED FROM SHELF FRU INFO HPM2 ENABLE Boolean TRUE Enables the Shelf Manager to No CLIENT _SESSI establish and use HPM 2 client ONS sessions to HPM 2 capable intelligent FRUs in the Shelf If this parameter is TRUE the Shelf Manager when detecting an intelligent FRU an IPMC or an AMC that supports HPM 2 sessions attempts to establish a client session to that FRU Subsequently the Shelf Manager uses these sessions to retrieve SDRs and FRU information from that FRU which can be significantly faster than using IPMB If this parameter is FALSE the Shelf Manager does not establish HPM 2 client sessions to intelligent FRUs in the shelf this mode of operation is compatible with previous releases of the Shelf Manager that lacked this level of HPM 2 support HPM2_ ENABLE __ Boolean TRUE Enables HPM 2 Extended Inactive No INACTIVE STA State Management in the Shelf TE _MANAGEMEN Manager If this parameter is TRUE T the Shelf
239. ealth 28h are operational 01h Redundancy Lost some of the fan trays defined in the Address Table are missing or non operational With the HPDL default cooling management strategy this causes the fan level for all remaining fan trays to be set to their maximum 136 Cooling State Severity 7 Management 00h transition to OK The Subsystem cooling state is Normal Health 28h 01h transition to Non Critical from OK The cooling state is now Minor Alert the previous cooling state was Normal 02h transition to Critical from less severe The cooling state is now Major Alert the previous cooling state was either Normal or Minor Alert 04h transition to Non Critical from more severe The cooling state is now Minor Alert the previous cooling state was either Major or Critical Alert 05h transition to Critical from Non recoverable The current cooling state is Major Alert the previous cooling state was Critical Alert 06h transition to Non recoverable The current cooling state is now Critical Alert 137 Fans State Severity 7 Management 00h transition to OK The fans Subsystem state is Normal no thresholds are Health 28h crossed on fan tachometer sensors 01h transition to Non Critical from OK The fans state is now Minor Alert non critical thresholds are crossed for some tachometer Release 3 5 1 170 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide s
240. ection 7 8 2 adds an example reliable upgrade scenario for the SnMM 1500 C 12 Release 2 6 1 e Section 3 2 1 adds descriptions of new U Boot variables Llog_max and log_ remote e Section 3 3 adds new configuration parameters ENABLE _INTEGRALHPT INTEGRALHPI_ DOMAIN ID TACHOMETER THRESHOLD UPDATE DELAY e Section 3 3 corrects the description of the configuration parameter REDUNDANCY NET ADAPTER2 e New section 3 13 1 adds a parsed example of an SNMP Trap in default IPMI PET v1 0 format e New section 3 14 describes configuration of the IntegralHP subsystem C 13 Release 2 6 4 e Section 2 4 4 lists the full set of ShMM variants including those that have reached an end of life status Describes new ShMM 1500 models with encryption code removed e Section 3 2 1 adds descriptions of the HPDL carrier specific option CARRIER_FRU_LOCATION Release 3 5 1 280 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide e Section 3 3 adds new configuration parameters BOARD LAN PARAMETERS CHANNEL LIST INITIALIZATION SCRIPT PEF_USE_KEYED ALARMS SEL FILE COMPRESSION ENABLED SEL FILE JOURNALING ENABLED SEL FILE WRITE DELAY SHELF MANAGER _CONFIGURATION_IN_SHELF_FRU_INFO TIMEPROTO TIMESERVER e New section 3 3 2 describes a new mechanism for retrieving configuration variables from Shelf FRU Information New section 3 4 2 4 describes bonded usage of the two network interfaces New section 3 6 4 1 describes how to specify l
241. ed IPMB B Enabled te 0x08 LocalControl No failure te 0x08 LocalControl No failure LUN 0 Sensor 25 IPMB LINK 13 0x8 IPMB A Enabled IPMB B Enabled te 0x08 LocalControl No failure te 0x08 LocalControl No failure LUN 0 Sensor 26 IPMB LINK 14 0x8 IPMB A Enabled IPMB B Enabled te 0x08 LocalControl No failure te 0x08 LocalControl No failure LUN 0 Sensor 27 IPMB LINK 15 0x8 IPMB A Enabled IPMB B Enabled te 0x08 LocalControl No failure te 0x08 LocalControl No failure August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide 4 5 2 Operation in ShMM 1500 based Shelves with Radial IPMB 0 On ShMM 1500 based shelves with radial IPMB 0 support there is a separate logical IPMB interface for each of the two portions IPMB A and IPMB B of each radial IPMB segment There is no need for faulty link isolation in this case since each segment is separately accessible and permanently isolated from its peer segments on a logical basis Radial operation of SAMM 1500 requires all of the following 1 radial support on the shelf level 2 the presence of a radial IPMB description record in the Shelf FRU Information and 3 radial support on the ShMM carrier For non HPDL systems a special Pigeon Point defined record the IPMB topology record must be present in the ShMM carrier FRU information to specify the type of the IPMB topology supported by the carrier In HPDL based systems the IPMB topology typ
242. ed with the Shelf Manager does not perform specific image validation steps but does take responsibility for filling in the Flash partitions for which no images are provided in the current call to rupgrade_tool as would happen in a partial upgrade scenario These partitions are copied from the current persistent Flash to the provisional Flash For example if the current partial upgrade provides only a new RFS image the script copies the U Boot and kernel partitions from the persistent Flash to the provisional Flash As soon as the first image has been installed to its destination the utility proceeds to the second image if there is one and so on until all the supplied image files have been successfully installed to Flash A failure to successfully install an image immediately terminates the upgrade procedure vs skipping a failing image and proceeding to the next one This approach enables the user to separately upgrade the three parts of ShMM firmware U Boot kernel and RFS image However the user should bear in mind that the parts that are not explicitly updated is copied from persistent Flash PPS recommends use of one of the following upgrade approaches e Explicitly upgrading all three partitions e When fewer than 3 partitions are explicitly upgraded omitting the d specifier in that case the special script mentioned above automatically ensures that every upgrade is effectively a full upgrade covering all three partitions
243. eeececsesseaeeeeeeeeeeses 161 4 5 1 Operation in SAMM 500 based Shelves with Radial IPMB 0 ccccsccceee 161 4 5 2 Operation in SAMM 1500 based Shelves with Radial IPMB 0 c00cs 164 4 5 3 Operation in SAMM 700 based Shelves with Radial IPMB 0 cccscceeeee 167 4 6 AUTOMATIC SEL TRUNCATION 0cscccccecececeesesaececcesceesesesaeceeceseecsesaeaececeeseeeseesaeeeeess 169 4 7 COOLING STATESENSORS bi cect cccanenpesseeeescctebeesskeyensiasdyaaedeenvensducdehanstesuaseicndeass Sineeedeaccets 169 4 8 DEADLOCK DETECTION scicze cocevencsmnatctereacncncteacndtiewoshencswscncteswasnddcsescndtle seaenenctenctdiereamncdcees 171 AS C BUS FAULT ISOLATION sicccrsidecssiassnncesniahtuiesdteceashsedioassirscaniciduiessincnens iusucess sancetibiiess 175 4 9 1 PC Bus Fault Isolation Original Approach Single Multiplexer or Switch Not FIPDL DASOO sin5ccsxiissavslivnze ccuxibass taayiaccue colabibuyyn avdexnecanduua nasvundsedes susbressseppese A R aaa 176 4 9 2 PC Bus Fault Isolation HPDL based Approach Multiple Multiplexers or Switches 176 4 10 ASSIGNMENT OF LAN CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS TO BOARDS AND MODULES 178 4 10 1 Structure and Composition of the Supported Parameters ccccccecceeeeeeeees 178 4 10 2 Obtaining LAN Configuration Parameters on the Shelf Manager Level 179 4 10 3 Dispatching LAN Configuration Parameters to BoardS 1 cc cccccsceeereseeeteees 183 4 10 4 Synchronous As
244. ees 254 8 9 RELIABLE UPGRADE EXAMPLEG 0 csesssesesesseseesesssesssesseeeeeseeeessesseeessseseesseseeesesesneaes 255 8 9 1 EOMP Tarira a a a a ips eseakpabwig cae ba vives eacyendeapsivigeal asia eiveaieee een 255 8 9 2 PROTI 2 es seit aSins gic pte te Sessa T crn sepa eeag as pods ae peieek avs pee eee 262 8 9 3 EEX LITO Disses shiv wc o N ode ta pve aie gadis a Selves a debs pape dvb avs oben Seve eee 265 9 HPI BASED SHELF MANAGER UPGRADE csseccsseeeeeeeeesseeseseeeeeeneeseeeseseeeenseeeeennes 272 APPENDIX A CONVERTING TO SHMM 700 BASED SHELF MANAGERS IN SHMM 500 MANAGED SHELVES a a a raara eaaa cece a E eea A o PAra E seas tuacececuaccusataseceetateseatameye 274 APPENDIX B CUSTOMER SUPPORT wwssecescncicecccesececcsetacennncseceedcetacenteesnetecntedesesseetesetes 276 APPENDIX C REVISION HISTORY rearea asiansa eraann aea oaaae aani aaao 277 C 1 RELEASE 2051 0 i siccieesc cus te te suds ae tas ccen bh eeededs eeuded ch Sebeedtpweacee e AE went ieee 277 C 2 RELEASE 2 20 o ieeeticdet cade ceaeuesseensadtavencsa el ae i aaao a Aa iength ace detest tie woe eae 277 C 3 RELEASE 2 30u unane a e a dence adh execs aE Ea KEE Ea RAA EE Aea 277 C 4 RELEASE 274 0 s s isddei sects eases a aai anavaa ar aa innit naaa teehee 278 C 5 RELEASE 22404 arianarian ia aaaea araa iar a Eai araa iae edness 278 C 6 PREEEAS E242 oss ctuiceteys eds cesuautiot wyetacdiunaaceedvexsceoesesctt ns pv ecacoeuuseaveuves se aeuex sitet vues ssceueeesbors 278 C 7 PRECEA
245. eeseaees 141 3 14 1 HPI Domain Support in InteQralHP 22 ccccccccsesceeseeceeeecenecetseeseneeceneeetsnneneaes 141 3 14 2 HPI SNMP Subagent Support cccccccccsccceeececeeeeeensecseneeceeeeeseesseseeceeeeessnneseaes 141 3 14 3 IntegralHPI Client Configuration 2 ccccececeeeceeeseceeseeceneeecseeesaaecseneeseeneetsaneteaes 141 3 15 CONFIGURING SYSTEM SERVICES cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeecaeeesaaeeeeaeeseeeesaeeeeaeeseneeseaes 142 3 16 CONFIGURING THE SPEED OF I C BUSES SHMM 700 ONLY c sccsesesesseseseeesseeeeessen 144 4 USING THE SHELF MANAGER escocs cicccssncpsccccesscteeescecesecsentecetecueesdenencuseetcudesedyccnteseecuersetees 146 4 1 IN THIS SECTION ities deceit ceitss aoaea Saanaa a aA aE aE aa 146 4 2 SHMM LOGIN sv ccgieecs cee aderechesctacdttet acc netagtiAavesczhens ipavlilacceaesanteitia ts naaleu heaton enatetianens 146 4 3 STARTING THE SHELF MANAGER ccceseceeeseceeseeceeceeseeeeeaaeceeaaeseaeeseaeessaaeseeaaesseneeenaeee 146 4 4 REDUNDANT OPERATION seanair n naaa eaa aaan aa aeaa a aa AAAA REAA 154 4 4 1 Initialization of the Redundant Shelf MANnaQers 22 ccccccccsecessteceeseceeetesennetenes 157 4 4 2 Redundancy and CPLD State S NSOM 1 ccsccccscccccsceceeeeecseesesssecseeeceneeessnnensaes 158 4 4 3 Reboot Reason Sensor ou scessscceseessececeescececeeacececsuaeecessuseecessuneeceeseneseeseeseeeeeenes 160 4 5 OPERATION IN SHELVES WITH RADIAL IPMB 0 ccccccccececsesseeeee
246. effective binary image for HPDL and SDR data is a concatenation of the contents of all multirecords of the corresponding type that are present in a given FRU Information Release 3 5 1 120 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide Since in many cases the capacity of EEPROM devices used to store the FRU Information is small HPDL data and SDRs can be placed into the FRU Information in a compressed form The GZIP compression algorithm is supported Compressed data is detected automatically when retrieved by the Shelf Manager from the FRU Information and the data is automatically uncompressed in that case To support this deployment approach several new features have been added to the Pigeon Point FRU Compiler and to the Pigeon Point Shelf Manager CLI Command Line Interface these features enable the user to incorporate compiled HPDL data and SDRs into the FRU Information 3 6 4 1 Specifying the Location of the Carrier FRU Information The preferred location for the Carrier FRU Information is an EEPROM on the ShMM carrier In addition however the Shelf Manager supports getting the Carrier FRU Information from a file on the ShMM file system this can be useful if the SAMM carrier lacks an appropriate EEPROM However if the Carrier FRU Information is stored in an EEPROM the location and type of this EEPROM needs to be communicated to the Shelf Manager Carrier HPDL data cannot be used for that because of a chicken and egg pro
247. eful if a reliable upgrade procedure is started remotely over the network via a virtual terminal telnet rsh or ssh connection because in that case the messages issued to the local serial console are not directly available e After the completion of the reliable upgrade the user can revert to the original images if he she detects that the new images are not acceptable for any reason To do this the user invokes rupgrade rollback This sequence can be performed manually by an operator However if necessary one can easily automate the above sequence via a script that runs on a host machine that is connected to the ShMM over the network and remotely issues appropriate commands to the rupgrade and backend utilities on the ShMM 8 9 Reliable Upgrade Examples This section provides reliable upgrade examples for ShMM 700 8 9 1 Example 1 This example shows a reliable upgrade of all four components U Boot kernel RFS image and application package copying etc and var nvdata non volatile directories to the candidate locations All images are taken from the local tmp which implies that they have already been copied there in some unspecified way The U Boot image is taken from tmp u boot bin the kernel image is taken from tmp sentry kernel the RFS image is taken from tmp sentry rfs the application image is taken from tmp sentry app tgz The upgrade procedure is started from the serial console Release 3 5 1 255 August 17 201
248. elf Manager usb0 and usb1 must belong to different logical networks while usb0 on one Shelf Manager and usb1 on the other Shelf Manager must belong to the same logical network This is achieved by dividing the IP address space into two ranges These ranges logical networks are defined by the subnet mask given by the parameter REDUNDANCY_NETMASK from the configuration file etc shelfman conf Ifthe network mask is 255 255 255 128 then the first range is 192 168 1 0 192 168 1 127 and the other is 192 168 1 128 192 168 1 255 The usb0 endpoint on the first Shelf Manager and the usb0 endpoint on the other Shelf Manager are in the first range The usb0 endpoint on the first Shelf Manager and the usb0 endpoint on the other Shelf Manager are in the second range The 4 IP addresses in question can be derived from one IP address for example the IP address assigned to usb0 on the Shelf Manager with the even hardware address and the network mask for which the recommended value is 255 255 255 128 The rules are as follows e To compute the IP address for usb0 on the Shelf Manager with the even hardware address when the file etc readhwaddr is present you should set the least significant bit of REDUNDANCY IP_ADDRESS to 0 e To compute the IP address for usb1 on the other Shelf Manager you should toggle the least significant bit in the usbO IP address on the first Shelf Manager This guarantees that usb0 on Shelf Manager with the even hardware
249. eliable upgrade by calling rupgrade s xrupgrade s lt INFO gt frontend c 37 Last upgrade log lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1285 Write storage state not available gt available ALLOW lt INFO gt shmm700_ hal c 369 Resetting UBIFS cache lt INFO gt shmm700_ hal c 1913 Clean on defice 1 1 Leaving file dev mtd2 untouched lt INFO gt backend c 730 Burning image lt INFO gt backend c 764 393216 bytes was written from file tmp tmp uboot to dev 1 1 lt INFO gt backend c 730 Burning image lt INFO gt backend c 764 1402348 bytes was written from file tmp tmp kernel to dev 2 1 lt INFO gt backend c 730 Burning image lt INFO gt backend c 764 2283039 bytes was written from file tmp tmp rfs to dev 4 1 lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1285 Write storage state available gt not available ALLOW lt INFO gt backend c 730 Burning image lt INFO gt backend c 764 2110743 bytes was written from file tmp tmp app to dev 8 1 lt INFO gt backend c 808 Erasing user data on candidate bank lt INFO gt backend c 821 Copy etc lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1189 Write confirmed 0 gt 0 ALLOW Release 3 5 1 261 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide lt INFO gt shmm700_ hal c 1194 Write candidate 1 gt 1 ALLOW lt INFO gt shmm700 hal
250. ements numerous IPMI 2 0 features including RMCP Virtual LAN support and firmware firewall commands PICMG has significantly extended IPMI to cover the needs of open modular architectures In fact about 30 of the 656 pages of PICMG 3 0 are devoted to hardware platform management including the definition of 38 new commands ten new FRU Information data structures several quite complex and 3 new sensor types The AdvancedMC and MicroTCA specifications add another 208 pages of hardware platform management coverage The strategy for the Pigeon Point Shelf Manager is to fully support these extensions and also map them to other platform architectures such as CompactPCI Note AdvancedTCA has adopted the term shelf for alignment with typical practice in telecommunications applications Traditionally for instance in the CompactPCI specifications the term chassis has been used with essentially the same meaning Figure 1 shows the logical elements of an example AdvancedTCA shelf identified in terms of the ATCA specification and potential sites for incorporation of Pigeon Point products Release 3 5 1 12 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide Figure 1 Management Aspects and Potential Pigeon Point Product Sites in an Example AdvancedTCA Shelf Potential Pigeon Point Product Sites ATCA AMC Specification Elements 1 Shelf Managers EA Salia SS Ee TR ShMM S00R ea 2 ontrol veral Variants
251. ensors the previous fans state was Normal 02h transition to Critical from less severe The fans state is now Major Alert critical thresholds are crossed for some tachometer sensors the previous fans state was either Normal or Minor Alert 04h transition to Non Critical from more severe The fans state is now Minor Alert the previous fans state was either Major Alert or Critical Alert non recoverable thresholds are crossed for some tachometer sensors 05h transition to Critical from Non recoverable The current fans state is Major Alert the previous fans state was Critical Alert 06h transition to Non recoverable The current fans state is now Critical Alert 4 8 Deadlock Detection The Shelf Manager contains built in facilities for detecting internal deadlocks A deadlock happens if two or more threads in the Shelf Manager application acquire locks in an incorrect order so that one thread owns the lock requested by the other thread and vice versa As a result the Shelf Manager becomes unresponsive on its external interfaces though it still continues to run Any deadlock is a result of a serious programming bug and should not happen during normal operation The deadlock detection facilities however add an additional layer of protection and ensure that should a deadlock happen during normal operation of the Shelf Manager a switchover to the backup Shelf Manager takes place and the Shelf Manager continu
252. ent of full size 8U AdvancedTCA boards as well as other auxiliary FRUs such as fan trays or power entry modules Based on the interfaces specified by IPMI and extended by AdvancedTCA and AdvancedMC any compliant Shelf Manager can work with any compliant IPM Controller and the FRUs that it represents including AMCs This section focuses on controllers based on Pigeon Point technology as a concrete example The focus here is on controller solutions for AdvancedTCA and AdvancedMC Pigeon Point also provides solutions for MicroTCA management controllers The Pigeon Point BMR reference design can be implemented as part of any board or other FRU and executes the corresponding firmware thereby realizing a compliant IPM Controller The BMR firmware represents one or more FRUs via IPMB 0 to the Shelf Manager including e Providing inventory information identifying each such FRU including its manufacturer and other data e Describing and implementing a set of logical sensors such as for temperature state of IPMB 0 and operational state for each FRU activated deactivated etc e Generating events typically directed to the Shelf Manager for exceptional conditions detected by any sensor based on its configured event generation settings e Negotiating with the Shelf Manager for resources needed by the FRU s including power and interconnects BMR firmware running on a Carrier IPMC additionally represents its installed AMCs or an inte
253. eptable for any reason To do this the user calls rupgrade tool sR hook flip If necessary the above sequence can be easily automated by developing a simple script designed to run on a remote network host Alternatively an operator can carry out the reliable upgrade manually either locally from the serial console or remotely over the network 7 8 Reliable Upgrade Examples This section provides reliable upgrade examples for both ShMM 500 and ShMM 1500 The reliable upgrade procedure works similarly on these two types of ShMMs but there may be minor differences in the appearance of the command output 7 8 1 Example 1 This example shows a reliable upgrade of all three components U Boot kernel and RFS image copying etc and var nvdata non volatile directories to the provisional Flash All images are taken from the local tmp which implies that they have already been copied there in some unspecified way The U Boot image is taken from tmp u boot bin the kernel image is taken from tmp sentry kernel the RFS image is taken from tmp sentry rfs The upgrade procedure is started from the serial console Comments are interspersed in the console log to provide additional background on the steps of the upgrade procedure First the rupgrade_tool1 is started from the command prompt The parameters show that all three Flash images are to be updated with the Shelf Manager non volatile data and configuration file preserved as well ru
254. equire corrective actions including those resulting in the need to soft reset the ShMM This means that an invocation of rupgrade_tool c may not return and instead may result in a reset of the ShMM If a reset takes place it reverts the ShMM to the software installed in the persistent Flash If the upgrade WDT is active and has fired at any step prior to invocation of rupgrade c this means that the ShMM already reverted to the software in the persistent Flash In this scenario the utility disables the upgrade WDT and returns to the use of persistent Flash and terminates the upgrade procedure If the upgrade WDT is active but has not fired this means that the ShMM successfully booted up to this point from the provisional Flash The utility strobes the upgrade WDT and exits with the return code of 0 indicating that there is an upgrade procedure session in progress If the upgrade WDT is not active but the content of the var upgrade status file indicates that the upgrade procedure is still in progress this means that the ShMM rebooted due to a power cycle at one of the steps of the upgrade procedure In this scenario the utility performs the same corrective actions as for the situation when the upgrade WDT is active and has fired see above Release 3 5 1 227 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide Finally if the upgrade WDT is not active and var upgrade status is either not present or indicates that the upgrade proce
255. er 3 5 1 Built on July 17 2015 14 48 57 lt gt 02 48 08 469 171 Limits code 400000 5076 0 end data 10062000 start _stack 7f fff 7e30 sp 7fff 78a0 eip 2ab0d2e4 The Shelf Manager starts and finalizes the reliable upgrade calling rupgrade_tool f ethO link up ethl link up ethl going to full duplex shmm 193 login root BusyBox v0 60 5 2005 05 12 22 46 0000 Built in shell msh Finally the user checks the status of the reliable upgrade by calling rupgrade_tool w rupgrade_tool w Release 3 5 1 232 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide Recent upgrade status 1 PLB is 5 1 EEPROM page saved 2 persistent flash is 0 3 provisional flash is 1 4 copying image s 4 invoking scripts step4v u u boot bin k sentry kernel r sentry rfs hook etc_copy 4 copying u boot bin from tmp to dev mtdchar8 using cp protocol 4 copying sentry kernel from tmp to dev mtdchar7 using cp protocol 4 copying sentry rfs from tmp to dev mtdchar9 using cp protocol 4 invoking scripts step4h etc copy 4 image s copy OK 5 watchdog started 6 selected provisional flash 7 reboot 9 WDT not fired upgrade in progress ll provisional flash 1 updating EEPROM 12 EEPROM updated 13 upgrade WDT disabled 13 invoking scripts step1l3h 14 upgrade completed successfully 7 8 2 Example 2 This example shows a reliable upgrade of the
256. er number 0 1 2 with 0 for logical Shelf Manager e Request ID bits 3 0 Interface number 0 for ethO 1 for eth If the Shelf Address string in the Shelf FRU Information is empty a hard coded string of 7 zero bytes is used In that case the Client Identifier values are implemented as follows Currently the Client Identifier values are hardcoded as follows 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 10 Shelf Manager 1 eth0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 11 Shelf Manager 1 ethl 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 20 Shelf Manager 2 eth0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 21 Shelf Manager 2 ethl 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Logical Shelf Manager eth0O 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 Logical Shelf Manager ethl However these Client IDs can be redefined for a specific carrier inside the corresponding ShMM carrier specific module if the HPM 3 Client Identifier format is disabled To use this feature in the Shelf Manager it is necessary to define the configuration parameter USE_DHCP in the Shelf Manager configuration file etc shelfman conf as follows USE DHCP TRUE By default the Shelf Manager uses the first DHCP server that answers the DHCPDISCOVER request to assign the IP addresses If more than one DHCP server is present in the network the configuration parameter DHCP_SERVER_ADDRESS can be used in the Shelf Manager configuration file etc shelfman conf to specify the IP address of the DHCP server to be used as follows DHCP SERVER ADDRESS 192 168 1 50
257. erform multiple tasks including reliable upgrades of various ShMM software components status checks for the most recent upgrade and manual rollbacks to the previous software versions Another utility backend is provided that is not intended to be invoked directly by an interactive user This utility performs more specific actions needed for reliable upgrade like starting strobing Release 3 5 1 246 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide and stopping the reliable upgrade watchdog timer getting and setting the number of the candidate and confirmed image set etc It can be invoked from system scripts like the system startup script etc rc Also the rupgrade utility uses the services provided by the backend utility during its operation The rupgrade utility is fully functional only when called from the superuser root account If run from a non root account the utility can be used for read only operations like getting the upgrade status As the rupgrade utility operates in upgrade mode see below it logs the status of each action as it progresses through the stages of the procedure to the status file var upgrade status In the case of a failure the reliable upgrade utility adds a record to this file indicating that the reliable upgrade has completed unsuccessfully and then terminates with an appropriate error code The rupgrade utility outputs any informational messages to stdout and any error messages to stderr
258. es operation without interruption There are two deadlock detection facilities one that is triggered by watchdog timer expiration and one that directly detects incorrect locking patterns in the Shelf Manager The watchdog based deadlock detection facility monitors the operation of the most important interface oriented subsystems of the Shelf Manager which now include the CLI processing thread and the RMCP processing threads Normally if a deadlock takes place anywhere in the Shelf Manager one or more of these threads is affected immediately or very soon as a result of deadlock propagation The threads monitored by the watchdog based deadlock detection facility must periodically strobe the internal watchdog timer The strobe period is set separately for each type of monitored thread and is 30 seconds for the CLI thread and 3 seconds for the RMCP threads If one of the monitored Release 3 5 1 171 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide threads fails to strobe the internal watchdog timer on timely basis the Shelf Manager does the following e issues a warning message to the console and or to the syslog file e collects information about current usage of locks in the Shelf Manager e writes this information to a Flash file on the ShMM var nvdata dumplog bin where it survives reboots and can be subsequently analyzed by the analysis tool dumplog e if one of the monitored threads fails to do a timely strobe of the internal
259. es the ripmb_ prog utility for programming of ShMM 700 routing element FPGA s e Section 4 9 adds a description of the HPDL based method of 12C bus fault isolation e Appendix A notes that SnMM 500 to SnMM 700 switchovers involving a ShMM 700 module mounted on a ShMM 500 carrier via the Pigeon Point ShMM 700R SO DIMM adapter board SHMM 700R SA are not supported C 27 Release 3 3 0 e Section 3 3 describes new configuration variables HPM2 ENABLE INACTIVE STATE MANAGEMENT HPM2 ENABLE SHMM INACTIVE_STATE HPM3_ ENABLE IPMB LOCAL FAILURE _RETRIES RMCP_PLUS ONLY e Section 3 4 8 describes the HPM 3 Client Identifier format as default format for DHCP IP address assignments e Section 4 4 3 adds a new cause of the last reboot Release 3 5 1 284 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide C 28 Release 3 4 0 Section 3 3 describes new configuration variable SAVE_CRASH_INFORMATION The COOLING IGNORE LOCAL CONTROL variable was removed since it was not used in the Shelf Manager The default value of the HPDL _ ON_SUBSIDIARY_FRUS variable was corrected to TRUE Clarification was added for the IPMB_RETRY_TIMEOUT MSEC variable The value CRITICAL ALERT of the variable REAPPLY POWER_MAX COOLING STATE is no longer valid Section 3 3 describes new configuration variables COOLING _EXHAUST_SENSOR_LIST COOLING_INTAKE SENSOR LIST DEFAULT_HPM2 _CLIENT_IP_ ADDRESS DEFAULT _HPM2 GATEWAY_IP ADDRESS DEFAULT _HPM2_ NETMASK HP
260. es the risk of upgrading shelves in the field to the ShMM 700 It is important to understand the special aspects of this support e This conversion is only supported in one direction going to SAMM 700 based management e Concurrent presence in the shelf of both types of ShMMs is only supported for transition purposes Stable dual redundant management requires a pair of ShMMs from the same family e This functionality is only supported if the SnMM 500 uses a USB based Software Redundancy Interface e The CARRIER Shelf Manager configuration parameter must be set to the same value on the ShMM 500 and ShMM 700 carriers e The IPMB 0 topology must be bused Please contact Pigeon Point Systems if any of the following situations apply in a prospective scenario for converting a live shelf from ShMM 500 based management to ShMM 700 based management e AnEthernet based Software Redundancy Interface is used e The CARRIER configuration parameter cannot be set to the same value on the ShMM 500 and ShMM 700 carriers e The shelf supports a Radial IPMB 0 topology The switchover procedure is not much different from a standard ShMM 500 to ShMM 500 or ShMM 700 to SaMM 700 switchover procedure and is described below where ShMM 500 700 carriers are referenced for physical board removals and insertions 1 Remove the backup ShMM 500 carrier Insert a ShMM 700 carrier into the vacant slot Wait until it comes up as a backup Shelf Manager Issueaclia switch
261. es the verbosity of the informational messages The utility prints any error messages to stderr The utility has the following synopsis rupgrade tool s lt dst gt lt src gt proto lt protocol gt d hook lt args gt v a R rupgrade tool c v rupgrade tool f hook lt args gt v rupgrade tool w f rupgrade tool S v rupgrade tool h rupgrade tool C lt dst gt lt src gt proto lt protocol gt d v a where the parameters are defined as follows s lt dst gt lt src gt proto lt protocol gt hook lt args gt v a R Release 3 5 1 222 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide Initiate the reliable upgrade procedure As delivered with Shelf Manager support this step includes the following actions e obtaining the images to copy locally or via the network copying the images to the provisional Flash terminating the Shelf Manager instance running on the ShMM 500 if any copying non volatile data to the provisional Flash resetting the SAMM and instructing it to boot from the provisional Flash However if the specifier R has been used in the command line only the last action in the list above occurs that is no image copying takes place Because of the last step an invocation of rupgrade_tool s typically does not return and instead resets the ShMM If rupgrade_tool s does return it indicates that the reliable
262. es whose Shelf Managers support HPI IPMB_ADDRESS Number 0 The IPMB address of the Shelf No Manager overriding the hardware address The value of 0 causes the Shelf Manager to read the hardware address from hardware and set IPMB address to hardware address 2 Release 3 5 1 August 17 2015 IPMB LINK IS OLATION TIME OUT Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide TYPE Number DEFAULT 1 DESCRIPTION In radial shelves if an IPMB link is disabled due to the isolation algorithm the link is automatically enabled after this time interval in seconds 1 the default stands for forever CAN BE OBTAINED FROM SHELF FRU INFO Yes IPMB LOCAL F AILURE_RETRI ES Number ShMM 700 only in the case of a local IPMB failure as reported by the IPMB driver the number of times the IPMB operation is retried After the specified number of retries is exhausted on IPMB A and is also exhausted on IPMB B a switchover to the backup Shelf Manager takes place No IPMB RETRIES Number The number of attempts to send an IPMB request before finally giving up if no response is received to this request No IPMB RETRY T IMEOUT Number The amount of time in seconds that the Shelf Manager waits for a response after sending an IPMB request before retrying the request No IPMB RETRY T IMEOUT_MSEC Number 500 The millisecond part of the retry
263. ess within that range such as 192 168 0 2 In a redundant ShMM setup it is important to note that only one ShMM the active ShMM has the RMCP IP address enabled on the RMCP Ethernet port The backup ShMM assigns the same IP address to the RMCP Ethernet port but only enables it when that ShMM assumes the active role This way the RMCP IP address maintains availability in a failover situation If the configuration variable PROPAGATE _RMCP ADDRESS is set to TRUE in that case the backup ShMM assigns a conjugate to the RMCP IP address to its RMCP Net Adapter that is it assigns an address that is different in the least significant bit of the fourth byte 3 4 1 1 Assigning an Additional IP Address to the First Network Interface In the default configuration no IP address is assigned to the first network interface and the ShMM is not accessible over the network until the Shelf Manager starts and the RMCP IP address is assigned However it may be useful in some cases to assign an IP address to the RMCP network interface and have the ShMM accessible over the network as soon as the operating system is booted In that case it is also desirable that when the Shelf Manager is started for the RMCP IP address to coexist with the originally assigned IP address rather than replacing it To achieve this configuration it is necessary to instruct the Shelf Manager to assign the RMCP IP address not to the first network adapter itself ethO but to its first alia
264. essed or modified via any of the RMCP CLI web or SNMP external interfaces and take precedence over the shelfman configuration file when the Shelf Manager is restarted This is to ensure the persistency of any modifications that are made to the LAN IP Addresses and gateway via those interfaces If the Shelf Manager IP Connection record in the Shelf FRU Information contains an IP address it takes precedence over all other settings of the external or RMCP IP address Preferably the Shelf FRU Information should either not specify this address at all or set it to 0 0 0 0 to ensure that addresses can be controlled through the Shelf Manager configuration file and the IPMI LAN Release 3 5 1 39 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide configuration parameters The value of 0 0 0 0 for an IP address type of configuration parameter is interpreted as undefined The Shelf FRU Information should specify the RMCP IP address the Shelf Manager uses it and propagates it to the LAN configuration parameters RMCP is available in the absence of the Shelf FRU Information only if the configuration parameter RMCP_WITHOUT_ SHELF _ FRU is defined and set to TRUE In this case the Shelf Manager uses the IP address stored in the channel parameters If there are no stored channel parameters it uses the IP address specified in the boot parameters of the ShMM Some Shelf Manager configuration variables can get their values from the Shelf FRU In
265. etc rce Attach result 0 etc rce Mount ubi0 user etc re Attaching UBI1 boot UBI device number 1 total 484 LEBs 31657472 bytes 30 2 MiB available 0 LEBs 0 bytes LEB size 65408 bytes 63 9 KiB etc re Attach result 0 etc re Mount ubil boot etc re Selecting carrier from the environment etc re etc rce Extracting shelfman rootfs patch from 0 sentry shmm700 app 32979 1 records in 4122 1 records out 2110464 bytes 2 0MB copied 3 647968 seconds 565 0KB s etc rce Extraction result 0 etc rce Placed var tmp to ram disk etc re Setting hostname shmm700 etc rce Started syslogd and klogd lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1265 Write upgrade watchdog 1 gt 2 ALLOW etc re Strobing the reliable upgrade WDT Here rupgrade is invoked for the second time to strobe the reliable upgrade WDT etc rce Mounted 0 etc to etc etc re Calling etc rc shmm700 hpdl etc readhwaddr Board Hardware Address 0x12 etc netconfig etc hosts updated with shmm700 192 168 0 23 entry etc netconfig Updating etc profile sentry with IP settings etc netconfig Starting bin inetd etc netconfig Starting time synchronization script etc rce shmm700 hpdl Updating etc profile sentry with specific settings etc rce shmm700 hpdl Starting snmpd etc rce shmm700 hpdl Starting httpd etc rce shmm700 hpdl Starting Shelf Manager for carrier type PPS700 etc rce shmm7
266. ev etc lib mnt proc sbin tmp usr var 4 3 Starting the Shelf Manager The Shelf Manager software is implemented in the executable file she1 man in the directory bin During normal use of the Shelf Manager it is invoked automatically by startup scripts Typical users never need to invoke it manually as described here Nevertheless for the unusual circumstances in which manual invocation may be necessary the details are described here The syntax of a Shelf Manager command line invocation is defined as follows shelfman lt options gt amp or Release 3 5 1 146 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide daemon f shelfman lt options gt The following options are recognized h lt address gt v lt verbosity gt c lt path gt cs w wt 1 c s g lt ip_address gt sf port lt port gt ph lt IPMB addr1 gt lt IPMB addr2 gt i lt command _line gt A detailed description of these options is given below h lt address gt This option overrides the hardware address of the FRU site where the Shelf Manager resides This hardware address is used as the IPMB address for the Shelf Manager the address that is based on its hardware address separate from 20h and is treated as a hexadecimal number This option can be used if no hardware address is automatically available for the Shelf Manager If this option is not used the Shelf Manager obtains the hardware address in a carrier
267. ever if the Shelf Manager detects that the other network adapter is also physically disconnected from the network it does not perform the IP address switchover described above but performs a full switchover to the backup Shelf Manager A full switchover is also performed if the Shelf Manager detects physical disconnection of the network adapter used for RMCP communication in non cross connect configurations Detection of physical disconnection of the RMCP network adapter is controlled by the Shelf Manager configuration parameter SWITCHOVER_TIMEOUT_ON_ BROKEN LINK The value of this parameter is the time interval in seconds during which the adapter stays physically disconnected before the Shelf Manager performs an IP address switchover or full switchover Detection and switchover is disabled if the value of this parameter is equal to 1 Another configuration parameter INITIAL SLOW _LINK_ DELAY specifies the time interval from the start of the Shelf Manager during which detection of physical disconnection is not performed This allows using Ethernet links that are slow to start and need some time after shelf power up to establish the physical connection In the case of a Shelf Manager switchover as opposed to the IP address switchover mentioned above caused by a broken link a special situation occurs when the first hub board is inserted into a shelf with no hub boards and cross connect Shelf Manager links From the physical connection perspe
268. f Managers These interfaces are named usb0 and usb1 The interface usb0 always exists while the interface usb1 exists only if the interface usb0 is active on the peer Shelf Manager which means that the peer Shelf Manager is physically installed and running Also the interfaces are cross connected usb0 on the first Shelf Manager is connected to usb1 on the second Shelf Manager and vice versa The Shelf Manager supports usage of the USB network interfaces for communication between the redundant Shelf Managers To use this feature it is necessary to define two redundancy network adapters in the Shelf Manager configuration file etc shelfman conf as follows zal EDUNDANCY NET ADAPTER usb0 EDUNDANCY NET ADAPTER2 usbl zal Release 3 5 1 92 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide One additional consideration relates to the definition of the subnet mask for the redundancy network interfaces In the legacy case when only one redundant network adapter is used two different IP addresses are derived from the redundancy IP address specified in etc shelfman conf They are assigned to the two endpoints of the redundancy connection and differ only in the least significant bit However when two redundancy network adapters are used four different IP addresses are used one for each of the endpoints two endpoints on each of the two redundant Shelf Managers To ensure proper operation the two endpoints on the same Sh
269. f entries in No IES the System Event Log CAUTION Large values of this parameter can significantly degrade Shelf Manager performance MAX SESSIONS Number 32 The maximum number of No simultaneous IPMI sessions The maximum allowed value for this parameter is 63 MAX USERS Number 32 The maximum number of IPMI users No The maximum allowed value for this parameter is 63 MICRO TCA Boolean FALSE If TRUE the Shelf Manager operates No as a MicroTCA Shelf Manager the second RMCP channel is used for interaction with Carrier Managers MIN _FAN_LEVE Number 1 The minimum fan level the cooling Yes L management code does not reduce the fan level of any fan below this value when controlling the fan level automatically MIN_SHELF_FR Number 2 The minimum number of Shelf FRU No US Information instances in the shelf that the Shelf Manager must detect to start up successfully Release 3 5 1 67 August 17 2015 NORMAL STABL E TIME Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide Number DEFAULT 3600 DESCRIPTION The time in seconds for which the Shelf Manager preserves the minimum fan level dynamically found in Normal mode that is the minimum fan level that does not cause thermal alerts After this time expires the cooling algorithm decreases the minimum fan level if possible to allow the shelf to decrease the fan level if the thermal load in it has also decreased CAN BE OBTAINED F
270. file tmp rootfs image local ShMM file lt abs_path gt absolute path to the image file on the ShMM starts with HTTP Download the image http lt host gt lt path gt http 192 168 1 253 shm from an HTTP server m700 rootfs image lt host gt host name or IP address lt path gt relative path to the image file path origin depends on HTTP server configuration TFTP Download the image tftp lt host gt lt path gt tftp 192 168 1 253 shmm using the TFTP 700 rootfs image protocol lt host gt host name or IP address lt path gt relative path to the image file path origin depends on TFTP server configuration Release 3 5 1 249 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide PROTOCOL DESCRIPTION URL SYNTAX EXAMPLE URL NAME FIP Download the image ftp lt user gt lt pass gt lt host ftp user password 192 using the FTP protocol gt lt path gt lt user gt user name lt pass gt password lt host gt host name or IP address lt path gt relative path to the image file path origin depends on FTP server configuration 168 1 253 shmm700 rootf s image SCP Download the image using the SSH SCP protocol scp lt user gt lt host gt lt path gt lt user gt user name lt host gt host name or ip address lt path gt relative path to the image file path origin is usually the user s home d
271. files are actually defined through Sensor Data Records SDRs The details of these SDRs are specified in text files and compiled to binary by a separate Python based compiler This compiler is available from Pigeon Point for both Linux and Windows operating systems there is a separate User Guide for this compiler Release 3 5 1 119 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide For example the following command line compiles the input SDR file acb3 sdr into the binary SDR file acb3 sdr bin gt python sdrce py acb3 sdr 3 6 3 Deploying HPDL Data to the ShMM File System The Shelf Manager first looks for HPDL data and SDRs in FRU Information areas Shelf FRU Information for the shelf level data and carrier FRU Information for the ShMM carrier data If the data is not found there it is retrieved from the following files on the ShMM file system var nvdata carrier data Binary HPDL definitions for the carrier var nvdata carrier sdrs Binary SDRs for the carrier sensors var nvdata chassis data Binary HPDL definitions for the shelf var nvdata chassis sdrs Binary SDRs for the shelf sensors If the Shelf Manager cannot retrieve HPDL data from these locations it uses the values of the following environment variables to locate the information CARRIER HPDL Binary HPDL definitions for the carrier CARRIER_SDRS Binary SDRs for the carrier sensors CHASSIS HPDL Binary HPDL definitions for t
272. for support in the Shelf Manager for ShMC cross connects in accordance with the PICMG ECN 3 0 2 0 001 In that case the second network interface connects the Shelf Manager with one of the ATCA network hub boards To configure the Shelf Manager to support cross connects it is necessary to define the configuration parameter RMCP_NET_ADAPTER2 In that case if the backplane and hub boards also support cross connects the Shelf Manager uses the two network adapters RMCP_NET ADAPTER and RMCP_NET ADAPTER2 for RMCP communication Three usage models are available for this feature e active standby e active active and e bonded 3 4 2 1 Active Standby Usage of the Two Network Interfaces The two network interfaces can be used in an active standby way In this mode at any given time RMCP communication passes through only one adapter initially this is RMCP_NET ADAPTER However if the Shelf Manager detects that the adapter currently used for RMCP communication becomes physically disconnected from the network link broken it automatically switches to the other alternate adapter The first adapter is turned off the RMCP IP address is transparently moved to the other adapter and three ARP notifications are broadcast to notify other systems about the MAC address change This change is transparent for the System Manager and does not break existing RMCP connections Release 3 5 1 85 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide How
273. formation This may be useful to users who need to associate certain configuration parameters with a specific instance of a shelf In that case even if SnMMs or ShMM carriers are moved between shelves the configuration parameters specified in the Shelf FRU Information stay with the shelf and override the parameter values specified in configuration files on the SAMM If the same variable is specified in a configuration file on the ShMM and in the Shelf FRU Information the value from the Shelf FRU Information overrides the value from configuration files Note that configuration files are parsed early during the Shelf Manager initialization while the Shelf FRU Information can be found substantially later Not all variables can be specified in the Shelf FRU Information the main reason is that many variables control the Shelf Manager initialization behavior which happens before the Shelf FRU Information is found For such variables overriding the value when the Shelf FRU Information is found could not have any effect since the choice they control has typically already been made If such variables are specified in the Shelf FRU Information they are parsed successfully but value assignments are silently ignored The configuration variable SHELF_MANAGER_CONFIGURATION IN SHELF _FRU_INFO controls whether this functionality of the Shelf Manager is enabled By default the value of this variable is FALSE and the functionality is disabled The follow
274. formed independently for IPMB A and IPMB B Isolated segments are turned off which means that the corresponding IPM controller s is are isolated from the corresponding bus Such segments are kept in the isolated state for IPMB_ LINK ISOLATION TIMEOUT seconds after which they are automatically turned on if the fault still exists the persistent IPMB 0 error occurs again and the faulty links is isolated again By default however the value of this configuration parameter is 1 which means never re enable the link automatically In addition isolated links can be turned on in one of the following ways manually via the CLI command setipmbstate with parameters indicating the ShMC target address 0x20 and the corresponding link number and corresponding IPM controller is removed from the shelf that is when it goes to the state MO automatically when the corresponding IPM controller is removed from the shelf that is when it goes to the state MO To find out the current isolation state of radial IPMB 0 links the CLI command getipmbstate can be used When applied to the ShMC target address 0x20 this command shows the state of all radial IPMB 0 links For example the command clia getipmbstate 20 can yield a report like this Pigeon Point Shelf Manager Command Line Interpreter 20 Link 1 LUN 0 Sensor 10 IPMB LINK 1 Bus Status 0x8 IPMB A Enabled IPMB B Ena
275. from a remote SSH server using the SCP protocol This protocol assumes that all of the specified lt srce gt files are to be copied to the ShMM from the secure shell server host specified as the host name or the IP address by lt server gt All the images must reside in the directory specified by lt dir gt on the remote SSH server The path is absolute The user name for the SSH connection is specified by the lt user gt parameter It is not possible to supply a password in this mode but the lt id_ ile gt parameter allows specifying the secure shell identity file to be used for password less authorization The lt port gt parameter can be used to specify a non standard port number for the remote SSH server If the lt port gt parameter is not supplied the default SSH service port number 22 is used A failure in copying an image to the ShMM causes the utility to terminate the upgrade procedure vs skipping a failing image and proceeding to the next one For each provisional Flash partition upgraded by the s option the to be upgraded partition is given write permissions after the validity of the image has been checked and right before the src image is about to be moved to the Flash Write permissions are removed from the partition immediately after the full image has been moved to Flash Combined with the fact that all the partitions containing the U Boot Linux kernel and root file system images are read only on boot up of the ShMM this
276. ftware does not strobe the watchdog at least once during this period the hardware resets the ShMM The supported range for this parameter is 2 30 seconds which is valid for all supported ShMM platforms Increasing the default value may be necessary if additional software besides the Shelf Manager application runs on the ShMM increasing the CPU load Also see section 4 4 3 for the possible reasons to increase the watchdog timeout The downside of increasing the watchdog timeout is that the length of time to switch over to the backup ShMM will be also be increased in the event of a watchdog expiration No Release 3 5 1 80 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide By default the configuration file variables are used automatically when the ShMM is brought up for the first time The default configuration file imports several environment variables set by U Boot Table 8 U Boot Environment Variables and Descriptions U BooT ENVIRONMENT VARIABLE DESCRIPTION SIPADDR Default RMCP IP Address SIPDEVICE Default RMCP network adapter SIP1ADDR Default Redundant IP Address SIPIDEVICE Default Redundant network adapter SGATEWAY Default gateway used for RMCP communication The environment variables CARRIER and CARRIER_OPTIONS are set by the secondary RC script The name of this carrier specific startup script is defined by the U Boot environment variable rc2 If needed the U Boot environmen
277. functionality and high level interfaces for all three ShMM variants The Pigeon Point Shelf Manager is adaptable to manage CompactPCI platforms as well This document focuses primarily on AdvancedTCA contexts but provides CompactPCl specific comments where appropriate 2 1 In This Section This section contains the topics listed below Just click on a topic to go to it e Intelligent Platform Management An ATCA Overview e Pigeon Point Board Management Reference Hardware and Firmware e Pigeon Point Shelf Manager and ShMM 2 2 Intelligent Platform Management An ATCA Overview The Pigeon Point products are the first Intelligent Platform Management building blocks designed from the ground up for modular platforms like AdvancedTCA in which there is a strong focus on a dynamic population of Field Replaceable Units FRUs and maximum service availability Release 3 5 1 11 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide The Intelligent Platform Management Interface IPMI specification provides a solid foundation for the management of such platforms but requires significant extension to support them well IPMI defines a management infrastructure that is widely used across the PC and server industry PICMG 3 0 the AdvancedTCA specification defines the necessary extensions to IPMI PICMG specifications are based on revision 1 5 of IPMI However the Pigeon Point Shelf Manager conforms to revision 2 0 of the IPMI specification and impl
278. g Up and Using ShMM Power On Self Tests Configuring External Event Handling Configuring the Platform Event Trap Format Configuring the IntegralHPI Interface Configuring System Services Configuring Speed of Master Only 12C Buses ShMM 700 only 3 2 Setting Up U Boot On a power up reset of the ShMM the hardware starts executing the U Boot firmware in Flash The firmware performs basic initialization of the ShMM and unless the user explicitly disables the Autoboot feature thus forcing the firmware to switch to the maintenance user command interface commences booting the Linux kernel Linux is booted from the kernel and root file system images residing in Flash U Boot relocates the kernel image to RAM sets up kernel parameters and passes control to the kernel entry point For ShMM 500 U Boot 1 1 4 Apr 27 2005 19 17 09 CPU Aul550 324 MHz id 0x02 rev 0x00 Board ShMM 500 S N 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 03 03 03 DRAM 64 MB Flash 16 MB Te serial Out serial Err serial Release 3 5 1 22 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide Net AulX00 ETHERNET Hit any key to stop autoboot 0 shmm500 For ShMM 1500 U Boot 1 1 4 Jun 15 2006 17 49 12 MPC83XxX Clock configuration Coherent System Bus 99 MHz Core 249 MHz Local Bus 24 MHz CPU MPC83xx Rev 1 1 at 249 975 MHz Board ShMM 1500R PCI1 32 bit 33 MHz EAC ready DRAM 128 MB FLASH 64 MB PCI Bus Dev
279. g types Boolean number string or IP address The values of string type of configuration parameters are case sensitive The format of the value conforms to the type of the configuration parameter as shown in the following table Table 6 Configuration Parameter Types and Descriptions CONFIGURATION PARAMETER DESCRIPTION TYPE Boolean A Boolean can be represented by either the strings FALSE false or TRUE true or by their numerical representations of O and 1 respectively Number A whole possibly signed numeric value hexadecimal notation Ox is also supported String A string quoted always with double quotes or unquoted Quoted strings may contain blanks unquoted strings are terminated by the first blank The maximum string size is specified separately for each string oriented configuration parameter These values are case sensitive IP address An Internet Protocol address in decimal dot xXX XXX XXX XXxx notation It is possible to specify a value of an environment variable as a configuration parameter value using the notation lt envvar gt in that case the value of the variable lt envvar gt is substituted when the configuration file is read Here is an example DEFAULT RMCP_ IP ADDRESS IPADDR After the Shelf Manager has been brought up for the first time the IP addresses are stored with the IPMI LAN configuration parameters The LAN configuration parameters can be acc
280. ge of the new configuration parameter ISOLATE MUX BUS Section 4 12 clarifies current support on the SaMM 500 1500 Release 3 5 1 283 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide Section 5 notes current absence of IPMB trace facility on ShAMM 700 Section 6 adds ShMM 700 coverage Section 7 notes SAMM 500 1500 focus for reliable upgrade coverage New section 8 covers SnMM 700 specific reliable upgrades New section 9 covers HPI based firmware upgrades for all three ShMM types Renumbered sections 8 Appendix C updated section numbers reflect new sections 8 and 9 e New Appendix A describes how to convert a shelf from ShMM 500 based to SnMM 700 based Shelf Managers e Appendix B and Appendix C retitled content from previous sections 10 and 11 C 25 Release 3 1 1 e Section 5 adds coverage of HPM 2 IPMI Trace Payloads in board trace mode e Section 5 removes the limitation for ShMM 700 of not supporting controlled mode e Section 8 7 adds a note about encryption of A2F060 upgrade images C 26 Release 3 2 0 e Section 3 3 describes new configuration variables ALLOWED_CIPHER_SUITES AXIE_SEQUENCING ENUM READY TIMEOUT AXIE SEQUENCING M4 TIMEOUT AXIE SEQUENCING WAIT DELAY AXIE_SYSTEM_ MODULE _IPMB ADDRESS AXIE_NOT_ READY STARTUP_DELAY TURBO MODE MIN MISSING FAN TRAYS WATCHDOG TIMEOUT e New section 3 16 describes how to configure the maximum speed of 12C buses on the ShMM 700 e Section 4 5 3 introduc
281. ger retrieves the corresponding parameter sets for it and performs the assignment This assignment is performed synchronously before powering up the payload of the corresponding board or module 4 10 2 Obtaining LAN Configuration Parameters on the Shelf Manager Level There are three ways to obtain LAN configuration parameters on the Shelf Manager level 1 Retrieved from a DHCP Server In this case when the configuration variable BOARD LAN PARAMETERS USE_DHCPis set to TRUE the Shelf Manager retrieves parameter sets from a DHCP server The same algorithm for finding the appropriate DHCP server is used as in the case of obtaining Shelf Manager IP addresses via DHCP The queries are based on Client Identifiers not on MAC addresses In the default implementation the Client Identifier is based on the Shelf Address string that is stored in the Shelf FRU Information plus three endpoint Request Identifier Request ID bytes in the following format e Identifier byte 1 indicates the board physical slot address the identifier byte value is slot address 2Fh e Identifier byte 2 is the AMC site number on the board for boards this byte has value 0 e Identifier byte 3 provides a parameter set number within the specific slot For boards modules that require the configuration of more than one LAN channel the value of this byte is 0 for the first parameter set 1 for the second parameter set and so on For boards modules that require configuration
282. ghly encourage users to change the password when configuring the Shelf Manager In the event that the new password is forgotten the password can be reset to the default value as assigned in the RFS image via the password_reset U Boot variable By setting this variable to y and then booting up the system the root password is removed shmmxx00 setenv password reset y shmmxx00 saveenv shmmxx00 boot The following output is shown on the console during boot up etc rc hostname demo Release 3 5 1 214 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide 7 Re programming the ShMM 500 1500 This section describes how to update the firmware on the ShMM 500 or the ShMM 1500 using the reliable upgrade facilities that are built into Monterey Linux On the ShMM 700 a similar facility exists for reliable upgrade of ShMM firmware but it is substantially different in implementation details and therefore is described in a separate section of this document see Section 8 7 1 In This Section This section contains the topics listed below Just click on a topic to go to it Firmware Reliable Upgrade Procedure Overview Flash Partitioning The var upgrade File System Reliable Upgrade Procedure Status File Reliable Upgrade Utility Reliable Upgrade Utility Use Scenarios Reliable Upgrade Examples 7 2 Firmware Reliable Upgrade Procedure Overview Monterey Linux provides a reliable upgrade procedure for the firmware images on a running
283. gnificant To toggle this bit in an IP address it is sufficient to add 128 if this bit is set to zero in the IP address or subtract 128 if this bit is set to 1 in the IP address To toggle the least significant bit in an IP address it is sufficient to add 1 if the IP address is even or subtract 1 if the IP address is odd Since REDUNDANCY_IP_ ADDRESS is even the computations are the same whether the file etc readhwaddr is present or not On the ShMM with the even hardware address the assignment of IP addresses looks like this e usb0 192 168 1 2 no changes e usb1 192 168 1 130 toggling the least significant non zero bit of the netmask On the ShMM with the odd hardware address the assignment of IP addresses looks like this e usb0 192 168 1 131 toggling the least significant bit of the IP address and the least non zero bit of the netmask e usb1 192 168 1 3 toggling the least significant bit of the IP address Here is another example of deriving IP addresses for the USB network interfaces under the assumption that the following definitions are in etc shelfman conf REDUNDANCY IP ADDRESS 192 168 1 13 REDUNDANCY NETMASK 255 255 255 128 Suppose also that the file etc readhwaddr is present The least significant non zero bit in the network mask is 7th bit To toggle this bit in an IP address it is sufficient to add 128 if this bit is set to zero in the IP address or subtract 128 if this bit is set to 1 in the I
284. grade tool persistent flash is 0 rupgrade tool provisional flash is 1 rupgrade tool copying image s rupgrade tool copying sentry shmm1500 rfs from 192 168 1 253 tftpboot ru ppe to tmp using ftp protocol 220 vsFTPd 1 1 3 USER admin The user is asked here for a password to the FTP site that password is entered manually 331 Please specify the password PASS kkkkk 230 Login successful Have fun TYPE I 200 Switching to Binary mode PASV 227 Entering Passive Mode 192 168 1 253 112 206 RETR tftpboot ru ppc sentry shmm1500 rfs 150 Opening BINARY mode data connection for tftpboot ru ppc sentry shmm1500 rfs 4069968 bytes 226 File send OK QUIT 221 Goodbye In the next step a special script s tep4vshm is invoked that copies the U Boot and kernel images from the persistent Flash to the provisional Flash After that the upgrade utility proceeds to copy the RFS image to its designated position in provisional Flash rupgrade tool invoking scripts step4v r sentry shmm1500 rfs proto ftp 192 168 1 253 tftpboot ru ppc admin assword hook etc_copy etc upgrade step4vshm Erasing dev mtdchar7 Done etc upgrade step4vshm Copying Kernel from dev mtdchar2 to dev mtdchar7 Done etc upgrade step4vshm Erasing dev mtdchar8 Done etc upgrade step4vshm Copying U Boot from dev mtdchar3 to dev mtdchar8 Done rupgrade tool copying sentry shmm1500 rfs from tmp to dev mtdcha
285. h channel that caused the error is noted and values of the signals Channel lt n gt _Isolated and IsolatedChannelMask are modified accordingly e The multiplexer switch is re enabled via the corresponding GPIO the next time some part of the Shelf Manager tries to access it This allows the Shelf Manager to access devices on the subordinate buses that are still functional e When an attempt is made to access the faulty subordinate bus by writing the channel number or mask for the faulty bus into the multiplexer switch this operation is not permitted for a certain configurable period of time after the failure During this period the faulty bus is not enabled an error is instead returned for the corresponding write operation This time period is specified by the configuration parameter ISOLATE _MUX_IGNORE_TIME Release 3 5 1 177 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide e The algorithm knows which value in the multiplexer switch register corresponds to the faulty bus because it monitors all write accesses to the multiplexer switch registers and remembers the last value before the occurrence of the fault e When the ignore time expires an attempt is made to access the faulty bus and check whether the fault is still present If the attempt fails the ignore time is reset to its original value If the attempt succeeds then the recorded fault condition for that bus is removed and operation continues normally
286. hMM along with the state of the low level redundancy bits exposed by the CPLD and redundancy related exceptional conditions in the CPLD if any This discrete sensor is associated with the physical Shelf Manager has number 128 name CPLD State and OEM event reading type code DEh On the ShMM 700 where there is no CPLD and the programmatic interface to HRI is different this sensor has the name HWRI state though it is fully state compatible with its counterpart on the SAMM 500 1500 On the SAMM 500 1500 the sensor reads the second byte of the CPLD CSRO register bits 8 15 which contains various redundancy related data such as the Remote Presence Remote Healthy Remote Switchover Request Local Presence and Active bits For a detailed description of the CPLD register values please see the ShMM Hardware Architecture specification On the ShMM 700 the sensor uses the ShMM 700 HRI programmatic interface to obtain the values of the HRI bits The state mask reflects the high level redundancy state normal state of the ShMM as well as various low level redundancy related exceptions Several bits of the exception group can be set in the mask along with one of the normal state bits The meanings of the bits in the sensor state mask are given below High level redundancy state bits normal state 0 The current Shelf Manager is Active with no Backup 1 The current Shelf Manager is Active with a Backup 2 The current Shelf M
287. hat are relevant to IPMI trace analysis Please consult the extensive user documentation for Wireshark at www wireshark org for more details Previously Pigeon Point Systems had done a private extension of Ethereal the predecessor to Wireshark see www ethereal com to perform the IPMB trace analyzer function Since Wireshark is now recommended for this role only that application is documented here 5 3 1 Introduction to the Wireshark GUI This section provides a brief introduction to the GUI section 5 4 provides a step by step example of using it Figure 6 provides a view of the GUI main window which is composed of three frames Figure 6 Main Window IPMB trace analysis TCP 192 168 1 65 Capturing Wireshark 0X File Edit View Go Capture Analyze Statistics Help a R PY a a ae nmeodFF OE aaan BMS SF Filter Expression Clear Apply No Time Source Destination Protocol Info a ZII 4 333407 rece VAUS LIME ATC Wey Uet vevite 10 sey Vaza 256 4 359893 I2C 1 0x09 IPMI ATC Req Get Device ID seq 0x2a 257 19 369289 I2C 1 0x09 IPMI ATC Req Get Device ID seq 0x00 258 19 369289 I2C 2 0x09 IPMI ATC Req Get Device ID seq 0x00 259 19 398524 I2C 2 0x09 IPMI ATC Req Get Device ID seq 0x00 260 19 399152 I2C 1 0x09 IPMI ATC Req Get Device ID seq 0x00 261 19 399886 I2C 1 0x09 IPMI ATC Req Get Device ID seq 0x00 262 19 400538 I2C 2 0x09 IPMI ATC Req Get Device ID seq 0x00 263 34 408530 I2C 1 0x09 IP
288. hat channel If the IP Address source 3 address loaded by BIOS or system software the Shelf Manager assigns configuration parameters for this channel Commands are sent on IPMB 0 for modules commands are directed to the module address on IPMB L and are wrapped with Send Message commands directed to the IPMB 0 address of the carrier board Parameter sets are obtained in order as they are needed for a specific slot If a parameter set cannot be obtained for instance if parameter sets are exhausted for a specific slot configuration parameters are not assigned The Shelf Manager sends the configuration parameters to a board or module as a set of Set LAN Configuration Parameters commands over IPMB 0 however the channel parameter in these commands is set to channel N For modules commands are wrapped in Send Message commands The following batch of Set LAN Configuration Parameters commands is sent Channel N Parameter Set In Progress 0 data set in progress Channel N Parameter IP Address 3 data board IP address Channel N Parameter Subnet Mask 6 data board subnet mask Channel N Parameter Default Gateway 12 data board default gateway IP address Channel N Parameter Set In Progress 0 data commit write Channel N Parameter Set In Progress 0 data set complete Release 3 5 1 183 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide 4 10 4 Synchronous Assignment
289. he same FPGA image If the upgrade procedure is interrupted at any point it must be re started to ensure all FPGAs get fully programmed When the programming is successful the following message s are displayed by the ripmb prog utility depending on the number of FPGA devices to be programmed Image file radial dat Determining the number of devices in the JTAG scan chain 2 Programming device Pls vice oe ho SN ES HOES ETE SO OE GaSe EEO SUCCESS Programming device FAS ke Wie eo ela ele eels dew Ge bane era sels anes Gee Sule sw aie ee SUCCESS To obtain the version of the currently installed routing element image issue the following command ripmb prog V This command displays the version of the routing element FPGA design and firmware in the following format lt firmware_version gt lt fpga_version gt for example 1 3 1 0 1 1 If this command displays VERSION mrsmatcu the FPGAs must be re programmed with the latest image Release 3 5 1 168 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide 4 6 Automatic SEL Truncation The System Event Log SEL on the Shelf Manager stores events from all IPM controllers and FRUs in the shelf and can easily exceed its maximum capacity To prevent overflows the Shelf Manager can automatically truncate the SEL removing the oldest entries as SEL approaches its limits The automatic truncation algorithm works as follows The two configuration parameters are defined SEL_HIGH WATERMA
290. he changes 3 5 4 Other FRU Information Repositories The Shelf Manager itself exposes at least one IPM controller the ShMC at IPMB address 20h For most carriers the Shelf Manager also exposes a physical IPM controller that represents the resources of the carrier board and has an IPMB address derived from the physical address of the carrier While the ShMC is exposed only by the active Shelf Manager and is subject to switchover the physical IPM controller is exposed separately by both active and backup Shelf Managers For both of these IPM controllers FRU Information is stored in Flash files on the SAMM var nvdata bmc fru information for the ShMC var nvdata shelfman fru information for the physical IPM controller For some carriers there may be additional FRUs represented by the ShMC The location of the FRU Information for these FRUs is carrier specific Reading and writing these FRU Information repositories can be done via the IPMI commands Read FRU Data Write FRU Data addressed to the appropriate FRUs 3 6 Configuring Carrier and Shelf Attributes using HPDL A special description language has been developed by Pigeon Point to describe the structure and device population of specific AdvancedTCA shelves ShMM carriers and non intelligent subsidiary FRUs managed by the Shelf Manager such as Fan trays PEMs alarm panels This language is called HPDL which is short for Pigeon Point Hardware Platform Descr
291. he shelf CHASSIS _SDRS Binary SDRs for the shelf sensors Therefore when HPDL definitions cannot be placed in some part of a FRU Information EEPROM they are placed in the RFS and the environment variables listed above provide the locations inside the RFS somewhere below the etc directory To override the default HPDL definitions stored in the RFS a user should copy the files generated by the HPDL and SDR compilers to the directory var nvdata on the ShMM file system by using for example FTP The directory var nvdata is in the persistent part of the ShMM file system that is the file content persists across ShMM reboots 3 6 4 Deploying HPDL Data to FRU Information Areas FRU Information areas are the recommended deployment location for HPDL data and SDRs for the carrier and shelf chassis in carrier FRU Information and shelf FRU Information respectively FRU Information for a specific FRU Fan tray Power Entry Module can also be used it provides FRU specific HPDL data that amends definitions for that FRU in the shelf chassis HPDL description FRU Information is usually stored in EEPROM type devices HPDL data and SDRs are stored in the FRU Information as a sequence of OEM type multirecords similar to the multirecords defined in the AdvancedTCA specification These multirecords have the Pigeon Point manufacturer ID 00040Ah and the manufacturer specific record type is 7 for HPDL data multirecords and 8 for SDR multirecords The
292. he upgrade session to a non volatile file in var upgrade status The software protocol ensures that the reliable upgrade does not finish until all the required actions including those defined by custom hook scripts that may be needed for a specific application have all completed successfully Release 3 5 1 215 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide The Monterey Linux reliable upgrade procedure is described in full detail in Chapter 7 of the Monterey Linux User s Guide Au1550 Edition for the SAMM 500 or MPC83xx Edition for the ShMM 1500 Users of the reliable upgrade procedure should review that material as background That material explains the underlying mechanisms which provide substantial opportunities for customization to particular requirements Any users who wish to extend or customize the workings of the reliable upgrade process must become thoroughly familiar with the Monterey Linux User s Guide s coverage of this topic The reliable upgrade procedure implemented in Monterey Linux is neutral to the embedded application running on the ShMM The procedure provides a sufficient set of hooks allowing a specific application running on the ShMM to ensure that custom actions are carried out at appropriate points of the reliable upgrade The remainder of this section focuses on provisions for reliable upgrade of the Pigeon Point Shelf Manager firmware that have been implemented using these hooks 7 3 Flash P
293. hen non intelligent hub boards non compliant boards that do not implement an IPM controller are installed in the shelf i lt command_line gt This option defines the command line for the initialization script that is invoked by the active Shelf Manager during initialization This initialization script can be used for platform specific initialization The CPLD bits Local Healthy and Active are set when the command line is invoked and the Shelf Manager waits for completion of the initialization script before progressing further Note that the initialization script is run only at the startup of the active Shelf Manager and is not called after a switchover The corresponding command line can also be specified as the value of the configuration parameter INITIALIZATION SCRIPT in the Shelf Manager configuration file Release 3 5 1 148 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide To run the Shelf Manager from the command line type the following daemon f shelfman lt options gt For example here is a typical log of the Shelf Manager starting with options that cause it to route log information both to the console and to the log file and to use EEPROMs for Shelf FRU Information daemon f shelfman lcs sf lt gt 1493571724338 199 July 17 2015 22 00 07 lt gt 14 35 17 348 199 lt gt 14735217 350 199 KK lt I gt 14 35 17 362 199 lt I gt 14 35 17 384 199 lt I gt 14335217 2392 19
294. here e lt stage gt is an integer in the range 1 to 14 where stage 14 is the final stage of a reliable upgrade session meaning that the procedure is complete e lt status gt is a human readable string that describes the status passed or failed of the corresponding stage e lt description gt is a description of the corresponding stage The list of stages and the corresponding description of each stage is summarized in Table 32 below The status file can be used to track the progress of the reliable upgrade procedure it is also used by the reliable upgrade utility itself to synchronize the state of the upgrade procedure across ShMM reboots Table 32 Reliable Upgrade Stages STAGE NUMBER DESCRIPTION 1 Images have been downloaded to tmp and verified 2 Boot volume mount is about to begin 3 Boot volume mount is complete 4 Candidate has been marked as non valid 5 U Boot image write is complete 6 Kernel image write is complete T RFS image write is complete 8 9 Boot volume umount is complete Application package has been removed 10 New application package write is complete 11 Sync is complete 12 var and etc have been processed 13 First strobe after reboot has been done 14 Upgrade is confirmed 8 6 Reliable Upgrade Utility A special user space utility rupgrade is provided on the ShMM This utility has several modes of operation and allows the user to p
295. his case however support for SEEPROMs must also be provided by the carrier specific module in the Shelf Manager If none of the above approaches is supported by the shelf and there are no sources of Shelf FRU Information represented by separate IPM controllers the system integrator must resort to the Flash file as storage for Shelf FRU Information In that case the following changes to the default configuration should be done e setthe variable SHELF_FRU_IN_ EEPROM to FALSE e set the varialleMIN SHELF _FRUS to 1 Release 3 5 1 113 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide The last change is necessary because there is only one copy of the Shelf FRU Information on each ShMM The variable LOCAL _SHELF_FRU must retain its default value of TRUE The following table summarizes the configuration variable settings that correspond to the various Shelf FRU Information source possibilities described above Table 13 Shelf FRU Information and Configuration Variable Settings SOURCE OF THE SHELF FRU INFORMATION SETTINGS OF CONFIGURATION VARIABLES Non volatile storage likely SEEPROMs LOCAL _SHELF_FRU FALSE accessed via IPM controllers on IPMB 0 SHELF_FRU_IN_EEPROM does not matter MIN SHELF FRUS minimum number of IPM controllers on IPMB 0 providing the Shelf FRU Information usually 2 Optionally SHELF FRU_IPMB SOURCE1 IPMB address of the first designated source SHELF FRU _IPMB SOURCE2 IPMB address of the second design
296. his is done for the benefit of ATCA boards that are not fully IPMl compliant in this respect USE_DHCP Boolean FALSE Requests assignment of RMCP Yes accessible and private IP addresses for the Shelf Manager from a DHCP server the configuration parameter DHCP_SERVER_ADDRESS can be used to specify the IP address of the DHCP server Release 3 5 1 79 August 17 2015 USE_SECOND C HANNEL Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide TYPE Boolean DEFAULT FALSE DESCRIPTION This parameter applies only if two network interfaces on the SAMM are used for RMCP communication If TRUE the two network interfaces on the ShMM are used in parallel mode if FALSE they are used in redundant mode CAN BE OBTAINED FROM SHELF FRU INFO Yes VERBOSITY Number The Shelf Manager verbosity level No VERBOSITY CO NSOLE Number N A The Shelf Manager verbosity level for console output No VERIFY SHELF _FRU_CHECKSU M Boolean TRUE Enable verification of checksums in Shelf FRU Information records if set to FALSE Shelf Manager ignores checksums No WATCHDOG ENA BLED Boolean TRUE This configuration parameter is used to enable or disable the hardware watchdog timer When enabled the watchdog will cause the Shelf Manager to reboot if the watchdog expires No WATCHDOG TIM EOUT Number The hardware watchdog timeout in seconds If the so
297. his parameter may be overridden by a ShMM carrier specific cooling algorithm Yes FAN LEVEL ST EP_UP Number The number of fan steps by which the fan speed is increased during operation of the cooling algorithm in the Minor Alert state This parameter may be overridden by a carrier specific cooling algorithm Yes HPDL Boolean FALSE Turns on HPDL support in the Shelf Manager The carrier and chassis HPDL data and SDRs are taken from the FRU Information or from the files and are used to define the behavior of the platform plus the number and types of managed FRUs and sensors No Release 3 5 1 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide TYPE DEFAULT DESCRIPTION CAN BE OBTAINED FROM SHELF FRU INFO HPDL_ON_SUBS Boolean TRUE Turns on support of HPDL information Yes IDIARY_FRUS stored on subsidiary FRUs If TRUE the Shelf Manager looks for HPDL data and SDRs in the FRU Information of its subsidiary FRUs If these data are found for a specific FRU they are used to substitute definitions for that FRU from the carrier or chassis HPDL data and or SDRs HPDL_ NETWORK Number 0 If non zero specifies the offset to the Yes _ELEMENT ID_ Network Element ID data structure in EEPROM OFFSE Shelf FRU Information EEPROMs T This 33 byte data structure consists of the three separate 11 byte Network Element IDs and is transparent for the Shelf Manager but can be r
298. ide Boolean DEFAULT TRUE DESCRIPTION lf TRUE the Shelf Manager uses journaling when writing the SEL to the ShMM Flash this reduces the size of the data periodically written to the Flash and thus increases the lifetime of the Flash The reduction is even greater if SEL compression is simultaneously enabled CAN BE OBTAINED FROM SHELF FRU INFO No SEL FILE WRI TE DELAY Number The minimum number of seconds between subsequent updates of the SEL file on the ShMM Flash Setting this number to a higher value causes SEL updates to be less frequent this reduces the total amount of data written to the Flash and thus increases the lifetime of the Flash but increases the probability of event loss if both redundant Shelf Managers go out of service No SEL HIGH WAT ERMARK Number This value is the high watermark for the algorithm that controls automatic purging of the SEL if the actual percentage of free entries in the SEL falls below this value or the SEL overflows the Shelf Manager starts a thread that purges old records from the SEL in order of decreasing age Yes SEL LOW WATE RMARK Number This value is the low watermark for the algorithm that controls automatic purging of the SEL if the thread that purges old records from the SEL starts it purges records until the percentage of occupied entries in the SEL falls below this value Yes SENSOR_POLL_ INTERVAL
299. iescctuchoncteteatenstuvenstecteatecstnctaeceesenaecse 9 1 1 SHELF MANAGER DOCUMENTATION ccsceceeescseceeececsenseaeeeceeececeesaeaececeeseecsesasaeceseeseeesenaes 9 1 1 1 Conventions Used in this Document 2 cccccceecceeseeeeeneeceeececeeeeeaaeceeneeeenetetsinetenes 9 1 2 ADDITIONAL RESOURCES ookean E E E R E EEE 10 2 INTRODUCTION PANE E E E 11 2 1 IN TIS SECTION E 11 2 2 INTELLIGENT PLATFORM MANAGEMENT AN ATCA OVERVIEW ccc0ececeececeeeeeesesseaeeeeees 11 2 3 PIGEON POINT BOARD MANAGEMENT REFERENCE HARDWARE AND FIRMWARE 0 14 2 4 PIGEON POINT SHELF MANAGER AND SHMM cccccccecseseeseceseeececsesseaeceececceesesseaeeeeess 15 2 4 1 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager Features ccccccccsecessseceeneeceeeeesneseeneeceneeetnnenes 15 2 4 2 Support for Dual Redundant Operation 22 cccccccceeceesseceeneeceneeesseeseseecenneetsaneees 16 2 4 3 System Manager Interface 1 cccccccccceceesceeneeceeececeeeseneecceneeceneesiassseneeseeesetsaneees 18 2 4 4 Pigeon Point SAMM Shelf Management Mezzanines ccccccccesceesteceseetnteeees 19 3 CONFIGURATION rre aeaa eee eave Ts Reece ese cece 22 3 1 IN THIS SECTION siesvagecesera cafes as caedcavecteaveaeetvceceetoud wanes vecweccs aaaea aa Aaa aan 22 3 2 SETTING UP U BOOTiesciesescedaves shaeeit saved an aea aaao aaa a a aaa aaa Ea eak eNA DENARNE 22 3 2 1 U Boot Environment Variables eseeeeeeeeeeeneeeieneeiinneerrrneererneerrnneernnrerrrnnerrenneet 2
300. ime zone definition for US Eastern Time timezone EST5 Here the digit 5 specifies that the time zone is 5 hours west of GMT Any three letters can replace EST they are used to identify the time zone in for example the Linux date command output For timezones with half hour or quarter hour differences from an integer offset e g UTC 05 30 itis possible to use the etc localtime file Due to limited RFS space there is no time zone database on ShMM but such file can be copied from a Linux system e g usr share zoneinfo Asia Calcutta and installed ona ShMM as etc localtime If this file is detected at SnMM startup the TZ variable is not set so date related library calls use the time zone specified in etc localtime 3 11 Setting Up and Using ShMM Power On Self Tests The available Power On Self Test POST tests are built into U Boot The choice of the available POST tests that are actually executed is controlled by the dedicated U Boot environment variables post_normal and post_poweron The value of the environment variable post_normal contains names of tests that are executed on each boot up These names are separated by space characters These tests do not take much time and can be run on a regular basis The value of the environment variable post_poweron contains names of tests that are executed after power on reset only vs on each boot up These names are separated by space characters As the POST tests are executed th
301. in the URL FTP TFTP etc The image is copied to the RAM file system of the ShMM specifically the copy is to the tmp directory which is cleaned up after each reboot and after that it is validated Image validation involves verification of the image checksum and is performed Release 3 5 1 251 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide unless the command line parameter skip checksums is specified This procedure is repeated for all images specified in the command line After all images have been successfully obtained and validated they are finally one by one dispatched to their destination locations that is U Boot is copied to the destination Flash partition and other images are copied to appropriate locations on the UBIFS Boot and User volumes If the reliable upgrade utility does not succeed in copying or validating at least one image it immediately terminates the overall upgrade Subsequent images if any are ignored they are not even copied to the ShMM Before replacing kernel and RFS images in the Boot volume the reliable upgrade utility cleans up the UBIFS cache partition to tell U Boot that it is not valid any more The UBIFS cache is re created by U Boot automatically When copying the kernel and RFS images to the Boot UBIFS Flash partition the reliable upgrade utility mounts the partition before copying the image and then unmounts it shortly after the completion of the copy operation Normally the Boot Flash
302. information and information about the request response data Specifically the message is identified as either a request or a reply and the request reply header fields are interpreted The data fields are interpreted as defined by IPMI and PICMG specs for a particular request or response The bottom frame provides interpreted hexadecimal and textual representations of a message selected in the message list provided in the upper frame The GUI provides a number of other GUI elements dialogs menu windows etc that are used to exercise various features of the IPMI Analyzer as well as customize its behavior For instance Release 3 5 1 193 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide there is a trace collection dialog trace filter window and others These facilities are described in detail in the Wireshark user documentation and man pages Section 5 4 later in this document provides a step by step procedure to use selected GUI elements for tracing and analyzing IPMB data When analyzing RMCP or RMCP based IPMI network traffic the main GUI window looks similar but with some small differences as shown in Figure 7 below Figure 7 Main Window IPMI over network trace analysis ethO Capturing Wireshark File Edit View Go Capture Analyze Statistics Help B a a AA M 4 TZ BIE QQQF BUS g Filter rmep 7 Expression Clear Apply No Time Source Destination Protocol Info E e x Frame 33 65 bytes
303. ing and analysis of the message stream see section 5 4 6 should also be specified at this time Use the amp amp logical and operator to combine additional filtering options with the filtering option rmep lt Next execute the actions from step 4 the trace is then captured by tshark and sent to the command output For example tshark i ethO R rmcp 71 989290 80 240 102 57 gt 192 168 1 199 IPMI ATCA Req Get Channel Authentication Capabilities seq 0x0 71 990809 192 168 1 199 gt 80 240 102 57 IPMI ATCA Rsp Get Channel Authentication Capabilities seq 0x01 71 996590 80 240 102 57 gt 192 168 1 199 RMCP payload type RMCP Open Session Reques 71 998471 192 168 1 199 gt 80 240 102 57 RMCP payload type RMCP Open Session Respons Release 3 5 1 205 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide 72 000184 80 240 102 57 gt Message 1 72 005487 192 168 1 199 gt Message 72 008539 80 240 102 57 gt Message 3 72 019149 192 168 1 199 gt Message 4 72 022416 80 240 102 57 gt Privileg evel seq 0x02 724033355 192 168 1199 gt Privileg evel seq 0x02 72 057400 80 240 102 57 gt seq 0x03 72 059134 192 168 1 199 gt seq 0x03 72 059568 80 240 102 57 gt seq 0x04 72 062264 192 168 1 199 gt seq 0x04 72 062680 80 240 102 57 gt seq 0x05 72 066428 192 168 1 199 gt seq 0x05 724068235 192 168 1 199 gt seq 0x05 72 101030 80 240 102 5
304. ing table lists the configuration parameters that are currently supported Release 3 5 1 36 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide Table 7 Shelf Manager Configuration Parameters DEFAULT DESCRIPTION CAN BE OBTAINED FROM SHELF FRU INFO 2_X_ SYSTEM Boolean None If specified this parameter explicitly No designates the current shelf as CompactPCI if TRUE or AdvancedTCA if FALSE If not specified the choice of the shelf type is made automatically This parameter should not be specified unless it is necessary to override an incorrect hardware detection algorithm for the shelf type ACTIVATE _LOC Boolean FALSE If set to TRUE both IPM controllers No AL WITHOUT _S exposed by the active Shelf Manager HELF_ FRU representing the physical and the logical Shelf Managers are activated even if the Shelf FRU Information cannot be found This option should be used with caution because the power consumption of the payload of the physical Shelf Manager IPM controllers may potentially exceed the power capability of the corresponding slot in the shelf ALARM CUTOFF Number 600 The alarm cutoff timeout time after Yes _TIMEOUT which the alarm cutoff is deactivated in seconds ALLOW _ALL CO Boolean TRUE If set to TRUE most of the Yes MMANDS_FROM _ commands allowed from the RMCP IPMB interface are allowed from IPMB 0 as well except for session related commands For example Cold Reset an
305. initialization succeeded B4A841B0 5EBD 11DE 0080 ter redundancy ully Input redundancy socket successfully bound to Output red Active lis Connecting to x Running in Active mode undancy socket successf tening thread created s 192 168 0 65 1040 ully bound to uccessfully connection to Redundancy protocol initialized successfully Reboot reason sensor was registered Shelfman ADM102 ADM102 Shelfm Shelfm Shelfm Shelfm Shelfm Shelfm 63 6 an an an an an an Regis Ext 1 Ext 2 Regis Regis Regis Regis Regis Regis 149 tered tered tered tered tered tered tered Local Temp 3 3STBY voltage 3 3MAIN voltage 4 5V voltage Vcpp voltage 412V voltage 12V voltage sensor 0 3 temp sensor not implemented temp sensor not implemented sensor sensor sensor 0 6 sensor sensor sensor August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide lt I gt 14 35 22 188 199 FT 0 FRU successfully registered as FRU 02 lt I gt 14 35 22 190 199 Initializing Fans lt I gt 14 35 22 192 199 Registering fan RD facility lt I gt 14 35 22 194 199 Activating fan tray 0 fan level 5 power level 0 lt I gt 14 35 22 197 199 Controller 20 FRU 2 ATCA state set
306. int Shelf Manager User Guide Finally the Pigeon Point Shelf Manager can optionally include an IntegralHP subsystem which provides access to the Shelf Manager via the Hardware Platform Interface HPI IntegralHPI operates within the Shelf Manager fully leveraging the Shelf Manager s facilities for managing the elements and events in the shelf IntegralHP also takes advantage of the mature redundancy framework of the Shelf Manager to deliver a fully redundant HPI service Using these mechanisms the System Manager can access information about the current state of the shelf including current FRU population sensor values threshold settings recent events and overall shelf health These aspects of ATCA s System Manager Interface are considered to be the Pigeon Point shelf external interfaces They are documented separately in the Shelf Manager External Interface Reference 2 4 4 Pigeon Point ShMM Shelf Management Mezzanines The Pigeon Point Shelf Manager executes on the ShMM a small Shelf Management Mezzanine with SAMM 500R ShMM 1500R and ShMM 700R variants ShMM 500R and SAMM 1500R mezzanines are available with 1 32 Mbytes of Flash and 64 Mbytes of SDRAM or 2 64 Mbytes of Flash and 128 Mbytes of SDRAM All ShMM 700Rs have 64 Mbytes of Flash and 128 Mbytes of SDRAM The following table shows the main characteristics of the key ShMM variants Table 3 ShMM 500R ShMM 1500R and ShMM 700R Features and Variants FEA
307. interface ip2addr IP address used by the third network interface if present This variable can be passed as a part of the kernel command line to automatically configure the corresponding kernel network interface This variable is not assigned by default ipdevice Device corresponding to ipaddr Default value is ethO ipldevice Device corresponding to ipladdr On ShMM 500 and ShMM 1500 the default is eth1 On ShMM 700 usb is the default ip2device Device corresponding to ip2addr Not assigned by default but can be assigned if more than two network interfaces are used on the ShMM e g a USB or serial based network interface can be designated this way Release 3 5 1 21 August 17 2015 ENVIRONMENT VARIABLE kernel start Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide DESCRIPTION The absolute starting address of the kernel image in Flash This variable is set automatically by U Boot during bootstrap Note on ShMM 700 this variable contains the absolute starting address of the kernel image in RAM This variable is used in ubifs nfs net load_ubifs load_ubifs_alt to specify the address in physical memory where the kernel image should be loaded and where it is expected to be during system boot The default value is 0x42000000 load_ubifs ShMM 700 only U Boot command that loads current Linux kernel and RFS images from the Flash drive into RAM Images are selected on the basis of the im
308. ion parameter specifies No whether the HPM 2 client channel channel 8 for the Shelf Manager is mirrored to some other LAN channel and the number of this channel If this parameter has a non zero value the HPM 2 client channel uses the LAN configuration IP address subnet mask gateway IP address etc of the given channel If a LAN configuration parameter is changed for the mirror channel it is also automatically changed for the HPM 2 client channel Changing LAN configuration parameters for the HPM 2 client channel is not allowed If this parameter has value O mirroring is not in use and the HPM 2 Client channel shall be set up and configured explicitly in the same way as the mandatory LAN channel 1 and the optional LAN channel 2 By default the HPM 2 channel is mirrored to the LAN channel 1 utilizing the same LAN configuration parameters for the RMCP server and the HPM 2 RMCP client in the Shelf Manager HPM2 NET ADA PTER String 16 oy undefined The name of the network adapter No used for HPM 2 based network communication with intelligent FRUs in the Shelf This parameter is ignored if the HPM 2 client channel channel 8 on the logical Shelf Manager is mirrored to another network channel but must be specified otherwise Release 3 5 1 58 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide TYPE DEFAULT DESCRIPTION CAN BE OBTAINED FROM SHELF FRU INFO HPM3
309. ipmf ipmb buffe line 98 un 22 17 23 27 2007 Released 2acclde0 pid 263 ile ipmf ipmb buffe line 129 Jun 22 17 23 27 2007 Released 2acclf80 pid 263 file ipmf c line 1533 Jun 22 17 23 27 2007 CondWait Before 7d5ff 740 pid 263 file msg c line 790 Jun 22 17 23 27 2007 CondWait After 7d5ff 740 pid 263 file msg c line 790 eq Lear H G G B E HO Ph aGhQareag Kh 4 Jun 22 17 23 18 2007 Succeeded 2ac34970 pid 216 file shelffru c line 3171 Jun 22 17 23 18 2007 Released 2ac34970 pid 216 file Shelffru c line 3196 Jun 22 17 23 18 2007 Acquiring 2ac34970 pid 216 file shelffru c line 3171 un 22 17 23 18 2007 Succeeded 2ac34970 pid 216 file sShelffru c line 3171 Jun 22 17 23 18 2007 Released 2ac34970 pid 216 file shelffru c line 3196 j Total of 32 locks 2ac34530 owner 0 waiting 0 2ac34ad0 owner 0 waiting 0 2acclf80 owner 0 waiting 0 2ac344a0 owner 0 waiting 0 2acbe5ec owner 0 waiting 0 2acclde0 owner 0 waiting 0 2ac34950 owner 0 waiting 0 2ac36230 owner 0 waiting 0 2ac34b90 owner 0 waiting 0 2acbe620 owner 0 waiting 0 2ac34df0 owner 0 waiting 0 2ac34970 owner 0 waiting 0 1004bd60 owner 0 waiting 0 2ac36350 owner 0 waiting 0 Release 3 5 1 174 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide 10051070 owner 0 waiting 0 2ac34450 owner 0 waiting 0 2accle28 owner 0 waiting 0 2accle40 owner 0 waiting 0 100
310. iption Language A full description of the HPDL is available to shelf developers in a separate document the Pigeon Point HPDL Reference HPDL descriptions are organized in units called HPDL modules Each module corresponds to a single text file One module can describe one or more carriers and or shelves The HPDL modules are compiled by a special compiler npdi1c and stored as binary data The encoding of the binary data conforms to the ASN 1 Basic Encoding standard ISO 8825 The Shelf Manager reads and interprets this data during initialization and obtains the following information from it e Population of the master only 12C bus on the carrier and shelf e Types and attributes of non intelligent FRUs managed by the Shelf Manager e Information about IPMI sensors exposed by the Shelf Manager e Associations between IPMI sensors and physical signals exposed by master only 12C devices Release 3 5 1 118 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide Based on this information the Shelf Manager configures master only 12C devices creates FRU descriptors for non intelligent FRUs creates IPMI sensors and associates them with the corresponding FRUs In addition to HPDL modules collections of SDRs are used to configure IPMI sensors on the carrier and in the shelf These collections of SDRs are compiled with the SDR compiler stored as binary data and retrieved by the Shelf Manager during initialization The Shelf Manager uses the
311. iptor gt lt ipmb address gt lt fru designator lt fru designator gt lt fru device id gt lt fru device id gt lt site type gt lt site number or wildcard gt lt site number or wildcard gt lt site number gt lt site number gt Descriptors in the list are comma separated Each descriptor consists of the IPMB address and the FRU designator either the FRU device ID or the site type and site number of the target subsidiary FRU The IPMB address can be specified alone or the FRU designator can be specified as a wildcard in either case synchronous assignment applies to all FRUs associated with that IPMB address A wildcard descriptor applies to all FRUs in the shelf If a FRU designator is specified it is separated from the IPMB address by a dot Site type and site number are also each separated by a dot An additional FRU device ID or site number for this IPMB address can be designated separated by semicolon A site number can be specified as a wildcard which makes the descriptor apply to all FRUs with the specified site type on a given IPMC An IPMB address is hexadecimal by default and FRU device ID site type and site number are decimal by default For example the value 82 0 86 8A 7 2 5 90 1 3 A0 7 applies synchronous assignment to the IPMC 82h FRU 0 all FRUs associated with the IPMC 86h AMC 2 and 5 associated with the IPMC 8Ah FRU 1 and FRU 3 associated wi
312. irectory An absolute path can be specified by beginning it with The password must be entered interactively by the user scp user 192 168 1 253 shmm700 rootfs image scp user 192 168 1 253 nome user shmm700 roo tfs image In upgrade mode both regular and HPM 1 the reliable upgrade utility performs the following actions e obtains the images to copy locally or via the network e copies the images to the candidate locations e copies non volatile data to the candidate locations or erases the corresponding candidate locations etc var depending on the presence of command line parameters copy config copy etc copy var copy all1 and erase all e resets the ShMM and instructs it to boot the candidate U Boot which in turn loads images from the candidate image set Because of the last stage an invocation of rupgrade in upgrade mode typically does not return and instead resets the ShMM If rupgrade in upgrade mode does return it indicates that the reliable upgrade procedure has failed and was terminated before proceeding to reset the ShMM in order to boot the candidate images Release 3 5 1 250 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide Not all images need to be specified to rupgrade in upgrade mode or in the HPM 1 upgrade mode the HPM 1 image may not include all possible components If any components are not specified during the reliable upgrade the mis
313. is Document CONVENTION SAMPLE DESCRIPTION setenv This 10 point bold Courier font is used for text entered at keyboard in example dialogues which typically occur as one or more separate lines U Boot 1 0 2 Apr 18 2006 This 10 point normal Courier font is used for Sane ShMM output in example dialogues addmisc This 12 point bold Courier font is used for special text within normal paragraphs The types of such special text include command names file names configuration parameters and command parameters plus other text that could be entered by or displayed to a Shelf Manager user This font is also used for command syntax definitions Get Device ID IPMI commands defined by the IPMI specification or as PICMG extensions are shown in the normal font surrounded by double quotes This matches the corresponding convention used in PICMG specifications Release 3 5 1 9 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide 1 2 Additional Resources For more information about Pigeon Point products go to the Pigeon Point Web site http www pigeonpoint com products html Release 3 5 1 10 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide 2 Introduction This section provides an overview of the Pigeon Point Shelf Manager and Shelf Management Mezzanine or ShMM currently the SaMM 500R ShMM 1500R and ShMM 700R products The Pigeon Point Shelf Manager is a shelf level management solution for AdvancedTCA
314. is feature This record contains the list of IPMB addresses and FRU IDs of FRUs considered cold sensitive A cold sensitive FRU is considered too cold if any temperature sensor associated with it generates an event at startup that indicates that the temperature is below the lower non recoverable Release 3 5 1 125 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide threshold Such a FRU is not immediately powered on but kept in the state M3 until all of its temperature sensors are above their lower non recoverable thresholds then it is powered on 3 7 2 Configuring a Specific Cooling Management Strategy To configure a specific cooling management strategy the following steps need to be taken 1 Create a new cooling management strategy module shared library or choose one of the several libraries supplied with the Shelf Manager in the RFS directory 1ib that are based on cooling strategies from certain vendors 2 Ifanew module is created perform the following steps 2 14 Implement the specific cooling management functionality using the Shelf Manager Cooling Management API which is described in a separate document 2 2 Choose a name for the shared library that conforms to the following pattern libcooling lt xxx gt so where lt xxx gt is the name of the strategy typically the vendor name 2 3 Place the shared library either in the directory 1ib or in the directory var bin on the ShMM 3 Set the value of the configuration
315. is variable is TRUE support of the regular RMCP protocol from IPMI 1 5 is disabled on the Shelf Manager and only the RMCP protocol from IPMI 2 0 is supported This mode may be needed for security reasons No RMCP_ WITHOUT _SHELF_FRU Boolean FALSE RMCP is available in the absence of the Shelf FRU Information only if this configuration parameter is defined and set to TRUE No RUN HPI SNMP _SUBAGENT Boolean FALSE Specifies whether the HPI SNMP subagent should be started automatically No SAVE CRASH I NFORMATION Boolean FALSE lf TRUE the Shelf Manager saves crash information in the var crash directory in addition to setting a corresponding reboot reason The following system signals are treated as indicators of a Shelf Manager crash SIGSEGV SIGABRT SIGILL SIGFPE SIGBUS The saved crash information includes a compressed system log and core file No SDR_READ RET RIES Number The maximum number of times the Shelf Manager retries the Read Device SDR command Yes SEL FILE COM PRESSION ENA BLED Boolean TRUE If TRUE the Shelf Manager compresses the SEL before writing it to the ShMM Flash this reduces the size of the file that is periodically written to the Flash and thus increases the lifetime of the Flash No Release 3 5 1 August 17 2015 SEL FILE JOU RNALING_ENAB LED Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Gu
316. ite on the 2 1 FRU designated by the Primary Site Type and Primary Site Number identifies the Site Type of that Slot Secondary Site Number Applicable when the Slot is a subsidiary site on the 3 1 FRU designated by the Primary Site Type and Primary Site Number identifies the Site Number of that Slot For the Shelf Manager addresses the fields are assigned as follows Primary Site Type 3 Dedicated Shelf Manager Primary Site Number 0 to request RMCP accessible addresses 1 or 2 to request Private Shelf Manager addresses the value 1 or 2 is the site number for the corresponding Shelf Manager in the Shelf Address Table Secondary Site Type and Secondary Site Number 0 IPMI LAN Channel Index 0 for the physical interface used by the first LAN channel and 1 for the physical interface used by the second LAN channel The first physical interface is Release 3 5 1 106 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide normally ethO and the second physical interface is normally eth1 but this can be changed by the Shelf Manager configuration variables RMCP_NET ADAPTER and RMCP_NET_ ADAPTER2 If the HPM 3 Client Identifier format is disabled then in the default implementation the Client Identifier is based on the Shelf Address string that is stored in the Shelf FRU Information plus the Request Identifier Request ID byte at the end The Request ID byte has the following format e Request ID bits 7 4 Shelf Manag
317. ith intelligent FRUs in the shelf IPMCs AMCs and intelligent RTMs as described in the HPM 2 specification A separate IPMI LAN based channel channel 8 is allocated on the logical Shelf Manager for that purpose This channel can be used in one of the two modes mirrored or standalone The mode is specified by the value of the Shelf Manager configuration parameter HPM2 CLIENT MIRROR_CHANNEL The value 1 or 2 specifies the mirrored mode the value O specifies the standalone mode In the mirrored mode the channel is mirrored on an existing RMCP server mode LAN channel the mandatory channel 1 or the optional channel 2 This means that the HPM 2 client channel shares the network adapter and LAN configuration parameters the IP address the subnet mask etc with the original channel These parameters can be read via the command Get LAN Configuration Parameters through the HPM 2 client channel or the original channel They can be changed by sending the command Set LAN Configuration Parameters to the original channel An attempt to change them through the HPM 2 client channel will fail This mode can be used for shelves in which both the outside network and the HPM 2 shelf internal network are available through the same network interface The default mode for the HPM 2 client channel is mirroring it to channel 1 In the standalone mode a separate set of LAN configuration parameters and a separate network interface are assigned
318. ival Time Jun 24 2008 20 58 03 318074000 Time delta from previous captured frame 0 079507000 seconds Time delta from previous displayed frame 0 079507000 seconds Time since reference or first frame 0 079507000 seconds Frame Number 2 Frame Length 11 bytes Capture Length 11 bytes Frame is marked False Protocols in frame i2c ipmi Inter Integrated Circuit Data Bus I2C 1 Target address 0x10 Flags 0x00000000 Intelligent Platform Management Interface Response to 1 Responded in 0 079507000 seconds Header Get Sensor Reading Response from 0x82 to 0x20 Target Address 0x20 Target LUN 0x00 NetFN Sensor Event Response 0x05 00 Target LUN 0x00 0001 O1 NetFn Sensor Event Response 0x05 Header checksum Oxcc correct Source Address 0x82 Source LUN 0x00 SeqNo 0x28 00 Source LUN 0x00 1010 00 Sequence Number 0x28 Command Get Sensor Reading 0x2d Completion code Command Completed Normally 0x00 Data Sensor Reading 50 Event Messages Enabled Sensor scanning Enabled 1 Event Messages Enabled l Sensor scanning Enabled 0 Reading status unavailable False Threshold comparisons assertions byte 0 0 Reserved State 7 asserted False 0 Reserved State 6 asserted False O At or above UNR threshold State 5 asserted False O At or above UC threshold State 4 asserted Fals
319. ive value is returned or the current upgrade session has failed a negative error code is returned If there is no upgrade session in progress the returned value is non zero the startup script continues with the normal mode boot up sequence If however there is an upgrade session in progress the returned value is 0 the startup script proceeds with sanity validation of the newly installed software In the middle of validation it calls backend strobe to strobe the upgrade WDT in case the validation takes longer than the upgrade WDT timeout period Finally the startup script starts the Shelf Manager to perform final validation The watchdog timer interval is set to 120 seconds so the processing time in the etc rc script between the call to rupgrade status and the call to strobe the WDT and between the call to strobe the WDT and the startup of the Shelf Manager must not exceed 120 seconds each e During initialization the Shelf Manager strobes the upgrade WDT once again before trying to establish a network connection with the peer Shelf Manager Establishing a network connection may take up to 6 seconds After that and after successfully finishing the initialization which indicates validity of the new configuration the Shelf Manager makes a call to backend confirm which completes the upgrade procedure e At this point the user can invoke rupgrade status in order to find out the status of the current upgrade session This may be us
320. ked as a sub shell and given a single parameter the stage number Table 32 above describes all stages of the reliable upgrade that are visible to the hook script The script returns 0 on success and a non zero value in the case of a failure in which case the upgrade procedure is terminated No hook script is set up by default The user can run the reliable upgrade utility in the Add Hook mode to install a hook script The script is copied to the directory etc hook so if the directory etc is copied to the candidate location this installation is permanent however if the command line parameter reset etc is specified all hook scripts are erased after the upgrade 8 7 Reliable Upgrade of A2F060 Firmware To upgrade the A2F060 firmware run the reliable upgrade utility in the A2F060 upgrade mode rupgrade upgrade a2f lt URL gt skip checksums Here lt URL gt designates the file that contains the A2F060 upgrade firmware image the option skip checksums if specified requests the utility not to verify the checksum of the firmware image The image file includes all programmable contents of the A2F device including FPGA fabric and Cortex M3 firmware A reliable upgrade of A2F060 firmware is done separately from a reliable upgrade of any other ShMM 700 firmware components and involves resetting the ShMM Also if the current image set has number 1 this procedure has a side effect that U Boot image 0 is overwritten by the current U
321. l the channels to be deselected on the multiplexer switch which allows the Shelf Manager to access devices on the main 12C bus even if one of the subordinate buses has a fault e The multiplexer switch is re enabled via GPIO E8 the next time some parts of the Shelf Manager tries to access it This allows the Shelf Manager to access devices on the subordinate buses that are still functional e When an attempt is made to access the faulty subordinate bus by writing the channel number or mask for the faulty bus into the multiplexer switch this operation is not permitted for the ignore count subsequent attempts The faulty bus is not enabled an error is instead returned for the corresponding write operation The parameter ignore count is specified by the configuration parameter ISOLATE MUX IGNORE COUNT e The algorithm knows which value in the multiplexer switch register corresponds to the faulty bus because it monitors all write accesses to the multiplexer switch registers and remembers the last value before the occurrence of the fault e When the ignore count is exhausted an attempt is made to access the faulty bus and check whether the fault is still present If the attempt fails the ignore count is reset to its original value If the attempt succeeds then the recorded fault condition for that bus is removed and operation continues normally e With this approach it is also possible to initiate a switchover to the backup
322. le Shelf Manager information from the directory var nvdata to the provisional var file system or optionally copies the whole var directory to the provisional var Flash partition e temporarily just for the next boot sets the boot delay to 0 this is done to minimize the time of the next boot and prevent the reliable upgrade watchdog timer from premature expiration This script is invoked as a sub shell and given a single parameter which is either the string specified by lt args gt or an empty string if no args is supplied The parameter defines the mode of operation of the script with respect to copying non volatile information from the persistent Flash partitions to the provisional Flash partitions and can take the following values each of which triggers a corresponding set of actions e no parameter supplied the script erases both the provisional etc and provisional var directories then copies Shelf Manager non volatile information from the directory var nvdata to the provisional var partition The script also copies the contents of etc ssh directory to the provisional etc partition to preserve SSH server keys This is the default mode of operation in this case the non volatile data is preserved but the Shelf Manager configuration file is taken from the new RFS image e conf the script adopts the default mode of operation except that Shelf Manager configuration files are preserved via var upgrade filesystem During the nex
323. le with OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 3183 1 1 2 aS an ASCII string This format is convenient for visual monitoring without specialized tools If PET FORMAT is set to 2 Shelf Manager generates trap messages in multi variable format packing each field of the event event number timestamp generator etc as a separate variable with OIDs in the 1 3 6 1 4 1 3183 1 1 3 1 13 range Processing traps in this format requires the MIB file It is possible to change the Platform Event Trap format dynamically using the clia setpefconfig pet_format lt N gt command with lt N gt 0 2 The command clia getpefconfig pet format shows the currently used PET format Release 3 5 1 138 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide Here is some sample output of the standard Linux snmptrapd tool for the supported formats PET FORMAT 0 Received 111 bytes from 192 168 0 2 192 168 0 2 Enterprise Specific Trap 2453248 Uptime 191 days 4 23 00 02 PPS PET MIB ipmi trap data Hex STRING BF CE 7A 60 AE 50 11 DC 00 80 00 50 C2 3F CD 24 00 01 12 BE 74 62 00 00 20 20 02 20 C1 00 00 00 FF FF 00 00 00 00 00 19 OA 40 00 00 00 00 Cl PET FORMAT 1 Received 251 bytes from 192 168 0 2 192 168 0 2 Enterprise Specific Trap 2453248 Uptime 0 00 41 04 PPS PET MIB ipmi trap text STRING RecordID 0004 RecordType Platform Event Time Dec 19 17 11 43 2007 Generator 20 LUNO Chan0O SensorType 25 SensorNumber Cl EventType 6F EventDirecti
324. ler not within a specific FRU so the same sensors on different FRUs of the same type have different numbers and it is typically not known in advance in which slot a specific FRU is going to be placed This problem is solved in the following way the sensor numbers in the HPDL SDR data for a specific FRU have relative numbers and these numbers are correlated to the actual numbers in ascending order For example assume that the replacement SDRs describe sensors 1 2 3 and 4 and the sensor numbers for the corresponding FRU in the HPDL chassis definition are 124 208 209 and 210 In that case the replacement SDR for sensor 1 applies to sensor 124 the replacement SDR for sensor 2 applies to sensor 208 and so on Release 3 5 1 123 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide 3 7 Configuring the Cooling Management Strategy Different shelf vendors have different requirements for the cooling management strategy of the Shelf Manager The PICMG 3 0 specification contains several requirements related to cooling management that must be satisfied by all vendors e g the specification requires the Shelf Manager to deactivate a FRU that is in a critical thermal condition However some vendors have their own vendor specific requirements that need to be satisfied for specific shelves e g turn on the Critical TELCO alarm when the thermal condition in the shelf becomes critical Until now vendor specific cooling management was implemen
325. listed below Just click on a topic to go to it e Re initializing the U Boot Environment e Re initializing the File System e Resetting the Login Password 6 2 Re initializing the U Boot Environment The U Boot environment variables are stored in the ShMM EEPROM on the ShMM 500 and ShMM 1500 and in two redundant dedicated Flash partitions on the SAMM 700 If you would like to restore the default values for the U Boot environment variables you must first erase the environment variables stored in EEPROM Flash and reset or power cycle the ShMM To erase the EEPROM on a ShMM 500 you need to enter the following command from the U Boot prompt shmm500 eeprom write 80400000 0 1800 EEPROM 0x50 write addr 80400000 off 0000 count 6144 done shmm500 To erase the EEPROM on a ShMM 1500 you need to enter the following command from the U Boot prompt shmm1500 eeprom write 80400000 0 1000 EEPROM 0x50 write addr 80400000 off 0000 count 4096 done shmm1500 On a ShMM 700 the U Boot environment variables are stored in two redundant dedicated Flash partitions To erase the U Boot environment variables on a ShMM 700 you need to enter the following commands from the U Boot prompt shmm700 sf probe 2 0 65536 KiB N250512A at 2 0 is now current device shmm700 sf erase 100000 80000 Erasing Flash done shmm700 Then you need to reset the SAMM using the reset command as shown below with resulting consol
326. lligent RTM to the Shelf Manager including negotiating for power resources on their behalf Furthermore a Carrier IPMC negotiates with its modules and on carrier switching resources regarding interconnect configurations The AMC management architecture is purposely designed to 1 avoid impacting existing ATCA Shelf Managers and 2 minimize the resources required to implement a Module Management Controller since board real estate and cost are at a premium on AMCs Release 3 5 1 14 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide There are Pigeon Point BMR variants for AdvancedTCA IPM Controllers as well as for Carrier IPMCs and MMCs The principal BMR variants are based on the Microsemi SmartFusion intelligent mixed signal FPGA with variants based on the Atmel AVR ATmega and Renesas H8S microcontroller families for some controller types Please see http www pigeonpoint com products html for more details on these offerings as well as on the Pigeon Point solutions for MicroTCA controllers Pigeon Point Board Management Starter Kits for each of these BMR variants include all the materials necessary documentation schematics bill of materials firmware source code and development tools etc for Intelligent FRU developers to integrate a reference design directly into their boards and take immediate advantage of the fully validated BMR firmware More details including product briefs on the available Pigeon Point BMR variants and
327. llowing command line can be used to dump message details in the PostScript format tshark r ipmb traced log V T ps The e option can be used to select specific packet fields to be dumped if this option is used the field format must be also specified T fields Several e options can be used to specify multiple fields In conjunction with the filtering option R this option provides a powerful tool for queries on the message stream similar to relational database queries For example the following query dumps the values of net functions and command codes for IPMB messages sent from the source address 0x84 to the Shelf Manager destination address 0x20 tshark r ipmb_traced log e ipmi header netfn e ipmi header command ipmi header target 0x84 amp amp ipmi header source 0x20 T fields 0x04 Ox2d 0x04 0x2d 0x04 Ox2d 0x04 0x2d 0x04 Ox2d 0x04 Ox2d 0x04 Ox2d 0x04 Ox2d 0x04 0x2d 0x04 Ox2d 0x04 Ox2d 0x06 0x01 0x04 Ox2d 0x04 0x20 0x04 0x2d 0x04 Ox2d 0x04 0x2d 0x04 Ox2d 0x04 0x2d 0x04 0x2d Release 3 5 1 210 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide 0x04 Ox2d 0x04 Ox2d 0x04 Ox2d Full information about tshark options and syntax can be found in the tshark manual page man tshark Release 3 5 1 211 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide 6 Re initializing the ShMM 6 1 In This Section This section applies to SAMM 500 ShMM 1500 and ShMM 700 and contains the topics
328. lock frequency 40 MHz A2F Fabric clock frequency 20 MHz A2F Fast delay calibration 1330 cycles per 100uS A2F eNVM 128 KB 00000000 00020000 A2F eSRAM 16 KB 20000000 20004000 A2F Extram start 200022D0 RUPG booting from image 0 confirmed Iiis serial Out serial Err serial Net FECO 00 18 49 01 8f 26 FEC1 00 18 49 01 8f 27 FECO FEC1 Hit any key to stop autoboot 0 shmm700 3 Echo current network settings shmmxx00 printenv rmcpaddr netmask gatewayip rmcpaddr 192 168 0 44 netmask 255 255 255 0 gatewayip 192 168 0 1 shmmxx00 4 Change settings and commit to non volatile storage shmmxx00 setenv rmcpaddr 10 1 1 10 shmmxx00 setenv netmask 255 255 0 0 shmmxx00 setenv gatewayip 10 1 1 1 shmmxx00 saveenv Saving Environment to EEPROM shmmxx00 Release 3 5 1 97 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide Note saveenv output is slightly different on the ShMM 700 5 Boot the ShMM up to full operational state and log in as user root On ShMM 500 shmm500 reset U Boot 1 1 2 Apr 27 2005 19 17 09 CPU Aul550 324 MHz id 0x02 rev 0x00 Board ShMM 500 S N 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 03 03 03 DRAM 64 MB Flash 16 MB Tris serial Out serial Err serial Net AulX00 ETHERNET Hit any key to stop autoboot 0 Booting image at bfb00000 Image Name MIPS Linux 2 4 26 Created 2005 05 07
329. lock7 11 JFFS2 User partition for image set 1 contains shelf manager files and user data 62 5 1 5 dev mtdblock8 var upgrade Partition for the upgrade status files The minimum possible size for a JFFS2 partition is 5 erase blocks Release 3 5 1 244 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide Before changing the user partition format to JFFS2 it is necessary to verify that the ShMM 700 is running at least the Linux kernel RFS and U Boot images from release 3 5 0 or a later release which can be done via the im1s command If the currently running Shelf Manager release includes the Linux kernel image the RFS image or the U Boot image from a release older than 3 5 0 i e the Created date is prior to March 2015 it is necessary to upgrade the image s to release 3 5 0 or later before changing the user partition format to JFFS2 To change the user partition format to JFFS2 it is necessary to run the following commands setenv user partition jffs2 setenv flash_reset user reboot WARNING All files stored in the user partition will be erased when the format is changed to JFFS2 or from JFFS2 to UBIFS The default files from the currently loaded RFS image will be copied to the user partition in for example the var and etc directories The result can be verified in the mount command output at the ShMM shell prompt e g mount ubi0 boot on boot type u
330. lsolated MuxlsiCh2 Channel2_lsolated MuxlsICh3 Channel3_Isolated MuxisiCh4 Channel4_lsolated ji A configuration parameter for the signal Channels in the form Reset lt n gt specifies the number of the ShMM GPIO used to reset the device This GPIO is chosen by the designers of the ShMM carrier For distinct multiplexers different GPIOs must be used Signals with internal names in the form Channel lt n gt _Isolated report the isolation state of a specific channel of the multiplexer or switch starting from 1 The value of the signal is 1 if the channel is currently isolated by the isolation algorithm and 0 otherwise These signals can be exposed as IPMI sensors using normal HPDL mechanisms The signal IsolatedChannelMask reports the bitmask that has 1s for currently isolated channels bit 0 of the bitmask corresponds to the first channel bit 1 to the second channel etc In this mode the isolation algorithm operates as follows e When the error ETIMEDOUT is detected by the Linux 12C subsystem while trying to access a device on a subordinate bus this bus is recorded as faulty in the Shelf Manager and the multiplexer switch is held in reset via the corresponding GPIO This operation causes all the channels to be deselected on the multiplexer switch which allows the Shelf Manager to access devices on the main master only 12C bus even if one of the subordinate buses has a fault e The multiplexer switc
331. lue of 1 the backup Shelf Manager concludes that the communication link between the Shelf Managers is broken In that case no switchover is initiated instead the backup Shelf Manager repeatedly reinitializes itself and tries to establish a connection with the active Shelf Manager until the communication link is restored Re initialization is achieved by rebooting the ShMM and automatically restarting the Shelf Manager after the reboot Special logic in the Shelf Manager guarantees that it does not try to become active at startup if the peer Shelf Manager is already active The Shelf Manager uses a watchdog timer to protect against becoming unresponsive due to infinite loops or other software bugs In the event the watchdog timer on the active Shelf Manager triggers that ShMM is reset causing the Remote Healthy bit on the backup ShMM to become 0 and triggering a switchover In addition to the scenarios described above the active Shelf Manager monitors the state of the Local Healthy and Active bits If either of these bits becomes 0 on the active Shelf Manager and the backup Shelf Manager is present the active Shelf Manager initiates a reboot of the ShMM in this way initiating a switchover to the backup Shelf Manager This allows third party applications on the ShMM to participate in monitoring health of the whole ShMM and initiate a switchover if necessary Also this behavior allows the former active ShMM to reinitialize itself as a backup in the
332. ly in the least significant bit The netmask and default gateway on the backup ShMM is the same as on the active ShMM For example if the RMCP IP address is 192 168 0 2 the backup ShMM has the corresponding IP address 192 168 0 3 with the same netmask and default gateway To enable this feature it is necessary to define the Shelf Manager configuration parameter PROPAGATE RMCP ADDRESS as TRUE in the Shelf Manager configuration file 3 4 2 Usage of the Second Ethernet Interface The second Ethernet interface can be dedicated for use as a private network between redundant ShMMs and used to synchronize state information between the active and backup ShMMs Unlike the RMCP Ethernet port this second Ethernet interface is always enabled on both the active and backup ShMM but with a small twist both the active and backup ShMM specify the same IP address for the redundancy interface but software assigns the next logical IP address to the ShMM with an odd hardware address For instance the default setting for the redundancy Ethernet port is 192 168 1 2 The odd addressed ShMM assumes the address 192 168 1 3 This way the active and backup ShMM can be identically configured but still assume unique IP addresses for the redundancy Ethernet link When the ShMMs use a non Ethernet network interface for communication between the redundant Shelf Managers see section 3 4 4 the second network interface can potentially be used for other purposes such as
333. m is specified via the configuration parameter EXTERNAL EVENT HANDLER 3 12 1 Detailed Steps to Configure External Event Handling To use external event handling the user should take the following steps 1 Prepare a script or executable for external event handling and place it on the Shelf Manager Flash filesystem for example into the directory var bin Release 3 5 1 135 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide 2 Specify the location of the external event handler in the Shelf Manager configuration file etc shelfman conf as the value of the configuration parameter EXTERNAL EVENT HANDLER for example EXTERNAL EVENT HANDLER var bin ext_handler sh If the configuration parameter EXTERNAL EVENT HANDLER is not defined or is defined as an empty value external event handling is disabled 3 Start the Shelf Manager 4 Enable PEF via the CLI if not enabled yet clia setpefconfig control 1 5 Enable alerting if not enabled yet clia setpefconfig action_control 1 6 Set alert strings if necessary clia setpefconfig alert string 1 test string In the example above 1 is the number of the string to set multiple strings use sequential string numbers 1 2 etc for subsequent strings 7 Set at least one alert policy that sends alerts to the destination channel Fh the IPMI System Interface clia setpefconfig alert policy 1 1 8 F 1 1 Where the fields in the example have
334. m rw ramdisk sentry shmm1500 rfs rootpath rootfs rmcpaddr 192 168 0 2 serverip 192 168 0 7 timezone UTC For ShMM 700 bootargs console console bootcmd run mount_ubifs a2f upgrade run ubifs bootdelay 3 baudrate 115200 netmask 255 255 255 0 bootfile sentry shmm700 kernel loadaddr 0x42000000 console ttySP0 115200n8 rfsaddr 0x46000000 mtdids spi0 SPI 0 mtdpartsl 512K uboot0 512K uboot1 256K envvars0 256K envvars1 256K u bifs_ cache 30976K boot 32M user bootfile sentry shmm700 kernel ramdisk sentry shmm7 00 rfs quiet quiet mac _override set bootargs bootargs fec_mac ethaddr rootpath rootfs ipdevice etho ipldevice usb0 ip2device ethl ipaddr 192 168 0 22 ipladdr 192 168 1 2 gatewayip 192 168 0 1 rmcpaddr 192 168 0 2 netmask 255 255 255 0 hostname shmm700 flash reset n password reset n logging ram timezone UTC rc_ifconfig n Release 3 5 1 33 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide start _rc2 daemons y rce2 etc rce shmm700 hpdl set_mtdparts set mtdparts mtdparts SPI 0 mtdparts1 bootargs common set bootargs console console mtdparts m25p80 1 mtdpartsl1 quiet run mac_override bootargs initrd run bootargs common set bootargs bootargs root dev ram bootargs nfs run bootargs common set bootargs bootargs root dev nfs ip S ipaddr ethO off nfsroot S serverip rootpath v3 tcp mount _ubifs run set_mtdparts load_ubifs ubifsload l
335. mation from the frame Layer 5 provides RMCP header information from the frame version sequence number and Class e Layer 6 includes additional information about the RMCP or RMCP specific fields in the message Release 3 5 1 194 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide e Layer 7 is available only for IPMI ATCA messages and provides message header information and information about the request response data Specifically the message is identified as either a request or a reply and the request reply header fields are interpreted The data fields are interpreted as defined by IPMI and PICMG specs for a particular request or response 5 3 2 Introduction to Terminal oriented Wireshark The Wireshark tool suite also includes a command line oriented utility called tshark This utility can be used to analyze traffic using only a command line approach when running a GUI application is not practical The tshark tool has the same overall functionality as the GUI but lacks its interactive capabilities Section 5 4 also includes step by step examples of using tshark which is fully documented in the corresponding manual pages man tshark To get online help use tshark 5 3 3 Installing IPMI Analyzer Software The IPMB trace daemon is included in the software image on the ShMM by default and does not require any specific installation The Wireshark client applications and much more regarding Wireshark can be obtained from ww
336. mm700 sentry shmm700 app lt INFO gt frontend c 732 Initiating partial upgrade lt INFO gt frontend c 765 app tmp _shmm700 sentry shmm700 app lt INFO gt frontend c 784 copy etc lt INFO gt frontend c 820 Calling backend to handle partial upgrade sbin backend application tmp shmm700 sentry shmm700 app copy etc lt WARN gt shmm700_ hal c 322 Device ubil boot is mounted to folder boot lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1255 Write storage state not available gt available ALLOW lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 368 Resetting UBIFS cache Erasing 64 Kibyte 30000 75 complete lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1863 Clone lt INFO gt shmm700_ hal c 1898 File dev mtd0 of device 1 0 cloned to file dev mtd2 of device 1 1 lt INFO gt shmm700_ hal c 1642 Cleaning image var upgrade boot ulImage 1 lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1863 lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1898 File var upgrade boot uImage 0 of device 2 0 cloned to file var upgrade boot uImage 1 of device 2 1 lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1642 Cleaning image var upgrade boot rfs 1 lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1863 lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1898 File var upgrade boot rfs 0 of device 4 0 cloned to file var upgrade boot rfs 1 of device 4 1 lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1255 Write storage state available gt not available ALLOW lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1642 Cleaning image 1 sentry shmm700 app lt INFO gt
337. mon establishes an RMCP session with the target board using a special type of payload the IPMI Trace Payload that is defined in the HPM 2 LAN Attached IPM Controller Specification Once the RMCP session with the IPMI Trace Payload is established the IPM Controller begins sending trace data to the daemon in the IPMI Trace Payload format and continues to do so until the session is terminated A specific instance of the daemon can collect either local or remote IPMI messaging trace but not both Also when collecting a remote trace it can do so only from one IPM Controller in the shelf To collect a remote trace from each of multiple IPM Controllers multiple instance of the daemon can be started on the ShMM When collecting a local or remote trace the trace collection daemon runs in either the unattended trace or controlled trace modes When initiated in unattended trace mode the daemon initiates trace collection and starts writing collected data into a file This continues until the daemon is terminated by the user via C or the SIGINT signal is sent to the daemon process operating as a background Linux application The resulting trace file can then be transferred to another host for analysis using the IPMB trace analyzer When started in controlled trace mode the daemon begins to listen for an incoming TCP IP connection from the IPMB analyzer running on another host Once the connection is established the daemon initiates trace collection
338. ms etc rce Mounted dev pts etc rce Mounted dev mtdblock0O to var etc rce Mounted dev mtdblock10 to var upgrade At this point in the execution of the xe script it invokes rupgrade_tool c to check whether a reliable upgrade is in progress The tool returns 0 confirming that an upgrade is in progress Given that result the rc script continues with the startup process etc rce Checking the reliable upgrade watchdog timer activated etc rce Mounted ram disk to var log etc re Started syslogd and klogd etc rce Mounted ram disk to var tmp etc re Setting hostname shmm 193 Since a reliable upgrade is in progress the watchdog timer is strobed once more in the re script etc rce Strobing the reliable upgrade watchdog timer etc rce Mounted dev mtdblockl to etc etc re Calling etc rce carrier3 Board Hardware Address OxFE etc netconfig etc hosts has valid 192 168 1 193 entry etc netconfig Updating etc profile sentry with IP settings etc netconfig ifconfig ethO 192 168 1 193 etc netconfig ifconfig ethl 192 168 0 193 etc netconfig route add default gw 192 168 1 253 etc netconfig Starting inetd etc rce carrier3 Starting up IPMBs etc rce carrier3 Updating etc profile sentry with specific settings etc rce carrier3 Starting snmpd S S etc rce carrier3 Starting httpd etc rce carrier3 Starting Shelf Manager lt I gt 02 48 08 463 171 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager v
339. mtdchar6 Not mounted The other etc dev mtdblock6 JFFS2 file system 3 1 dev mtdchar7 Not mounted The other Linux kernel image Release 3 5 1 216 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide OFFSET IN FLASH SIZE IN DEVICE NODE MOUNTED As CONTENT IN MBYTES MBYTES ON STARTUP 2 dev mtdchar8 Not mounted The other U Boot firmware image 4 25 3 75 dev mtdchar9 Not mounted The other Linux root file system rfs image 8 0 5 dev mtdchar10 var upgrade The first half of the dev mtdblock10 varlupgrade JFFS2 file system 8 5 15 dev mtdchar0 Iar The var JFFS2 file dev mtdblock0 system 10 1 dev mtdchar1 letc The etc JFFS2 file dev mtdblock1 system 11 1 dev mtdchar2 Not mounted The Linux kernel image 12 0 25 dev mtdchar3 Not mounted The U Boot firmware image 12 25 3 75 dev mtdchar4 Not mounted The Linux root file system rfs image Table 24 Flash Partitioning for 32MB Flash ShMM 500s OFFSET IN FLASH SIZE IN DEVICE NODE MOUNTED As CONTENT IN MBYTES MBYTES ON STARTUP 0 0 5 dev mtdchar10 var upgrade The first half of the dev mtdblock10 var upgrade JFFS2 filesystem 0 5 1 dev mtdchar2 Not mounted The Linux kernel dev mtdblock2 image 1 5 1 dev mtdchar1 letc The etc JFFS2 dev mtdblock1 filesystem 2 5 1 75 dev mtdchar0 iar The var JFFS2 dev mdtblock0 filesystem 4 25 7 15 de
340. mware The image is used to rollback an A2F upgrade if new candidate firmware is not programmed successfully or fails any of the post upgrade tests addmisc Appends quiet and console settings to bootargs This variable is normally not modified Note not present on ShMM 700 Release 3 5 1 24 August 17 2015 ENVIRONMENT VARIABLE alt _image Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide DESCRIPTION ShMM 700 only This variable contains the rollback image set index This variable is used by load_ubifs command to determine which of the Linux kernel and RFS images to boot if the current image set is broken and there is no reliable upgrade running The variable is set automatically by U Boot during bootstrap and should not be changed by the user its value is always opposite to image_sel baudrate Serial port baud rate default is 115200 bootargs Command line to be passed to the Linux kernel May contain references to other U Boot environment variables which is resolved at run time On both ShMM 500 and ShMM 1500 the default value is root dev ram rw console ttyS0 115200 On ShMM 700 the default value is console ttySP0 115200n8 mtdparts m25p80 1 512K uboot0 512K ubootl1 256K envvars0 2 56K envvars1 256K ubifs_ cache 30976K boot 32M user quiet fec_mac ethaddr root dev ram bootargs_ comm on ShMM 700 only U Boot command that sets up common kernel bootargs parameters It s called by boo
341. n Point tool that generates a FRU Information image from its textual description The image can then be stored in an appropriate EEPROM device using various techniques The FRU Information Compiler implements special syntax that can be used to incorporate a configuration file into a FRU Information image that is being created For example the following lines add a compressed configuration file shelfman conf acb3 gz to the current FRU Information image PPS Shelf Manager Configuration File shelfman conf acbh3 gz 3 3 2 2 Using the Shelf Manager Command Line Interface to Place Configuration Variables in the Shelf FRU Information An extended version of the CLI command rudataw can be used to dynamically update Shelf FRU Information with configuration information The corresponding configuration file optionally compressed must be first downloaded to the ShMM The corresponding command line has the following syntax clia frudataw p lt ipmb address gt lt fru id gt lt in file gt clia frudataw p c lt ipmb address gt lt fru id gt The parameters lt ipmb address gt and lt fru id gt specify the IPMB address and FRU device ID of the FRU Information to update For the Shelf FRU Information use IPMB address 20h and FRU device ID 254 The parameter lt in ile gt indicates the configuration file which is possibly compressed to be stored in the target FRU Information The option c removes clears the configuration data from
342. n a specific network environment requires changing the following network parameters e RMCP IP address rmcpaddress e RMCP gateway address gatewayip e RMCP netmask netmask If the second ShMM Ethernet is used for software redundancy communication between a pair of ShMMs the network parameters above would typically not need to be adapted to a different network environment since this is a dedicated private network between the redundant ShMMs However if the second network interface is used for RMCP communication please use steps 10 and 11 below to change the settings U Boot environment variables do not apply to the second network interface Changing the RMCP network parameters is a two step process First the U Boot network environment variables need to be updated then the booted active ShMM module network settings Release 3 5 1 95 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide need to be updated using the Shelf Manager command line interface CLIA Specific steps are shown below 1 Attach a serial port console connection to the ShMM module This typically is 115200 Baud N 8 1 for ShMM 500 ShMM 1500 and ShMM 700 2 Reset the ShMM carrier and press the space bar to interrupt the automatic boot up process You should see on ShMM 500 U Boot 1 1 2 Apr 27 2005 19 17 09 Board ShMM 500 S N 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 03 03 03 DRAM 64 MB Flash 16 MB Tni serial Out serial Err serial
343. n dhcp cli nt identifi tifier 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 144 020 0202020204 1 fixed address 192 168 1 only Starting with release 3 5 the Shelf Manager supports IPv6 in parallel with IPv4 for communication with the System Manager and other shelf external entities using RMCP or other application level Release 3 5 1 145 109 tftpboot ssh_ script _eth0O ShM2 tftpboot ssh_script_ethl ShM2 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide protocols This support exists only on ShMM 700 since the Linux kernel on SAMM 500 1500 does not support IPv6 Starting with release 3 5 1 the Shelf Manager also supports the PICMG 3 0 R3 0 amendments defined by ECN 3 0 3 0 001 In particular Shelf Manager IPv6 Connection records in the Shelf FRU Information and the new format of the command Get Shelf Manager IP Addresses are supported For configuration of Pv6 based services the Shelf Manager supports new IPv6 related LAN configuration parameters which are defined in the IPMI 2 0 rev 1 1 specification parameters 50 80 These LAN configuration parameters as well as the previously supported parameters are stored persistently and are redundant that is changes to the parameters are passed from the active to the backup Shelf Manager over the redundancy interface and stored there The parameters are stored in the files var nvdata chl_param_ipv6_v2 var nvdata ch2_param_ipv6_v2 for LAN channels 1 and 2
344. n file is ignored Release 3 5 1 50 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide DEFAULT DESCRIPTION CAN BE OBTAINED FROM SHELF FRU INFO DETECT DEADL Boolean TRUE This variable turns on the deadlock No OCKS detection in CLI and RMCP server facilities in the Shelf Manager The detection is based on an internal watchdog that must be periodically strobed by the threads serving CLI and RMCP requests If one of the threads fails to strobe the internal watchdog the actual watchdog does not get strobed and ultimately the ShMM resets initiating a failover to the backup Shelf Manager In addition currently on all platforms except ShMM 700 lock data structures are periodically checked directly for the presence of a deadlock See section 4 8 for further background DEVICE POLL_ Number 10 The time in seconds between Yes TIMEOUT successive polls of the IPMB 0 devices by the Shelf Manager via sending the Get Device ID command to them DHCP _FOR_RWMC Boolean FALSE If this variable is set only the RMCP_ Yes P_ONLY IP addresses are assigned via the DHCP mechanism private IP addresses of the ShMMs are not touched by DHCP DHCP REQUEST Boolean FALSE This variable causes the DHCP client Yes _OPTION LIST to request an explicit list of options via parameter request list option 55 By default the DHCP request does not specify desired options so the DHCP server does not nece
345. n normal operation if this interval exceeds one second the Shelf Manager is reset 1 c s Set logging destination use s to choose syslog and c to choose console If this option is not specified the values of the parameters CONSOLE LOGGING ENABLED and SYSLOG _LOGGING_ENABLED from the file etc shelfman conf determine Shelf Manager actions in this area g lt ip_address gt Set the default gateway IP address This address is only used if no gateway address is set in the LAN Configuration Parameters for channel 1 sf The option s forces the Shelf Manager to use EEPROMs for Shelf FRU Information storage The option s f forces the Shelf Manager not to use EEPROMs for Shelf FRU Information storage If neither of these options is present in the command line the value of the parameter SHELF _FRU_IN_ EEPROM from the file etc shelfman conf determines Shelf Manager actions in this area p lt port gt This option sets the redundancy communication port If this option is not present the value of the parameter REDUNDANCY_ PORT from the file etc shelfman conf determines the Shelf Manager actions in this area ph lt IPMB addr1 gt lt IPMB addr2 gt This option defines IPMB addresses of pseudo hubs by default 0x82 and 0x84 Pseudo hubs are virtual IPM controllers that are created and emulated by the Shelf Manager and behave like IPM controllers for Base Interface hub boards This option can be used for testing and w
346. n script if the U Boot variable start_rc2_daemons is set to y to disable the RMCP interface comment out the corresponding line in the script This interface is available only on the active ShMM and only if the Shelf Manager is operational The Shelf Manager only accepts connections targeted to configured RMCP address es 1040 tcp ShM Redundancy interface This is the inter ShAMM communication interface needed in redundant configuration It only accepts connection targeted to the IP address specified as the configuration parameter REDUNDANT IP ADDRESS in the Shelf Manager configuration file 4743 tcp HPI server 4743 tcp6 This service is available when an instance of an on ShMM OpenHPI or IntegralHPI running on the ShMM IntegralHPI is activated as a part of the Shelf Manager if the configuration variable ENABLE INTEGRALHPT is set to TRUE and the HPI dynamic library is present OpenHPI on ShMM version is started by the etc rce common script so it is possible to comment out corresponding lines in that script to disable it On SAMM 700 only the HPI server listens to both IPv6 and IPv4 sockets so HPI sessions with a ShMM 700 can be established over both IPv6 and IPv4 3 16 Configuring the Speed of IC Buses ShMM 700 Only Two of the SAMM 700 12C buses with logical numbers 2 and 3 support both high speed 400KHz and normal speed 100KHz operation By default both buses operate in high speed mode but this can be changed by mean
347. neaess 170 Table 18 ShMM Tests Implemented in the Diagnostic Infrastructure cccceeeeeeeteeeeetees 186 Table 19 Options for the IPMB Trace Collection Daemon c ccccccessecesseseeeeseeeeeeeseneaeeeseseaees 190 Table 20 IPMB Trace Collection Packet Field c cccccceseeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeaeeeeeeeeseeeesaeeseeeeenaees 191 Table 21 IPMB Message List Basic Information ccc ececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteneaeeeeeeeaees 193 Table 22 IPMI Filter Primitives ccccccecceseesncne cece eeeeeeceaeaeceeeeeseceaaaeceeeeeeesecaaaeeeeeeeseseesnnaeeeeess 208 Table 23 Flash Partitioning for 16MB Flash SAMM 500S cccccsessecesseeeeeseeeeeeesseeeesseeeaees 216 Table 24 Flash Partitioning for 32MB Flash SAMM 5005S c ccccsescecesseeeeeeseeeeeesseeaeeeseseaees 217 Table 25 Flash Partitioning for 64MB Flash SAMM 500S cccssescecesseeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeenseseaees 218 Table 26 Flash Partitioning for 32MB Flash SAMM 1500S cccccessecesseseeesseeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeaees 219 Table 27 Flash Partitioning for 64MB Flash SAMM 1500S cccccescecesssseeceseeeeeeseneeeeeeseaees 220 Table 28 Standard Source File Names for Upgrade Components ccccceeeeeeeesteeeeneeeeeees 224 Table 29 Flash Partitioning for SAMM 700s 64MB Flash in UBIFS mode 241 Table 30 File Names for Firmware Images Stored as UBIFS Files ceecceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 242 T
348. ned the search for the Shelf FRU Information on the IPMB is limited to the designated sources only SHELF FRU_TI Number 5 The time interval in seconds during No MEOUT initialization that the Shelf Manager waits for Shelf FRU Information devices to be detected Release 3 5 1 74 August 17 2015 SHELF MANAGE R_CONFIGURAT ION_IN SHELF _FRU_INFO Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide Boolean DEFAULT FALSE DESCRIPTION If TRUE instructs the Shelf Manager to retrieve configuration parameters from a special set of records in the Shelf FRU Information If these parameters are successfully retrieved they override the values from configuration files Not all configuration variables can be overridden from the Shelf FRU Information for example this variable cannot be overridden for obvious reasons and to be effective must be specified in the configuration file CAN BE OBTAINED FROM SHELF FRU INFO No SHORT SEND M SG_ RESPONSE Boolean TRUE Determines the type of the Send Message response provided by the Shelf Manager required by the current PICMG 3 0 if TRUE or compatible with the previous versions of the Shelf Manager if FALSE No SPECIAL HPI_ ENTITY FOR A MC_CARRIER Boolean TRUE If TRUE IntegralHPI uses the entity type SAHPI_ENT_ SUBBOARD_ CARR IER_BLADE for AMC carrier boards otherwise the entity type SAHPI_ENT PICMG FRONT B
349. ned in PICMG 3 0 R1 0 and supported as the only IPMB 0 radial topology until the ECN 002 amendments to PICMG 3 0 R2 0 e Supports dual redundant operation of IPMB 0 even with the only one Shelf Manager installed e Does not need or include IPMB 0 cross links between the two ShMM carriers Figure 5 Redundant Dual Star Radial IPMB 0 Topology Shelf Manager Shelf Manager The IPMB topology record has the following format which follows the regular FRU Info multirecord format Release 3 5 1 165 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide Table 16 IPMB Topology Record OFFSET LENGTH DEFINITION 0 1 Record Type ID The value of COh OEM is used 1 1 End of List Version 7 End of List Set to one for the last record 6 4 Reserved write as Oh 3 0 Record format version 2h for this definition 2 1 Record length 3 1 Record Checksum Holds the zero checksum of the record 4 1 Header Checksum Holds the zero checksum of the header 5 3 Manufacturer ID LS byte first Write as the three byte ID assigned to PPS 16394 decimal or 00400Ah 8 1 PPS Record ID For this record the value 5h is used 9 1 Record Format Version For this record the value Oh is used 8 1 IPMB Topology Type The following values are defined Oh unspecified 1h Bused IPMB 0 carrier 2h Dual star radial IPMB 0 carrier 3h Redundant dual star radial IPMB 0 carrier 4h Universal redundant dual star
350. neeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeee 24 Table 6 Configuration Parameter Types and Descriptions cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeteaeeeeeeteenees 35 Table 7 Shelf Manager Configuration Parameters cccccceeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesaeeneaeeseeeees 37 Table 8 U Boot Environment Variables and Descriptions cc eeeeeseeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeetnaeeeeee 81 Table 9 Verbosity Configuration Parameters and Levels c cceccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeeeseeeees 83 Table 10 HPM 3 DHCP Client ID ce cecceccccccneceeneeeeeeeeceaeeeeaaeseeeeeceeeeesaaeseeaaessaceeseaeeesaaesteneessaees 105 Table 11 HPM 3 DHCP Unique Identifier Formmat c ccccceeeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseaeeesaeeneneeesaees 105 Table 12 Slot Location record for AdvancedTCA ccceecceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeaeeesaeeseeeeeseaeeesaeeneneeeeaees 106 Table 13 Shelf FRU Information and Configuration Variable Settings cccccceseeeseeeeees 114 Table 14 Network Services cc cccccssssecsesssecsessesecseseesecsesnsecseenseseesnsecsesensesecsensessesensessesensess 142 Table 15 OS Level Bus Number Mapping for SHMM 700 cccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeneeeeeaees 145 Table 16 IPMB Topology Record ccc ccccccccceccceeeceeeeeeeceeeeencnieeeeteceeeenboneeeebeeceeeenbonieeeebeceets 166 Table 17 Cooling State Sensors ccccccccseccecesseeceeeseneeeeeseneeeceseeeeeeseeeeeeseneaeesseesseesssesaeesse
351. nformation stores it in the ShMM file system A separate file is used for each of the 6 network interfaces processed by the DHCP client according to the following rules tmp tftp_info_0 for the first network interface on the ShMM with the lower Hardware Address tmp tftp info 1 for the second network interface on the ShMM with the lower Hardware Address tmp tftp_info 2 for the first network interface on the ShMM with the higher Hardware Address tmp tftp info 3 for the second network interface on the ShMM with the higher Hardware Address tmp tftp info 4 for the first RMCP accessible interface tmp tftp_info 5 for the second RMCP accessible interface The first four files above are stored on the corresponding ShMM only the last two are stored on both redundant ShMMs Each file consists of two lines The first line represents the TFTP server name and the second line represents the boot file name for example cat tmp tftp_info 2 TFTPSERVER 192 168 1 253 BOOTFILE tftpboot ssh_ script eth0O ShM2 The example configuration file below shows how to configure the Linux DHCP server DHCPD to provide IP addresses as well as TFTP server and boottfile information to the Shelf Manager Fixed predefined addresses are used for that purpose This file should be located as etc dhcpd conf on the system hosting the DHCP server Other DHCP servers such as those on non Linux operating systems are configured diffe
352. ng are shown in the table below Table 15 OS Level Bus Number Mapping for ShMM 700 LOGICAL BUS NUMBER PHYSICAL BUS NUMBER DEV I2c lt N gt ACCORDING TO THE SHMM 700R HARDWARE SPECIFICATION WIP gt olaj ol C O gt o Release 3 5 1 145 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide 4 Using the Shelf Manager This section introduces the overall operation of the Shelf Manager including operation in a redundant active standby pair 4 1 In This Section This section contains the topics listed below Just click on a topic to go to it ShMM Login Starting the Shelf Manager Redundant Operation Operation in Shelves with Radial IPMB 0 Automatic SEL Truncation Cooling State Sensors Deadlock Detection 12C Bus Fault Isolation Assignment of LAN Configuration Parameters to Boards and Modules HPI System Event Sensor ShMM Tests Available via the Diagnostic Infrastructure 4 2 ShMM Login Once the ShMM has been fully booted you are prompted to login You can log in as user root the default password as set in the PPS provided RFS images is the empty password We highly recommend that you change passwords during the configuration of the ShMM If the password is forgotten it can be reset as described in Section 6 4 The following is a typical log in session for ShMM 500 which would look similar on SaMM 1500 and ShMM 700 shmm500 login root Password ls bin d
353. nging the Default SAMM Network Parameters cccccccccccesssssecssssseesesneeees 95 3 4 7 Assigning VLAN IDS sareren ee Sioa attest penseettiesayyed ol Wiebe eae pees 104 3 4 8 Assigning IP Addresses to the Shelf Manager via DHCP cccccccccssesseeesesees 105 3 4 9 Using IPv6 for Shelf External Access to the Shelf Manager ShMM 700 only 109 3 5 CONFIGURING THE FRU INFORMATION 00 cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeesaaeeeeeeeseaeeeseaeeesaaeeeeneeseaees 112 3 5 1 Accessing the Shelf FRU Information csccccceccccsceceenceceeeeesseeseneeceeetecsnnsesaees 112 3 5 2 Setting up the Shelf FRU Information ccccccccsscccssceceeeeecsneeeeseceeeecseeeetsneeeaes 114 3 5 3 Setting up the Shelf FRU Information Using the CL1 cccccccccccssseeessssteseeneees 117 3 5 4 Other FRU Information Repositories 2 cccccccccsscecsceceeececeeeeeenseceeneetenetetsneneaes 118 3 6 CONFIGURING CARRIER AND SHELF ATTRIBUTES USING HPDL cceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 118 3 6 1 Compiling HPDL Definitions 000 1ccccceccccccce eens ceceneeeeeeceenceceeeesaeseenseceeeeersnneeeaees 119 3 6 2 Compiling SDRS iiss terse ids dente ein doi als de diel needs ds 119 3 6 3 Deploying HPDL Data to the SAMM File SYSteM ccccccscccsssceeseeceeeetsnnetenes 120 3 6 4 Deploying HPDL Data to FRU Information Areas 0 c ccccececeeeeeteeetnneeeeeeniees 120 3 7 CONFIGURING THE COOLING MANAGEMENT STRATEGY cccccceeseeteceeecececsessaeeeeeeseeenes 124 3
354. nity of the newly installed software calling rupgrade_tool S inthe middle of operation to strobe the upgrade WDT in case the validation takes longer than the upgrade WDT timeout period and finally start the Shelf Manager to perform final validation The watchdog timer interval is set to 12 8 seconds so the processing time in the etc re script between the call to rupgrade_tool c and strobing the WDT and between strobing the WDT and starting the Shelf Manager must not exceed 12 8 seconds each During initialization the Shelf Manager strobes the upgrade WDT once again before trying to establishing a network connection with the peer Shelf Manager Establishing a network connection may take up to 6 seconds After that and after successfully finishing the initialization which indicates validity of the new configuration the Shelf Manager makes a call to rupgrade_tool f which completes the upgrade procedure The user optionally calls rupgrade_tool w in order to find out the status of the upgrade session As explained above this option may be especially useful for a remote upgrade session where the progress of the upgrade cannot be observed directly from the messages printed to the serial console as is the case for a local upgrade Release 3 5 1 229 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide e After the completion of the reliable upgrade the user can revert to the original images if he she detects that the new images are not acc
355. ns or modifications to the set of replacement SDRs in a shelf should only be undertaken in close cooperation with the shelf supplier The following rules apply to SDRs that are used to configure local sensors referenced as replacement SDRs below e Every replacement SDR must be a Full Sensor Record type 01 Compact Sensor Records type 02 are not supported and are never used by the Shelf Manager for local sensors e The following fields are mandatory in every replacement SDR note that this list is smaller than the list of mandatory fields for normal SDRs processed by the SDR compiler e Sensor Owner ID e Sensor Number e Sensor Initialization e Ifa field from a replacement SDR is used as a result of the operation of other rules to replace an attribute for a target sensor and the field is not specified in the replacement SDR a value zero 0 is used for this field Release 3 5 1 128 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide e The tuple Sensor Owner ID Sensor Number identifies the sensor that is to be configured The Sensor Owner ID is a literal IPMB address so for sensors on the physical IPM controller two instances of the corresponding replacement SDR must be present one each for the IPMB addresses associated with each of the two redundant dedicated ShMC slots e The fields Entity ID and Entity Instance if specified in the replacement SDRs and different from 0 0 replace the corresponding attributes of the sens
356. ns that rely on the pre ECN 002 behavior No Release 3 5 1 52 August 17 2015 ENABLE INTEG RALHPI Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide Boolean DEFAULT FALSE DESCRIPTION This variable determines whether the Shelf Manager exposes the Hardware Platform Interface HPI defined by the Service Availability Forum www saforum org Setting this variable to TRUE enables the separately licensed IntegralHPI implementation within the Shelf Manager and makes the Shelf Manager accessible via HPI CAN BE OBTAINED FROM SHELF FRU INFO No ENABLE LOCKS _ LOGGING Boolean TRUE If this variable is TRUE default value the Shelf Manager records all requests to acquire and release locks mutexes in an internal memory area This information can be subsequently recovered and analyzed by the analysis tool dumplog in case of a deadlock or another synchronization violation Setting this variable to FALSE makes post mortem lock analysis impossible but substantially improves the performance of the Shelf Manager See section 4 8 for further background No ENABLE RTC T RICKLE CHARG ER Boolean FALSE If this variable is TRUE the trickle charge feature of the RTC DS1339 device on the ShMM is enabled This setting is required for ShMM carriers that connect a super cap to the RTC backup power supply input VBAT or VBACKUP_RTC No EXIT IF HEAL THY LOST _IN_ STANDALONE M ODE
357. nstance 1 mounted as etc if image set 1 is active O var User har directory instance 0 mounted as var if image set 0 is active Release 3 5 1 242 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide FILE NAME FLASH PARTITION DESCRIPTION var User ar directory instance 1 mounted as var if image set 1 is active 0 sentry shmm700 app User Application package image 0 Starting with release 3 5 0 this file if image set 0 is active is a symbolic link to the app 0 file in the Boot partition 1 sentry shmm700 app User Application package image 1 Starting with release 3 5 0 this file if image set 1 is active is a symbolic link to the app 1 file in the Boot partition 8 4 Changing the User Flash Partition Format to JFFS2 Starting with release 3 5 0 it is possible to change the format of the user partition from UBIFS to JFFS2 and back This enhancement was added due to a report of very rare cases of the UBIFS partition becoming unrecoverable after a power cycle during a write operation on Flash There is no known solution to this reported problem in the UBIFS driver so the ability to switch to a more reliable filesystem for the user partition has been added The risk of a boot partition corruption is much lower since it is mounted in read only mode except for a short upgrade time that takes about a minute Corruption of UBIFS formatted user partition has the following impli
358. ny erry rer 237 6 761618 I2C 1 0x76 IPMI ATC Req Get Device ID seq 0x3e 238 6 762032 I2C 2 0x76 IPMI ATC Req Get Device ID seq 0x3e 239 6 762581 I2C 2 0x77 IPMI ATC Req Get Device ID seq 0x3f 240 6 762993 I2C 1 0x77 IPMI ATC Req Get Device ID seq 0x3f 241 6 763541 I2C 1 0x78 IPMI ATC Req Get Device ID seq 0x00 242 6 763952 I2C 2 0x78 IPMI ATC Req Get Device ID seq 0x00 243 6 764502 I2C 2 0x79 IPMI ATC Req Get Device ID seq 0x01 244 6 764913 I2C 1 0x79 IPMI ATC Req Get Device ID seq 0x01 245 6 765460 I2C 1 0x7a IPMI ATC Req Get Device ID seq 0x02 246 6 765873 I2C 2 0x7a IPMI ATC Req Get Device ID seq 0x02 247 6 766420 I2C 2 0x7b IPMI ATC Req Get Device ID seq 0x03 248 6 766834 I2C 1 0x7b IPMI ATC Req Get Device ID seq 0x03 249 6 767380 I2C 1 Ox7c IPMI ATC Req Get Device ID seq 0x04 250 6 767725 I2C 2 Ox7c IPMI ATC Req Get Device ID seq 0x04 251 6 768293 12C 2 Ox7d IPMI ATC Req Get Device ID seq 0x05 252 6 768703 I2C 1 0x7d IPMI ATC Req Get Device ID seq 0x05 253 6 769264 I2C 1 0x7e IPMI ATC Req Get Device ID seq 0x06 254 6 769684 I2C 2 0x7e IPMI ATC Req Get Device ID seq 0x06 255 6 770229 I2C 2 0x7f IPMI ATC Req Get Device ID seq 0x07 sss b Frame 244 7 bytes on wire A bytes captured gt Inter Integrated Circuit Data b Intelligent Platform Management Interface 0000 f2 18 f6 20 04 01 dba TCP 192 168 1 65 lt live capture in pro Packets 298 Displayed 298 Ma Profile Default 4 After
359. o M1 state 150 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide lt I gt 14 35 22 856 199 Controller 20 FRU 1 ATCA state set to M1 prev M0 cause 0 locked 0 lt I gt 14 35 22 859 199 Registering shelf FRU notification 0x4eb18c lt I gt 14 35 22 861 199 Registering shelf FRU notification Ox2ab44fdc lt I gt 14 35 22 863 199 Shelfman Running lt I gt 14 35 22 865 226 Shelf FRU registering for SDR Repository notifications lt I gt 1433572278713 226 Added 20 1 to the fru list treated as Shelf FRU Info storage size 2048 data size 529 lt I gt 14735 2244 875 226 1 Equal Shelf FRUs have been detected lt I gt 14 35 22 877 226 Calling shelf FRU notifications count 1 op 1 lt I gt 14 35 22 879 226 Calling shelf FRU notification Ox2abd05f8 lt I gt 14 35 22 881 226 Calling shelf FRU notification 0x4eb18c lt I gt 14735 22 883 226 Lan apply cfg parameters HW addr OxFC cross 0 use second 0 adapter eth0 adapter2 lt I gt 14 35 22 886 226 Lan apply cfg parameters IP C601A8C0 GW FDO1A8CO MASK OOFFFFFF lt W gt 14 35 22 888 226 Shelf FRU Info found failed to get IP Connection record from Shelf FRU err 61 lt I gt 14 35 22 891 226 LAN channel 1 address 192 168 1 198 623 lt I gt 14 35 22 893 226 LAN setting RMCP IP address to 192 168 1 198 lt I gt 14 35 22 914 212 Controller 20 FRU 0 ATCA state set to M2 prev M1 cause 2 locked 0 lt I gt 14 35 22
360. oach and assigns them to the target boards modules with a series of Set LAN Configuration Parameters IPMI commands See the HPM 3 specification for more information 4 10 1 Structure and Composition of the Supported Parameters The parameters are specified on a per slot basis Slots are defined for both main boards and modules For main boards the slot number is the board physical slot number site number For AMC modules the slot number is the combination of the AMC carrier physical slot number and AMC site number For each slot several parameter sets may be defined Each parameter set contains parameters currently the IP address subnet mask and default gateway address for one LAN channel Parameter sets for a specific slot are ordered they are assigned to a board module in the order in which the Shelf Manager polls LAN channels of a board module see the definition of the configuration variable BOARD LAN PARAMETERS CHANNEL LIST In general parameters sets are retrieved by the Shelf Manager dynamically on demand During initialization after the Shelf FRU Information is found and the shelf Address Table is known the Shelf Manager retrieves parameter sets for all currently active boards and modules in states M3 and M4 and performs the assignment After initialization when a new board or a module is Release 3 5 1 178 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide installed in the shelf and reaches state M3 the Shelf Mana
361. oadaddr uImage image sel ubifsload S rfsaddr rfs image_ sel load_ubifs alt ubifsload loadaddr uImage S alt_ image ubifsload S rfsaddr rfs alt_image ubifs run bootargs initrd run load ubifs bootm loadaddr rfsaddr echo ERROR booting active image failed trying alternate image run load_ubifs alt bootm loadaddr rfsaddr echo ERROR bad image s aborting nfs tftp loadaddr bootfile run bootargs nfs bootm loadaddr net run bootargs initrd tftp loadaddr bootfile tftp rfsaddr S ramdisk bootm loadaddr S rfsaddr Several of these environment variables need to be reconfigured with values that are appropriate to the network context in which the ShMM is used 3 2 4 Establishing the Secondary RC Script The secondary RC script gets invoked when the system configuration is established during the boot process It is called from the primary RC script etc xrc The secondary script is a carrier specific startup script and is etc rce carrier3 by default on SnMM 500 1500 and etc re shmm700 hpd1 on ShMM 700 or some other script that is appropriate for that platform A typical name for this scriptis etc re lt target_platform gt The name of this carrier specific startup script is defined by the U Boot environment variable re2 The variable re2 is the one environment variable that must definitely be changed for a ShMM and its carrier to work properly in a shelf The RC2 sc
362. ocation of the Carrier FRU Information Section 3 14 2 adds a note about the special version of the HPI client library Section 4 3 adds a description of the option i for Shelf Manager command line invocations adds a note about Shelf Manager configurations with encryption code present or removed e New section 4 10 describes how to use a new facility in which the Shelf Manager stores and assigns LAN configuration parameters to boards or modules in a shelf that implement LAN channels in the local management controller e Section 7 6 adds a note about reliable upgrade from an encryption present RFS to an encryption absent RFS C 14 Release 2 6 4 2 e Section 3 4 7 adds a description of the DHCP client restart and status commands describes provisions for storing in a flash file a TFTP server name and bootfile name received from the DHCP server C 15 Release 2 6 4 4 e Section 3 3 adds coverage of a new configuration parameter SWITCHOVER_ON BROKEN LINK _BACKUP_DELAY e Section 3 4 2 1 provides user guidance for a special situation when a hub board is inserted into a shelf with cross connect Shelf Manager links where no hub boards were present before C 16 Release 2 7 0 e Section 3 3 adds new configuration parameters BOARD LAN PARAMETERS CHANNEL SYNCHRONOUS BOARD LAN PARAMETERS USE_DHCP COOLING KEEP POWERED OFF_FRUS_IN M1 The increased length of the configuration parameter string BOARD LAN PARAMETERS CHANNEL LIST is note
363. ode UBI physical eraseblock size 65536 bytes 64 KiB UBI logical eraseblock size 65408 bytes UBI smallest flash I O unit 1 UBI VID header offset 64 aligned 64 UBI data offset 128 Release 3 5 1 258 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide UBI attached mtdl to ubi0 UBI MTD device name mtd 5 UBI MTD device size 30 MiB UBI number of good PEBs 484 UBI number of bad PEBs 0 UBI max allowed volumes 128 UBI wear leveling threshold 4096 UBI number of internal volumes 1 UBI number of user volumes 1 UBI available PEBs 0 UBI total number of reserved PEBs 484 UBI number of PEBs reserved for bad PEB handling 0 UBI max mean erase counter 11 9 UBIFS read only UBI device UBIFS mounted UBI device 0 volume 0 name boot UBIFS mounted read only UBIFS file system size 30807168 bytes 30085 KiB 29 MiB 471 LEBs UBIFS journal size 1569792 bytes 1533 KiB 1 MiB 24 LEBs UBIFS media format w4 r0 latest is w4 r0 UBIFS default compressor LZO UBIFS reserved for root 1522516 bytes 1486 KiB Loading file uImage 0 to addr 0x42000000 with size 1604076 0x001879ec Done Loading file rfs 0 to addr 0x46000000 with size 2283039 Ox0022d61f Done Booting kernel from Legacy Image at 42000000 Image Name Linux 2 6 34 8 shmm700 Created 2012 03 26 17 40 37 UTC Image Type ARM Linux Kernel Image uncompressed
364. of LAN Configuration Parameters to Boards In the case of obtaining parameters from a DHCP server if the configuration variable BOARD _LAN PARAMETERS USE DHCP is TRUE activation of LAN enabled boards and modules transitioning from M3 to M4 is not affected by the process of retrieving LAN configuration parameters for them a board may reach M4 before its parameters are retrieved and assigned However it is possible to instruct the Shelf Manager to assign LAN configuration parameters to designated boards modules in a synchronous way before allowing them transition to M4 This is done by delaying power assignment to these FRUs until LAN configuration parameters are retrieved and assigned to them This feature is controlled by a Shelf Manager configuration variable BOARD LAN PARAMETERS SYNCHRONOUS that contains the list of all FRUs that are to be treated this way Using synchronous assignment of LAN configuration parameters can indefinitely hold a target FRU in state M3 so it should be used with caution The string value of the configuration parameter BOARD LAN PARAMETERS SYNCHRONOUS represents the list of descriptors for FRUs that require synchronous assignment of LAN configuration parameters This list is meaningful only if the configuration parameter BOARD LAN PARAMETERS USE_DHCP is set to TRUE The following grammar applies to this value lt descriptor list gt lt descriptor gt lt descriptor list gt lt descriptor gt lt descr
365. of a single LAN channel this byte is 0 Parameters for different slots are retrieved in parallel The same sequence of retransmission timeouts 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 64 seconds applies if the DHCP server does not respond as in the case of retrieval of the Shelf Manager parameters The lease time is infinite The Shelf Manager maintains internally a record of assigned parameter sets After a specific parameter set is no longer needed e g when the board or the corresponding module is extracted the Shelf Manager removes the corresponding parameter set from its records and sends a DHCP Release request for the corresponding Client ID to the DHCP server This is done to prevent exhaustion of the pool of IP addresses available to the DHCP server for allocation in configurations where this pool is relatively small 2 Read from a Flash File on the ShMM After the Shelf Manager starts up it retrieves the LAN configuration parameters from a file on the ShMM var nvdata lan_config_ params This is the simplest approach to retrieve the parameters The file has a text format Each line defines one parameter set and has the following format lt physical slot gt lt amc slot gt lt ip address gt lt subnet mask gt lt default gateway ip address gt Release 3 5 1 179 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide Comment lines starting with are allowed and ignored Also the rest of the line after a character
366. of that directory across reliable firmware upgrades see 7 6 for details Also note that the var bin directory is erased when the U Boot variable flash_reset is set to y see 6 3 for details 3 12 2 External Event Handler Operation The external event handler can be a user provided binary executable program or a shell script The handler is invoked by the Shelf Manager when an event matching a relevant PEF filter occurs During that invocation a pipe is created between the Shelf Manager and the external event handler This pipe serves as standard input for the external event handler For each event the Shelf Manager submits a single line of text into the pipe in the following format raw raw data alert string alert string data The raw data are the 16 bytes of the SEL record with the characters representing each byte separated by a colon from the next byte For example raw 36 3 2 27 d 49 0 20 0 4 f1 18 6f a1 0 78 alert string test Release 3 5 1 137 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide The external event handler should read its standard input line by line and process each line as a separate event There are possible two approaches to event processing in the external event handler e Read the standard input line by line and process incoming data In that case one instance of the external event handler is spawned in the beginning and handles all subsequent events e Read one line from the standard inp
367. on e Monitors activities within the shelf via the ATCA specified dual redundant Intelligent Platform Management Bus IPMB e Accepts and logs events posted by any intelligent FRU in the shelf reflecting exceptions in temperatures voltages etc posts alerts outside the shelf based on configurable IPMI Platform Event Filters e Supports hot swapping of Field Replaceable Units FRUs while maintaining full management visibility Release 3 5 1 15 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide e Interfaces to standard Telco Alarm infrastructures via ShMM carrier implemented dry contact relays e Supports redundant Shelf Manager instances for high availability e Integrates a watchdog timer which resets the ShMM if not periodically strobed such resets automatically trigger a switchover to the backup ShMM if configured e Includes battery backed real time clock for time stamping events e Implements rich set of shelf external interfaces accessible over Ethernet including Remote Management Control Protocol RMCP required by AdvancedTCA command line web browser Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP e Includes a Shelf Adaptation Layer based on the Pigeon Point Hardware Platform Description Language HPDL that makes it straightforward to adapt the Shelf Manager for operation across a wide range of ATCA shelf architectures e Optionally supports an additional built in shelf external interface that complies with th
368. on 2 5 1 of HPM 3 DHCP Assigned Platform Management Parameters Specification DHCP Unique Identifier See DUID 39 Binary Table 11 HPM 3 DHCP Unique Identifier Format The DHCP Unique Identifier DUID has the following format Table 11 HPM 3 DHCP Unique Identifier Format FIELD LENGTH FORMAT CONTENT DUID format 2 Binary DUID EN identifier 2 DUID header part1 4 Binary a IANA ID 12634 Release 3 5 1 105 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide DUID header part2 5 ASCII oe DUID header part 3 2 ASCII cae Os Shelf Address Type Length Byte field from the Shelf FRU a a ag 1 Binary Information AdvancedTCA PRENS Address Table or MicroTCA Shelf Information record Shelf Address field from the Shelf FRU Information Shelf address 20 Binary AdvancedTCA Address Table or MicroTCA Shelf Information record 0 for AdvancedTCA shelves 1 SHEP Binary for MicroTCA shelves See Table 12 Slot Location Slat ieaton i Binary record for AdvancedTCA Table 12 Slot Location record for AdvancedTCA OFFSET LENGTH DEFINITION 0 4 Primary Site Type The Site Type of the Slot for a Front Board or other Intelligent FRU that attaches directly to IPMB 0 4 1 Primary Site Number The Site Number of the Slot for a Front Board or other Intelligent FRU that attaches directly to IPMB 0 Secondary Site Type Applicable when the Slot is a subsidiary s
369. on Point Shelf Manager User Guide option routers 192 168 1 253 option subnet mask 255 255 255 0 host board2 fru0_ch4 option dhcp client identifier 58 58 58 31 0 4 fixed address 192 168 1 203 option routers 192 168 1 253 option subnet mask 255 255 255 0 4 10 3 Dispatching LAN Configuration Parameters to Boards For each board or module the Shelf Manager detects whether it supports LAN channels and expects the configuration parameters for them to be assigned by the Shelf Manager If this is the case for a particular board or module the Shelf Manager sends it the configuration parameters from the next parameter set for the corresponding physical slot Shelf Manager does this for all boards or modules in states M3 M65 during startup after the Shelf FRU Information is found After the initialization Shelf Manager performs this procedure during board or module activation when the board or module reaches state M3 The Shelf Manager maintains internal records to avoid sending configuration parameters to the same board or module twice To detect what LAN channels a specific board or module has the Shelf Manager sends it the command Get Channel Info with a channel number picked sequentially from the BOARD LAN PARAMETERS CHANNEL LIST Ifa board or module responds with the Channel Medium Type 802 3 LAN for some channel the Shelf Manager sends the command Get LAN Configuration Parameters IP Address Source for t
370. on asserted EventData 00 FF FF PET FORMAT 2 Received 296 bytes from 192 168 0 2 192 168 0 2 Enterprise Specific Trap 2453248 Uptime 489 days Lis 3hel7 215 PPS PET MIB ipmi trap record id INTEGER 4 PPS PET MIB ipmi trap record type INTEGER platformE 2 PE ET MIB ipmi trap timestamp INTEGER 1198084292 PE MIB ipmi trap generator address INTEGER bmc 32 PE MIB ipmi trap generator lun INTEGER lun0O 0 PE ET MIB ipmi trap generator channel INTEGER ipmb 0 PPS PET MIB ipmi trap sensor type INTEGER entityPresence 37 PPS PET MIB ipmi trap sensor number INTEGER 193 PPS PET MIB ipmi trap event type INTEGER sensorSpecific 111 PPS PET MIB ipmi trap event direction INTEGER asserted 0 PPS PET MIB ipmi trap event data Hex STRING 00 FF FF L PPS PET MIB ipmi trap entire record Hex STRING 04 00 02 C4 50 69 47 20 00 04 25 C1 6F 00 FF FF 3 13 1 Parsed Example of SNMP Trap The following is a parsed version of sample SNMP Trap in the default IPMI PET v1 0 format The original event which is reported by this trap follows Event at Tue Aug 5 16 29 21 2008 from 0x20 0 0 sensor 0x12 0x85 event 0x6f asserted 0xC0 0x00 0x00 This trap describes a system reconfigure event which is generated during Shelf Manager startup and switchover
371. on result 0 etc rc Placed var tmp to ram disk etc rce Setting hostname shmm700 etc re Started syslogd and klogd etc re Strobing the reliable upgrade WDT etc rce Mounted 0 etc to etc etc re Calling etc rce shmm700 hpdl etc readhwaddr Board Hardware Address 0x12 etc netconfig etc hosts has valid shmm700 192 168 0 23 entry etc netconfig Updating etc profile sentry with IP settings etc netconfig Starting bin inetd etc netconfig Starting time synchronization script etc rce shmm700 hpdl Updating etc profile sentry with specific settings etc rce shmm700 hpdl Starting snmpd etc rce shmm700 hpdl Starting httpd etc rce shmm700 hpdl Starting Shelf Manager for carrier type PPS700 etc rc shmm700 hpdl Command line shelfman sf etc rce shmm700 hpdl Strobing the reliable upgrade WDT lt gt 11 08 11 872 122 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager ver 3 5 1 Built on July 17 2015 22 20 24 lt gt 1T1s08211 913 122 Lock log print buffer at Oxla2d74 lt gt 11 08 11 915 122 Pthread lock log print buffer at 0xla7594 xK K K lt I gt 11208711 963 122 Reading configuration file etc shelfman conf Finally the user checks the status of the reliable upgrade by calling rupgrade s Release 3 5 1 270 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide rupgrade s lt INFO gt frontend c 37 Last upgrade log
372. on the newly active Shelf Manager correspond to the same hub boards as before the switchover 3 4 2 4 Bonded Usage of the Two Network Interfaces The two physical network interfaces ethO and eth1 can be used in a bonded fashion using the kernel bonding driver that joins several physical devices into one logical device and selects an active device for data transfers In this mode both physical network interfaces that can be used for outside connections are enslaved by the bonding driver at system startup and the Shelf Manager uses the single bonding interface for RMCP based communication This mode is useful when both devices are connected to the same network switch hub and it does not matter which device is used at any given moment as long as the Shelf Manager remains available via the network The bonding driver in the kernel is configured to use an active backup policy which means that only one slave device in the bond is active A different slave device becomes active only if the active slave device fails The bond s MAC address is externally visible on only one network adapter port to avoid problems with switch hub hardware Link status of the slave devices in the bond is polled every 100 milliseconds which is the recommended value Also in the case of an active device switch the bonding driver sends out a gratuitous ARP packet to notify switch hardware about the port change since bonding slave devices share the same MAC address taken from
373. onfiguration parameter name SHELF MANAGER CONFIGURATION _IN SHELF FRU_INFO C 23 Release 2 8 2 Section 3 3 adds a new configuration parameter DHCP_ SPECIAL CLIENT ID FORMAT C 24 Release 3 0 0 Section 2 adds a description of the ShMM 700 Section 2 2 updates Figure 1 Section 2 4 1 adds HPDL coverage Section 2 4 2 updates Figure 2 Section 2 4 4 adds text and a new column for the ShMM 700 in Table 3 Section 3 adds ShMM 700 coverage Section 3 3 clarifies the description of the configuration parameter ATCA _TESTER_COMPATIBILITY Section 3 3 describes new configuration variables AXIE_TIMING ASYMMETRIC MATCH ENABLE LOCKS LOGGING ENABLE RTC TRICKLE CHARGER ISOLATE MUX BUS Section 3 3 describes new IntegralHPl related configuration variables INTEGRALHPI SHELF ENTITY LOCATION INTEGRALHPI _DEFAULT_AUTO INSERT_TIMEOUT INTEGRALHPI_DEFAULT_AUTO INSERT_TIMEOUT_ MSEC INTEGRALHPI_DEFAULT_AUTO EXTRACT TIMEOUT and INTEGRALHPI_ DEFAULT AUTO EXTRACT TIMEOUT MSEC Section 3 4 6 describes the new utility hwri that replaces cp1ld utility on the ShMM 700 Section 3 5 2 adds SAMM 700 coverage Section 3 10 1 clarifies the behavior of the system clock before the time is successfully obtained from the time server Section 4 3 corrects the example of the Shelf Manager startup log Section 4 4 adds ShMM 700 coverage Section 4 8 adds ShMM 700 coverage Section 4 9 adds ShMM 700 coverage Section 4 9 adds covera
374. or e The Sensor Initialization field identifies the specific attributes to be redefined and indicates what fields in the rest of the replacement SDR are applicable It is specified as a list of symbolic constants the following constants are defined e THRESHOLDS indicates that the sensor thresholds are to be replaced with the corresponding threshold values specified in the replacement SDR e HYSTERESIS indicates that the sensor hysteresis values are to be replaced with the corresponding hysteresis values specified in the replacement SDR e SENSOR_TYPE indicates that the sensor type is to be replaced with the corresponding fields Sensor Type and Event Reading Type from the replacement SDR e EVENTS indicates that the event masks are to be replaced with the corresponding fields from the replacement SDR e The field Sensor Capabilities cannot be replaced e If and only if the symbolic constant SENSOR_TYPE has been specified in the Sensor Initialization field the fields Sensor Type and Event Reading Type from the replacement SDR replace the corresponding attribute of the sensor even if the values of these fields are 0 e f and only if the symbolic constant EVENTS has been specified in the Sensor Initialization field the following fields from the replacement SDR replace the corresponding attributes of the target sensor e For Threshold Based sensors e Lower Threshold Reading Mask Upper Threshold Reading Mask Threshold Assertion Event Mask
375. otal size 64 MB A2F SPICOMM protocol v1 6 M3 firmware v0 9 FPGA design v0 44 0 0 A2F A2F firmware version 0 9 A2F Last reset cause HARD A2F Device type A2FO60M3E FG256 A2F MSS clock frequency 40 MHz A2F Fabric clock frequency 20 MHz A2F Fast delay calibration 1330 cycles per 100uS A2F eNVM 128 KB 00000000 00020000 A2F eSRAM 16 KB 20000000 20004000 A2F Extram start 200022D0 RUPG booting from image 1 candidate Here U Boot reports that a reliable upgrade is in progress and the candidate image set is being used The candidate image set index is 1 and the confirmed image set is 0 dns serial Out serial Err serial Net FECO 00 18 49 01 8f 26 FEC1 00 18 49 01 8f 27 FECO FEC1 Hit any key to stop autoboot 2 Power is turned off here After some time power is turned back on The candidate Flash state has been lost because of the power loss so the ShMM reverts back to the confirmed Flash Release 3 5 1 267 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide PowerPrep start initialize power Battery Voltage 1 32V No battery or bad battery detected Disabling battery voltage measurements Mar 21 201223 23 40 FRAC 0x92926152 memory type is DDR2 Wait for ddr ready 1 power 0x00820616 Frac 0x92926152 start change cpu freq hbus 0x00000003 cpu 0x00010001 start test memory access ddr2 0x40000000 finish simple test U Boot 2009 08 Mar
376. otfile Parameter that specifies what kernel image should be used by the net and nfs boot options console Setting for the kernel and init script console port and baud rate On ShMM 500 and ShMM 1500 the default is ttySO 115200 On ShMM 700 the default is ttySPO 115200n8 corrupted ima ges This U Boot managed counter records the number of times that a corrupted boot image is discovered When U Boot fails to boot the kernel or the configured RFS image due to corruption of the boot image in Flash U Boot executes a recovery procedure that essentially designates the previously provisional candidate Flash device as the current persistent confirmed Flash device increments this variable and proceeds with the boot process The recovery procedure is not performed if the reliable upgrade WDT is active or if the corrupted boot image is not located in Flash Support temporarily limited to SaAMM 500 1500 ethact ShMM 700 only Parameter that specifies which Ethernet controller should be used by U Boot when handling bootp dhcp nfs ping rarpboot tf tpboot commands Supported values are FECO FEC1 FECO selects eth0 interface FEC1 selects eth1 interface Default value is FECO ethaddr MAC address of the primary on chip Ethernet controller The value of this variable is set automatically by U Boot This address is passed to the kernel Ethernet driver ethladdr MAC address of the secondary Ethernet controller The value
377. oth redundant Shelf Managers are release 2 8 0 or higher of the Shelf Manager 3 4 5 Using the ShMM 1500 Alternate Software Redundancy Interface For ShMM 1500s that are configured for SAMC Cross connect operation software redundancy communication takes place over an FPGA implemented serial interface with SLIP Serial Line IP support configured on it thereby enabling TCP IP to be used by the Shelf Manager for this link just as it is on the SAMM 500 The corresponding Linux serial interface is named sl0 To use this interface it is necessary to define the redundancy network adapter in the Shelf Manager configuration file etc shelfman conf as follows REDUNDANCY NET ADAPTER s10 In all other aspects configuration of the serial interface sl0 for redundant communication is the same as in the case of the second Ethernet adapter see 3 4 2 In particular both the active and backup ShMM specify the same IP address for the redundancy interface but software assigns the next logical IP address to the ShMM with an odd hardware address Compression of data transferred over the Software Redundancy Interface applies also to ShMM 1500 Compression may be even more beneficial for performance on ShMM 1500 since the SLIP interface is somewhat slower than the USB based SRI used on the ShMM 500 However as with the ShMM 500 compression is turned off by default 3 4 6 Changing the Default SoMM Network Parameters Configuring a SAMM to work i
378. over command on the ShMM 700 The ShMM 700 should immediately become active and the ShMM 500R will automatically reboot The ShMM 500 will keep rebooting without becoming a backup Shelf Manager and can be removed at any time 6 Remove the second ShMM 500 carrier 7 After removing the ShMM 500 carrier insert a second SAMM 700 carrier into its slot It should come up as a backup Shelf Manager The switchover procedure is now complete eN NOTE As implied above a switchover from a ShMM 700 back to a ShMM 500 is NOT supported Once a ShMM 700 becomes active the only supported action is to remove the second ShMM 500 carrier Also a ShMM 500 carrier should never be inserted into a shelf with a running ShMM 700 Release 3 5 1 274 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide WARNING The above ShMM 500 to ShMM 700 switchover procedure cannot be used with a ShMM 700 module that is mounted on a ShAMM 500 carrier via the Pigeon Point Systems ShMM 700R SO DIMM adapter board SHMM 700R SA That adapter board which is not intended for production use is not designed to support testing of this switchover scenario Release 3 5 1 275 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide Appendix B Customer Support If you are having problems with the Pigeon Point Shelf Manager or ShMM product please contact your supplier for the Pigeon Point products with questions and problem reports If you have any questions about direct purchas
379. overable Threshold 0x50 Full Sensor Record Owner Id 0x12 Sensor Number 2 Sensor Initialization THRESHOLDS Lower Non Critical Threshold 0Oxb0 Lower Critical Threshold 0xc0 Lower Non Recoverable Threshold 0xd0 Upper Non Critical Threshold 0x40 Upper Critical Threshold 0x48 Upper Non Recoverable Threshold 0x50 Full Sensor Record Owner Id 0x12 Sensor Number 3 Sensor Initialization THRESHOLDS Lower Non Critical Threshold 0xb0 Lower Critical Threshold 0xc0 Lower Non Recoverable Threshold 0xd0 Upper Non Critical Threshold 0x40 Upper Critical Threshold 0x48 Upper Non Recoverable Threshold 0x50 3 9 Setting the Auxiliary Firmware Revision The Auxiliary Firmware Revision can be set when the Shelf Manager is started The Auxiliary Firmware Revision is reported by the Get Device ID command targeted to a physical ShMC at the hardware specified IPMB 0 address versus the logical Shelf Manager at IPMB 0 address 0x20 and is stored in a single Flash file var nvdata aux fw revision If the file var nvdata aux fw revision is absent the Auxiliary Firmware Revision is not defined According to IPMI v2 0 R1 0 Section 20 1 Get Device ID Command the Auxiliary Firmware Revision is a 4 byte data item The file var nvdata aux fw revision should contain the eight hexadecimal digits that represent the 4 bytes in question No separators are allowed The first two
380. p lt port gt In controlled trace mode specify the TCP port port lt port gt number to listen to the client application connects to this port Default port 19000 q lt size gt In unattended trace mode the maximum trace file quota lt size gt size in KB After this size is reached the existing file is closed and renamed with the extension old and a new trace file is created w Produce output in the Wireshark format otherwise wireshark ipmb_traced produces output in the Ethereal format On ShMM 700 only Wireshark output format is supported so this option is ignored on ShMM 700 b lt ip_address gt Specify board trace mode in which IPMI messaging board lt ip address gt is traced on another IPM controller that is connected to the network The trace daemon obtains the trace using an RMCP session via a HPM 2 IPMI Trace Payload with the target IPMC The parameter lt ip_address gt specifies the IP address of the target IPMC m lt mask gt In board trace mode specify the bit mask of IPMI mask lt mask gt channels that are to be traced on the target IPMC This bit mask is represented by the numeric parameter lt mask gt with prefix 0x used to specify a hexadecimal number The following channel numbers can be used Release 3 5 1 190 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide e Channel 0 bit mask 1 IPMB 0 e Channel 7 bit mask 0x80 IPMB L e Ch
381. p file is present and renames the A2F upgrade file on the boot partition to a2 auto rollback dat to complete the upgrade process Ifan a2 auto rollback dat file was already present it is renamed as a2 manual rollback dat before overwriting it with the current upgrade file This allows a manual rollback procedure to be initiated by invoking the rupgrade utility running in the upgrade a2f mode with the file a2 manual rollback dat as the parameter The UBIFS Boot volume may need to be explicitly mounted first If the upgrade process is interrupted or an error is detected the SnMM 700 will get reset with the Flash remapping logic turned off As a result it will boot from partition 0 and U Boot will detect that Flash remapping logic is turned off In this case it will try to revert to the previous image by repeating the above steps with the auto rollback image file name a2 auto rollback dat NOTE the A2F060 upgrade images provided by Pigeon Point Systems are encrypted with a private AES key This key is pre programmed in the A2F060 device on the ShMM 700R during manufacturing As a consequence A2F060 upgrade images that were not built by PPS cannot be installed onto the A2F060 device on the ShMM 70OR Attempting to do so will result in a failed upgrade 8 8 Reliable Upgrade Utility Use Scenarios It is intended that the reliable upgrade utility is used in the following sequence in order to carry out an upgrade of the ShMM
382. partition stays unmounted This ensures that applications cannot accidentally erase the critical boot up images and allows U Boot to cache the location of boot images for faster loading After all the specified images have been installed at their respective destinations the utility mounts the candidate etc and var directories and either erases all files in them or copies the current contents of these directories to the candidate locations This behavior is controlled by several command line parameters all of them mutually exclusive e copy config if specified the SSH keys etc ssh the Shelf Manager configuration files etc shelfman con and the subdirectory var nvdata are copied to the candidate directories etc and var from the current location any other files in the candidate etc and var directories are erased e copy etc if specified the entire etc directory and the subdirectory var nvdata are copied to the candidate directories etc and var from the current location any other files in the candidate var directory are erased e copy var if specified the SSH keys etc ssh and the entire var directory are copied to the candidate directories etc and var from the current location any other files in the candidate etc directory are erased e copy all if specified the entire etc directory and the entire var directory are copied to the candidate directories etc and var from the current location e erase all1
383. pgrade tool s k sentry kernel r sentry rfs u u boot bin hook etc_copy v rupgrade tool PLB is 5 rupgrade tool EEPROM page saved rupgrade tool persistent flash is 0 rupgrade tool provisional flash is 1 rupgrade tool copying image s The upgrade utility attempts to invoke a validation script to check the images in tmp currently supplied If any of the specified file designators is not found in tmp the utility stops and a message like the following is produced rupgrade tool cannot open tmp u boot bin for reading rupgrade tool failed to copy images to flash The utility proceeds to copy the images to the specified destinations in provisional Flash rupgrade tool invoking scripts step4v u u boot bin k sentry kernel r sentry rfs hook etc_copy rupgrade tool copying u boot bin from tmp to dev mtdchar8 using cp protocol Release 3 5 1 230 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide rupgrade tool copying sentry kernel from tmp to dev mtdchar7 using cp protocol rupgrade tool copying sentry rfs from tmp to dev mtdchar9 using cp protocol rupgrade tool invoking scripts step4h etc copy At this point the step4hshm hook script is invoked it stops the Shelf Manager and copies non volatile information to the provisional Flash etc upgrade step4hshm Stopping Shelf Manager etc upgrade step4hshm Erasing var and etc copying var nvdata etc upgrad
384. pply in the absence of the LAN configuration parameters on a ShMM on a fresh ShMM or after a Shelf Manager upgrade from a pre 2 6 version to the version 2 6 Once the LAN configuration parameters are defined and stored the Set LAN Configuration Parameters mechanism should be used to change the VLAN ID VLAN support is available on all ShMM variants Release 3 5 1 104 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide 3 4 8 Assigning IP Addresses to the Shelf Manager via DHCP DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol and DHCP servers can be used to assign IP addresses to the Shelf Manager The following types of IP addresses can be assigned via DHCP e RMCP accessible addresses for one or both network interfaces e Private Shelf Manager addresses for one or both network interfaces for both Shelf Managers A total of 6 IP addresses can be assigned via DHCP A specific IP address is designated by a particular value of the Client Identifier that is passed from the Shelf Manager to the DHCP server If the HPM 3 Client Identifier format is enabled which is the default the Client Identifier has the following standard format defined in the HPM 3 specification Table 10 HPM 3 DHCP Client ID FIELD LENGTH FORMAT CONTENT Header 1 Binary 61 3Dh Data Length 1 Binary 7 A a romaning Content Type 1 Binary 255 FFh IPMI LAN Channel Index with range 0 through Ah and all other values reserved see IAID 4 Binary secti
385. pported the Shelf Fan Geography Record from the Shelf FRU Information is used to define cooling zones e inthe normal cooling state that is when no thermal thresholds on any sensors are crossed the Shelf Manager attempts to minimize the fan level but at the same time prevent thermal alerts It does that by adaptively choosing the lowest possible fan level that allows the shelf to avoid thermal alerts for each fan taking cooling zones into account e Inthe minor alert cooling state non critical thermal thresholds are crossed for one or more sensors the Shelf Manager periodically increases the fan level for the fans that serve the cooling zone s where those thresholds have been crossed until the fan level reaches its maximum or the thermal condition goes away e Inthe major alert cooling state critical thermal thresholds are crossed for one or more sensors the Shelf Manager sets the fan level to the maximum for the fans that serve the cooling zone s where those thresholds have been crossed In addition if the thermal condition is caused by a specific FRU and the FRU supports power levels lower than the Release 3 5 1 124 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide current one the Shelf Manager reduces power consumption of the FRU by assigning it the next lower power level e In the critical alert cooling state non recoverable thermal thresholds are crossed for one or more sensors the Shelf Manager sets the fan level to m
386. r Guide The remaining aspects of radial IPMB 0 support in SnMM 700 based shelves are the same as in ShMM 1500 based shelves except for programming upgrading the routing element FPGA s which is described in the next section 4 5 3 1 Upgrading the Routing Element FPGA s The routing element FPGA s can be programmed upgraded using the ripmb_prog ulility which is included as part of the standard SAMM 700R RFS image In addition to programming the FPGA s this utility can be used to obtain the version of the currently installed image s IMPORTANT before running ripmb_ prog to program upgrade the routing element FPGA s terminate the Shelf Manager by issuing a clia terminate command Upon completion of the FPGA programming the Shelf Manager must be re initialized by issuing a reboot command Failing to do so may lead to FPGA access errors and unpredictable behavior If ripmb prog is invoked only to obtain the version of the currently installed image terminating the Shelf Manager is not necessary To program a new FPGA image to the routing element FPGA s issue the following command ripmb prog lt image name gt where lt image_name gt is the name of the upgrade image with a dat extension By default the ripmb_ prog utility tries to determine how many FPGA devices are connected to the JTAG chain and programs each of them with the upgrade image IMPORTANT all routing element FPGAs on the ShMM 700R carrier must be programmed with t
387. r with the odd hardware address becomes the backup In PICMG 2 x systems where the Shelf Manager geographic address is represented by the GEOGRAPHIC_POSITION bit the Shelf Manager with GEOGRAPHIC_POSITION 0 becomes the active Shelf Manager and the other Shelf Manager becomes the backup Release 3 5 1 157 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide After the connection is established the active Shelf Manager performs the initial synchronization with the backup Shelf Manager sending it all the appropriate redundant data During the initial synchronization the backup Shelf Manager verifies that the active Shelf Manager uses the same carrier specific module If the carrier specific modules are different further data propagation and collaboration between the active and the backup Shelf Managers is not possible Therefore in that case the backup Shelf Manager does not proceed with initialization but reboots and reestablishes the connection in a loop expecting the active Shelf Manager with the correct carrier specific module to appear The only exception to this is that in order to facilitate upgrades from non HPDL to HPDL based configurations the HPDL based backup Shelf Manager can coexist with a non HPDL active Shelf Manager but only when a reliable upgrade operation is in progress 4 4 2 Redundancy and CPLD State Sensor Both active and standby Shelf Managers expose a sensor that indicates the high level redundancy state of the S
388. r9 using cp protocol rupgrade tool invoking scripts step4h etc copy etc upgrade step4hshm Stopping Shelf Manager Done etc upgrade step4hshm Cleaning new var partition Done etc upgrade step4hshm Cleaning new etc partition Done etc upgrade step4hshm Copying etc contents Done etc upgrade step4hshm Copying var nvdata contents Done etc upgrade step4hshm Upgrade complete rupgrade tool image s copy OK rupgrade tool watchdog started rupgrade tool selected provisional flash rupgrade tool reboot Restarting system Release 3 5 1 234 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide The step4hshm hook script is invoked which stops the Shelf Manager and preserves the non volatile data The utility then starts the upgrade WDT and reboots rupgrade tool invoking scripts step4h etc copy etc upgrade step4hshm Stopping Shelf Manager Done etc upgrade step4hshm Cleaning new var partition Done etc upgrade step4hshm Cleaning new etc partition Done etc upgrade step4hshm Copying etc contents Done etc upgrade step4hshm Copying var nvdata contents Done etc upgrade step4hshm Upgrade complete rupgrade tool image s copy OK rupgrade tool watchdog started rupgrade tool selected provisional flash rupgrade tool reboot Restarting system At this point the telnet session is closed after a certain inactivity period after several seconds
389. rade utility uses these hardware mechanisms and also implements software mechanisms for carrying out reliable upgrades properly For the benefit of the user the progress of the current reliable upgrade session and its final outcome success or failure is logged in a special file var upgrade status located on the User UBIFS partition The reliable upgrade procedure implemented on ShMM 700 was designed primarily to handle reliable upgrades of the Pigeon Point Shelf Manager firmware In addition however the procedure can be applied to arbitrary embedded applications running on the ShMM To achieve that the procedure supports hook scripts that can be invoked at certain stages of the reliable upgrade procedure and can be used for customization of the procedure This support for hook scripts is briefly discussed in section 8 6 however the rest of this Section 8 mainly concentrates on reliable upgrades in the context of Shelf Manager firmware where hook scripts are not used Also a special procedure is defined for the reliable upgrade of A2F060 firmware The Microsemi A2F060 is a hardware component of the ShMM 700 that includes an FPGA fabric and an ARM Cortex M3 subsystem combined on a single chip Correspondingly the firmware for A2F060 consists of an FPGA fabric image and the program code for the Cortex M3 processor combined in a single composite image Update of the A2F060 firmware requires special precautions and is Release 3 5 1 240 A
390. relevant target platform This variable must be set to a carrier specific value matching the carrier on which the ShMM is installed rfs_ start The absolute starting address of the root filesystem image in Flash This variable is set automatically by U Boot during bootstrap Note on ShMM 700 this variable contains the absolute starting address of the RFS image in RAM This variable is used in the ubifs net load_ubifs and load_ubifs_alt commands to specify the address in physical memory where the RFS image should be loaded and where it is expected to be during ShMM boot The default value is 0x46000000 rmcpaddr Default IP address for the RMCP service serverip IP address of the TFTP server set_mtdparts ShMM 700 only U Boot command that is invoked to set up the MTD configuration in U Boot to perform boot volume access The command is invoked by mount _ubifs during bootstrap start_rc2_ dae mons Instructs the secondary startup script to start or not start the snmpd boa and shel fman daemons after bootup Default is y Release 3 5 1 30 August 17 2015 ENVIRONMENT VARIABLE time _proto Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide DESCRIPTION Protocol used to retrieve time from a network time server possible values are ntp and rdate time_server Time server for synchronization at runtime If this variable is not specified time is extracted from the hardware clock at system startup
391. rently allow booting Release 3 5 1 108 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide allow bootp domain name tst subnet mask 255 255 255 0 domain name servers 192 168 1 100 ntp servers 192 168 1 50 routers 192 168 1 253 vendor class identifier option option option option option option PPS min lease time 4294967295 default lease time 4294967295 use host decl names on ddns update style ad hoc subnet 192 168 1 0 netmask 255 255 255 0 host client00 option dhcp client iden fixed address 192 168 1 option tftp server name option bootfile name tifi 140 192 168 1 253 tftpboot ssh_ script _eth0O ShM1 r 020302030202 02107 host client0Ol option dhcp client iden fixed address 192 168 1 option tftp server name option bootfile name tifier 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 11 eles 192 168 1 253 tftpboot ssh_script_ethl1_ ShM1 host client02 option dhcp client iden tifier 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 20 fixed address 192 168 1 option tftp server name option bootfile name host client03 option dhcp client iden 142 192 168 1 253 tifier 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 21 fixed address 192 168 1 option tftp server name option bootfile name host client04 143 192 168 1 253 option dhcp client iden fixed address 192 168 1 host client05 3 4 9 Using IPv6 for Shelf External Access to the Shelf Manager ShMM 700 optio
392. ress gt lt fru id gt lt in file gt clia frudataw d c lt ipmb address gt lt fru id gt clia frudataw s c lt ipmb address gt lt fru id gt The parameters lt ipmb address gt and lt fru id gt specify the IPMB address and FRU device ID of the FRU Information to update When updating HPDL data or SDRs in the Shelf FRU Information use IPMB address 20h and FRU device ID 254 or the addresses of actual locations of the Shelf FRU Information The parameter lt in ile gt indicates the binary HPDL data or SDR file which is possibly compressed to be stored in the target FRU Information The option d indicates that HPDL data is to be updated the option s indicates that SDRs data is to be updated Release 3 5 1 122 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide The option c removes clears the HPDL data or SDRs respectively from the target FRU Information For example the following commands can be used to update the Shelf FRU Information with new versions of HPDL data and SDRs on a shelf where the Shelf FRU Information is stored in two redundant EEPROMs on the backplane accessed locally by the Shelf Manager clia frudataw d 20 1 std14slot hpdl bin gz clia frudataw s 20 1 stdl14slot sdr bin gz clia frudataw d 20 2 stdl14slot hpdl bin gz clia frudataw s 20 2 stdl14slot sdr bin gz 3 6 4 4 Placing HPDL Data and SDRs in the FRU Information for Specific FRUs This section addresses placing HPDL data and SD
393. riginal mechanism that is not based on HPDL ISOLATE _MUX_ Number 10 This parameter instructs the isolation No IGNORE_COUNT algorithm to skip this number of accesses to a faulty bus before trying to enable it on the platforms where SHMM_GPIO8 is used to control access from the Shelf Manager to the multiplexer on the master only 12C bus via the original mechanism that is not based on HPDL Release 3 5 1 64 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide DEFAULT DESCRIPTION CAN BE OBTAINED FROM SHELF FRU INFO ISOLATE _MUX_ Number 10 This parameter instructs the isolation No IGNORE_TIME algorithm to avoid accessing the faulty bus and immediately return a failure for specified number of seconds after a failure detection on the platforms where SHMM GPIOs are used to control access from the Shelf Manager to multiplexers on the master only 12C bus via an HPDL based mechanism ISOLATE MUX_ Boolean FALSE Must be set to TRUE for platforms No ON_GPIO8 where SHMM_GPIO8 is used by the Shelf Manager to reset an 12C switch multiplexer on an 12C bus but must be FALSE if the HPDL based reset mechanism is used ISOLATE MUX_ Number 0 If this parameter is non zero and No SWITCHOVER_T ISOLATE MUX_ON_GPIO8 is HRESHOLD TRUE the 12C isolation algorithm will perform a switchover to the backup Shelf Manager if a fault exists on the main 12C bus after the 12C switch is reset In this
394. ript sets up environment variables CARRIER and CARRIER_OPTIONS These variables inform the Shelf Manager about the carrier on which it is installed and define carrier specific options as necessary for each supported carrier By default the values of these environment variables are propagated to the corresponding configuration variables see Table 7 Shelf Manager Configuration Parameters CARRIER and CARRIER_OPTIONS The configuration variables in their turn are retrieved and used by the Shelf Manager The U Boot variable start_rc2_daemons instructs the secondary startup script to start or not start the daemons snmpd SNMP server boa HTTP server and she1fman the Shelf Manager after Linux boots If the U Boot variable start_rc2_daemons is set to y the secondary RC script should also define command line options for automatic invocation of the shelfman daemon It may also provide other configuration services Release 3 5 1 34 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide 3 3 Setting Up Shelf Manager Configuration File The Shelf Manager configuration file she1fman conf is located in the etc directory Each line in the file is either a comment line starting with or a lt name gt lt value gt pair representing the assignment for the configuration parameter The name and the value are separated with the equal sign The configuration parameter name is case insensitive Each configuration parameter is one of the followin
395. rmines the list of POST tests that are executed after power on reset only vs on each boot up If not set compile time default settings are used The test names listed in a value of this variable are separated by space characters serial This variable contains the ShMM serial number assigned during manufacturing The variable is set automatically by U Boot during bootstrap rootpath ShMM 700 only This variable specifies the NFS root to be used by the Linux kernel when booting the ShMM via the bootcmd_nfs command Default value is root s quiet Instructs the kernel upon bootup not to print progress messages to the serial console Default is quiet ramargs Sets the kernel command line in the bootargs variable as appropriate for the root filesystem to be mounted from a ramdisk Note not present on ShMM 700 ramdisk Specifies what r s image should be used by the net boot option ramsize Size of the system memory in bytes Default setting calculated from the SDRAM configuration encoding in the build time configuration block Note not present on ShMM 700 rc_ifconfig Allows the etc rc script to set up the IP address instead of shel fman Default is n allow she1f man to set up IP addresses re2 Specifies secondary RC script that is to be invoked This is the carrier specific startup script Default is etc rc shmm700 hpd1 on ShMM 700 and etc re carrier3 on ShMM 500 and ShMM 1500 or other appropriate script for the
396. rongly recommended for use with client HPI applications since it contains the redundancy framework improvement to avoid the potential loss of an HPI call that is being processed during a Shelf Manager switchover The OpenHPI library 1ibopenhpi so 2 in the Shelf Manager RFS already contains this improvement Also note that the posted open source OpenHPI versions 2 16 and higher already include the necessary library updates 3 15 Configuring System Services The Shelf Manager filesystem contains several network services that can be used for debug and upgrade purposes The following table contains a list of ports used by the Shelf Manager with a brief description of the service configuration with each port Table 14 Network Services PORT NUMBER TYPE NETWORK SERVICE DESCRIPTION 21 tcp FTP server Activated via the etc inetd conf file to disable the FTP server comment out the tp line in that file This service is based on WU FTP daemon so the configuration is located in the etc tp files mostly in etc ftpaccess NOTE On ShMM 700 only the FTP server can be configured to listen to IPv6 sockets To achieve that it is necessary to replace tcp with tcp6 in the corresponding line in the etc inetd conf file ftp stream tcp6 nowait root bin in ftpd a This option is turned off by default because the FTP server does not correctly show the peer IP address in the system logs in the case of an IPv6 connection 22 tcp S
397. ronment variables second copy 1 5 0 25 dev mtd8 Not mounted UBIFS cache used for boot acceleration 1 75 30 25 dev mtd10 Not mounted Boot partition UBI temporarily with one UBIFS mounted by U Boot volume named to load images and_ boot contains Linux by the reliable kernel and RFS upgrade utility to images write images 32 32 dev mtd12 0 User partition UBI 1 with one UBIFS volume named user contains application package images Shelf Manager files other application files and user data The following table lists names of the files and directories on UBIFS volumes that contain other firmware images The file names for A2F060 upgrade files are also listed the A2F060 upgrade process is described in section 8 7 Table 30 File Names for Firmware Images Stored as UBIFS Files FILE NAME FLASH PARTITION DESCRIPTION ulmage 0 Boot Linux kernel image 0 ulmage 1 Boot Linux kernel image 1 rfs 0 Boot Root file system RFS image 0 rfs 1 Boot Root file system RFS image 1 a2f upgrade dat Boot A2F060 upgrade image present only during an A2F060 upgrade a2f auto rollback dat Boot Rollback A2F060 upgrade image for use if an A2F060 upgrade fails for any reason a2f manual rollback dat Boot Previous A2F060 upgrade image for manual rollback O etc User etc directory instance 0 mounted as etc if image set 0 is active lete User etc directory i
398. ror code if there is no var upgrade status file to be found If the specifier is supplied rupgrade_tool w removes the var upgrade status file before exiting S v Strobe the upgrade WDT rupgrade_tool S is intended as a shell level interface to strobe the upgrade WDT for use by newly installed software that is validating its sanity rupgrade_ tool S returns a value of 0 u This option was previously used to undo a successful upgrade session As of the 2 7 3 release this option has been removed and is no longer supported To undo an upgrade use the options sR hook flip or sR C lt dst gt lt src gt proto lt protocol gt v d a Copy images to the Flash but do not execute the final upgrade step This usage scenario is complementary to the upgrade without copying usage scenario With the option C rupgrade_tool performs the same operations as described above for the option s and Release 3 5 1 228 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide terminates after copying images into the Flash where the rupgrade_tool run with the options s R starts its operation h Show help to stdout 7 7 Reliable Upgrade Utility Use Scenarios It is intended that the reliable upgrade utility is used in the following sequence in order to carry out an upgrade of the ShMM The user makes a call to rupgrade_tool s to initiate the upgrade procedure The call can be made either loc
399. rt of bootargs string The variable specifies how the Flash drive is split into partitions and consists of pairs of partition sizes and their names Default value is 512K uboot0 512K uboot1 256K envvars0 256 K envvars1 256K ubifs cache 30976K boot 3 2M user See the SnMM 700R Hardware Architecture Specification for more information net This variable can be used as a replacement for bootemd as a means of booting a kernel and RFS image from TFTP Use run net netmask Network netmask default value is 255 255 255 0 nfs This variable can be used as a replacement for bootemd as a means of booting and running with an NFS mounted root filesystem The Monterey Linux User Guide sample NFS project provides details for ShMM 500 and ShMM 1500 users Note the kernel image is fetched from a TFTP server by default password rese t Instructs Linux to restore the password from the current RFS image The default password for user root in the PPS provided RFS images is the empty password Default value for password resetisn post _normal Determines the list of POST tests that are executed on each boot up If not set compile time default settings are used The test names listed in a value of this variable are separated by space characters Release 3 5 1 29 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide ENVIRONMENT DESCRIPTION VARIABLE post _poweron Dete
400. rview Flash Partitioning and Image Layout Changing the User Flash Partition Format to JFFS2 Reliable Upgrade Procedure Status File Reliable Upgrade Utility Reliable Upgrade of A2F060 Firmware Reliable Upgrade Utility Use Scenarios Reliable Upgrade Examples 8 2 Firmware Reliable Upgrade Procedure Overview WARNING Before downgrading the ShMM 700R Linux kernel RFS and U Boot images from a 3 5 0 or later Shelf Manager release to a pre 3 5 0 Shelf Manager release users MUST verify that the Flash user partition is formatted to UBIFS for further details refer to section 8 4 For the ShMM 700 a reliable upgrade procedure for the firmware images on a running and functioning ShMM is provided An arbitrary combination of the following four software images can be upgraded reliably the U Boot firmware the Linux kernel the Linux root file system RFS and the application package If an attempted reliable upgrade fails an automatic rollback to the previous version of the firmware takes place An upgrade failure can be caused for example by installation of a faulty kernel image that cannot properly boot up the ShMM or a faulty Shelf Manager application that fails to start In contrast to the SaMM 500 1500 the ShMM 700 firmware includes a fourth component that contains just the application binaries for the Shelf Manager and accompanying applications in many cases it will be sufficient to upgrade only this component in order to upgrade
401. s ethO 1 The initial IP address is assigned in that case to the network adapter itself ethO during the start of the operating system This initial assignment happens in the initialization script etc rc it is accomplished by 1 enabling the U Boot variable rc_ifconfig setting it to y 2 assigning the original IP address to the U Boot variable ipaddr for example shmmx500 setenv rce_ifconfig shmmx500 setenv ipaddr 192 168 1 240 and 3 changing the value of the Shelf Manager configuration parameter RMCP_NET ADAPTER to eth0 1 In a redundant configuration the U Boot variable ipaddr is allowed to have the same value on both ShMMs The actual initial IP address assigned to each of the two redundant ShMMs is based on the value of ipaddr but is modified depending on the hardware address of the ShMM The least significant bit of the IP address is set to the least significant bit of the hardware address In the example above the IP address is 192 168 1 240 for the ShMM with an even hardware address and is 192 168 1 241 for the ShMM with an odd hardware address This modification of the IP address can be turned off by removing the file etc readhwaddr Release 3 5 1 84 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide 3 4 1 2 RMCP Address Propagation There is an optional feature of the Shelf Manager that allows the backup ShMM also to be exposed on the external network with an IP address that is different from the RMCP IP address on
402. s mode is not compliant with the PICMG 3 0 AdvancedTCA specification and should be used with extreme caution CAN BE OBTAINED FROM SHELF FRU INFO Yes COOLING MANA GEMENT String 64 oy undefined If specified the name of the shared library that implements cooling management The actual name of the library is libcooling lt xxx gt so where lt xxx gt is the value of this configuration parameter This library is dynamically loaded by the Shelf Manager and must be located in var bin or 1ib No COOLING POLL _TIMEOUT Number 30 The maximum time in seconds between successive invocations of the cooling monitoring and management thread Yes CPLD ACTIVE_ WORKAROUND Boolean TRUE This flag when TRUE enables a special workaround to detect the loss of the Active signal in the CPLD Registers in the CPLD Complex Programmable Logic Device on the ShMM expose the state of the hardware redundancy signals to the software This loss may happen on some platforms when hot inserting a ShMM carrier The workaround can be turned off by setting this value to FALSE if this problem does not exist for a specific platform This parameter is not applicable to the ShMM 700 No CTCA_FRU_RES ET TIMEOUT Number 500 CompactPCI shelves only The time in milliseconds during which the Shelf Manager holds the BD_SEL line low in order to reset a CompactPCI board
403. s connected could be configured By default however logical 12C bus 5 physical bus 3 on the ShMM 700R was used for this functionality Starting with release 3 2 0 this feature has been re implemented to allow more than one 12C multiplexer or switch to be resettable These multiplexers or switches can also be located in the case of the ShMM 700 on multiple 12C buses The new implementation is not backwards compatible and applies only to HPDL based shelves The information about reset support and the number of the ShMM GPIO used to reset the device must be contained in the HPDL device description of the corresponding multiplexer or switch The following subsections describe the usage of this feature in the original and HPDL based mode respectively Release 3 5 1 175 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide 4 9 1 2C Bus Fault Isolation Original Approach Single Multiplexer or Switch Not HPDL based In this approach the isolation algorithm is controlled by the value of the configuration parameter ISOLATE MUX_ON_GPIO8 and works as follows e The multiplexer switch 7 bit 12C address can be specified by the configuration parameter ISOLATE _MUX_ADDRESS The default is 0x70 e When the error ETIMEDOUT is detected by the Linux 12C subsystem while trying to access a device on a subordinate bus this bus is recorded as faulty in the Shelf Manager and the multiplexer switch is held in reset via GPIO E8 This operation causes al
404. s necessary at least to assign a static IPv6 address to the corresponding channel For example to assign the IPv6 address 3ffe 302 11 2 26 with the network part of 64 bits as the first address the address index starts from 0 to the LAN channel 1 the following command can be used clia setlanconfig 1 ipv6_ addresses 0 3ffe 302 11 2 26 64 Configuration of static routers is optional depending on whether appropriate IPv6 routers exist and can be discovered dynamically via the Router Discovery protocol on the target local network For example if such dynamic discovery is not feasible or desirable the following commands can be used to configure statically the default router with the address 3ffe 302 11 2 7f on the Shelf Manager Release 3 5 1 111 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide clia setlanconfig 1 ipv6_routerl_ip 3ffe 302 11 2 7 clia setlanconfig 1 ipv6 _routerl_prefix_ length 0 clia setlanconfig 1 ipv6_routerl_prefix value The values assigned via the clia setlanconfig command are stored persistently and survive a Shelf Manager reboot or switchover In the case of a switchover the static IPv6 addresses and other configuration information are failed over to the former backup Shelf Manager which now becomes active and RMCP communication can continue without interruption as occurs with IPv4 Static Shelf Manager IPv6 addresses and static router IPv6 addresses can also be configured in the Shelf
405. s of a Linux kernel startup parameter i2c mxs speed which has the following syntax i2c mxs speed lt speed1 gt lt speed2 gt where lt speed1 gt and lt speed2 gt can have values 100 or 400 and represent the speed of buses 2 and 3 respectively According to normal Linux kernel naming conventions the name of the parameter is composed of two parts separated by the dot symbol i2c mxs corresponds to the 12C driver name and speed is the parameter name within that driver For example to set both buses to normal speed the following parameter should be passed to the Linux kernel i12c mxs speed 100 100 Release 3 5 1 144 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide The recommended method to pass this parameter to the kernel is to append it to the value of the U Boot variable bootargs_initrd for example by typing the following at the U Boot prompt shmm700 setenv bootargs initrd bootargs initrd i2c mxs speed 100 100 shmm700 saveenv NOTE On ShMM 700 to provide compatibility with designs based on previous generation of ShMMs bus mapping takes place on the OS level For example logical 12C bus 0 represented by the device node dev i2c0 that goes to the ShMM 700R carrier and accommodates carrier based 2C devices is actually physical 12C bus 4 Logical 12C bus 1 represented by the device node dev i2c1 that accommodates on ShMM I2C devices is actually physical 12C bus 5 The details of the mappi
406. s to the corresponding targets over an HPM 2 session if one exists the requests and responses in this case can be significantly longer than when the command is sent over IPMB The length of a request can be up to 150 bytes and a response can be up to 248 bytes in sendemd and up to 241 bytes in sendamc e In IntegralHPI populating an Inventory from the FRU Information uses an HPM 2 session if it exists for the target FRU in that case the chunk size for a single read operation is 128 bytes otherwise it is 16 bytes e The CLI command fruinfo uses an HPM 2 session if it exists for the target FRU in that case the chunk size for a single read operation is 128 bytes otherwise it is 16 bytes e Some not all internal Shelf Manager requests to read a FRU Information record use an HPM 2 session if it exists for the target FRU in that case the chunk size for a single read operation is 128 bytes otherwise it is 16 bytes e The Shelf Manager code that reads Device SDRs from IPMCs uses an HPM 2 session if it exists for the target IPMC In that case each SDR is read in a single read operation by default each SDR is read by several partial read operations 3 4 4 Using the ShMM 500 and ShMM 700 Alternate Software Redundancy Interface In ShMM 500s and ShMM 700s configured for ShMC Cross connect operation two additional network interfaces are implemented over the two USB connections In this configuration they always connect the two redundant Shel
407. se saved SDRs for the sensors described in HPDL that it creates during initialization 3 6 1 Compiling HPDL Definitions HPDL definitions in text format are compiled by the HPDL compiler into a binary format that conforms to the ASN 1 basic encoding rules ISO 8825 and stored in an output file The HPDL compiler executable is available both for Linux x86 and Windows operating systems with the names hpdlc and hpdi1c exe respectively The Linux version of the compiler can be run on various Linux distributions including Red Hat Mandriva Linux and Ubuntu The command line for the HPDL compiler has the following synopsis hpdic d v lt in file gt lt out file gt The parameter lt in ile gt specifies the input file that contains the HPDL descriptions in text format The optional parameter lt out ile gt specifies the output file if this parameter is omitted the name of the output file is based on the input file name with the suffix bin appended at the end Option d causes the HPDL compiler to output additional debugging information when compiling the input file Option v causes the HPDL compiler to identify its version Error messages if any are output on the standard error stream of the HPDL compiler For example the following command line compiles the input file acb3 hpd1 into the binary file acb3 hpdl bin gt hpdic acb3 hpdl 3 6 2 Compiling SDRs Most of the attributes of sensors referenced in HPDL
408. se 2 5 3 e Section 3 3 corrects the description of the configuration parameter COOLING_MANAGEMENT e Section 3 6 3 amends the description of the procedure to locate HPDL data taking into account the new environment variables that can provide the location of that data e New section 4 9 describes the provisions for isolating faulty subsidiary buses behind a multiplexer on the ShMM carrier for carriers that have GPIO control of that multiplexer C 11 Release 2 6 0 Entire document adds coverage of ShMM 1500R e Sections 3 1 3 10 1 changes the default time zone name from UTCO0 to UTC e Section 3 3 adds new configuration parameters ACTIVATE LOCAL WITHOUT _SHELF_FRU ATCA _TESTER_COMPATIBILITY DEFAULT _VLAN_ID DEFAULT _VLAN_ID2 DHCP_FOR_RMCP_ONLY TURBO MODE MIN FAN FAILURES e New section 3 4 7 describes assigning VLAN IDs in accordance with version 2 0 of the IPMI specification Section 3 12 1 in the PEF configuration example corrects control 7 to control 1 New section 4 5 1 describes operation in ShMM 500 based Shelves with radial IPMB 0 New section 4 5 2 describes operation in ShMM 1500 based Shelves with radial IPMB 0 New section 5 introduces the use of the IPMI analysis tools Section 7 3 adds the tables describing the Flash partitions for a SaMM 1500 with 32 MB and 64MB Flash devices e Section 7 6 adds descriptions of new options and specifiers for the reliable upgrade utility a R C e S
409. se 3 5 1 Downloading file file tmp u boot Downloading file file tmp sentry Downloading file file tmp sentry Downloading file file tmp sentry Initiating partial upgrade uboot tmp tmp _uboot kernel tmp tmp kernel rfs tmp _ tmp rfs 265 bin kernel rfs app August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide lt INFO gt frontend c 765 app tmp _ tmp app lt INFO gt frontend c 820 Calling backend to handle partial upgrade sbin backend uboot tmp tmp uboot kernel tmp tmp kernel rootfs tmp tmp rfs application tmp tmp app lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1285 Write storage state not available gt available ALLOW UBI device number 1 total 484 LEBs 31657472 bytes 30 2 MiB available 0 LEBs 0 bytes LEB size 65408 bytes 63 9 KiB lt INFO gt shmm700_ hal c 369 Resetting UBIFS cache Erasing 64 Kibyte 30000 75 complete lt INFO gt shmm700 hal c 1913 Clean on defice 1 1 Leaving file dev mtd2 untouched lt INFO gt backend c 730 Burning image lt INFO gt backend c 764 393216 bytes was written from file tmp tmp _uboot to dev 1 1 Erasing 64 Kibyte 30000 75 complete 512 0 records in 512 0 records out 262144 bytes 256 0KB copied 1 571406 seconds 162 9KB s lt INFO gt backend c 730 Burning lt INFO gt backend c 764 1402348 bytes was written from file
410. signment of LAN Configuration Parameters to Boards 184 4 11 HPI SYSTEM EVENT SENSOR c ccceesceeeseceseeeeeeneeseeeesaeeeeaaeeeaaesaeeeeaeeeeaaeseeeeeseneees 185 4 12 SHMM TESTS AVAILABLE VIA THE DIAGNOSTIC INFRASTRUCTURE 2 ccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 185 5 USING THE IPMI ANALYSIS TOOLS 0 ccccceseceseeeeesneeenseeeeeeeeesneeseseeeeeeneeseaeseseaeenseeeeenees 188 5 1 IN THIS SECTION rotnn eraan bebstavudbentdeasesivvassbddecbaads eaae aai 188 5 2 IPMB TRACE COLLECTION DAEMON IPMB_TRACED scccceesseeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeessssaeeeeeeaas 188 5 3 IPMI TRAGE ANALYZER cise cc ccveicewnet sceseverdatcehed dit vecendactencnct eaa Kaa aaa aa EAE 192 5 3 1 Introduction to the Wireshark GUI sccccccccesccesseeceeneecenececeeeeesaeceeneeseeetetseetenes 192 5 3 2 Introduction to Terminal orienteO Wireshark cccccccceccceeesteeeeenneeeeesnneeeeeeniees 195 5 3 3 Installing IPMI Analyzer SOPWAPEC cccccccescceesseceencecenetecseeesnaeceeneecenetetsnenenes 195 5 4 COLLECTING AND ANALYZING A TRACE USING THE GUI AND COMMAND LINE TOOLS 195 5 4 1 Collecting IPMI Traces on IPMB 0 in Unattended MOdl ccccccccccseseceseeees 195 5 4 2 Collecting IPMI Traces on IPMB 0 in Controlled MOd ccccccsccccsseesteceeneees 200 5 4 3 Collecting an IPMI Trace in Board Trace Mode ssccccsseeececeenseeessnneeeesennes 203 Release 3 5 1 4 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide 5 4 4
411. sing components are copied from current confirmed component set This allows reliable upgrades to be done when only certain firmware components e g the application package change between releases while other components are left intact in that case upgrade images can be made smaller and the upgrade itself will be faster An example of such a partial upgrade is shown as Example 2 at the end of this section The backend utility has the following synopsis Only the command line parameters that are intended to be used by external programs are shown here the remaining parameters not shown here are for the exclusive use of the rupgrade utility Output the current image set index 0 or 1 to stdout backend c backend get current Confirm and finalize the current upgrade backend confirm Cancel abort the current upgrade backend cancel Strobe the reliable upgrade watchdog timer backend strobe Help mode output a brief help to stdout backend h backend help Get Version mode output the version of the utility to stdout backend version Table 34 Standard Source File Names for Upgrade Components COMPONENT NAME SOURCE FILE NAME U Boot sentry shmm700 u boot Linux kernel sentry shmm700 kernel RFS sentry shmm700 rfs Application Package sentry shmm700 app The image upgrade works as follows For each of the specified source images the image is copied to the ShMM via the protocol specified
412. ssarily return such information Release 3 5 1 51 August 17 2015 DHCP SERVER _ ADDRESS Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide IP address DEFAULT None DESCRIPTION This parameter is the IP address of the DHCP server it applies only if the variable USE_DHCP is TRUE If this parameter is omitted or set to 0 0 0 0 and the USE_DHCP variable is TRUE the Shelf Manager accepts address information from any DHCP server that responds to its broadcast discovery request CAN BE OBTAINED FROM SHELF FRU INFO Yes DHCP SPECIAL _CLIENT ID F ORMAT Boolean FALSE If this parameter is set to TRUE the DHCP Client ID has a special format that is used by some Pigeon Point customers By default this variable is FALSE and a standard Pigeon Point Client ID format is used as described in section 3 4 8 of this document Yes ENABLE DIREC T SHELF _FRU_ WRITE Boolean FALSE This variable controls whether the Shelf Manager allows direct writes to the Shelf FRU Information FRU Device ID 254 on the IPM controller at 20h on IPMB 0 via the IPMI command Write FRU Data By default direct writes are prohibited as mandated by PICMG 3 0 R2 0 ECN 002 which requires that Shelf FRU Information writes use a special locking protocol so that only one writer is active at once Setting this variable to TRUE enables direct writes for compatibility with System Manager applicatio
413. switchover the address 20h is exposed by the former backup Shelf Manager which now exposes two IPMB addresses If this variable is set to FALSE the Shelf Manager exposes only the logical address 20h this is allowed only for a non redundant Shelf Manager In the redundant configuration this variable must be set to TRUE Release 3 5 1 39 August 17 2015 ATCA TESTER_ COMPATIBILIT Y Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide TYPE Boolean DEFAULT FALSE DESCRIPTION This variable if set turns off event handling optimizations in the Shelf Manager so that the Shelf Manager behavior is compatible with the Polaris ATCA Tester in particular duplicate hot swap events are handled as separate events if they have different IPMI sequence numbers CAN BE OBTAINED FROM SHELF FRU INFO No AUTO SEND ME SSAGE Boolean TRUE Automatically convert an RMCP request sent to a non Shelf Manager IPMB address into a Send Message request directed to that address No AXIE NOT REA DY_STARTUP_D ELAY Number The Axle startup delay time in milliseconds No AXIE POWER M ANAGEMENT Boolean FALSE Enables overall support of AXle power management functionality in the Shelf Manager must be turned on explicitly No AXIE_SEQUENC ING ENUM REA DY_TIMEOUT Number Timeout for the AXle Enumeration Not Ready signal to get cleared This timeout v
414. t Release 3 5 1 247 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide copy var copy the SSH keys and the entire var directory from the current image set to the new image set copy all1 copy the entire var directory and the entire etc directory from the current image set to the new image set erase all1 erase both the var and etc directories for the new image set copy only the SSH keys from the current image set skip checksums skip the verification of checksums in the images used for upgrade The following verbosity levels are supported e none do not output verbose messages to stdout do not write them to the log file e file do not output verbose messages to stdout do write them to the log file e all output verbose messages to stdout and write them to the log file The following command variants invoke the HPM 1 upgrade mode rupgrade p lt URL gt copy config copy etc copy var copy all erase all skip checksums rupgrade package lt URL gt copy config copy etc copy var copy all erase all skip checksums Here p lt URL gt or package lt URL gt specifies the location of the new image in HPM 1 format which contains some combination of the new U Boot kernel RFS and application package images Other optional parameters have the same meaning as for a non HPM 1 upgrade The following command variant invokes the A2F060 upgrade mode see section 8 7 rupgrad
415. t HPI Release 3 5 1 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide DEFAULT DESCRIPTION CAN BE OBTAINED FROM SHELF FRU INFO INTEGRALHPI_ Number 2 This configuration parameter applies Yes KEEPALIVE_IN to TCP based IntegralHPI sessions it TERVAL is used to set the interval in seconds between successive keepalive probes INTEGRALHPI_ Number 5 This configuration parameter applies Yes KEEPALIVE PR to TCP based IntegralHPI sessions it OBES is used to set the number of unacknowledged probes to send before considering the TCP session to be dead INTEGRALHPI_ Number 10 This configuration parameter applies Yes KEEPALIVE TI to TCP based IntegralHPI sessions it ME is used to set the interval in seconds between the last data packet sent and the first keepalive probe INTEGRALHPI_ Number 100 The maximum number of entries in Yes SESSION_EVEN the event queue for each IntegralHPI TS CAPACITY session When choosing this number the memory capacity of the ShMM should be considered Each event queue entry occupies approximately 300 bytes and 64 simultaneous IntegralHPI sessions are supported Therefore increasing this number by 1 causes the Shelf Manager to use 19 2 Kbytes of additional ShMM memory INTEGRALHPI_ Number 1 The entity location for the Yes SHELF_ENTITY AdvancedTCA Shelf HPI Resource _LOCATION used to differentiate on the HPI client level among multiple shelv
416. t boot configuration files are copied from var upgrade to the etc partition e erase the script erases both the provisional etc and provisional var directories they are restored from the RFS default values during the next boot the current Shelf Manager non volatile data and configuration are not preserved The only preserved configuration in this mode is the etc ssh directory which contains SSH server keys that are copied to the provisional etc partition The current Shelf Manager non volatile data and configuration are not preserved e etc_copy the script erases both the provisional etc and provisional vaxr directories then it copies the contents of etc and the non volatile information from the directory var nvdata to the provisional Flash partitions In this case both the non volatile data and the Shelf Manager configuration file are preserved e copy the script erases both the provisional etc and provisional var directories then copies the full contents of the etc and var directories onto the provisional partition In this case not only the configuration but also the executable files placed to var bin is copied and overrides executable files with the same name from the RFS image This mode of Release 3 5 1 226 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide operation is useful if the directory var bin contains some special executables e g a special version of the Shelf Manager or other utilities that must be
417. t typically they are located at address 0xA4 on channels 1 and 2 of the 12C multiplexer and the multiplexer itself resides at address OxE0 In that case the following commands issued on the ShMM can be used to download the file var nvdata shelf fru_info to the SEEPROMs It is assumed that the file was compiled by the FRU Information Compiler and downloaded onto the ShMM as in the previous example teepromw c 1 A4 var nvdata shelf fru_info eepromw c 2 A4 var nvdata shelf_ fru_info The general syntax for the eepromw utility is as follows eepromw b lt multiplexer gt c lt channel gt lt eeprom address gt lt file gt lt count gt where e lt multiplexer gt is the address of the 12C multiplexer on the 12C bus default 0xE0 e lt channel gt is the channel on the multiplexer to use default 0 e lt eeprom address gt is the address of the target SEEPROM Release 3 5 1 115 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide e lt file gt is the path to the file to write onto the target SEEPROM e lt count gt is how many bytes to write The optional parameter lt count gt specifies how many bytes to write If this parameter is not specified all the contents of the file are written into the target SEEPROM The total number of bytes written to SEEPROM does not exceed the size of the SEEPROM The reciprocal eepromr utility allows the user to read the contents of an SEEPROM into a file on the Flash and has
418. t variables can be reset to default values refer to Section 6 2 3 3 1 Carrier specific Configuration File After reading the common configuration file etc shelfman conf the Shelf Manager reads the carrier specific configuration file etc shelfman conf lt carrier name gt where lt carrier name gt is the name of the ShMM carrier used in the relevant shelf in lower case characters Settings in the carrier specific configuration file override settings for the same variable in the common configuration file This mechanism allows redefinition of common settings on a carrier specific basis Typically only a few critical configuration variables are defined in the carrier specific file For instance the appropriate value for the MIN_ FAN LEVEL parameter may well be determined by the shelf architecture and the fan facilities that it implements This mechanism allows such shelf specific constraints to be enforced One result of this mechanism is that to change the effective value of a configuration parameter that is specified in the carrier specific configuration file the change must be made in that configuration file A change for such a variable in the common configuration file will not have any effect 3 3 2 Obtaining Configuration Variables from Shelf FRU Information Besides carrier specific redefinition of configuration variables there is another mechanism for retrieving and applying configuration variables from the Shelf FRU Information
419. targs_ initrd and bootargs_nfs commands to setup console mtdparts quiet fec_mac kernel arguments bootargs init rd ShMM 700 only U Boot command that sets up kernel bootargs string so that the kernel shall be booted with RFS image stored in RAM It executes bootargs common command and then extends bootargs string with root dev ram kernel parameter bootargs nfs ShMM 700 only U Boot command that sets up kernel bootargs string to prepare the system to be booted with NFS volume as RFS It executes bootargs_ common command and then extends bootargs string with the following NFS parameters root dev nfs ip ipaddr eth0O off nfsroot serverip rootpath v3 tcp So the kernel shall use ipaddr to configure eth0 interface and access serverip host to use its exported rootpath share as root bootcmd U Boot command executed to accomplish auto booting On both ShMM 500 and ShMM 1500 normally this is something similar to bootm BFB00000 BFC40000 which starts the Linux image stored in Flash On ShMM 700 the boot command is more complex because of the reliable A2F upgrade support and because boot images are stored ina file system and normally this is something similar to run mount ubifs a2f upgrade run ubifs bootdelay Autoboot delay value in seconds Default setting is 3 Release 3 5 1 25 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide ENVIRONMENT DESCRIPTION VARIABLE bo
420. ted inside the Shelf Manager With the advent of HPDL as a means to describe the architecture of carriers and shelves without additional coding it became desirable to make cooling management modular so that cooling management strategies can be added to the Shelf Manager without modification of the Shelf Manager code and the proper cooling management strategy can be chosen dynamically To satisfy this goal the following approach is supported in the Shelf Manager e Cooling management modules are implemented as Linux shared libraries so files e Acooling management API is defined this API fully defines the interface between the Shelf Manager and the cooling management module in the form of function calls e Support has been added to the Shelf Manager for dynamically loading the cooling management modules and binding to the functions that they export This approach is utilized only if HPDL is used to describe the carrier and the shelf For non HPDL defined carriers and shelves the cooling management strategy remains bound to carrier specific code in the Shelf Manager 3 7 1 Default Cooling Management Strategy With HPDL a reasonable default cooling management strategy is provided It is not necessary to configure the cooling management strategy if the default is satisfactory for a given carrier shelf which is likely the case for many carriers and shelves The default cooling management has the following features e zoned cooling is su
421. th the IPMC 90h and all AMC modules associated with the IPMC A0h Release 3 5 1 184 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide 4 11 HPI System Event Sensor This discrete sensor is associated with the logical Shelf Manager IPMB address 20h has number 0 on LUN 3 the name HPI Sys Event and OEM event reading type code DBh Its purpose is to enhance interaction between the Shelf Manager and Pigeon Point HPI implementations IntegralHPI and Pigeon Point OpenHPI This sensor sends IPMI events in a special format to signal HPI implementations that changes have occurred within the Shelf Manager for example some fields within a Multi record in the Shelf FRU Information have been updated The HPI implementation is expected to process such an event and perform corresponding actions to react to the new conditions for example to reread the Shelf FRU Information Since this sensor is intended to be used for internal communication between the Shelf Manager and Pigeon Point HPI implementation its behavior set of states and event format are subject to change and it is not recommended for an ordinary user to make any direct use of it 4 12 ShMM Tests Available via the Diagnostic Infrastructure A Diagnostic Initiators DI facility has been implemented in the Shelf Manager starting with release 2 8 0 Currently PPS OEM commands are used for access to the diagnostic initiators they are documented in the Pigeon Point Shelf Manager External
422. the first device in the slave device list When a network link loss is detected active device switching is performed only after 500 milliseconds to avoid potential problems with short term link loss The idea is similar to the Active Standby usage of two network interfaces except that device link state monitoring and switching is performed at low level by the kernel instead of the Shelf Manager The bonding mode is activated by changing the ipdevice variable value in U Boot to bondo This has to be done at the U Boot level so that the system startup scripts perform the device initialization for bondO before the Shelf Manager starts By default this value is passed to the Shelf Manager as the default RMCP network adapter via the setting in etc shelfman conf RMCP_NET ADAPTER SIPDEVICE It is possible to use an alias interface of bond if it is necessary to have a permanent IP address on the ShMM while the RMCP address floats between active and standby ShMMs i e RMCP_NET ADAPTER bond0 1 The parameter RMCP_NET_ADAPTER2 must not be set while using the bonding interface as an RMCP adapter The bonding mode assumes single RMCP network adapter usage from the Shelf Manager perspective so the parameter USE_SECOND_CHANNEL must be set to FALSE Release 3 5 1 89 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide 3 4 3 Setting up the HPM 2 Client Channel The logical Shelf Manager supports RMCP client connectivity w
423. the System Manager and its usage of IP addresses is not defined in the ATCA specification and the Shelf Manager design should not artificially limit it The solution in this case should be implemented at the System Manager level Some new features introduced in ECN 002 to the ATCA specification PICMG 3 0 R2 0 facilitate a solution The command Get Shelf Manager IP Addresses allows the System Manager to retrieve the IP addresses exposed by the Shelf Managers both active and backup Using this information the System Manager can check the availability of the Shelf Managers and the current distribution of responsibilities between them active vs backup In active active mode instead of having a single RMCP network address that is switched between the two network interfaces see description of active standby mode in 3 4 2 1 the Shelf Manager supports RMCP on both interfaces with different IP addresses as two separate IPMI channels channels 1 and 2 Each channel has its own set of LAN configuration parameters that includes the IP address network mask default gateway etc Both addresses are available via the Get Shelf Manager IP Addresses command The System Manager in this case is responsible for switching over to a different IP address if the currently used IP address becomes unavailable or maintaining two parallel RMCP sessions to both addresses If IP addresses on both interfaces become unavailable the System Manager can a
424. the target FRU Information For example the following command can be used to update the Shelf FRU Information with a new version of the configuration file clia frudataw p 20 254 shelfman conf acb3 gz Release 3 5 1 82 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide 3 3 3 Verbosity Level Description This parameter controls the verbosity of output sent by the Shelf Manager to the system log This parameter also controls the verbosity of output to the console if the configuration parameter VERBOSITY_CONSOLE is omitted The VERBOSITY configuration parameter is a hexadecimal bit mask with each bit enabling output of a specific type of message Table 9 Verbosity Configuration Parameters and Levels VERBOSITY CONFIGURATION PARAMETER VERBOSITY LEVEL 0x01 Error messages 0x02 Warning messages 0x04 Informational messages 0x08 Verbose informational messages 0x10 Trace messages not recommended 0x20 Verbose trace messages not recommended 0x40 Messages displayed for important commands sent to the IPM Controllers during their initialization not recommended 0x80 Verbose messages about acquiring and releasing internal locks not recommended The default debug level is 0x07 enabling error warning and informational messages 3 3 4 Verbosity Console Level Description This parameter controls the verbosity of output sent by the Shelf Manager to the console The VERBOSITY CONSOLE configuration
425. the trace analyzer application To support this mode the target IPM controller must be specifically configured to begin tracing the specified IPMI messaging interfaces when an RMCP session with the HPM 2 IPMI Trace Payload is established to a certain payload instance number and send IPMI trace packets in the appropriate format over the RMCP session while the session is open when the session closes the controller stops tracing IPMI messaging In this mode the trace daemon instead of collecting the IPMI trace locally on the Shelf Manager establishes a RMCP session with the HPM 2 IPMI Trace Payload with the target board and forwards the data received over this session to the trace analyzer in controlled mode or stores it in a file in unattended mode For example the following command line can be used to start the trace daemon in the board trace mode with a board that has the IP address 192 168 1 149 The specified channel mask instructs the IPM controller to trace the IPMB 0 and IPMB L buses The trace daemon operates in controlled mode daemon f ipmb traced c w b 192 168 1 149 m 0x81 5 4 4 Collecting Traces of IPMI Traffic Over the Network When collecting the traces of IPMI traffic transferred over the network RMCP or RMCP sessions the trace daemon is not used Wireshark or tshark collects the trace directly from one of the local network interfaces on the system on which that tool runs that is the analyzer host Usually
426. ther channel If a non zero gateway IP address is provided in the LAN Configuration Parameters for the HPM 2 channel the value provided in the Shelf Manager configuration file is ignored If the HPM 2 channel is mirrored to another channel the gateway IP address is taken from the parameters of that other channel and this parameter is also ignored No Release 3 5 1 47 August 17 2015 DEFAULT _HPM2 _NETMASK Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide TYPE IP address DEFAULT Variable DESCRIPTION The network mask for the network adapter used for the HPM 2 based network communication with intelligent FRUs in the shelf This mask is used only if the corresponding parameter is set to 0 0 0 0 inthe IPMI LAN Configuration Parameters for the HPM 2 channel channel 8 on the Shelf Manager and if the HPM 2 channel is not mirrored to another channel The default value depends on the class of the client IP address used for the HPM 2 based network communication see parameter DEFAULT _HPM2 CLIENT IP_ ADDRESS For example for an IP address of class C this parameter is set to 255 255 255 0 CAN BE OBTAINED FROM SHELF FRU INFO No DEFAULT _RMCP _IP_ADDRESS IP address None The default IP address used for shelf external RMCP based communication it is switched over between the redundant instances of the Shelf Manager This IP address is used only if the corresponding parameter
427. ting the Shelf Manager tries to determine its role active or backup and establish a TCP connection with its peer Shelf Manager It does this using the following algorithm e The Shelf Manager starts listening for incoming TCP connection requests from its peer Shelf Manager e f either of the Remote Healthy and Remote Present bits is 0 the Shelf Manager assumes that there is no peer Shelf Manager and assumes the active role e Otherwise the Shelf Manager issues a connection request trying to establish a TCP connection to its peer If the connection request fails the Shelf Manager assumes the active role e lf the connection request succeeds and there is no pending incoming connection request the Shelf Manager assumes that an active Shelf Manager already exists in the shelf and assumes the backup role e f both 1 the outgoing connection request succeeds and 2 an incoming connection request is pending the situation is symmetric between the two Shelf Managers and one of the Shelf Managers should assume the active role and the other should assume the backup role The decision is based on the value of the Shelf Manager geographic address In PICMG 3 0 systems where full hardware addresses are available hardware addresses assigned to the slots where peer Shelf Managers reside must have different least significant bits In the case of a tie the Shelf Manager with the even hardware address becomes the active Shelf Manager and the Shelf Manage
428. to M1 prev M0 cause 0 locked 0 lt I gt 14 35 22 203 199 Controller 20 FRU 2 updating blue LED for M1 lt I gt 14 35 22 206 199 Carrier version set to 82 64 01 00 lt I gt 14 35 22 243 199 Alarm sensor registered lt I gt 14 35 22 245 199 Alarm Input Sensor reading 0 initial update 0 lt I gt 14 35 22 247 199 Alarm input sensor registered lt I gt 14 35 22 253 199 SEL initialized SEL compression resources max sel entries 1024 lt I gt 14 35 22 256 199 SEL compression is ON journaling is ON lt I gt 14 35 22 285 205 SEL dedicated write thread started lt I gt 14 35 22 291 206 SEL truncation thread pid started successfully lt I gt 14 35 22 294 199 ShM SEL Activation complete lt I gt 14 35 22 352 208 PEF thread starting lt W gt 14 35 22 355 199 External event handler is not defined so PEF external handler thread is not started lt I gt 14 35 22 357 199 PEF activated successfully lt I gt 14 35 22 359 199 PEF initialized successfully System Event Sensor 133 lt I gt 14 35 22 363 199 Chassis facility activated successfully lt I gt 14 35 22 366 199 Chassis facility initialized successfully lt i gt L4r35222 3 1 199 Registering shelf FRU notification Ox2abd05f8 lt I gt 14 35 22 416 199 Session session descriptor size 996 bytes lt I gt 14 35 22 490 215 Started incoming message thread hc 1 lt I gt 14 35 22 493 215 Status change on IPMB 0 flags 186 ON
429. to the next version of the Shelf Manager which should result in faster upgrades On the other hand the RFS image on the ShMM 700 contains only system files and executables and does not contain application binaries and application specific files which makes it smaller and less prone to change in successive versions of the ShMM 700 firmware Similar to the SAMM 500 1500 two sets of upgrade component images exist on the ShMM 700 The storage and layout of upgrade components on ShMM 700 is however different from ShMM 500 1500 Only the U Boot images are assigned to dedicated Flash partitions Kernel and RFS images are stored as files on a single partition formatted under the UBIFS file system U Boot on ShMM 700 is able to read files from UBIFS partitions and therefore is able to locate and load the Release 3 5 1 239 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide proper kernel and RFS images Also there exist two instances of the application component package one of which represents the candidate firmware and the other of which represents the confirmed firmware They are stored on another user accessible UBIFS Flash partition in a compressed form When the RFS is loaded and the initial startup script etc xc is executed it picks up the appropriate instance of the application package and unpacks it into certain directories in the root RAMFS file system thus creating application binaries in the RAMFS file system on the fly
430. ubi0 UBI MTD device name mtd 5 UBI MTD device size 30 MiB UBI number of good PEBs 484 UBI number of bad PEBs 0 UBI max allowed volumes 128 UBI wear leveling threshold 4096 UBI number of internal volumes 1 UBI number of user volumes 1 UBI available PEBs 0 UBI total number of reserved PEBs 484 UBI number of PEBs reserved for bad PEB handling 0 UBI max mean erase counter 12 10 UBIFS read only UBI device UBIFS mounted UBI device 0 volume 0 name boot UBIFS mounted read only UBIFS file system size 30807168 bytes 30085 KiB 29 MiB 471 LEBs UBIFS journal size 1569792 bytes 1533 KiB 1 MiB 24 LEBs UBIFS media format w4 r0 latest is w4 r0 UBIFS default compressor LZO UBIFS reserved for root 1522516 bytes 1486 KiB RUPG upgrade file is not present skipping Loading file uImage 0 to addr 0x42000000 with size 1604076 0x001879ec Done Loading file rfs 0 to addr 0x46000000 with size 2283039 Ox0022d61f Done Booting kernel from Legacy Image at 42000000 Image Name Linux 2 6 34 8 shmm700 Created 2012 03 26 17 40 37 UTC Image Type ARM Linux Kernel Image uncompressed Data Size 1402284 Bytes 1 3 MB Load Address 40008000 Entry Point 40008000 Verifying Checksum OK Loading init Ramdisk from Legacy Image at 46000000 Image Name ShMM700 RFS 3 5 1 Created 2015 05 27 18 21 50 UTC Image Type ARM Linux RAMDisk Image gzip compressed Data Size 228
431. uce a human readable text file from it This utility is described in the SDR Compiler User Guide The current version of the SDR compiler as distributed with release 2 2 or later of the Shelf Manager must be used Release 3 5 1 126 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide In order to take advantage of this sensor configuration facility you should install the SDR Compiler on either a Linux or a MS Windows system Then you should create an SDR definition text file according to the format described in a SDR Compiler User Guide You can use standard text editors such as vi for Linux or Notepad for MS Windows The standard extension for SDR definition text files is inf The SDR Compiler is a command line utility To produce a binary SDR definition file user _sdr from a text SDR definition file you should use the utility in the compilation mode For example gt python sdrc py test inf user _sdr user_sdr is an optional name of an output file If it is not indicated in the command line a binary file test bin will be created by the SDR Compiler The SDR compiler is written in Python so you also need a Python interpreter version 2 3 or later to run it Python is available for free downloading with support for both Windows and Linux at www python org After producing the binary SDR definition file you should place it on your ShMM in the directory vaxr nvdata under the name user_sdr For example you can use FTP gt tp
432. ugust 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide implemented as a special case of the reliable upgrade procedure This special case is documented in detail in section 8 7 It is expected however that A2F060 firmware will be relatively stable and that most new releases of the Shelf Manager in future will not require an A2F060 firmware upgrade 8 3 Flash Partitioning and Image Layout The ShMM 700 provides a hardware mechanism that allows swapping of the two Flash partitions at certain addresses under control of software running on the i MX287 This capability is implemented in support of the reliable upgrade procedure and applies to U Boot images stored on dedicated Flash partitions Other firmware images the Linux kernel RFS and application package are stored in files on UBIFS volumes and there are two sets of these images numbered 0 and 1 The choice of the set to use is made in U Boot based on the chosen instance number evaluated by the U Boot Therefore a hardware mechanism is needed only for choosing the U Boot instance and exposing the chosen instance number to the software To accelerate loading of images from a UBIFS partition U Boot implements a special cache where it stores the map of the last booted Linux kernel and RFS images The map describes how the images are laid out in terms of physical Flash sectors and using this map allows U Boot during the second and subsequent boots of the same image set to load images using
433. until the occupancy of the SEL falls below the low watermark this is done to prevent multiple events if SEL occupancy oscillates around the high watermark e Acustom state 6h is defined for the state when the SEL occupancy is below the low watermark the percentage of occupied entries falls below the value of the configuration parameter SEL_LOW_WATERMARK There is no event associated with this state the System Manager can detect this state by polling the sensor value and its asserted states Using this information the System Manager performs truncation of the SEL presumably using the IPMI command Delete SEL Entry sending it over the RMCP session 4 7 Cooling State Sensors The cooling management strategy in the Shelf Manager is configurable and also depends on the currently chosen carrier Cooling management strategy configuration is described in section 3 7 Irrespective of the current cooling management strategy however several sensors are defined that expose the current cooling state of the shelf to the System Manager These sensors belong to the logical Shelf Manager IPMB address 20h and are defined in the following table Release 3 5 1 169 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide Table 17 Cooling State Sensors SENSOR SENSOR NAME EVENT READING SENSOR TYPE OFFSETS NUMBER TYPE 135 FT Oper Status Redundancy Management 00h Full Redundancy all fan Bh Subsystem trays defined in the Address Table H
434. urs This reliable upgrade is initiated from the serial console All three images are assumed to be already in tmp rupgrade tool s k sentry kernel r sentry rfs u u boot bin hook etc_copy v rupgrade tool PLB is 5 upgrade tool EEPROM page saved upgrade tool persistent flash is 0 upgrade tool provisional flash is 1 upgrade tool copying image s upgrade tool invoking scripts step4v u u boot bin sentry kernel r sentry rfs hook etc_copy upgrade tool copying u boot bin from tmp to dev mtdchar8 using cp rotocol upgrade tool copying sentry kernel from tmp to dev mtdchar7 using cp protocol upgrade tool copying sentry rfs from tmp to dev mtdchar9 using cp rotocol upgrade tool invoking scripts step4h etc copy topping Shelf Manager Se seh ay Oop Na MKS 5 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager Command Line Interpreter Terminating the Shelf Manager Erasing var and etc copying var nvdata Operation copy etc and var nvdata Copying completed rupgrade tool image s copy OK rupgrade tool watchdog started rupgrade tool selected provisional flash rupgrade tool reboot Restarting system The reliable upgrade procedure resets the ShMM here and starts U Boot from the provisional Flash xx Resetting Integrated Peripherals U Boot 1 1 2 Apr 11 2005 15 16 25 CPU Aul550 324 MHz id 0x02 rev 0x00 Board ShMM 500 S N 8000
435. ut process the data on that line and exit In that case the Shelf Manager spawns a new instance of the external event handler for the next event Here is an example of a simple external event handler script bin sh while read line do raw eval Sline if z Sraw then do event processing here echo event Sraw fi done 3 13 Configuring the Platform Event Trap Format The Shelf Manager sends SNMP Traps as a result of event processing when an Alert action is initiated or as a result of the Alert Immediate command which is used to test Alert destinations The Platform Event Trap format is controlled by the PET_ FORMAT configuration variable Currently there are three supported formats All formats use the same enterprise OID iso 1 org 3 dod 6 internet 1 private 4 enterprises 1 wired for _man agement 3183 PET 1 version 1 but have different OIDs for the embedded variable s Pigeon Point supplies a separate MIB file for supported SNMP traps By default or with PET_ FORMAT set to 0 the Shelf Manager generates trap messages according to IPMI Platform Event Trap Format v1 0 specification In this format event data is packed as binary in a single variable with OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 3183 1 1 1 To facilitate parsing this format Pigeon Point makes available a sample application snmptc lf PET FORMAT is set to 1 the Shelf Manager generates trap messages in plain text format packing event into single variab
436. ution on each boot up e i2c Master Only 2C test recommended for execution on each boot up The names of the tests can be used in values of the post_poweron and post_normal environment variables Starting from release 2 4 1 the IPMI command Get Self Test Results directed to the logical Shelf Manager IPMB address 20h returns the results of the POST performed by U Boot at the startup of the ShMM If all tests have passed the status code 0x55 is returned If any tests have failed the device specific failure code 0x59 is returned The third byte of the response contains the following bit mask in that case 7 5 Reserved 4 1b Ethernet test failed 3 1b UART test failed 2 1b U Boot CRC test failed 1 1b I2C test failed 0 1b Memory test failed 3 12 Configuring External Event Handling Sometimes there is a need for specific IPMI events to be processed by a user defined application or script that is external to the Shelf Manager but still executing on the ShMM This is called external event handling This feature allows extensions of Shelf Manager functionality by user programs or scripts executed on the ShMM External event handling is implemented via the PEF alerting mechanism As an extension of this mechanism all alerts with a destination channel set to the System Interface Channel Fh are delivered by the Shelf Manager to the standard input of a designated external event handler program This progra
437. v mtdchar4 Not mounted The Linux root file dev mtdblock4 system rfs image 12 0 25 dev mtdchar3 Not mounted The U Boot firmware image 12 25 3 75 dev mtdchar11 Not mounted The first half of the dev mtdblock11 app_jffs application specific JFFS2 partition 16 0 5 dev mtdchar10 var upgrade The second half of dev mtdblock10 the var upgrade JFFS2 file system 16 5 1 dev mtdchar7 Not mounted The other Linux dev mtdblock7 kernel image Release 3 5 1 217 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide OFFSET IN FLASH SIZE IN DEVICE NODE MOUNTED As CONTENT IN MBYTES MBYTES ON STARTUP 17 5 1 dev mtdchar6 Not mounted The other etc dev mtdblock6 JFFS2 file system 18 5 1 75 dev mtdchar5 Not mounted The other var dev mtdblock5 JFFS2 file system 20 25 7 15 dev mtdchar9 Not mounted The other Linux root dev mtdblock9 file system rfs image 28 0 25 dev mtdchar8 Not mounted The other U Boot firmware image 28 25 3 75 dev mtdchar11 Not mounted The second half of dev mtdblock1 1 the app_jffs application specific JFFS2 partition Table 25 Flash Partitioning for 64MB Flash ShMM 500s OFFSET IN FLASH SIZE IN DEVICE NODE MOUNTED As CONTENT IN MBYTES MBYTES ON STARTUP 0 0 5 dev mtdchar10 var upgrade The second half of dev mtdblock10 the var upgrade JFFS2 file system 0 5 1 dev mtdchar7 Not mounted Th
438. variable COOLING_MANAGEMENT in etc shelfman conf to the name of the strategy lt xxx gt above and restart the Shelf Manager thereafter whenever it starts the Shelf Manager loads and uses the designated shared library for cooling management 3 8 Configuring Local Sensors Note This section applies only to shelves where HPDL is not used With HPDL sensor SDRs are defined as part of the carrier and chassis definition and do not require additional configuration from a file on the ShMM Local sensors on the ShMM can be configured when the ShMM is started This capability applies to sensors that are associated with either 1 the Shelf Manager or 2 the physical IPM controller that takes its IPMB 0 address from the hardware address of the ShMM carrier slot Only sensor attributes that are defined in Sensor Data Records such as thresholds hysteresis values sensor name linearization parameters etc can be configured at this time The Sensor Device Records SDRs defining these sensors are read from the file var nvdata user_sdr This file must contain an array of binary SDRs that are compliant with the IPMI specification However these SDRs can contain only partial sensor definition if only a subset of the attributes of the sensor need to be redefined see below The PPS supplied SDR compiler utility can be used to produce the binary SDRs from plain text human readable text files The SDR compiler can also decode binary SDR data and prod
439. w wireshark org The netcat nc utility is needed as a mediator between the IPMB trace daemon and Wireshark tshark for real time IPMI analysis with IPMB trace daemon operating in controlled mode Linux distributions typically include this utility Its Windows variant nc exe can be downloaded from http www securityfocus com tools 139 The source code of the utility is available at http netcat sourceforge net download php 5 4 Collecting and Analyzing a Trace Using the GUI and Command Line Tools An IPMB trace can be collected in either of two ways 1 unattended mode where it is stored in a file during collection and analyzed later or 2 controlled mode where the trace is forwarded to directly to the analyzer as it is collected The following sections provide guidance for each of these modes as well as for collecting and analyzing an IPMI over network trace 5 4 1 Collecting IPMI Traces on IPMB 0 in Unattended Mode In unattended mode a trace is collected into a target local file transferred to the analyzer host and then read and analyzed using the trace analyzer The following stepwise procedure shows how to collect an unattended trace and open it for analysis in the GUI The GUl specific steps are followed by corresponding guidance for opening the trace for analysis in tshark Release 3 5 1 195 August 17 2015 Pigeon Point Shelf Manager User Guide 1 Startipmb traced onthe ShMM with the option w optionally specifying
440. watchdog timer three times in a row stops strobing the hardware watchdog timer which causes a reset of the ShMM and a switchover to the backup Shelf Manager In this scenario output similar to the following appears on the console lt W gt 17 25 49 368 218 ipmf watchdog thread proc 239 facility has failed don t confirm the watchdog lt I gt 17 25 49 760 218 Write 132232 bytes to the var nvdata dumplog bin 0 seconds lock offset 131848 lt W gt 17 25 50 068 218 ipmf watchdog thread proc 239 facility has failed don t confirm the watchdog lt W gt 17 25 50 378 218 ipmf watchdog thread proc 239 facility has failed don t confirm the watchdog lt W gt 17 25 50 688 218 ipmf watchdog thread proc 239 facility has failed don t confirm the watchdog lt W gt 17 25 50 998 218 ipmf watchdog thread proc 239 facility has failed don t confirm the watchdog The direct deadlock detection mechanism is supported in the Shelf Manager starting with release 2 5 2 This mechanism checks the state of the currently claimed locks every 5 seconds by looking at the internal lock structures It analyzes that state information for circular dependencies that indicate a deadlock If a deadlock is detected by this mechanism the Shelf Manager does the following e issues a warning message to the console and or to the syslog file e collects information about current usage of locks in the Shelf Manager
441. with encryption support When ordering ShMM 1500s you must specify which version is needed e ShMM 1500R 250M32F64R ShMM 1500R 250M64F128R Encryption enabled e ShMM 1500R 250M32F64R NE ShMM 1500R 250M64F128R NE Encryption removed The following line in the log above lt I gt 14 35 18 818 199 shm crypto init initialization succeeded indicates that the encryption library has been found and loaded successfully Otherwise the following messages appear lt W gt 14 34 04 480 242 shm_crypto_ init failed to load libpps encryption so library err libpps encryption so cannot open shared object file No such file or directory lt I gt 14 34 04 482 242 shm_crypto_ init the Shelf Manager will not support encryption 4 4 Redundant Operation The active Shelf Manager exposes the ShMC device address 20h on IPMB manages IPMB and the IPM controllers and interacts with the System Manager over RMCP and other shelf external interfaces It maintains an open TCP connection with the backup Shelf Manager It communicates all changes in the state of the managed objects to the backup Shelf Manager The backup Shelf Manager does not expose the ShMC on IPMB does not actively manage IPMB and IPM controllers nor interact with the System Manager via the shelf external interfaces with one exception noted below Instead it maintains the state of the managed objects in its own memory volatile and non volatile and updates the state as dire

Shelf Manager User Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents